Gcaa Lo Guide

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY
THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

FLIGHT CREW LICENSING
Flight Crew License

ATPL/MPL/CPL/IR (A) & (H)
Theoretical Knowledge
Learning Objectives (LOs)
The main objective of this document is to introduce the long syllabus and Learning Objectives
(LOs) for professional Licences and instrument ratings in the GCAA Theoretical Knowledge
Examination system.
The DOCUMENT also aims to resolve any inconsistencies identified after the adoption of the FCL
Implementing Rules. This is necessary to ensure that the GCAA Theoretical Knowledge
Examination system reflects the state of the art, and specifically the best practices developed in
the UAE in the field of pilot training.
The specific objective of this DOCUMENT is to maintain a high level of knowledge and safety for flight
crews, to ensure harmonized implementation of the Theoretical Knowledge Instruction Courses.
This DOCUMENT in line with Civil Aviation Regulations Part II Chapter 2 Part FCL
This document incudes all Theoretical Knowledge Subjects for ATPL/MPL/CPL/IR (A) &
(H), in addition to Syllabus Reference Numbers, Syllabus details and associated Learning
Objectives.
The Learning Objectives are expected to serve as a guideline for applicants seeking to sit for
a GCAA
Examinations
This document may serve as a guideline for organization delivering Theoretical Knowledge
Page 1

Table of contents
1.
2.
3.
Explanatory Note ................................................................................................................................... 3

Training Aim ........................................................................................................................................... 4
Interpretation ........................................................................................................................................ 4
........................................................................................................................................................ 5
A. SUBJECT 010 AIR LAW ........................................................................................................... .6
B. SUBJECT 021 AIRFRAME AND SYSTEMS, ELECTRICS, POWER PLANT AND EMERGENCY.71
C. SUBJECT 022 INSTRUMENTATION ..................................................................................... 154
D. SUBJECT 031 MASS AND BALANCE .................................................................................... 208
E. SUBJECT 032 PERFORMANCE (AEROPLANE) ..................................................................... 219
F. SUBJECT 033 FLIGHT PLANNING & MONITORING ............................................................. 241
G. SUBJECT 034 PERFORMANCE (HELICOPTER) ..................................................................... 259
H. SUBJECT 040 HUMAN PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS ................................................ 271
I. SUBJECT 050 -- METEOROLOGY ............................................................................................. 310
J. SUBJECT 061 GENERAL NAVIGATION................................................................................... 360
K. SUBJECT 062 RADIO NAVIGATION ...................................................................................... 393
L. SUBJECT 070 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 455
M. SUBJECT 081 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT (AEROPLANNE) ........................................................ 492
N. SUBJECT 082 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT (HELICOPTERS) ......................................................... 541
O. SUBJECT 091 VFR COMMUNICATION .578
P. SUBJECT 092 VFR COMMUNICATION .587
Q. SUBJECT LICENCE CONVERSION.595
Page 2

Explanatory Note
The applicable Learning Objectives for each licence or the instrument rating are marked
with an x.
The Learning Objectives define the theoretical knowledge that a student should have
assimilated on successful completion of an approved theoretical-knowledge course prior to
undertaking the theoretical-knowledge examinations. They refer to measurable statements
of the skills and knowledge that a student should be able to demonstrate following a
defined element of training.
The Learning Objectives are intended to be used by an ATO when developing Part -FCL
theoretical-knowledge elements of the appropriate course. It should be noted, however,
that the Learning Objectives do not provide a ready-made ground-training syllabus for
individual ATOs, and should not be seen by organizations as a substitute for thorough
course design.
Page 3

Training aims
After completion of the training, a student should be able to apply the acquired knowledge
and skills to:
understand the capabilities and limitations of the equipment used;
identify sources of information and analyze information relevant to the operation;
identify hazards, assess risks and manage threats;
apply solutions to common problems including errors.
Specific examples of the application of knowledge and skills will be provided in the
respective appendix to a subject, if needed.
Interpretation
The abbreviations used are ICAO abbreviations listed in ICAO Doc 8400 Abbreviations and
Codes or those listed in FCL.010.
Where a Learning Objective refers to a definition, e.g. Define the following terms or
Define and understand or Explain the definitions in..., candidates are also expected to be
able to recognize a given definition.
Page 4

The Jeppesen Student Pilots Training Route Manual (SPTRM), otherwise known as the
Training Route Manual (TRM), contains planning data plus aerodrome and approach charts
that may be used in theoretical-knowledge training courses.
Specimen data manuals, CAP 696, 697, 698 for Aeroplanes and CAP 758 for Helicopters, may
be used in training courses and for reference during theoretical-knowledge examinations.
Where the competent authority does not permit the use of these manuals during
examinations, alternative data manuals shall be provided to support the relevant
questions. Definitions that are included in these data manuals are explained in the relevant
manual.
Some numerical data, e.g. speeds, altitudes/levels and masses, used in questions for
theoretical-knowledge examinations may not be representative for helicopter operations
but the data is satisfactory for the calculations required.
Page 5

Subject: 010 - AIR LAW

Theoretical knowledge examination
Exam length, total number of questions and distribution of questions
ATPL(A) CPL(A) ATPL(H)/IR ATPL(H) CPL(H)
1:10
0:45
1:10
0:45
0:45
Time
allowed
(hours)
Distribution of questions with regard to the topics of the syllabus
010 01
2
1
2
1
1
010 02
1
1
1
1
1
010 03
1
1
1
1
1
010 04
1
1
1
1
1
010 05
7
7
7
7
7
010 06
6
3
6
3
3
010 07
4
2
4
2
2
010 08
1
1
1
1
1
010 09
5
3
5
3
3
010 10
1
1
1
1
1
010 11
1
1
1
1
1
010 12
1
1
1
1
1
010 13
1
1
1
1
1
010 14
12
9
12
9
9
Total
44
33
44
33
33
questions
IR(A) & (H)

0:45
XX
XX
XX
1
7
6
4
1
5
XX
XX
XX
XX
5
29
A. SUBJECT 010 AIR LAW

(1)
The subjects Air law and ATC procedures are primarily based on ICAO documentation
and GCAA regulations.
Syllabus
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Page 6

ATPL
reference
Syllabus details and associated

Learning Objectives
010 00 00 00
AIR LAW
010 01 00 00
INTERNATIONAL LAW:
CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND
ORGANISATIONS
010 01 01 00
The Convention on International

Civil Aviation (Chicago)
ICAO DOC 7300
LO Explain the historical background that

led to the establishment of the
Convention on International Civil
Aviation, Chicago, 7 December 1944.
010 01 01 01
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
CPL
Part I Air navigation
with
the
general
LO Be familiar
contents of relevant parts
of the
following chapters:
general principles and

application of the Convention;
flight over territory of
Contracting States;
nationality of aircraft;
measures to facilitate air
navigation;
conditions to be fulfilled with
respect to aircraft;
international standards and
recommended practices
(SARPs), especially notification
of differences and validity of
endorsed certificates and
licences.
LO General principles
Describe the application of
following terms in civil aviation:
the
sovereignty;
Page 7

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
territory, high seas, according

to the UN Convention on the
High Seas.
LO Define the following terms and
explain
how
they
apply
to
international air traffic:
right of non-scheduled flight
(including the two technical
freedoms of the air);
scheduled air services;
cabotage;
landing at customs airports;
applicability of air regulations;
rules of the air;
search of aircraft.
LO Describe the duties of Contracting
States in relation to:
documents carried on board of
the aircraft:
certificate of
registration;
certificates of
airworthiness;
licences of personnel;
recognition of
certificates and licences;
cargo restrictions;
photographic apparatus.
LO Describe the objectives of ICAO.
LO Explain the organisation and duties

of the ICAO Assembly, Council and
Air Navigation Commission (ANC).

of the
ICAO Headquarters and
Regional Offices.
LO Describe
regions.
010 01 01 02
Part II The International Civil

Aviation Organization (ICAO)
the
worldwide
ICAO
LO Be familiar with the hierarchy of the

ICAO publications (SARPs, Docs):
annexes to the Convention;
Page 8

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
documents.
010 01 02 00 Other conventions and

agreements
010 01 02 01 The International Air Services
Transit Agreement
(ICAO Doc 7500)
LO Explain the two technical freedoms
of the air.
commercial
LO Describe the legal situation within

the EU with regard to the Freedoms
of the Air.
010 01 02 02 The International Air Transport

Agreement
LO Explain
the
three
freedoms of the air.
010 01 02 03 Suppression of unlawful acts

against the
safety
of
civil
aviation; the Conventions
of
Tokyo, Den Haag and Montreal
LO
Conventions
and
Supplements
concerning unlawful acts against the
safety of civil aviation.
LO Explain
the
content
of
Convention
on
Unlawful
Committed on Board Aircraft.
the
Acts
(Doc 8364
Convention
on
Offences and Certain Other Acts
Committed on Board Aircraft, Tokyo,
14 September 1963)
LO Explain
the
content
of
Convention
on
Suppression
Unlawful Seizure of Aircraft.
(Doc 8920
Suppression of
Aircraft, Den
1970,
and
the
of
Convention for the

Unlawful Seizure of
Haag, 16 December
Protocol
for
the
Page 9

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Suppression
of
Unlawful
Acts
against the Safety of Civil Aviation,
Montreal, 23 September 1971)
LO Explain
the
content
of
the
Convention
on
Suppression
of
Unlawful Acts of Violence at Airports
Serving International Civil Aviation
in accordance with Doc 8966
Convention for the Suppression of
Unlawful Acts against the Safety of
Civil Aviation, done at Montreal on
23.9.1971, and signed at Montreal
on 24 February 1988).
LO Describe the measures and actions

to be taken by the PIC of an aircraft
in order to suppress unlawful
acts
against the safety of the aircraft.
(Doc 9518 Protocol supplementary to the Convention for the

Suppression
of
Unlawful
Acts
done at Montreal on 23 September
1971, and signed at Montreal on 24
February 1988)
010 01 02 04 Bilateral agreements
LO Explain the reason for the existence
of
bilateral
agreements
for
scheduled air transport
(Digest of Bilateral Air Transport

Agreements, ICAO Doc 9511).
010 01 02 05 International private law
LO Explain
the
Conventions
and
Protocols designed to cover liability
towards persons and goods
in
accordance with the Warsaw System
based on the Convention
for the
Unification of Certain Rules Relating
to International Carriage
by Air,
Page 10

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Warsaw, 2 October 1929.

LO Explain the legal significance of the
issue of a passenger ticket and/or of
baggage/cargo documents.
LO Explain that the liability towards

persons and goods may be unlimited
on the basis of the
Montreal
Convention of 28 May 1999.
LO Explain the consequences of the EU

Regulation about passenger rights in
case of delay, cancellation or denied
boarding.
LO Explain the liability limit in relation

to destruction,
loss, damage or
delay of baggage.
LO Describe the consequences for an

airline and/or the PIC when
passenger ticket is not issued.
010 01 02 06 Operators and pilots liabilities

towards persons and goods on
the ground in case of damage
and
injury
caused
by
the
operation of the aircraft
LO Explain
the
Conventions
and
towards persons and goods on the
ground based on the International
Convention for rules relating to
Damage Caused by aircraft, signed
at Rome on 29 May 1933 and on
7 October 1952, and at Montreal on
23 September 1978.
010 01 02 07 The Convention of Rome (1933)
and other documents related to
rights in aircraft.
Page 11
Syllabus
reference


Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Understand the rules relating to

international recognition of rights in
aircraft and the rules relating to
precautionary arrest of aircraft.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
x
IR
CPL
010 01 03 00 World organisations

Association (IATA)
LO
Describe the general

and objectives of IATA.
organisation
Page 12

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
010 02 00 00 AIRWORTHINESS OF AIRCRAFT

010 02 01 00 ICAO Annex 8 and the related
Certification Specifications
LO Explain the
Annex 8.
ICAO
LO Explain how
the
Airworthiness
Standards of ICAO Annex 8 and the
Certification Specifications (CSs) are
related to each other.
LO State which aircraft the Standards

of ICAO Annex 8 and the CSs shall
apply to.
LO State the necessity to have a CofA.
LO Explain the various elements that

are required for a CofA.
LO State who
shall determine
an
aircrafts continuing airworthiness.
LO Describe how a Certificate of

Airworthiness can be renewed or
may remain valid.
010 02 02 00 Certificate
(CofA)
definitions
of
LO State the issuing

CofA.
of
Airworthiness
authority
010 03 00 00 AIRCRAFT
NATIONALITY
REGISTRATION MARKS
of a
AND
010 03 01 00 Definitions of ICAO Annex 7

LO Recall the
definitions
following terms:
of
the
aircraft;
heavier-than-air aircraft;
State of Registry.
010 03 02 00 Aircraft
nationality,
common
and registration marks to
be
Page 13

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Used
LO State the location of nationality and
common and registration marks.
LO Explain
the
combination
of
nationality and registration marks
(sequence, use of hyphen).
LO State who
is responsible
assigning registration marks.
LO Explain the structure of Part FCL.
LO Understand the difference between

Part-FCL and AMC/GM to Part-FCL.
LO Explain the requirements to act as a

flight crew member of a civil aircraft
registered in a Member State.
for
010 04 00 00 PERSONNEL LICENSING

010 04 01 00 ICAO Annex 1
010 04 01 01 Differences
between
Annex
1 and
the
Regulation
ICAO
Aircrew
LO Describe
the
relationship
and
differences between ICAO Annex 1
and the Aircrew Regulation.
010 04 02 00 Part-FCL
010 04 02 01 Definitions
LO Define the following:
category of aircraft,
cross-country,
dual instruction time, flight time,
SPIC, instrument time,
instrument
flight time, instrument ground time,
MCC, multi-pilot aircraft,
night,
private pilot,
proficiency check,
renewal, revalidation, skill test, solo
flight time, type of aircraft.
010 04 02 02 Content and structure
Page 14

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State to what extent Member States

will accept certificates issued by
other Member States.
LO List the two factors that are relevant

to the exercise of the privileges of a
licence.
LO State the circumstances in which a

language-proficiency endorsement is
required.
LO List the restrictions

for licence
holders with an age of 60 years or
more.
LO Explain
the
authority.
competent
LO Describe the obligation to carry and

present documents (e.g. a flight
crew licence) under Part-FCL.
LO State the requirements for the issue

of a CPL.
LO State the privileges of a CPL.
term
010 04 02 03 Commercial Pilot Licence (CPL)
010 04 02 04 Airline Transport Pilot Licence

(ATPL) and
Multi-crew
Pilot
Licence (MPL)
of an ATPL and MPL.
LO State the privileges of an ATPL and

MPL.
010 04 02 05 Ratings
LO Explain the
requirements for class
ratings, their validity and privileges.
LO Explain the requirements

for type
LO Explain
the
requirements
for
x
x
Page 15

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
instrument ratings, their validity and

privileges.
010 04 03 00 Part-MED
LO Describe the relevant content of PartMED
Medical
Requirements
(administrative
parts
and
requirements related to licensing
only).
LO State the requirements for a medical

certificate.
LO Name the kind of medical certificate

required
when
exercising
the
privileges of a CPL or ATPL.
LO State the actions to be taken in case

of a decrease in medical fitness.
LO Explain the territorial application of

the ICAO Rules of the Air.
LO Explain the compliance

Rules of the Air.
the
LO State who on
board an aircraft is
primarily
responsible
for
the
operation of the aircraft in accordance
with the Rules of the Air.
LO Indicate under what circumstances

departure from the Rules of the Air
may be allowed.
LO Explain the
duties of the PIC
concerning pre-flight actions in case
of an IFR flight.
010 05 00 00 RULES OF THE AIR

LO Explain the definitions
Annex 2.
of
ICAO
010 05 02 00 Applicability of the Rules of the

Air
with
Page 16

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State who has the final authority as

to the disposition of the aircraft.
LO Explain the problematic in the use of

psychoactive substances by flight
crew members.
LO Describe the rules for the avoidance

of collisions.
LO Describe the lights to be displayed

by aircraft.
LO Understand marshalling signals.
LO State the basic requirements for

minimum height for the flight over
congested areas of cities, towns or
settlements, or over an open-air
assembly of persons.
LO Define when the cruising levels shall

be expressed in terms of flight
levels (FL).
LO Define under what circumstances

cruising levels shall be expressed in
terms of altitudes.
LO Explain the limitation for proximity

to other aircraft
and the right-ofway rules, including holding at
runway-holding
positions
and
lighted stop bars.
LO Describe the meaning of

light
signals displayed to and by the
aircraft.
LO Describe the requirements when

carrying out simulated instrument
flights.
LO Indicate the basic rules for an

aircraft operating on and in the
vicinity of an aerodrome (AD).
010 05 03 00
General rules
Page 17

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the requirements for the

submission of an ATS flight plan.
LO Explain why a time check has to be

obtained before the flight.
LO Explain the actions to be taken in

case of flight-plan change or delay.

of inadvertent changes to track,
true airspeed
(TAS) and
time
estimate affecting the current flight
plan.
LO Explain the procedures for closing a

flight plan.
LO State for which flights an air traffic

control clearance shall be obtained.
LO State how a pilot may request an air

traffic control clearance.
LO State the action to be taken if an air

traffic control clearance is
not
satisfactory to a pilot-in-command.
LO Describe the required actions to be

carried out if the continuation of a
controlled VFR flight in VMC is not
practicable anymore.
LO Describe
the
provisions
for
transmitting a position report to the
appropriate ATS unit including time
of transmission and normal content
of the message.
LO Describe the necessary action when

an aircraft experiences
a COM
failure.
LO State what information

an aircraft
being
subjected
to
unlawful
interference
shall give
to
the
appropriate ATS unit.
Page 18

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
010 05 04 00 Visual Flight Rules (VFRs)

LO Describe the Visual
Flight Rules as
contained in Chapter 4 of ICAO
Annex 2.
010 05 05 00 Instrument Flight Rules (IFRs)

LO Describe the Instrument Flight Rules
as contained in Chapter 5 of ICAO
Annex 2.
010 05 06 00 Interception of civil aircraft

LO List
the
possible
reasons
intercepting a civil aircraft.
for
LO State what primary action should be

carried out
by an
intercepted
aircraft.
LO State
which
frequency
should
primarily be tried in order to contact
an intercepting aircraft.
LO State on which mode and code a

transponder
on
board
intercepted
aircraft
should
operated.
the
be
LO Recall the interception signals and

phrases.
010 06 00 00 PROCEDURES
FOR
AIR
NAVIGATION
SERVICES
AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS (PANSOPS)

010 06 01 00 Foreword and introduction
LO Translate the term PANS-OPS into
plain language.
LO State the general aim of PANS-OPS

Flight Procedures (ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume I).
010 06 02 00 Definitions and abbreviations
Page 19

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Recall all definitions included
ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I,
Chapter 1.
in
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Name the factors dictating

the
design
of
instrument-departure
procedures.
LO Explain in which situations the

criteria
for
omnidirectional
departures are applied.
LO Define
the
terms
straight
departure and turning departure.
LO State the responsibility

of the
operator when unable to utilise the
published departure procedures.
LO Explain when the omnidirectional

method is used for departure.
LO Describe the solutions when an

omnidirectional procedure is not
possible.
LO State the
conditions
for
the
publication of a SID and/or RNAV
route.
LO Describe
departures
LO Interpret all abbreviations as shown

in ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I,
Chapter 2.
010 06 03 00 Departure procedures
010 06 03 01 General criteria (assuming
engines operating)
all
010 06 03 02 Standard instrument departures

(SIDs)
010 06 03 03 Omnidirectional departures
010 06 03 04 Published information
how
omnidirectional
are expressed in the
Page 20

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
appropriate publication.
010 06 03 05 Area
Navigation
(RNAV)
departure procedures and RNPbased departures
LO Explain the relationship between
RNAV/RNP-based
departure
procedures
and
those
for
approaches.
LO General criteria (except the table

Speeds for procedure calculations)
of the approach procedure design:
instrument approach areas;
accuracy of fixes;
fixes formed by intersections;
intersection fix-tolerance
factors;
other fix-tolerance factors;
approach area splays;
descent gradient.
LO Name the five possible segments of

an instrument approach procedure.
LO Give reasons for establishing aircraft

categories for the approach.
LO State the maximum angle between

the final approach track and the
extended RWY centre line to still
consider a
non-precision-approach
as being a straight-in approach.
LO State
the
minimum
obstacle
clearance provided by the minimum
sector altitudes (MSAs) established
for an aerodrome.
LO Describe the point of origin, shape,

size and subdivisions of the area used
for MSAs.
LO State that a pilot shall
010 06 04 00 Approach procedures

010 06 04 01 General criteria
apply wind
Page 21

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
corrections when carrying out
instrument-approach procedure.
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
an
LO Name
the
most
significant
performance factor influencing the
conduct of
instrument-approach
procedures.
LO Explain why a pilot should not

descend below OCA/Hs which are
established for:
precision-approach
procedures;
procedures;
visual (circling) procedures.
LO Describe in
general
relevant factors for the
of operational minima.
terms
the
calculation
acronyms
LO Describe how the vertical cross

section for each of the five approach
segments is broken down into the
various areas.
LO State within which area of the cross

section
the
Minimum
Obstacle
Clearance (MOC) is provided for the
whole width of the area.
LO Define the terms IAF,

MAPt and TP.
FAF,
LO Name the area within which the

plotted point of an intersection fix
LO Translate the following

into plain language:
DA, DH, OCA, OCH, MDA,

MOC, DA/H, OCA/H, MDA/H.
MDH,
LO Explain the relationship between the

terms:
MDH,
010 06 04 02 Approach-procedure design
IF,
Page 22

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
may lie.
LO Explain by
which factors
the
dimensions of an intersection fix are
determined.
LO State the accuracy of facilities

providing track (VOR, ILS, NDB).
LO Describe
factors:
LO Describe
the
basic
information
relating to approach-area splays.
LO State the optimum descent gradient

(preferred for a precision approach)
in degrees and per cent.
LO Name the five standard segments of

an
instrument APP procedure and
state the beginning and end for
each of them.
LO Describe
where
normally ends.
LO State whether or not omnidirectional

or sector arrivals can be provided.
LO Explain the main task of the initial

APP segment.
LO Describe the maximum angle of

interception between the initial APP
segment and the intermediate APP
segment
(provided
at
the
intermediate fix) for a precision
approach
and
a
non-precision
approach.
the
other
fix-tolerance
surveillance radar (Terminal Area

Radar (TAR)), En Route Surveillance
Radar (RSR), DME, 75 MHz marker
beacon, fixes overhead a station
(VOR, NDB).
010 06 04 03 Arrival and approach segments
an
ARR
route
Page 23

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the main task of the final APP

segment.
LO Name the two possible aims of a

final APP.
LO Explain the term final approach

point in case of an ILS approach.
LO State what happens if an ILS GP

becomes inoperative during the APP.
LO Name the three phases of a missedapproach procedure and describe

their geometric limits.
LO Describe the main task of a missedapproach procedure.
LO State at which height/altitude the

missed approach
is assured to be
initiated.
LO Define the term missed

point (MAPt).
approach
LO Describe how an MAPt

established
in
an
procedure.
may be
approach
LO State the pilots reaction if, upon

reaching the MAPt, the required
visual reference is not established.
LO Describe what a pilot is expected to

do in the event a missed approach
is initiated prior to arriving at the
MAPt.
LO State whether the pilot is obliged to

cross the MAPt at the height/altitude
required
by the
procedure or
whether they are allowed to cross
LO Describe the main task

intermediate APP segment.
of
the
010 06 04 04 Missed approach
Page 24

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
the MAPt at
an altitude/height
greater than that required
by the
procedure.
010 06 04 05 Visual manoeuvring (circling) in
the vicinity of the aerodrome
LO Describe what is meant by visual
manoeuvring (circling).
LO Describe how a prominent obstacle

in the visual manoeuvring (circling)
area outside the final-approach and
missed-approach area has to be
considered for the visual circling.
LO State for which category of aircraft

the
obstacle-clearance
altitude/
height within an established visualmanoeuvring
(circling)
area
is
determined.
LO Describe how an MDA/H is specified

for visual manoeuvring (circling) if
the OCA/H is known.
LO State the conditions to be fulfilled

before descending below MDA/H in a
visual-manoeuvring
(circling)
approach.
LO Describe why there can be no single

procedure designed that will cater for
conducting a circling approach in
every situation.
LO State how the pilot is expected to

behave after initial visual contact
during
a
visual
manoeuvring
(circling).
LO Describe what the pilot is expected

to do if visual reference is lost while
circling to land from an instrument
approach.
010 06 04 06 Area
Navigation
(RNAV)
Page 25

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
approach procedures based on

VOR/DME
LO Describe the provisions that must be
fulfilled
before
carrying
out
VOR/DME RNAV approaches.
LO Explain the disadvantages

VOR/DME RNAV system.
the
LO List the factors the navigational

accuracy of the
VOR/DME RNAV
system depends on.
LO State whether the VOR/DME/RNAV

approach is a precision or a nonprecision procedure.
LO Explain why deviations from the inflight procedures of

a holding
established
in
accordance
with
Doc 8168 are dangerous.
LO State that if for any reasons a pilot is

unable to conform to the procedures
for normal conditions laid down for
any particular holding pattern, they
should advise ATC as early as
possible.
LO Describe how right-turn holdings can

be transferred to left-turn holding
patterns.
LO Describe the shape and terminology
of
010 06 04 07 Use of FMS/RNAV equipment to

follow
conventional
nonprecision approach procedures
LO State the provisions for flying
the
conventional non-precision approach
procedures
using
FMS/RNAV
equipment.
010 06 05 00 Holding procedures
010 06 05 01 Entry and holding
Page 26

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
associated with the holding pattern.

LO State the bank angle and
rate of
turn to be used whilst flying
in a
holding pattern.
LO Explain why pilots in a holding

pattern should attempt to maintain
tracks and how
this can
be
achieved.
LO Describe where outbound

begins in a holding pattern.
LO State where the outbound leg in a

holding terminates if the outbound
leg is based on DME.
LO Describe the three heading-entry

sectors for entries into a holding
pattern.
LO Define the terms parallel entry,

offset entry and direct entry.
LO Determine
procedure
pattern.
entry
holding
LO State the still air time for flying the

outbound entry heading with or
without DME.

to do when
clearance is received
specifying the time of departure
from the holding point.
LO Describe the layout of the basic

holding area, entry area and buffer
area of a holding pattern.
LO State which obstacle clearance is

provided by a minimum permissible
holding level
referring to
the
010 06 05 02 Obstacle
table)
the
for a
correct
given
clearance
timing
(except
Page 27

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
holding
area, the
buffer
area
(general only) and over high terrain
or in mountainous areas.
010 06 06 00 Altimeter-setting procedures
010 06 06 01 Basic
requirements
procedures
and
LO Describe the two main objectives of

altimeter settings.
LO Define the terms QNH and QFE.
LO Describe the different terms for

altitude or flight levels respectively
which are the references during
climb or descent to change the
altimeter setting from
QNH to
1013.2 hPa and vice versa.
LO Define the term Flight Level (FL).
LO State where flight level zero shall be

located.
LO State
the
interval
by
which
consecutive flight levels shall be
separated.
LO Describe
how
numbered.
LO Define the term Transition Altitude.
LO State how Transition Altitudes shall

normally be specified.
LO Explain how the height of the

Transition Altitude is calculated and
expressed in practice.
LO State where Transition

shall be published.
LO Define the term Transition Level.
LO State when the Transition

Level is
normally passed on to the aircraft.
flight
levels
are
Altitudes
Page 28

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State how the vertical

position of
the aircraft shall be expressed at or
below the Transition Altitude and
Transition Level.
LO Define the term Transition Layer.
LO Describe when the vertical position

of an
aircraft passing through the
transition layer shall be expressed
in terms of flight levels and when in
terms of altitude.
LO State when the QNH altimeter

setting shall be
made available to
departing aircraft.
LO Explain when the vertical separation

of an aircraft during en route flight
shall be assessed
in terms
of
altitude and when in terms of flight
levels.
LO Explain
when,
in
airground
communications during an en route
flight, the vertical position of an
aircraft shall be expressed in terms
of altitude and when in terms of
flight levels.
LO Describe why QNH altimeter-setting

reports should be provided from
sufficient locations.
LO State how a QNH altimeter setting

shall
be made available to aircraft
approaching a controlled aerodrome
for landing.
LO State under which circumstances

the vertical position of an aircraft
above the transition
level may be
referenced to altitudes.
010 06 06 02 Procedures
pilots
for operators
and
Page 29
Syllabus
reference


Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the three requirements that

selected altitudes or selected flight
levels should have.
LO Describe a pre-flight
operational
test in case of QNH setting and in
case of QFE
setting
including
indication (error) tolerances referred
to the different test ranges.
LO State on which setting at least one

altimeter shall be set prior to takeoff.
LO State where during the climb the

altimeter setting shall be changed
from QNH to 1013.2 hPa.
LO Describe when a pilot of an aircraft

intending to land at an AD shall
obtain the transition level.

obtain the actual QNH altimeter
setting.
LO State where the altimeter settings

shall be changed from 1013.2 hPa
to QNH during descent for landing.
LO Describe the difference

between
independent and dependent parallel
approaches.
LO Describe the
operations:
010 06 07 00 Simultaneous
operation
on
parallel
or
near-parallel
instrument runways
following
different
simultaneous instrument
departures;
segregated parallel
approaches/departures;
semi-mixed and mixed
operations.
Page 30

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Know about NOZ and NTZ.
LO Name
the
aircraft
equipment
requirements for conducting parallel
instrument approaches.

parallel instrument approaches may
be conducted.
LO State the radar requirements for

simultaneous, independent, parallel
instrument approaches and how
weather conditions effect these.
LO State the
maximum angle
of
interception for an ILS localiser CRS
or MLS final APP track in case of
conditions for
LO Describe the special
tracks
on
missed
approach
procedures and departures in case
of simultaneous, parallel operations.
LO State when and where the pilot shall

operate the transponder.
LO State the modes and codes that the

pilot shall operate in the absence of
any ATC directions or regional air
navigation agreements.
LO Indicate when the pilot shall operate

Mode C.
LO State when the pilot shall SQUAWK

IDENT.
LO State the transponder

code to indicate:
010 06 08 00 Secondary
surveillance
(transponder) operating
procedures
radar
010 06 08 01 Operation of transponders
mode
and
a state of emergency;
Page 31

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
a communication failure;
unlawful interference.
LO Describe the consequences

transponder failure in flight.
LO Describe the main reason for using

ACAS.
LO Indicate whether the use of ACAS

indications described in Doc 8168 is
absolutely mandatory.
LO Explain the pilots reaction required

to allow ACAS to fulfil
its role of
assisting pilots in the avoidance of
potential collisions.
LO Explain
why
pilots
shall
not
manoeuvre
their
aircraft
in
response to Traffic Advisories only.
LO Explain the significance of Traffic

Advisories in view of
possible
Resolution Advisories.
LO State why a pilot should follow

Resolution Advisories immediately.
LO List the reasons which may force a

pilot to disregard a
Resolution
Advisory.
LO Decide how a pilot shall react if

there is
a
conflict
between
Resolution Advisories in case of an
ACAS/ACAS coordinated encounter
LO Explain
the
importance
of
instructing ATC immediately that a
Resolution
Advisory
has
been
followed.
LO Explain the duties of a pilot as far as

ATC is concerned when a Resolution
of a
LO State the primary action of the pilot

in the case of an
unserviceable
transponder before departure when
no repair or replacement at the
given aerodrome is possible.
010 06 08 02 Operation of ACAS equipment
Page 32

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Advisory situation is resolved.

010 07 00 00 AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES AND AIR
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
010 07 01 00 ICAO Annex 11
Services
Air Traffic
LO Recall the definitions given in ICAO
Annex 11.
LO Name the objectives of Air Traffic

Services (ATS).
LO Describe the three basic types of Air

Traffic Services.

Traffic Control services (ATC).
LO Indicate when aerodrome

control
towers shall provide an accurate
time check to pilots.
LO State on which frequencies a pilot

can expect ATS to contact them in
case of an emergency.
LO Understand the
procedure for the
transfer of an aircraft from one ATC
unit to another.
for
LO Understand the various rules and

services that apply to the various
classes of airspace.
LO Explain which airspace

included in an FIR or UIR.
be
LO State the designation for those

portions of the airspace where flight
information
service
(FIS)
and
alerting service shall be provided.
LO State the designations for those

portions of the airspace where ATC
service shall be provided.
010 07 01 02 General
010 07 01 03 Airspace
LO Describe
the
purpose
establishing FIRs including UIRs.
shall
Page 33

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Indicate whether or not CTAs and

CTRs designated within an FIR shall
form part of that FIR.
LO Name the lower limit of a CTA as far

as ICAO standards are concerned.
LO State whether or not the lower limit

of a CTA has to be established
uniformly.
LO Explain why a UIR or Upper CTA

should be delineated to include the
Upper Airspace within the lateral
limits of a number of lower FIRs or
CTAs.
LO Describe in general the lateral limits of

CTRs.
LO State the minimum extension (in

NM) of the lateral limits of a CTR.
LO State the upper limits of a CTR

located within the lateral limits of a
CTA.
in
LO Name the ATS units providing ATC

service
(area
control
service,
approach
control
service,
aerodrome control service).
LO Describe which unit(s) may

assigned with the task to provide
specified services on the apron.
be
clearances
LO Describe the aim of clearances

issued by ATC with regard to IFR, VFR
or special VFR flights, and refer to the
different airspaces.
LO List the various (five possible) parts of

an ATC clearance.
LO Describe the various

clearance coordination.
010 07 01 04
Air Traffic Control services
LO Name all classes of airspace

which ATC shall be provided.
LO Name the purpose of

issued by an ATC unit.
aspects
of
Page 34

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State how ATC shall react when it

becomes apparent
that
traffic,
additional to that already accepted,
cannot be accommodated within a
given period of time at a particular
location or in a
particular area, or
can only be accommodated
at a
given rate.
LO Explain why
the movement
of
persons, vehicles and towed aircraft
on the manoeuvring area of an AD
shall be controlled by the AD TWR (as
necessary).
LO State for which aircraft FIS shall be

provided.
LO State whether or not FIS shall

include the provision of pertinent
SIGMET and AIRMET information.
LO State which information FIS shall

include in addition to SIGMET and
AIRMET information.
LO Indicate which other

information
the FIS shall include in addition to
the special information given in
ANNEX 11.
LO Name the three major types

operational FIS broadcasts.
LO Give the meaning of the acronym

ATIS in plain language.
LO Show that you are acquainted with

the basic conditions for transmitting
an ATIS as indicated in ANNEX 11.
LO Mention the
messages.
ATIS
LO List
the
basic
information
concerning ATIS broadcasts
(e.g.
frequencies used,
number of ADs
included,
updating, identification,
acknowledgment
of
receipt,
language
and
channels,
ALT
setting).
010 07 01 05
Flight Information Service (FIS)
four
possible
of
Page 35

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Understand the content of an ATIS

message and the factors involved.
LO State
the
reasons
circumstances
when
an
message shall be updated.
LO Indicate who provides the alerting

service.
LO State
who
is
responsible
for
initiating
the
appropriate
emergency phase.
LO Indicate
the aircraft to
which
LO Name the unit which shall

be
notified by the responsible ATS unit
immediately
when an aircraft is
considered to be in a state
of
emergency.
LO Name
the
three
stages of
emergency and describe the basic
conditions
for
each
kind of
emergency.
LO Demonstrate
knowledge of
the
meaning
of
the
expressions
INCERFA, ALERFA and DETRESFA.
LO Describe the limiting conditions for

the information of aircraft in the
vicinity of an aircraft being in a
state of emergency.
the
LO State the factors that RNP is based on.
LO Describe the reason for establishing a

system of route designators and
Required Navigation
Performance
(RNP).
LO State whether or not a prescribed
010 07 01 06
and
ATIS
Alerting service
010 07 01 07 Principles governing

ATS route designators
RNP
LO State
the
meaning
of
expressions RNP 4, RNP 1, etc.
and
Page 36

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
RNP type is considered an integral

part of the ATS route designator.
LO Demonstrate general knowledge of
the composition of an ATS route
designator.
plain
language
the
the acronym
PANS-
LO State whether or not the procedures

prescribed in ICAO Doc 4444 are
directed exclusively to ATS services
personnel.
LO Describe the relationship between

ICAO
Doc
4444
and
other
documents.
LO State whether or not a clearance

issued by ATC units does
include
prevention of collision with terrain,
and if there is an exception to this,
name the exception.
010 07 02 00 ICAO Document 4444

Traffic Management
Air
010 07 02 01 Foreword (Scope and purpose)

LO Explain in
meaning of
ATM.
LO Recall all definitions
given
Doc 4444 except the following:
in
accepting unit/controller, AD taxi

circuit, aeronautical fixed service
(AFS), aeronautical fixed station,
air-taxiing, allocation, approach
funnel, assignment, data
convention,
data
processing,
discrete code, D-value, flight status,
ground
effect,
receiving
unit/controller, sending
unit/controller, transfer of control
point, transferring
unit/controller,
unmanned free balloon.
010 07 02 03
ATS system capacity and

Air
Traffic
Flow
Management
(ATFM)
Page 37

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Explain when and where
service shall be implemented.
ATFM
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Explain the sole scope and purpose of

an ATC clearance.
LO State which information the issue of

an ATC clearance is based on.
Describe what a PIC should do if an

ATC clearance is not suitable.
who
bears
the
LO Indicate
responsibility for adhering to the
applicable
rules and
regulations
whilst flying under the control of an
ATC unit.
the
LO
Explain the meaning of the phrases

cleared via flight planned route,
cleared via (designation) departure
and cleared via
(designation)
arrival in an ATC clearance.
LO
List which items of an ATC clearance

shall always be read back by the flight
crew.
010 07 02 04
General provisions for Air Traffic

Services
LO Describe who is responsible for the

provision of flight information and
alerting
service within a Flight
Information
Region
(FIR) within
controlled airspace and at controlled
aerodromes.
010 07 02 05
LO
LO
LO
ATC clearances
Name the two primary purposes of

clearances issued by ATC units.
clearances
LO State why
issued early enough to
aircraft.
LO Explain what is meant
expression clearance limit.
010 07 02 06
Horizontal
instructions
speed
must
be
en route
by
control
LO Explain the reason for speed control
Page 38

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
by ATC.
LO Define the maximum speed changes
that ATC may impose.
LO State within which distance from the

threshold the PIC must not expect
any kind of speed control.
Change from IFR to VFR flight
010 07 02 07
LO Explain how the change from IFR to

VFR can be initiated by the PIC.
LO Indicate the expected reaction of

the appropriate ATC
unit upon a
request to change from IFR to VFR.
Wake turbulence
010 07 02 08
the
wake-turbulence
LO State
categories of aircraft.
the
wake-turbulence
LO State
separation minima.
LO Describe how a heavy aircraft shall

indicate this in the initial radiotelephony contact with ATS.
LO Indicate how the vertical position of

an aircraft in the vicinity of an
aerodrome shall be expressed at or
below the transition altitude, at or
above the transition level, and while
climbing or descending through the
transition layer.
LO Describe when the height of an

aircraft using QFE during an NDB
approach is referred to the landing
threshold instead of the aerodrome
elevation.
Altimeter-setting procedures
010 07 02 09
LO Define the following terms:
LO
transition level;
transition layer; and
transition altitude.
Indicate how far altimeter settings
Page 39

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
provided to aircraft shall be rounded

up or down.
LO Define the expression lowest usable
flight level.
LO Determine how the vertical position

of an aircraft on an en route flight is
expressed at or above the lowest
usable flight level and below the
lowest usable flight level.
LO State who establishes the transition

level to be used in the vicinity of an
aerodrome.
LO Decide how and when a flight crew

member shall be informed about the
transition level.
LO State whether or not the pilot can

request the transition level to be
included in the approach clearance.
LO State in what kind of clearance the

QNH altimeter
setting shall
be
included.
LO Describe when position reports shall

be made by an
aircraft flying on
routes
defined
by
designated
significant points.
LO List the six items that are normally

included in a voice position report.
LO Name the requirements for using a

simplified position report with flight
level, next position (and time over)
and ensuing
significant
points
omitted.
LO Name the item of a position report

which must be forwarded to ATC
with the initial call after changing to
010 07 02 10
Position reporting
Page 40

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
a new frequency.
LO Indicate the item of a position
report which may be omitted if SSR
Mode C is used.
LO Explain in which circumstances the

indicated
airspeed
should
be
included in a position report.
LO Explain the meaning of the acronym

ADS.
LO State to which unit an ADS report

shall be made.
LO Describe how ADS reports shall be

made.
LO Describe which expression

shall
precede the level figures in a
position report
if the level
is
reported in
relation to 1013.2 hPa
(standard pressure).
010 07 02 11 Reporting of operational

meteorological information
and
LO List the occasions when special air

reports shall be made.
010 07 02 12 Separation methods and minima
LO Explain the general provisions for
the separation of controlled traffic.
LO Name
the
different
kinds
separation used in aviation.
of

the type of separation
provided
within the
various
classes
of
airspace and the various types of
flight.
LO State who is responsible for the

avoidance of collision with other
aircraft when operating in VMC.
Page 41

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the ICAO documents in which

details of current separation minima
are prescribed.
LO Describe how vertical separation is

obtained.
LO State
the
required
separation minimum.
vertical
LO Describe how the cruising levels of

aircraft flying to the same destination
and in the
expected approach
sequence are correlated with each
other.
LO Name the conditions that must be

adhered to when two aircraft are
cleared to
maintain a specified
vertical separation between them
during climb or descent.
LO List the two main

horizontal separation.
for
LO Describe how lateral

separation of
aircraft at the same level may be
obtained.
LO Explain the
separation.
between
navigation
LO Describe the three basic means for

the establishment of longitudinal
separation.
LO Describe the circumstances under

which a reduction in separation
minima may be allowed.
LO Indicate the
standard
radar separation in NM.
term
methods
geographical
LO Describe track separation

aircraft using the same
aid or method.
horizontal
LO Describe the method of the Mach-
Page 42

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
number technique.
LO State the wake-turbulence
radar
separation for aircraft in the APP
and DEP phases of a flight when an
aircraft is operating directly behind
another aircraft at the same ALT or
less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below.
010 07 02 13
Separation in
aerodromes
the
LO Define the expression

Local Traffic.
vicinity
of
Essential
LO State which possible decision the

PIC may choose to take if departing
aircraft are expedited by suggesting
a take-off direction which is not
into the wind.
LO State the condition to enable ATC to

initiate a visual approach for an IFR
flight.
LO Indicate whether or not separation

shall be provided by ATC between
an aircraft executing
a
visual
approach and other arriving or
departing aircraft.
LO State in which case, when the flight

crew are not familiar with the
instrument
approach
procedure
being carried out, only the final
approach track has to be forwarded
to them by ATC.
LO Describe which flight level should be

assigned to an aircraft first arriving
over a holding fix for landing.
LO Talk about the priority that shall be

given to aircraft for a landing.
LO Understand the situation when a

pilot of an
aircraft in an
approach
Page 43

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
sequence indicates their intention to

hold for weather improvements.
LO Explain
the
term
Expected
Approach Time and the procedures
for its use.
LO State the
reasons which
could
probably lead to the decision to use
another take-off or landing direction
than the one into the wind.
LO Name the possible consequences for

a PIC if the RWY-in-use is not
considered suitable for the operation
involved.
LO Be familiar with
the separation of
aircraft holding in flight.
LO Be familiar
separation
aircraft.
minimum
departing
familiar with the

minimum
separation between departing and
arriving aircraft.
LO Know about a clearance to maintain

own separation while in VMC.
LO Give a brief description of essential

traffic
and
essential
traffic
information.

010 07 02 14 Miscellaneous separation

procedures
with the
between
LO Be
LO Be familiar
with
wake-turbulence
separation minima.
the
non-radar
longitudinal
010 07 02 15 Arriving and departing aircraft
Page 44

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO List the elements of information

which shall be transmitted to an
aircraft as early as practicable if an
approach for landing is intended.
LO List
the
information
to
be
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO List
the
information
to
be
transmitted to an aircraft during
final approach.
LO Acquaint
yourself with all
the
information
regarding
arriving
and/or departing aircraft on parallel
or near-parallel runways, including
knowledge about NTZ and NOZ and
the various combinations of parallel
arrivals and/or departures.
LO State the
sequence of
priority
between aircraft landing (or in the
final stage of an approach to land)
and aircraft intending to depart.
LO Explain the factors that

the approach sequence.
influence
LO State the significant changes in the

meteorological conditions in the takeoff or climb-out area
that shall be
transmitted without delay to
a
departing aircraft.
LO Describe what information shall be

forwarded to a departing aircraft as
far as visual or non-visual
aids are
concerned.
LO State the significant changes that

shall be transmitted as early as
practicable to an arriving aircraft,
particularly
changes
in
the
meteorological conditions.
transmitted to an aircraft at the

commencement of final approach.
010 07 02 16
Procedures
for
aerodrome
Page 45

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
control service
LO Describe the general tasks of the
Aerodrome Control Tower (TWR)
when
issuing
information
and
clearances to aircraft under its
control.
LO List for which aircraft and their

given positions or flight situations
the TWR shall prevent collisions.
LO Name the operational failure or

irregularity of AD equipment which
shall be reported to the TWR
immediately.
LO State that, after a given period of

time, the TWR shall report to the ACC
or FIC if an aircraft does not land as
expected.
LO Describe the
procedures to be
observed by the TWR whenever VFR
operations are suspended.
LO Explain the term RWY-in-use and its

selection.
LO List the information the TWR should

give to an aircraft:
prior to taxiing for take-off;

prior to take-off;
prior to entering the traffic
circuit.
LO Explain that a report of

wind direction given to a
the TWR is magnetic.
surface
pilot by
LO Explain the exact meaning of the

expression runway vacated.
010 07 02 17
Radar services
LO State to what extent the use of radar

in air traffic services may be limited.
Page 46

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State what radar-derived information

shall
be available for display to the
controller as a minimum.
LO Name the two basic identification

procedures used with radar.
LO Define the term PSR.

which an aircraft provided with radar
service should be informed of its
position.
LO List the possible forms of position

information passed on to the aircraft
by radar services.
LO Define the term radar vectoring.
LO State the aims of radar vectoring as

shown in ICAO Doc 4444.
LO State how radar vectoring shall

achieved.
be
LO Describe the information which shall

be given to an aircraft when radar
vectoring is terminated and the pilot
is instructed
to
resume
own
navigation.
LO Explain the procedures

for the
conduct of
Surveillance
Radar
Approaches (SRA).
LO Describe
what
kind of
action
(concerning the transponder) the
pilot is expected to perform in case
of
emergency
if
they
have
previously been directed by ATC to
operate the
transponder on a
specific code.
010 07 02 18
Air traffic advisory service
LO Describe the objective and basic

principles of the
air traffic advisory
Page 47

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
service.
LO State to which aircraft air traffic
advisory service shall be provided.
LO Explain why air traffic advisory

service does not deliver clearances
but only advisory information.
LO State the mode and code of SSR

equipment a pilot might operate in a
(general) state of emergency or
(specifically) in case the
aircraft is
subject to unlawful interference.
LO State the special rights an aircraft in

a state of emergency can
expect
from ATC.
LO Describe the expected action of

aircraft after receiving a
broadcast
from ATS concerning the emergency
descent of an aircraft.
LO State how it can be ascertained, in

case of
a failure
of
two-way
communication, whether the aircraft
is able to receive transmissions from
the ATS unit.
LO Explain the assumption based on

which
separation
shall
be
maintained if an aircraft is known to
experience a COM failure in VMC or
in IMC.
LO State
on
which
frequencies
appropriate information, for
an
aircraft encountering two-way COM
failure, shall be sent by ATS.
LO Describe the expected actions of an

ATS unit after having been informed
010 07 02 19
Procedures
related
to
emergencies,
communication
failure and contingencies
Page 48

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
that an aircraft is being intercepted in

or outside its area of responsibility.
LO State what
is meant
by
expression strayed aircraft
unidentified aircraft.
LO Explain the minimum level for fueldumping and the reasons for this.
LO Explain the possible request of ATC to

an aircraft to change its RTF call sign.
LO Explain the meaning of AIRPROX.
LO Determine the task of an air traffic

incident report.
010 07 02 20
the
and
Miscellaneous procedures
010 08 00 00
AERONAUTICAL
SERVICE
010 08 01 00
Introduction
INFORMATION
LO State, in general terms, the objective

of the
Aeronautical
Information
Service.
010 08 02 00
Definitions of ICAO Annex 15
LO Recall the following definitions:

Aeronautical Information
Circular
(AIC),
Aeronautical
Information
Publication
(AIP), AIP amendment,
AIP supplement, AIRAC,
danger
area,
Integrated
Aeronautical
Information Package, international
airport, international NOTAM office
(NOF),
manoeuvring
area,
movement area, NOTAM, Pre-flight
Information
Bulletin
(PIB),
prohibited area, restricted
area,
SNOWTAM, ASHTAM.
010 08 03 00
General
LO State during which period of time
Page 49

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
aeronautical
information
service
shall be available with reference to
an aircraft flying in the area of
responsibility of an AIS, provided a
24-hour service is not available.
LO Name (in general) the kind of
aeronautical information/data which
an AIS service shall make available
in a suitable form to flight crews.
LO Summarise
the
duties
of
aeronautical
information
service
concerning aeronautical information
data for the territory of the State.
LO Understand
WGS 84.
of
LO Name the different elements that

make up an Integrated Aeronautical
Information Package.
LO State the primary purpose of the

AIP.
LO Name the different parts of the AIP.
LO State in which main part of the AIP

the following information can be
found:
the
principles
010 08 04 00 Integrated Aeronautical

Information Package
010 08 04 01 Aeronautical Information

Publication (AIP)
differences from the ICAO

Standards, Recommended
Practices and Procedures;
location indicators,
aeronautical information
services, minimum flight
altitude, VOLMET service,
SIGMET service;
general rules and procedures
(especially general rules, VFR,
IFR, ALT-setting procedure,
Page 50

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
interception of civil aircraft,

unlawful interference, air
traffic incidents);
ATS airspace (especially FIR,
UIR, TMA);
ATS routes (especially lower ATS
routes, upper ATS routes, area
navigation routes);
aerodrome data including
aprons, TWYs and check
locations/positions data;
navigation warnings (especially
prohibited, restricted and
danger areas);
aircraft instruments,
equipment and flight
documents;
AD surface-movement
guidance and control system
and markings;
RWY physical characteristics,
declared distances, APP and
RWY lighting;
AD radio navigation and
landing aids;
charts related to an AD;
entry, transit and departure of
aircraft, passengers, crew and
cargo.
LO State how permanent changes to

the AIP shall be published.
LO Explain what kind of information

shall be published in the form of AIP
Supplements.
LO Describe how conspicuousness of

AIP Supplement pages is achieved.
LO Describe how information shall be

published which in principle would
belong to
NOTAMs but includes
extensive text and/or graphics.
LO Summarise essential information

which leads to the issuance of a
010 08 04 02
NOTAMs
Page 51

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
NOTAM.
LO State to whom
distributed.
NOTAMs shall
be
LO Explain how information regarding

snow, ice and standing water on AD
pavements shall be reported.
LO Describe
the means
by
NOTAMs shall be distributed.
LO List the circumstances under which

the information concerned shall or
should be distributed as AIRAC.
LO State the sequence in which AIRACs

shall be issued and state how many
Days before the effective date the
information shall be distributed by
AIS.
the
and
which
LO State which information an ASHTAM

may contain.
Regulation and Control (AIRAC)

Circulars (AICs)
LO Describe
the
reasons
publication of AICs.
for
LO Explain
the
organisation
standard colour codes of AICs.
LO Explain the normal publication cycle

of AICs.
010 08 04 05 Pre-flight and post-flight
information/data
LO List (in general) which details shall be
Included in the aeronautical
Information provided for pre-flight
planning purposes at the appropriate
ADs.
Page 52

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Summarise the additional current

information relating to the AD of
departure that shall be provided as
pre-flight information.
LO Describe how a recapitulation of

current
NOTAM
and
other
information of urgent character shall
be made available to flight crews.
LO State which post-flight information

from aircrews shall be submitted to
AIS for distribution as required by the
circumstances.
010 09 00 00
AERODROMES (ICAO Annex 14,

Volume I Aerodrome Design
and Operations)
010 09 01 00
General
LO Recognise all definitions of ICAO

Annex 14 except the following:
accuracy, cyclic redundancy check,
data quality, effective intensity,
Ellipsoid height (geodetic height),
Geodetic datum, geoid, geoid
undulation, integrity (aeronautical
data), light failure, lighting system
reliability, orthometric height,
station declination, usability factor,
Reference code.
LO Describe, in general terms, the
intent of the AD reference code as
well as its composition
of two
elements.
010 09 02 00
Aerodrome data
010 09 02 01
Aerodrome reference point
LO Describe
where
the
aerodrome
reference point shall be located and
where it shall normally remain.
Page 53

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
010 09 02 02 Pavement strengths

LO Explain the terms PCN and ACN and
describe their mutual dependence.
LO Describe how the bearing strength

for an aircraft with an apron mass
equal to or less than 5 700 kg shall
be reported.
LO List
the four
most
important
declared RWY distances and indicate
where you can find guidance on
their calculation in ICAO Annex 14.
LO Recall the definitions for the

main declared distances.
LO Understand
the
purpose
of
informing AIS and ATS units about
the condition of the movement area
and related facilities.
LO List the matters

of operational
significance or
affecting aircraft
performance
which
should
be
reported to AIS and ATS units to be
transmitted to aircraft involved.
LO Describe the four different types of

water deposit on runways.
LO Name the three defined

frozen water on the RWY.
states of
LO Understand the
five levels
of
braking
action
including
the
associated coefficients and codes.
010 09 02 03 Declared distances
four
010 09 02 04 Condition of the movement area

and related facilities
010 09 03 00 Physical characteristics

010 09 03 01 Runways
LO Describe where a threshold should
Page 54

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
normally be located.
LO Acquaint yourself with the general
considerations concerning runways
associated with
a stopway
or
clearway.
LO State where in Annex 14 you can

find detailed information about the
required runway width dependent
upon code number and code letter.
LO Describe the condition which must be

fulfilled to maintain the required
clearance between the outer main
wheels of an aircraft and the edge of
the taxiway.
LO Describe
the
requirements
taxiways.
and
the
rapid-exit
taxiway
010 09 03 02 Runway strips

LO Explain the term runway strip.
010 09 03 03 Runway-end safety area
LO Explain the term RWY-end
area.
safety
010 09 03 04 Clearway
LO Explain the term clearway.
010 09 03 05 Stopway
LO Explain the term stopway.
010 09 03 06 Radio-altimeter operating area
LO Describe where a radio-altimeter
operating
area
should
be
established and
how far it should
extend laterally and longitudinally.
010 09 03 07 Taxiways
reasons
for
LO State the reason for

widening in curves.
Page 55

Syllabus
Aeroplane
Syllabus details and associated Learning

Objectives
reference
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain
when and where
bays should be provided.
holding
LO Describe
where
runway
positions shall be established.
holding
LO Define
the
position.
holding
intermediate
LO Describe
term
road
where
taxiway holding positions should be

established.
010 09 04
00
Visual aids for navigation
010 09 04
01
Indicators and signaling devices
LO Describe
the
wind-direction
indicators with which ADs shall be

equipped.
LO Describe
indicator.
landing-direction
LO Explain
the
signaling lamp.
capabilities
of
LO State which characteristics a signal

area should have.
LO Interpret all indications and signals
that may be used in a signals area.
010 09 04
02
Markings
LO Name
the colours
various
markings
used for
the
(RWY,
TWY,
aircraft stands, apron safety lines).

LO State
where
RWY
designation
marking shall be provided and how

it is designed.
Page 56

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Describe
the
application
characteristics of:
and
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe
mechanical
safety
considerations regarding
elevated
approach lights and elevated RWY,
stopway and taxiway lights.
LO Describe the relationship of

intensity of
RWY
lighting,
approach-lighting system and the
of a separate intensity control
different lighting systems.
the
the
use
for
LO List
the
conditions
for
the
installation of an AD beacon and
describe its general characteristics.
LO Name
the
different
kinds
operations for which a simple APP
lighting system shall be used.
of
LO Describe the basic installations of a

simple APP lighting system including
the
dimensions
and
distances
normally used.
LO Describe the principle of a precision

APP category I lighting system
including information such as location
010 09 04 03
RWY-centre-line markings;
THR marking;
touchdown-zone marking;
RWY-side-stripe marking;
TWY-centre-line marking;
runway holding position
marking;
intermediate holding position
marking;
aircraft-stand markings;
apron safety lines;
road holding position marking;
mandatory instruction
marking;
information marking.
Lights
Page 57

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
and characteristics.
Remark: This includes the Calvert
system with additional crossbars.
APP category II and III lighting
system including information such as
location and characteristics, especially
mentioning the inner 300 m of the
system.
LO Describe the wing bars of PAPI and

APAPI.
LO Interpret what the pilot will see

during approach using PAPI, APAPI,
T-VASIS and AT-VASIS.
LO Interpret what the pilot will

during approach using HAPI.
see
LO Explain
the
application
characteristics of:
and
RWY-edge lights;
RWY-threshold and wing-bar
lights;
RWY-end lights;
RWY-centre-line lights;
RWY-lead-in lights;
RWY-touchdown-zone lights;
stopway lights;
taxiway-centre-line lights;
taxiway-edge lights;
stop bars;
lights;
RWY-guard lights;
road holding position lights.

LO Understand the timescale within
which aeronautical ground lights shall
be made available to arriving aircraft.
010 09 04 04 Signs
LO State the general
installing signs.
purpose
for
Page 58

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain which signs are the only ones

on the movement area utilising red.
LO List the provisions for

signs.
illuminating
LO State the purpose for installing

mandatory instruction signs.
LO Name the kind of signs which shall be

included in the mandatory instruction
signs.
LO Name the colours used for mandatory

instruction signs.
LO Describe by which sign a pattern A

runway-holding position (i.e. at an
intersection of a taxiway and a noninstrument, non-precision approach
or take-off RWY) marking shall
be
supplemented.
LO Describe by which sign a pattern B

intersection of a taxiway and a
precision approach RWY) marking
shall be supplemented.
LO Describe the location of:
LO Name the sign with which it shall be

indicated that a taxiing aircraft is
about to
infringe
an obstaclelimitation surface or to interfere with
the operation of radio navigation aids
(e.g. ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area).
LO Describe
the
various
possible
inscriptions on RWY designation signs
and on holding-position signs.
LO Describe
a RWY designation sign at a

taxiway/RWY intersection;
a NO ENTRY sign;
a RWY holding position sign.
the
inscription
on
an
Page 59

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
intermediate holding-position
on a taxiway.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
sign
LO State when information signs shall

be provided.
LO Describe
the
colours used
in
connection with information signs.
LO Describe the possible inscriptions on

information signs.
LO Explain the application, location and

characteristics of aircraft standidentification signs.

characteristics of
road
holdingposition signs.
LO Explain why markers located near a

runway or taxiway shall be limited
to their height.
LO Explain
the
application
characteristics of:
LO State how fixed or mobile objects

shall be marked if colouring is not
practicable.
LO Describe marking by colours (fixed

or mobile objects).
LO Explain the use of markers for the

marking of objects, overhead wires,
010 09 04 05 Markers
and
Documented RWY-edge markers;

TWY-edge markers;
TWY-centre-line markers;
uDocumentved TWY-edge
markers;
boundary markers;
stopway-edge
markers.
010 09 05 00 Visual
aids
for
denoting
Obstacles
010 09 05 01 Marking of objects
Page 60

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
cables, etc.
LO Explain the use of flags
marking of objects.
for the
LO Name the different types of lights to

indicate the presence of objects
which must be lighted.
LO State the time period(s) of the 24

hours of a day during which highintensity lights are intended for use.
LO Describe (in general terms)

location of obstacle lights.
the
LO Describe (in general and for normal

circumstances) the
colour
and
sequence of low-intensity obstacle
lights,
medium-intensity obstacle
lights and high-intensity obstacle
lights.
LO State
where
you
can
find
information about lights to be
displayed by aircraft.
LO Describe the colours and meaning of

closed markings on RWYs and
taxiways.
LO State how the pilot of an aircraft

moving on the surface of a taxiway,
holding bay or apron shall be warned
that the shoulders of these surfaces
are non-load-bearing.
LO Describe the pre-threshold marking

(including colours) when the surface
before the threshold is not suitable
for normal use by aircraft.
010 09 05 02 Lighting of objects
010 09 06 00 Visual
aids
for
restricted use of areas
denoting
010 09 07 00 Aerodromes operational services,
Page 61

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
equipment and installations

010 09 07 01 Rescue and Firefighting (RFF)
LO Name the principal objective
rescue and firefighting service.
of a
LO List the most important factors

bearing on effective rescue in a
survivable aircraft accident.
LO Explain the basic information the AD

category
(for
rescue
and
firefighting) depends upon.
LO Describe what is meant by the term

response time and state its normal
and maximum limits.
LO State the reasons for emergencyaccess roads and for satellite firefighting stations.
LO Describe the reason for providing a

special apron management service
and state what has to be observed if
the AD control
tower is
not
participating
in
the
apron
management service.
LO State who has a right-of-way against

vehicles operating on an apron.
010 09 07 02 Apron management service
010 09 07 03 Ground-servicing of aircraft

LO Describe the necessary actions during
the ground-servicing of an aircraft
with regard to the possible event of a
fuel fire.
010 09 08 00 Attachment A to ICAO Annex 14,
Volume
1 Supplementary
Guidance Material
LO List the
four
types of
declared
Page 62

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
distances on a runway and also the

appropriate abbreviations.
LO Explain the circumstances which lead
to the situation that the four declared
distances on a runway are equal to
the length of the runway.
LO Describe the influence of a clearway,

stopway and/or displaced
threshold
upon the four declared distances.
radio-
LO Describe the physical characteristics

of a radio-altimeter operating area.
LO Describe the dimensions of a radioaltimeter operating area.
LO Describe the position of a

altimeter operating area.
of
LO Describe the two different versions of

a simple approach lighting system.
LO Describe the two different basic

versions of precision approach
lighting systems for CAT I.
LO Describe the diagram of the inner 300

m of the precision approach lighting
system in the case of CAT II and III.
LO Describe how the arrangement of an

approach lighting system and the
location of the appropriate threshold
are interrelated between each other.
010 09 08 02 Radio-altimeter operating areas

LO Describe the purpose of a
radio-
010 09 08 03 Approach lighting systems

LO Name the two main groups
approach lighting systems.
010 10 00 00 FACILITATION (ICAO Annex 9)

010 10 01 00 General
010 10 01 01 Foreword
Page 63

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the aim of ANNEX 9 as

indicated in the Foreword.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the purpose and use of

aircraft documents as far as the
General Declaration is concerned.
LO State whether or not a General

Declaration will be required by a
Contracting State under normal
circumstances.
LO State the kind of information

concerning crew members whenever
a General Declaration is required by
a Contracting State.
LO Explain entry requirements for

crew.
LO Explain the reasons for the use of

Crew Member Certificates (CMC) for
flight crews and cabin attendants
engaged in International Air
Transport.
LO Explain in which cases Contracting

States shall accept the CMC as an
identity document instead of a
passport or visa.
LO State whether the entry privileges

for crews of scheduled international
air services can be extended to
other flight crews of aircraft
operated for remuneration or hire
but not engaged in scheduled
International Air Services.
010 10 01 02 Definitions (ICAO Annex 9)

LO Understand the definitions.
010 10 02 00 Entry and departure of aircraft
010 10 02 01 General Declaration
010 10 02 02 Entry and departure of crew
010 10 02 03 Entry and departure of

passengers and baggage
LO Explain the entry requirements for
passengers and their baggage.
Page 64

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the requirements and

documentation for unaccompanied
baggage.
LO Be familiar with the documentation

required for the departure and entry
of passengers and their baggage.
LO Be familiar with the arrangements
LO Describe the pilots authority

towards unruly passengers.
LO Describe how Contracting States

shall arrange for the establishment
and prompt provisions of SAR
services.
LO Explain the establishment of SAR

Regions by Contracting States.
LO Describe the areas within which SAR

services shall be established by
Contracting States.
LO State the period of time per day

within which SAR services shall be
available.
in the event of a passenger being

declared an inadmissible person.
010 10 02 04 Entry and departure of cargo

cargo.
required for the entry and departure
of cargo.
010 11 00 00 SEARCH AND RESCUE
010 11 01 00 Essential Search and Rescue
(SAR) definitions in ICAO Annex
12
alert phase, distress phase,
emergency phase, operator, pilotin-command, rescue co-ordination
centre, State of registry,
uncertainty phase.
010 11 02 00 Organisation
Page 65

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe for which areas rescue

coordination centres shall be
established.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the SAR operating

procedures for the pilot-incommand who arrives first at the
scene of an accident.

procedures for the pilot-incommand intercepting a distress
transmission.
LO Explain the groundair visual signal

code for use by survivors.
LO Explain the signals to be used for

airground signals.
LO State the objectives of security.
LO Explain where further information in

addition
to
ICAO
Annex
17
concerning aviation
security
is
available.
010 11 03 00 Operating procedures for non-SAR

crews
010 11 04 00 Search and rescue signals
010 12 00 00 SECURITY
010 12 01 00 Essential definitions
Annex 17
of
ICAO

airside, aircraft security
check,
screening,
security,
security
control,
security-restricted
area,
unidentified baggage.
010 12 02 00 General principles
LO Understand the required activities
expected at each airport serving
international civil aviation.
Page 66

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
010 12 04 00 Preventive security measures

LO Describe the objects not allowed
(for reasons of aviation security) on
board an aircraft
engaged
in
LO Explain what each Contracting State

is supposed to
do
concerning
originating passengers
and their
cabin baggage prior to boarding an
aircraft engaged in international civil
aviation operations.
LO State what each Contracting State is

supposed to
do if
passengers
subjected to security control
have
mixed after a security screening
point.
LO Explain what has to be done at

airports serving international civil
aviation to protect cargo, baggage,
mail stores and operator supplies
against
an
act
of
unlawful
interference.
LO Explain what has to be done when

passengers, who are obliged to
travel because
of
judicial
or
administrative
proceedings,
are
supposed to board an aircraft.
LO Understand
what
has
to
be
considered
if
law-enforcement
officers carry weapons on board.
LO Describe what is meant by access

control at an aerodrome.
010 12 05 00 Management of response to acts

of unlawful interference
LO Describe
the
assistance
each
Contracting State shall provide to an
aircraft subjected to an act of
Page 67

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
unlawful seizure.
LO State the circumstances which could
prevent a State to detain an aircraft
on the ground after being subjected
to an act of unlawful seizure.
LO Describe what the

PIC should do
unless considerations on board the
aircraft dictate otherwise.
LO Describe what the PIC should do if:

the aircraft must depart from
its assigned track;
its assigned cruising level;
the aircraft is unable to notify
an ATS unit of the unlawful
interference.
LO Describe what the PIC should attempt

to do with regard to broadcast
warnings to decide at which level the
crew is proceeding
if no applicable
regional procedures for
in-flight
contingencies have been established.
010 12 06 00 Operators security programme

LO Understand the principles of the
written
operator
security
programme each Contracting State
requires from operators.
010 12 07 00 Security procedures
in other
documents, i.e. ICAO Annex 2,
ICAO Annex 6, ICAO Annex 14,
ICAO Doc 4444
010 12 07 01 ICAO Annex 2 Rules of the Air,
Attachment
B
Unlawful
Interference
010 12 07 02 ICAO Annex 6, Chapter 13

Security
LO Describe the special considerations
referring to flight crew compartment
Page 68

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
doors with regard to aviation security.

LO Explain what an operator shall do to
minimise the consequences of acts
of unlawful interference.

have appropriate employees available
who can contribute to the prevention
of acts of sabotage or other forms of

Physical characteristics
LO Describe what minimum distance an
isolated aircraft parking position
(after
the
aircraft
has
been
subjected to unlawful interference)
should have from other parking
positions, buildings or public areas.
010 12 07 04 ICAO Doc 4444
LO Describe the considerations
that
must take place with regard to a
taxi clearance in case an aircraft is
known or believed to have been
subjected to unlawful interference.
010 13 00 00 AIRCRAFT
ACCIDENT
INCIDENT INVESTIGATION
010 13 01 00 Essential definitions
Annex 13
of
AND
ICAO

accident, aircraft, flight recorder,
incident, investigation,
maximum
mass, operator, serious incident,
serious injury, State of Design,
State of Manufacture, State of
Occurrence, State of the Operator,
State of Registry.
LO Define
the
difference
between
Page 69

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
serious incident and accident.

LO Determine
whether
a
certain
occurrence has to be defined as a
serious incident or as an accident.
LO Recognise the description

accident or incident.
an
LO Describe the geographical limits, if

any, within which the specifications
given in Annex 13 apply.
LO State the
objective(s)
of
the
investigation of
an accident or
incident according to Annex 13.
LO Understand the general procedures

for the investigation of an accident
or incident according to Annex 13.
of
010 13 02 00 Applicability of ICAO Annex 13
010 13 03 00 ICAO
accident
Investigation
010 13 04 00 Accident
investigation
LO Be familiar
and
and
with
incident
incident
the ICAO
Accident and Incident procedures
Page 70

Syllabus
Reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Annex 13.
0
010 14 00 00
1
0
010 14 01 00
UAE Air Law
010 14 01 01
010 14 01 02
Alternate Heliport.
Flight time Helicopters(CAR Part 1)
010 14 02 02
010 14 02 03
010 14 02 04
010 14 02 05
010 14 02 06
010 14 02 07
010 14 02 08
010 14 02 09
010
010
010
010
14
14
14
14
03
03
04
04
00
01
00
01
CAR Part 1 Definitions

Alternate aerodrome: take-off
alternate, en route alternate, ETOPS
en route alternate, destination
alternate.(CAR Part 1)
010 14 02 00
010 14 02 01
CAR Part 2, CAR Part FCL

List the maximum period of time for
which the different licences, ratings
and medicals are valid
List the restrictions for licence holders
with an age of 60 years or more
Describe the requirement to carry a
flight crew licence
State the requirements for the Issue
and Currency of a CPL
State the Privlleges of a CPL
State the requirments for the Issue
and Currency of a MPL
State the Privlleges of a MPL
State the requirments for the issue
and currency of an ATPL
State the Privlleges of an ATPL
CAR Part 3
UAE General Rules differing to ICAO
CAR Part 4
UAE Airspace - CAP OPS 1
Commercial & Private Air Transport
Understand the various rules and
services that apply in the various
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Page 71

Explain which airspace shall be

included within the UAE
010 14 04 02
UTC Time - difference between UAE

and UTC time
010 14 04 03
UAE Aeronautical Information

Publications (AIP) - State in which
main part of the AIP the following
information can be found:
Differences from ICAO SARPS
Location indicators, aeronautical
information services, minimum
flight altitude, VOLMET services,
SIGMET service.
General rules and procedures,

Unlawful interference, air
traffic incidents;

UIR, TMA);
navigation routes);
prohibited, restricted and
danger areas);
documents;
AD surface-movement
guidance and control system
and markings;
declared distances, APP and
RWY lighting;
landing aids;

aircraft, passengers, crew and cargo.
010 14 04 04
Flight and Duty time limitations
010 14 05 00
Accident and Incident reporting
Page 72

Subject: 021 - AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE AIRFRAME/SYSTEMS/POWER PLANT

ATPL(A)
2:00
CPL(A) ATPL(H)/IR
1:30
2:00
ATPL(H)
2:00
CPL(H) IR(A)&(H)
1:30
XX
Time
allowed
(hours)
021 01
021 02
021 03
021 04
021 05
021 06
021 07
021 08
021 09
021 10
021 11
021 12
021 13
021 14
021 15
021 16
021 17
Total
questions
04
04
05
05
07
05
04
06
06
06
20
04
04
XX
XX
XX
XX
80
02
04
02
06
04
04
04
04
06
14
06
02
02
XX
XX
XX
XX
60
04
04
04
04
06
04
02
04
06
06
20
02
XX
01
04
06
03
80
04
04
04
04
06
04
02
04
06
06
20
02
XX
01
04
06
03
80
02
02
03
02
03
02
02
04
04
08
13
02
XX
01
03
05
04
60
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Page 73

B. SUBJECT 021 AIRFRAME AND SYSTEMS, ELECTRICS, POWER PLANT AND

EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
020 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE

AIRFRAME
AND
SYSTEMS,
ELECTRICS,
POWER
PLANT,
EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
021 01 00 00 SYSTEM
DESIGN,
STRESSES, MAINTENANCE
LOADS,
021 01 01 00 System design

021 01 01 01 Design concepts
LO Describe
the
following
design philosophy:
structural
safe life;
fail-safe (multiple load paths);
damage-tolerant.
LO Describe the following system design
philosophy:
redundancy.
021 01 01 02 Level of certification
LO Explain and state the safety objectives
associated
with failure
conditions
(AMC 25.1309, Fig. 2).

probability of a failure and the severity
of the failure effects.
LO Explain why
some
systems
duplicated or triplicated.
are
021 01 02 00 Loads and stresses
Page 74

B. SUBJECT 021 AIRFRAME AND SYSTEMS, ELECTRICS,
POWER PLANT AND EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the phenomenon of fatigue.

magnitude of the alternating stress
and the
number of
cycles (S/N
diagram or Whler curve).
LO Explain the
implication
concentration factor.
of
between
(stress
LO Explain the following terms:
stress,
strain,
tension,
compression,
buckling,
bending,
torsion,
static loads,
dynamic loads,
cyclic loads,
elastic and plastic deformation.
Remark: Stress is the internal force

per unit area inside a structural part
as a result of external loads. Strain is
the deformation caused by the action
of stress on a material. It is normally
given as the change in
dimension
expressed in a percentage
of the
original dimensions of the object.
LO Describe
the relationship
stress and strain for a metal.
between
021 01 03 00 Fatigue
of
stress-
021 01 04 00 Corrosion
LO Describe
the
corrosion:
following
types
oxidation,
electrolytic.
LO Describe
the
fatigue
and
corrosion).
interaction
corrosion
Page 75

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
021 01 05 00 Maintenance
021 01 05 01 Maintenance methods: hard time
and on condition
parts
carry
material
LO Compare the above properties as they

apply to aluminium alloys, magnesium
alloys, titanium
alloys, steel
and
composites.
hard-time maintenance;
on-condition maintenance.
021 02 00 00 AIRFRAME
021 02 01 00 Construction
Methods
and
attachment
LO Describe the principles of the following

construction methods:
monocoque;
semi-monocoque;
cantilever;
sandwich, including honey comb;
truss.
LO Describe the
methods:
following
attachment
riveting,
welding,
bolting,
pinning,
adhesives (bonding).
LO State that sandwich structural

need additional provisions to
concentrated loads.
021 02 02 00 Materials
LO Explain
the
properties:
following
elasticity,
plasticity,
stiffness,
strength,
strength-to-density ratio.
Page 76

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the need to use alloys rather

than pure metals.
LO Explain the principle of a

material.
composite
LO Describe the function of the following

components:
matrix, resin or filler;

fibres.
LO State
the
advantages and
disadvantages of composite materials
compared
with metal
alloys
by
considering the following:
strength-to-weight ratio;
capability to tailor the strength to
the direction of the load;
stiffness;
electrical conductivity (lightning);
resistance to fatigue;
resistance to corrosion and cost.
LO State that the following are compositefibre materials:
carbon,
glass,
aramid (Kevlar).
021 02 03 00 Aeroplane: wings, tail surfaces and

control surfaces
021 02 03 01 Design and construction
LO Describe
the
construction:
following
types
of
cantilever,
non-cantilever (braced).
021 02 03 02 Structural components

structural components:
spar and its components (web

and girder or cap),
rib,
stringer,
skin,
torsion box.
Page 77

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
021 02 03 03 Loads, stresses and

vibrations (flutter)
LO Describe the vertical
loads on the ground.
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Describe the
loads in flight
for
symmetrical
and
asymmetrical
conditions, considering both vertical
and horizontal loads and loads due to
engine failure.
LO Describe the principle of flutter, flutter

damping and resonance for the wing
and control surfaces.
LO Explain the significance on stress relief

and flutter of the following:
CPL
and
chord-wise and span-wise

position of masses (e.g. engines,
fuel and balance masses, control
balance masses);
torsional stiffness;
bending flexibility.
LO Describe
the
configurations:
IR
aeroelastic
horizontal
Helicopter
following
design
conventional (low or mid set)

tailplane;
T-tail.
021 02 04 00 Fuselage,
landing gear,
doors,
floor, windscreen and windows
LO Describe
the
following
fuselage construction:
types
of
monocoque,
semi-monocoque.
Page 78

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the construction

function of the following
components of a fuselage:
and
the
structural
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
frames;
bulkhead;
stiffeners, stringers, longerons;
skin, doublers;
floor suspension (crossbeams);
floor panels;
_____________
LO
_____________ Describe the loads on the fuselage due
to pressurisation.
firewall.
LO Describe the following loads on a main
landing gear:
touch-down loads (vertical and
horizontal)
taxi loads on bogie gear (turns).
LO Describe the structural danger of a
nose-wheel landing with respect to:
fuselage loads;
nose-wheel strut loads.
LO Describe the structural danger of a tail
strike with respect to:
fuselage and aft bulkhead
damage (pressurisation).
LO Describe
the
door and
hatch
construction for
pressurised
and
unpressurised aeroplanes including:
door and frame (plug type);
hinge location;
locking mechanism.
LO Explain
the
advantages
and
disadvantages
of
the
following
fuselage cross sections:
circular;
double bubble (two types);
oval;
rectangular.
LO State that flight-deck windows are
constructed with different layers.
Page 79

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain the function of window heating

for structural purposes.
LO Explain the implication of a directvision window (see CS 25.773 (b)

(3)).
LO State the need for an eye-reference

position.
LO Explain the function

(blow-out panels).
of floor venting
LO Describe the construction and fitting of

sliding doors.
Helicopter
IR
CPL
LO List the functions of flight controls.
LO Describe and explain the different

flight control
design concepts for
conventional, tandem, coaxial, side by
side, NOTAR and Fenestron-equipped
helicopters.
LO Explain the advantages, disadvantages

and limitations
of
the
respective
designs above.
LO Explain
the
function
synchronised elevator.
the
LO Describe the construction methods and

alignment of vertical and horizontal
stabilisers.
021 02 05 00 Helicopter:
flight
structural aspects
controls
021 02 05 02 Structural
Materials
of
components
LO Name the main components of flight

and control surfaces.
and
Page 80


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe and explain where the main

stresses are applied to components.
LO Describe the dangers and stresses

regarding safety and
serviceability in
flight when the manufacturers design
envelope is exceeded.
LO Explain the procedure for:
LO Describe the fatigue life and methods

of checking for serviceability of flight
and control
surface components and
materials.
021 02 05 03
Loads, stresses
Vibrations
and
aero-elastic
static chord-wise balancing;

static span-wise balancing;
blade alignment;
dynamic chord-wise balancing;
dynamic span-wise balancing.
LO Explain the process of blade tracking

including:
the pre-track method of blade

tracking;
the use of delta incidence
numbers;
aircraft configuration whilst
carrying out tracking;
factors affecting blade-flying
profile;
ground tracking and in-flight
trend analysis;
use of pitch-link and blade-trim
tab adjustments;
tracking techniques, including
stroboscopic and electronic.
LO Describe the early indications and

vibrations which are likely to be
experienced when the main
rotor
blades and tail rotor are out of balance
and/or tracking, including the possible
early indications due to
possible
fatigue and overload.
Page 81

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain how a vibration harmonic can be

set up in other components which can
lead to their early failure.
LO Describe the three planes of vibration

measurement, i.e. vertical,
lateral,
fore and aft.
021 02 06 00 Structural limitations

LO Define and explain the
maximum structural masses:
maximum
maximum
maximum
maximum
following
ramp mass;
take-off mass;
zero-fuel mass;
landing mass.
Remark: These limitations may also be

found in the relevant part of subjects
031, 032 and 034.
LO Explain that airframe life is limited by
fatigue, created by alternating stress
and the number of load cycles.
LO Explain
the
masses:
maximum
structural
maximum take-off mass.
LO Explain that airframe life is limited by

fatigue, created by load cycles.
021 03 00 00 HYDRAULICS
021 03 01 00 Hydromechanics: basic principles
LO Explain
the
principles
including:
concept
and
basic
of
hydromechanics
hydrostatic pressure;
Pascals law;
the relationship between
pressure, force and area;
transmission of power:
multiplication of force, decrease
of displacement.
021 03 02 00 Hydraulic systems
Page 82

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
021 03 02 01 Hydraulic
fluids:
characteristics, limitations
IR
CPL
types,
LO List
and
explain
the
desirable
properties of a hydraulic fluid:
LO State that different types of hydraulic

fluids cannot be mixed.
LO State that at the pressures being

considered,
hydraulic
fluid
is
considered incompressible.
LO Describe the difference in principle of

operation between a constant pressure
system and a system pressurised only
on specific demand (open-centre).
LO State the differences in principle of

operation between a passive hydraulic
system (without a pressure pump) and
an active hydraulic system (with a
pressure pump).
thermal stability;
corrosiveness;
flashpoint and flammability;
volatility;
viscosity.
LO State that hydraulic fluids are irritating

for skin and eyes.
LO List the
two
hydraulic fluids:
different
types
of
synthetic,
mineral.
021 03 02 02 System
components:
design,
operation, degraded
modes
of
operation,
indications
and
Warnings
LO Explain the working
hydraulic system.
principle
of
Page 83


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
hydraulic
LO State that hydraulic systems can be

classified as either high
pressure
(typically 3 000 psi or higher) and low
pressure (typically up to 2 000 psi).
LO State that the normal

pressure of most large
aircraft is 3 000 psi.
hydraulic
transport
LO Explain the working principle of a lowpressure (02000 psi) open centred

system using an off loading valve and
an RPM dependent pump.
LO Explain the advantages and

disadvantages of a high pressure
system over a low -pressure system.
LO Describe the working principle and
functions of pressure pumps including:
constant pressure pump (swash
plate or cam plate);
pressure pump whose output is
dependent on pump RPM (gear
type).
LO State that for an aeroplane, the power
sources of a hydraulic pressure pump
can be:
List the
main
advantages
and
disadvantages of system actuation by
hydraulic or purely mechanical means
with respect to:
weight,
size,
_____________
LO
_____________ List the
systems.
force.
main users
of
manual;
engine gearbox;
electrical;
air (pneumatic and ram-air
turbine);
hydraulic (power transfer unit) or
reversible motor pumps.
Page 84

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO State that for a helicopter, the power
sources of a hydraulic pressure pump
can be:
IR
CPL
manual,
engine,
gearbox,
electrical.
LO Describe the working principle and

functions of the following hydraulicsystem components:
LO Explain how redundancy is obtained by

giving examples.
LO Interpret
the
hydraulic
system
schematic appended to these LOs (to
be introduced at a later date).
LO Explain the implication

system demand.
reservoir (pressurised and

unpressurised);
accumulators;
case drain lines and fluid cooler
return lines;
piston actuators (single and
double acting);
hydraulic motors;
filters;
non-return (check) valves;
relief valves;
restrictor valves;
elector valves (linear and basic
rotary selectors, two and four
ports);
bypass valves;
shuttle valves;
fire shut-off valves;
priority valves;
fuse valves;
pressure and return pipes.
LO Explain
why
many
aeroplanes have demand
pumps.
transport
hydraulic
of a
high
Page 85

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the implication of a system

internal leakage including hydraulic
lock of piston actuators.
LO List and describe the instruments and

alerts for
monitoring a
hydraulic
system.
LO State the indications and explain the

implications
of
the
following
malfunctions:
system leak or low level;

low pressure;
high temperature.
021 04 00 00 LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES,

BRAKES
021 04 01 00 Landing gear
021 04 01 01 Types
LO Name, for an aeroplane, the following
different landing-gear configurations:
nose wheel,
tail wheel.
LO Name, for a helicopter, the following

different landing-gear configurations:
nose wheel,
tail wheel,
skids.
021 04 01 02 System
components,
design,
operation,
indications
and
warnings,
on-ground/in-flight
protections, emergency extension
systems
Page 86

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain the function of the
following
components of a landing gear:
CPL
oleo leg/shock strut;

axles;
bogies and bogie beam;
drag struts;
side stays/struts;
torsion links;
locks (over centre);
gear doors and retraction
mechanisms (normal and
emergency operation).

following
components of a landing gear:
IR
oleo leg/shock strut;

axles;
drag struts;
side stays/struts;
torsion links;
locks (over centre);
gear doors and retraction
mechanisms (normal and
emergency operation).
LO Name the different components of a

landing gear, using
the diagram
appended to these LOs.
LO Describe the sequence of events of the

landing gear during normal operation.
LO State
how
landing-gear
position
indication and alerting is implemented.
LO Describe
the
various
protection
devices to avoid
inadvertent gear
retraction on the ground:
ground lock (pins);

protection devices in the gearretraction mechanism.
LO Explain the speed limitations for gear

operation (VLO and VLE).
Page 87

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the sequence for emergency

gear extension:
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
unlocking;
operating;
down-locking.
Describe some methods for emergency

gear extension including:
Helicopter
gravity/free fall;
air or nitrogen pressure;
manually/mechanically.
021 04 02 00 Nose-wheel
operation
steering:
LO Explain the operating

nose-wheel steering.
design,
principle
of
LO Explain,
for
a
helicopter,
the
functioning of differential braking with
free-castoring nose wheel.
LO Describe,
for
an aeroplane,
the
functioning of the following systems:
LO Explain the centring mechanism of the

nose wheel.
LO Define the term shimmy and the

possible consequences for the nose
and the main-wheel system.
LO Explain the purpose

(body) steering.
LO Describe the basic operating principle

of a disk brake.
LO State the different materials used in a

disc brake (steel, carbon).
differential braking with freecastoring nose wheel;

tiller or hand wheel steering;
rudder pedal nose-wheel
steering.
of
main-wheel
021 04 03 00 Brakes
021 04 03 01 Types and materials
Page 88

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Describe
advantages
as:
LO State the limitation

of brake energy
and
describe
the
operational
consequences.
LO Explain how brakes are actuated.
LO Identify the task of an auto-retract or

in-flight brake system.
LO State that
limited.
torque-
brake
of the parking
IR
CPL
LO Explain the function of wear indicators.
LO Explain the reason for

temperature indicator.
brake-
LO State that the main power source for

brakes in normal operation and for
alternate operation for large transport
aeroplanes is hydraulic.
their
characteristics,
and disadvantages such
weight;
temperature limits;
internal-friction coefficient;
wear.
021 04 03 02 System
components,
operation,
indications
warnings
brakes
LO Describe the
accumulator.
can
function
LO Describe the function

brake.
design,
and
be
of
the
021 04 03 03 Anti-skid
LO Describe the operating principle of an
anti-skid system where the brake
performance is based on maintaining
the optimum wheel-slip value.
Page 89

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain the purpose of the wheelspeed signal (tachometer) and of the
aeroplane reference speed signal to
the anti-skid computer, considering:
LO Describe the operating principle of an

autobrake system.
LO State that the anti-skid system must

be available when using autobrakes.
LO Explain the difference between the

three possible levels of operation of an
autobrake system:
IR
CPL
slip ratio for maximum braking

performance;
locked-wheel prevention
(protection against deep skid on
one wheel);
touchdown protection (protection
against brake-pressure
application during touchdown);
hydroplane protection.
LO Give examples of the

impact of an
anti-skid system on performance.
021 04 03 04 Autobrake
OFF (system off or reset);

Arm/Disarm (arm: the system is
ready to operate under certain
conditions);
Operative/Inoperative or
Activated/Deactivated
(application of pressure on
brakes).
021 04 04 00 Wheels, rims and tyres

021 04 04 01 Types, structural components and
materials, operational limitations,
thermal plugs
LO Describe the different types of tyres
such as:
tubeless;
diagonal (cross ply);
radial (circumferential bias).
Page 90

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain the function of thermal/fusible

plugs.
LO Explain the implications

separation and tyre burst.
LO State that the ground speed of tyres is

limited.
LO Describe
material
and
basic
construction of the rim of an aeroplane
wheel.
IR
CPL
LO Explain flotation devices and how they

are operated.
LO Explain the IAS limitations

before,
during and
after
flotation-device
deployment.
ply rating;
tyre tread;
tyre creep;
retread (cover).
of
tread
021 04 05 00 Helicopter equipment
021 05 00 00 FLIGHT CONTROLS

021 05 01 00 Aeroplane: primary flight controls
Remark: The manual, irreversible and
reversible flight control systems
as
discussed in 021 05 01 01, 05 01 02
and 05 01 03 are all considered to be
mechanical flight control systems. Flyby-wire flight control systems are
discussed in 021 05 04 00.
LO Define a primary flight control.
LO List the following primary flight control

surfaces:
elevator;
aileron, roll spoilers;
rudder.
Page 91

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO List the various means of
surface actuation including:
control
IR
CPL
manual;
fully powered (irreversible);
partially powered (reversible).
021 05 01 01 Manual controls

LO Explain the basic principle of a fully
manual control system.
021 05 01 02 Fully
powered
(irreversible)
controls
LO Explain the basic principle of a

powered control system.
fully
LO Explain the concept of irreversibility in

a flight control system.
LO Explain the need for a feel system in

a fully powered control system.
LO Explain the operating principle of a

stabiliser trim
system in
a fully
LO Explain the operating principle

of
rudder and aileron trim in a fully
021 05 01 03 Partially
powered
(reversible)
controls
LO Explain the basic principle

of
partially powered control system.
LO Explain why a feel system is not

necessary in a partially
powered
control system.
021 05 01 04 System
components,
design,
operation,
indications
and
warnings,
degraded
modes
of
operation, jamming
Page 92

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO List and describe the function of the

following components of
a
flight
control system:
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain how redundancy is obtained in

primary flight control systems of large
transport aeroplanes.
LO Explain the danger of control jamming

and the means of retaining sufficient
control capability.
LO Explain the methods of locking the

controls on the ground and describe
gust or control lock warnings.
LO Explain the concept of a rudderdeflection limitation (rudder

limiter)
system and the various means of
implementation (rudder ratio changer,
variable stops, blow-back).
Helicopter
IR
CPL
actuators;
control valves;
cables or electrical wiring;
control surface position sensors.
021 05 02 00 Aeroplane:
controls
secondary
flight
021 05 02 01 System
components,
design,
operation, degraded
modes
of
operation,
indications
and
warnings
LO Define a secondary flight control.
List the following
control surfaces:
secondary
flight
lift-augmentation devices (flaps

and slats);
speed brakes;
flight and ground spoilers;
trimming devices such as trim
tabs,
trimmable
horizontal
stabiliser.
Page 93


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Describe secondary
flight
control
actuation methods and sources of
actuating power.

of a mechanical
lock when using hydraulic
motors
driving a screw jack.
LO Describe the requirement for limiting

speeds for the various secondary flight
control surfaces.
LO For lift-augmentation devices, explain

the load-limiting
(relief)
protection
devices and the functioning of an
autoretraction system.
LO Explain how a flap/slat

protection device functions.
autoslat
LO Explain the concept of control surface

blow-back
(aerodynamic
forces
overruling hydraulic forces).

system.
021 05 03 00
asymmetry
of an
Helicopter
IR
CPL
Helicopter: flight controls

x
LO Describe main-rotor droop stops and

how static rotor flapping is restricted.
LO Describe the need for linear and rotary

control input/output.
LO Explain the principle of phase lag and

advance angle.
LO Explain the methods of

controls on the ground.
locking the
Page 94

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
LO Describe the following four axes of

control operation,
their
operating
principle and their associated cockpit
controls:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the need for feel systems in the

hydraulic
actuated
flight
control
system.
LO Describe the purpose of a trim system.
collective control;
cyclic fore and aft (pitch axis);
cyclic lateral (roll axis);
yaw.
LO Describe the swash plate or azimuth

star control
system including the
following:
swash plate inputs;

the function of the non-rotating
swash plate;
the function of the rotating swash
plate;
how swash plate tilt is achieved;
swash plate pitch axis;
swash plate roll axis;
balancing of pitch/roll/collective
inputs to the swash plate to
equalise torsional loads on the
blades.
LO Describe the main-rotor spider control

system including the following:
the collective beam;

pitch/roll/collective inputs to the
collective beam;
spider drive.
LO Describe the need for control system

interlinks, in particular:
collective/yaw;
collective/throttle;
cyclic/stabilator;
interaction between cyclic controls
and horizontal/stabilator.
Page 95


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the purpose of a cyclic beeptrim system that utilises parallel trim
actuators to enable the pilot to control
the aircraft.
LO List and describe the different types of

trim systems.
LO Explain the basic components of a trim

system, in particular:
LO Describe the different types of control

runs.
LO Explain the use of control stops.
021 05 04 00
force-trim switch;
force gradient;
parallel trim actuator;
cyclic 4-way trim switch;
interaction of trim system with an
SAS/SCAS/ASS stability system;
trim-motor indicators.
Aeroplane:
Fly-by-Wire
control systems
(FBW)
LO Explain that a FBW flight

control
system is composed of the following:
pilots input command (control

stick/column);
electrical signalling, including:
pilot input to computer;
computer to flight control surfaces;
feedback from aircraft response to
computer;
flight control computers;
actuators;
control surfaces.
LO State
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of a FBW system in
comparison with a
conventional flight
control system including:
weight;
pilot workload;
flight-envelope protection.
Page 96

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain why a FBW system is always

irreversible.
LO State the existence of degraded modes

of operation.
Fly-by-Wire
control systems
Helicopter
IR
CPL
(FBW)
LO To be introduced at a later date.
021 06 00 00 PNEUMATICS PRESSURISATION

AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
021 06 01 00 Pneumatic/bleed air supply
021 06 01 01 Piston-engine air supply
LO State the method of supplying air for
the pneumatic
systems for piston
engine aircraft.
LO State that air supply

is required for
the following systems:
instrumentation,
heating,
de-icing.
021 06 01 02 Gas turbine

supply
engine:
bleed
air
LO State that the possible bleed air

sources for gas turbine engine aircraft
are the following:
engine,
APU,
ground supply.
LO State that for an aeroplane a bleed air

supply can be used for the following
systems or components:
anti-icing;
engine air starter;
pressurisation of a hydraulic
reservoir;
air-driven hydraulic pumps;
pressurisation and air
conditioning.
Page 97

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO State that for a helicopter a bleed air
supply can be used for the following
systems or components:
IR
CPL
anti-icing;
engine air starter;
pressurisation of a hydraulic
reservoir.
LO State that the bleed air supply system

can comprise the following:
LO Interpret
the
pneumatic
system
schematic appended to these LOs (to
be introduced at a later date).
LO Describe the cockpit

bleed air systems.
LO State how the bleed air supply system

is controlled and monitored.
LO List
the
following
malfunctions:
pneumatic ducts;
isolation valve;
pressure-regulating valve;
engine bleed valve (HP/IP
valves);
fan-air pre-cooler;
temperature and pressure
sensors.
indications
air
for
bleed
over-temperature;
over-pressure;
low pressure;
overheat/duct leak.
systems
air-conditioning
021 06 02 01 Types,
system
components,
design, operation, degraded modes
of operation,
indications
and
warnings
LO Describe the
purpose
conditioning system.
of
an
air-
Page 98

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain
how
an
system is controlled.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
air-conditioning
LO Describe
the
vapour
cycle
airconditioning system
including system
components,
design,
operation,
degraded modes of operation and
system malfunction indications.
LO Identify the
following
components
from a diagram of an air-conditioning
system and describe the operating
principle and function:
air-cycle machine (pack,

bootstrap system);
pack-cooling fan;
water separator;
mixing valves;
flow-control valves;
isolation valves;
recirculation fans;
filters for recirculation;
temperature sensors.
LO List
and
describe
the
controls,
indications and warnings related to an
air-conditioning system.
021 06 03 00 Aeroplane: pressurisation and airconditioning system
021 06 03 01 System
components,
design,
operation, degraded
modes
of
operation,
indications
and
warnings
LO State that a pressurisation and an airconditioning system of an
aeroplane
controls:
ventilation,
temperature,
pressure.
LO State that in general humidity is not

controlled.
Page 99

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain that the following components
constitute a pressurisation system:
LO Describe the use of hot trim air.
CPL
pneumatic system as the power

source;
outflow valve;
outflow valve actuator;
pressure controller;
excessive differential pressure-relief
valve;
negative differential pressure-relief
valve.
LO Explain that the following components

constitute an air-conditioning system
and describe their operating principles
and function:
IR
air-cycle machine (pack,

bootstrap system);
pack-cooling fan;
water separator;
mixing valves;
flow-control valves (outflow
valve);
isolation valves;
ram-air valve;
recirculation fans;
filters for recirculated air;
temperature sensors.
Remark: The bootstrap system is the

only
air-conditioning
system
considered
for Part-FCL
aeroplane
examinations.
cabin altitude;
cabin vertical speed;
differential pressure;
ground pressurisation.
LO Describe the operating
principle of a
pressurization system.
LO Describe the emergency operation by
manual setting of the
outflow valve
position.
Page 100

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the working

principle of an
electronic cabin-pressure controller.
LO State how the maximum

altitude is determined.
LO Identify the aural warning when cabin

altitude exceeds 10 000 ft.
LO List
the
indications
pressurisation system.
LO Explain the concepts of de-icing and

anti-icing.
LO Name the components of an aircraft

which can be protected from
accretion.
LO State that on some aeroplanes the tail

does not have
an
ice-protection
system.
LO State the different types of

icing/de-icing
systems
(hot
electrical, fluid).
operating
LO State:
the maximum allowed value of

cabin altitude;
a typical value of maximum
differential pressure for large
transport aeroplanes (8 to 9
psi); the relation between cabin
altitude, the maximum
differential pressure and
maximum aeroplane operating
altitude.
021 07 00 00 ANTI-ICING
SYSTEMS
AND
021 07 01 00 Types,
design,
indications
and
operational limitations

these systems.
of
the
DE-ICING
operation,
warnings,
ice
antiair,
principle
of
Page 101

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the operating principle of the

inflatable boot de-icing system.
021 07 02 00 Ice-warning
systems:
operation, and indications
LO Describe
principles
detectors:
the
of
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
types,
different
operating
the
following
ice
mechanical systems using air

pressure;
electromechanical systems using
resonance frequencies.
LO Describe the principle of operation of

ice-warning systems.
021 07 03 00 Helicopter blade-heating systems
LO Explain the
limitations
on blade
heating and the fact that
on some
helicopters the heating does not heat
all the main rotor blades at the same
time.
021 08 00 00 FUEL SYSTEM

021 08 01 00 Piston engine
021 08 01 01 Fuel:
types,
limitations
characteristics,
LO State the types of fuel used by piston

engine (diesel, AVGAS, MOGAS) and
their associated limitations.
LO State the main characteristics of these

fuels and give typical values regarding
their flash points, freezing points and
density.
021 08 01 02 Design,
operation,
components, indications
system
LO State the tasks of the fuel system.
Page 102

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Name the following main components
of a fuel system, and state their
location and their function.
IR
CPL
LO Describe a gravity fuel

feed system
and a pressure feed fuel system.
LO Describe the
construction of
the
different types of fuel tanks and state
their advantages and disadvantages:
LO Explain the function of cross-feed.
LO Define the term unusable fuel.
LO List the following parameters that are

monitored for the fuel system:
LO State the types of fuel used by gas

turbine engine (JET-A, JET-A1, JET-B).
LO State the main characteristics of these

fuels and give typical values regarding
their flash points, freezing points and
density.
LO State the existence

freezing.
lines;
boost pump;
pressure valves;
filter, strainer;
tanks (wing, tip, fuselage);
vent system;
sump;
drain;
fuel-quantity sensor;
temperature sensor.
drum tank,
bladder tank,
integral tank.
fuel quantity (low-level warning);

fuel temperature.
021 08 02 00 Turbine engine

021 08 02 01 Fuel:
types,
limitations
characteristics,
of additives
for
Page 103


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
021 08 02 02
Design,
operation,
components, indications
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
system
LO State the tasks of the fuel system.
LO Name the main components of a fuel

system, and state their location
and
their function:
LO Explain the limitations in the event of

loss of booster pump fuel pressure.
LO Describe the
construction of
the
different types of fuel tanks and state
their advantages and disadvantages:
LO Explain the function of cross-feed and

transfer.
LO Define the term unusable fuel.
LO Describe the use and purpose of drip

sticks (manual magnetic indicators).
LO Explain the considerations for fitting a

fuel dump/jettison system.
lines;
centrifugal boost pump;
pressure valves;
fuel shut-off valve;
filter, strainer;
tanks (wing, tip, fuselage, tail);
bafflers;
sump;
vent system;
drain;
fuel-quantity sensor;
temperature sensor;
refuelling/defuelling system;
fuel dump/jettison system.
LO Interpret the fuel-system

appended to these LOs.
schematic
drum tank,
bladder tank,
integral tank.
Page 104

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO List the following parameters that are
monitored for the fuel system:
IR
CPL
LO Explain why an aircraft must first be

grounded before refuelling/defuelling.
LO Explain
the
bonding.
LO State that a current can only flow in a

closed circuit.
LO Explain
the
basic principles
of
conductivity and give examples of
conductors,
semiconductors
and
insulators.
LO State the
operating
principle
of
mechanical (toggle, rocker, push and
pull), thermo, time and
proximity
switches.
LO Define
voltage,
current
and
resistance, and state their unit of
measurement.
LO Explain Ohms law in qualitative terms.
LO Explain the effect on total

resistance
when resistors are connected in series
or in parallel.
fuel quantity (low-level warning);

fuel temperature.
021 09 00 00 ELECTRICS
021 09 01 00 General,
definitions,
basic
applications: circuit breakers, logic
circuits.
021 09 01 01 Static electricity
LO Explain static electricity.
LO Describe a
static
explain its purpose.
reason
discharger
for
and
electrical
021 09 01 02 Direct current
Page 105

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State that resistances can have a

positive or a negative temperature
coefficient (PTC/NTC) and state their
use.
LO Define electrical work and

power in
qualitative terms and state the unit of
measurement.
LO Define the term electrical field and

magnetic field in qualitative terms
and explain the difference with the aid
of the Lorentz force (Electromotive
Force (EMF)).
LO Explain the term capacitance and

explain the use of a
capacitor as a
storage device.
LO Explain the term alternating current

(AC).
LO Define the term phase.
LO Explain the principle of single-phase

and three-phase AC and state its use
in the aircraft.
LO Define frequency in qualitative terms

and state the unit of measurement.
LO Explain
the use of
frequency in aircraft.
021 09 01 03 Alternating current
LO Define
terms.
phase
021 09 01 04 Resistors,
coil
shift
capacitors,
particular
in
qualitative
inductance
LO Describe the relation between voltage

and current of an ohmic resistor in an
AC/DC circuit.
Page 106

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL

and current of a capacitor in an AC/DC
circuit.

and current of a coil in an AC/DC
circuit.
LO Explain the term magnetic flux.
LO State the pattern and direction of the

magnetic flux outside the magnetic
poles and inside the magnet.
LO State that
an
electrical
current
produces a magnetic field and define
the direction of that field.
LO Describe how the strength

of the
magnetic field changes if supported by
a ferromagnetic core.
LO Explain the purpose and the working

principle of a solenoid.
LO Explain the purpose and the working

principle of a relay.
of
affecting
the
LO List the parameters affecting

induced voltage in a coil.
the
of a
021 09 01 05 Permanent magnets
021 09 01 06 Electromagnetism
LO Explain
the
principle
electromagnetic induction.
LO List the parameters
inductance of a coil.
021 09 01 07 Circuit breakers

fuse and a circuit breaker.
LO Explain how a fuse is rated.
Page 107

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the difference between a tripfree

and
non-trip-free
circuit
breaker.
LO List the following different

circuit breakers:
of
LO State
the
differences
between
semiconductor
materials
and
conductors and explain
how the
conductivity of semiconductors can be
altered.
LO State the principal function of diodes,

such as rectification and
voltage
limiting.
LO State
the
principal
function
of
transistors, such as switching and
amplification.
LO Explain the
following
five
basic
functions: AND, OR,
NOT, NOR and
NAND.
LO Describe their associated symbols.
types
thermal circuit breaker;

magnetic circuit breaker.
021 09 01 08 Semiconductors and logic circuits
LO Interpret logic
diagrams using
combination of these functions.
021 09 02 00 Batteries
021 09 02 01 Types,
characteristics
limitations
LO State the
battery.
function
of
LO Name the
types of
batteries used in aircraft.
an
and
aircraft
rechargeable
Page 108


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Compare
lead-acid
and
nickelcadmium
(Ni-Cd)
batteries
with
respect to
weight, voltage,
load
behaviour,
self-discharge,
charging
characteristics, thermal runaway and
storage life.
LO Explain the term cell voltage.
LO State that a battery is composed of

several cells.
LO Explain the difference between battery

voltage and charging voltage.
LO State the
corresponds
voltages.
charging voltage
that
with different
battery
LO Define the term capacity of batteries

and state the
unit
of measurement
used.
LO State the effect of

battery capacity.
on
LO State the relationship between voltage

and capacity when
batteries
are
connected in series or in parallel.
LO State that in
the case of loss of all
generated power (battery power only)
the remaining electrical power is timelimited.
021 09 03 00
temperature
Generation
Page 109

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State in qualitative terms how voltage

depends on the number of windings,
field strength, RPM and load.
LO List the differences between a DC

generator and a DC
alternator with
regard to voltage response at low
RPM, powerweight ratio,
and brush
sparking.
LO Explain
control.
LO Explain why reverse current flow from

the battery to the generator must be
prevented.

principle of a
starter generator
and
state
its
purpose.
Remark: For standardisation purposes,

the following standard expressions are
used
:
DC generator: produces DC
output;
DC alternator: produces internal

AC, rectified by integrated
rectifying unit, the output is DC;
AC generator: produces AC
output;
starter generator: integrated
combination of a DC generator
with DC output and a starter
motor using battery DC;
permanent magnet alternator/

generator: produces AC output
without field excitation using a
permanent magnet.
021 09 03 01 DC generation
simple DC alternator
main components.
the
principle
principle of a
and name its
of
voltage
021 09 03 02 AC generation
Page 110

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the components of a threephase AC generator and the operating

principle.
LO State that the generator field current

is used to control voltage.
LO State in qualitative terms the relation

between frequency,
number of pole
pairs and RPM of a
three-phase
generator.
LO Explain the
generator.
wild-frequency
LO Describe how
a three-phase
AC
generator can be connected to the
electrical system.
LO Describe the purpose and the working

principle of
a permanent
magnet
alternator/generator.

power
sources that can be used for an
aeroplane to drive an AC generator:
term
engine,
APU,
RAT,
hydraulic.

power
sources that can be used for a
helicopter to drive an AC generator:
engine,
APU,
_____________
021 09 03 03
_____________ Constant Speed Drive (CSD) and
gearbox. Integrated Drive Generator (IDG)
systems.
LO Describe the function and the working
principle of a CSD.
LO Explain the parameters of a CSD that

are monitored.
Page 111

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL

principle of an IDG.
LO Explain the
consequences
of
a
mechanical disconnection during flight
for a CSD and an IDG.
transformer
LO State the function

of a Transformer
Rectifier Unit (TRU), its
operating
principle and the voltage output.
LO State the function of static inverters,

their operating principle
and
the
voltage output.
LO State that the aircraft structure can be

used as a part of the electrical circuit
(common earth) and explain
the
implications for electrical bonding.
LO Explain the function of external power.
021 09 03 04 Transformers,
transformer
rectifier units, static inverters
LO State the function of a
and its operating principle.
021 09 04 00 Distribution
021 09 04 01 General
bar).
of a bus
(bus

buses:
main bus,
tie bus,
essential bus,
emergency bus,
ground bus,
battery bus,
hot (battery) bus.
Page 112

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State that a
priority sequence exists
between the
different sources
of
electrical power on ground and in
flight.
LO Introduce the term load sharing.
LO Explain that load sharing is always

achieved during parallel operations.
LO Introduce the term load shedding.
LO Explain that an AC load can be shed in

case of generator overload.
LO Interpret
an
electrical-system
schematic (appended to these LOs).
LO Describe a simple DC electrical system

of a single-engine aircraft.
LO Describe a DC electrical system of a

multi-engine aircraft (CS -2 3/CS -27)
including
the
distribution
consequences of loss of generator(s)
or bus failure.
LO Describe the DC part of an electrical

system of
a
transport
aircraft
(CS-25/CS-29)
including
the
distribution consequences of loss of
DC supply or bus failure.
LO Give examples of DC consumers.
Remark: The system described is a

split system.
021 09 04 02 DC distribution
021 09 04 03 AC distribution
LO Describe the AC electrical system of a
transport aircraft for split and parallel
operation.
Page 113


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the distribution consequences

of:
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the conditions to be met for

paralleling AC generators.
LO Explain the terms real

loads.
and reactive
LO State that real/reactive loads are

compensated in the case of paralleled
AC generators.
control,
LO Describe, for normal (on ground/in

flight)
and degraded
modes
of
operation, the following functions of
an
electrical
load
management
system:
distribution,
monitoring,
protection (overloading,
over/under voltage, incorrect
frequency).
LO State which parameters are used to
monitor
an electrical system for
parallel and split system operation.
APU electrical supply and external

power priority switching;
loss of (all) generator(s);
bus failure.
LO Give examples of AC consumers.
021 09 04 04
Electrical
load management
and
monitoring
systems:
automatic
generators
and bus
switching
during
normal
and
failure
operation,
indications
and
warnings
LO Give examples of system

monitoring and annunciators.
LO Describe how batteries are monitored.
Page 114

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State that
Ni-Cd
batteries
are
monitored to avoid damage resulting
from
excessive temperature increase
(thermal runaway).
LO Interpret various different

ammeter
indications of
an ammeter
which
monitors the charge current
of the
battery.

principle of an
electric motor as being an electrical
current carrying conductor inside a
magnetic field that experiences
a
Lorentz/electromotive (EMF) force.
LO State that electrical motors can be AC

or DC type.
021 09 05 00 Electrical motors

021 09 05 01 General
LO State that the purpose of an electric
motor is to convert electrical energy
into mechanical energy.
021 09 05 02 Operating principle
021 09 05 03 Components
LO Name the following components of an
electric motor and explain
their
function:
rotor (rotating part of an electric

motor);
stator (stationary part of an
electric motor).
021 10 00 00 PISTON ENGINES

Remark: This topic includes
engines and petrol engines.
diesel
021 10 01 00 General
021 10 01 01 Types of internal-combustion
engines: basic principles,
definitions
Page 115


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Define
the
expressions:
following
terms
and
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
RPM;
torque;
Manifold
Absolute
Pressure
(MAP);
power output;
specific fuel consumption;
mechanical
efficiency, thermal
efficiency, volumetric efficiency;
compression
ratio,
clearance
volume,
swept
(displaced)
volume, total volume.
LO Describe the influence of compression

ratio on thermal efficiency.
021 10 01 02
Helicopter
Engine:
design,
operation,
components and materials
LO Describe the following main engine

components and state their function.
crankcase,
crankshaft,
connecting rod,
piston,
piston pin,
piston rings,
cylinder,
cylinder head,
valves,
valve springs,
push rod,
camshaft,
rocker arm,
camshaft gear,
bearings.
Page 116

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State the materials used

following engine components:
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the gas-state changes, the

valve positions and the ignition timing
during the
four
strokes of
the
theoretical piston-engine cycle.
LO Explain the main differences between

the theoretical (Otto cycle) and the
practical
four-stroke
piston-engine
cycles.
LO Describe
the differences
between
petrol engines and diesel engines with
respect to:
for
the
crankcase,
crankshaft,
connecting rod,
piston,
piston pin,
cylinder,
cylinder head,
valves,
camshaft.
LO Name and identify the various types of

engine design with regard to cylinder
arrangement, such as:
horizontal opposed,
in line,
radial,
and working cycle
(four stroke: petrol and diesel).
means of ignition;
maximum compression ratio;
air or mixture supply to the
cylinder;
specific power output (kW/kg);
thermal efficiency;
pollution from the exhaust.
021 10 02 00 Fuel
021 10 02 01 Types,
grades,
limitations
characteristics,
Page 117


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Name the type of fuel used for petrol

engines including its colour (AVGAS).
LO Name the types of fuel used for diesel

engines (kerosene or diesel).
LO Define the term octane rating.
LO Describe the combustion process in a

piston-engine cylinder for both
petrol
and diesel engines.
LO Define the term flame front velocity

and describe its variations depending
on the fuel-air mixture for petrol
engines.
LO Define the term

detonation
and
describe the causes and effects of
detonation for both petrol and diesel
engines.
LO Define the term pre-ignition and

describe the causes and effects of preignition for both petrol and diesel
engines.
LO Identify the conditions and power

settings that promote detonation for
petrol engines.
LO Describe how detonation

engines is recognised.
petrol
petrol fuel
LO Describe the method and occasions for

checking the fuel for water content.
LO State the typical value of fuel density

for aviation gasoline and diesel fuel.
LO Explain volatility, viscosity and vapour

locking for petrol and diesel fuels.
LO Name the anti-detonation

additive (tetraethyl lead).
021 10 03 00
in
Engine fuel pumps
Page 118

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
separate
engine-
LO State the purpose of a carburettor.
LO Describe the operating principle of the

simple float chamber carburettor.
LO Describe the method

reliable idle operation.
achieving
LO Describe the methods of obtaining

mixture
control
over
the
whole
operating engine power setting range
(compensation jet, diffuser).
LO Describe the methods

mixture
control
over
operating altitude range.
LO Explain the purpose and the operating

principle of an accelerator pump.
LO Explain
the
enrichment.
power
the
LO Explain the effect of carburetor heat

on mixture ratio and power output.
LO Explain the purpose and the operating

principle of a primer pump.
LO Discuss other methods for priming an

engine (acceleration pumps).
LO Describe the need for

engine-driven fuel pump.
LO List the different
driven fuel pumps:
types of
gear type,
vane type.
021 10 04 00 Carburettor/injection system

021 10 04 01 Carburettor:
design,
operation,
degraded
modes of
operation,
indications and warnings
of
of obtaining
the
whole
purpose
LO Describe
the
function
carburetor heat system.
of
of
Page 119

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the danger of carburetor fire,

including corrective measures.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the low pressure, continuous

flow type, fuel injection system used
on light aircraft piston
petrol engines
with the aid of a schematic diagram.
LO Explain the advantages of an injection

system compared with a carburettor
system.
LO Explain the requirement

for two
different pumps in the fuel injection
system and describe their operation.
LO Describe the task and explain the

operating principle of fuel and mixture
control valves in the injection system
for petrol engines.
LO Describe the task and explain the

operating principle of the fuel manifold
valve, the discharge nozzles and the
fuel-flow meter in the fuel injection
system for petrol engines.
LO Describe the injection system of a

diesel engine and explain the function
of the following components:
021 10 04 02 Injection:
design,
operation,
degraded
modes of
operation,
high-pressure fuel injection

pump;
common-rail principle;
fuel lines;
fuel injectors.
021 10 04 03 Icing
LO Describe the causes and effects of
carburetor icing and the action to be
taken if carburetor icing is suspected.
Page 120

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Name the meteorological

conditions
under which carburetor
icing may
occur.
LO Describe
the
indications
of
the
presence of carburetor icing with both
a fixed pitch and a constant speed
propeller.
LO Describe
the
indications
presence of carburetor icing
helicopter.
Helicopter
of
the
with a
IR
CPL
LO Describe the indications that will occur

upon selection of carburetor
heat
depending on whether ice is present or
not.
LO Explain the reason for the use of

alternate air on fuel injection systems
and describe its operating principle.
LO State the meteorological

conditions
under which induction-system
icing
may occur.
to
for
021 10 05 00 Cooling systems

021 10 05 01 Design, operation, indications and
warnings
LO Specify the reasons
piston engine.
LO Describe
the
design
enhance
cylinder air
aeroplanes.
for
cooling
features
cooling
LO Describe
the
design features
to
enhance
cylinder air
cooling
for
helicopters
(e.g.
engine-driven
impeller and scroll assembly, baffles).
LO Compare the advantages of liquid and
air-cooling systems.
Page 121

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Identify the cylinder head temperature

indication to monitor engine cooling.
LO Describe
the
function
operation of cowl flaps.
LO Describe the term viscosity including

the effect of temperature.
LO Describe
the
viscosity
grade
numbering system used in aviation.
IR
CPL
LO State the functions of a piston-engine

lubrication system.
LO Describe the working principle of a

dry-sump lubrication
system
and
describe the functions of the following
components:
and
the
021 10 06 00 Lubrication systems

021 10 06 01 Lubricants: characteristics,
limitations
021 10 06 02 Design, operation, indications and

warnings
oil tank (reservoir) and its

internal components: hot well,
de-aerator, vent, expansion
space;
check valve (non-return valve);
pressure pump and pressurerelief valve;
scavenge pump;
filters (suction, pressure and
scavenge);
oil cooler;
oil cooler bypass valve (antisurge and thermostatic);
pressure and temperature
sensors;
lines.
LO Describe
system.
wet-sump
lubrication
Page 122

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the differences between a wet

and a dry-sump lubrication system.
LO State the advantages/disadvantages of

each system.
LO List the following factors that influence

oil consumption:
oil
oil

magneto-ignition system and
the
functions of the following components:
LO State why piston engines are equipped

with two
electrically
independent
ignition systems.

and
operating
principle of the following methods of
spark augmentation:
oil grade,
cylinder and piston wear,
condition of piston rings.
LO Describe the interaction between

pressure, oil temperature and
quantity.
021 10 07 00 Ignition circuits
021 10 07 01 Design, operation
magneto,
contact-breaker points,
capacitor (condenser),
coils or windings,
ignition switches,
distributor,
spark plug,
high-tension (HT) cable.
starter vibrator (booster coil),

impulse-start coupling.

and
operating
principle of the following methods of
spark augmentation:
starter vibrator (booster coil),

both magnetos live.
Page 123

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the reasons for using the correct

temperature grade for a spark plug.
LO Explain the function of ignition timing

advance or retard.
LO Explain how combustion is initiated in

diesel engines.
LO State the typical fuel-to-air

ratio
values or range of values for the
above mixtures.
LO Describe
the
advantages
disadvantages of
weak and
mixtures.
LO Describe the relation between enginespecific fuel consumption and mixture

ratio.
LO Describe the use of the exhaust gas

temperature as an aid to mixturesetting.
LO Explain the relation between

mixture
ratio, cylinder
head
temperature,
detonation and pre-ignition.
LO Explain
check.
the function of the magneto
021 10 08 00 Mixture
021 10 08 01 Definition, characteristic mixtures,
control instruments,
associated
control levers, indications
mixture,
chemically correct ratio
(stoichiometric),
best power ratio,
lean (weak) mixture (lean or rich
side of the EGT top),
rich mixture.
and
rich
Page 124

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR

principle of a
constant-speed propeller system under
normal flight operations with the aid of
a schematic.
LO Explain the
need for a
Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP) indicator to
control the power setting with a
constant-speed propeller.
LO State the purpose of a torque-meter.
LO State the purpose and

describe the
operation
of
a
low-pitch
stop
(centrifugal latch).

principle of a
single-acting and a
double-acting
variable pitch propeller for single and
multi-engine aeroplanes.
LO Describe the function and the basic

operating principle of
synchronising
and synchro-phasing systems.

operating
principle
feathering
system
feathering.
LO Explain the absence of mixture control

in diesel engines.
Helicopter
IR
CPL
021 10 09 00 Aeroplane: propellers

021 10 09 01 Definitions, general
Remark: Definitions and aerodynamic
concepts are detailed in subject 081,
topic 07 (Propellers) but need to be
appreciated for this subject as well.
021 10 09 02 Constant-speed propeller: design,
operation, system components
and the
of
an
including
basic
autoun-
021 10 09 03 Reduction gearing: design
Page 125

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Describe the checks to be carried out

on a constant-speed propeller system
after engine start.
LO Describe the operation of a constantspeed propeller system during flight at

different true
airspeeds and RPM
including an overspeeding propeller.

principle of a
variable
pitch
propeller
when
feathering and unfeathering, including
the operation of cockpit controls.

principle of a
variable pitch propeller when reverse
pitch
is
selected,
including
the
operation of cockpit controls.
LO Describe the operation of the propeller

levers during different phases of flight.
LO State the
gearing.
purpose
LO Explain the principles

reduction gearing.
of
reduction
of design
for
Helicopter
IR
CPL
021 10 09 04 Propeller
handling:
associated
control levers, degraded modes of
operation,
indications
and
warnings
021 10 10 00 Performance and engine handling

021 10 10 01 Performance
LO Engine performance:
define pressure
altitude and density altitude.
Page 126


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Describe the effect on power output of
a petrol and diesel engine taking into
consideration the following
parameters:
IR
CPL
LO Power-augmentation devices: explain

the
requirement
for
power
augmentation (turbocharging) of a
piston engine.
LO Describe the function and the principle

of operation of the following main
components of a turbocharger:
turbine,
compressor,
waste gate,
waste-gate actuator,
absolute-pressure controller,
density controller,
differential-pressure
controller.
LO Explain the difference between an
altitude-boosted turbocharger and a
ground-boosted turbocharger.
LO Explain turbo lag.
LO Define the term critical altitude.
LO Explain the function of an intercooler.
LO Define the terms full-throttle

and rated altitude.
height
LO State the correct procedures for

setting the engine controls when
increasing or decreasing power.
ambient pressure, exhaust back

pressure;
temperature;
density altitude;
_____________
LO Explain the term normally aspirated

_____________
humidity.
engine.
021 10 10 02
Engine handling
Page 127

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the term

hydraulicing and
the precautions to be taken prior to
engine start.
LO Describe the start problems associated

with extreme cold weather.
LO FADEC for a piston engine: To

introduced at a later date.
LO Describe how thrust is produced by a

basic gas turbine engine.
LO Describe the simple form of the thrust

formula for a basic, straight turbojet
and
perform
simple
calculations
(including pressure thrust).
LO State that thrust can be considered to

remain approximately constant over
the whole aeroplane
subsonic speed
range.
take-off power;
maximum continuous power.
be
021 11 00 00 TURBINE ENGINES

021 11 01 00 Basic principles
021 11 01 01 Basic generation of thrust and the
thrust formula
021 11 01 02 Design, types of turbine engines,

components
LO List the main components of a basic gas
turbine engine.
inlet,
compressor,
combustion chamber,
turbine,
outlet.
LO Describe
the
system
of
station
numbering in a gas turbine engine.
Page 128

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe
the
variation
of
static
pressure,
temperature
and
axial
velocity in a gas turbine engine under
normal operating conditions and with
the aid of a working cycle diagram.
LO Describe
the
differences
between
absolute, circumferential
(tangential)
and axial velocity.
LO List the different types of gas turbine

engines:
straight jet,
turbo fan,
turbo prop.
LO State that a gas turbine engine can

have one or more spools.
LO Describe how thrust is produced
turbojet and turbofan engines.
by
LO Describe how power is produced

turboprop engines.
by
LO Describe
the
term
equivalent
horsepower (= thrust horsepower +
shaft horsepower).
LO Explain the principle of a free turbine

or free-power turbine.
LO Define the term bypass ratio and

perform
simple
calculations
to
determine bypass ratio.
LO Define the terms propulsive

power,
propulsive
efficiency,
thermal
efficiency and total efficiency.
LO Describe the influence of compressorpressure ratio on thermal efficiency.
LO Explain the variations of propulsive

efficiency with forward
speed for
turbojet, turbofan
and
turboprop
engines.
Page 129

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Define
the
consumption
turboprops.
term
for
specific
turbojets
fuel
and
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
021 11 01 03 Coupled turbine engine: design,

operation,
components
and
materials
LO Name the main assembly parts of a
coupled turbine engine and explain the
operation of the engine.
LO Explain the limitations of the materials

used with regard to maximum turbine
temperature, engine and drive train
torque limits.
LO Describe the possible effects on engine

components when limits are exceeded.
LO Explain that when engine limits

exceeded,
this
event
must
reported.
LO Describe the design methods to keep

the engines size small for installation
in helicopters.
LO List the main components of a free

turbine engine.
LO Describe how the power is developed

by a turboshaft/free turbine engine.
LO Explain
how
the
exhaust
gas
temperature is used to monitor turbine
stress.
021 11 01 04 Free
turbine
engine:
components and materials
are
be
design,
021 11 02 00 Main-engine components

021 11 02 01 Aeroplane: air intake
LO State the functions of the engine air
inlet/air intake.
Page 130


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the geometry of a subsonic

(pitot-type) air inlet.
LO Explain the gas-parameter changes in

a
subsonic air inlet at different flight
speeds.
LO Describe the reasons for, and the

dangers of, the following
operational
problems concerning the engine air
inlet:
LO State the purpose of the compressor.
LO Describe the working principle

centrifugal
and
an
axial
compressor.
of a
flow

of a single stage and
describe their
function for a centrifugal compressor:
LO Describe the gas-parameter changes

in a compressor stage.
LO Define the term pressure

ratio and
state a typical value for one stage of a
centrifugal
and
an
axial
flow
compressor and for the
complete
compressor.
021 11 02 02
airflow separation,
inlet icing,
inlet damage,
Foreign Object Damage (FOD),
heavy in-flight turbulence.
Compressor and diffuser
impeller,
diffuser.

of a single stage and
describe their
function for an axial compressor:
rotor vanes,
stator vanes.
Page 131

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State
the
advantages
and
disadvantages
of
increasing
the
number of stages in a centrifugal
compressor.
LO Explain the difference in sensitivity for

Foreign Object Damage
(FOD)
of a
centrifugal compressor compared with
an axial flow type.
LO Explain the convergent air annulus

through an axial flow compressor.
LO Describe the reason

compressor blades.
LO State the tasks of inlet guide vanes

(IGVs).
LO State the reason for the clicking noise

whilst the compressor slowly rotates
on the ground.
LO State the advantages of increasing the

number of spools.
LO Explain the implications of tip losses

and describe the design
features to
minimise the problem.
LO Explain the problems of blade bending

and flapping and describe the design
features to minimise the problem.
LO State the conditions that are possible

causes of stall and surge.
LO Describe the indications

surge.
and
LO Describe the design features used to

minimise the occurrence of stall
and
surge.
for twisting the
compressor stall,
engine surge.
of stall
Page 132


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe a compressor map (surge

envelope) with RPM lines, stall limit,
steady state line and acceleration line.
LO Describe the function of the diffuser.
LO Define the purpose of the combustion

chamber.
LO List the requirements for combustion.

combustion chamber.
of a
the
the
LO State the function of the swirl vanes

(swirler).
LO State the function of the drain valves.
LO Define the terms primary airflow and

secondary airflow and explain their
purpose.
LO Explain
ratios:

in the combustion chamber.
LO State a typical maximum value of the

outlet temperature of the combustion
chamber.
021 11 02 03
Combustion chamber
principle
LO Explain the reason for reducing

airflow
axial
velocity
at
combustion chamber inlet (snout).
the
following
two
mixture
primary airflow to fuel,

total airflow (within the
combustion chamber) to fuel.
Page 133

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Describe
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the purpose of a turbine in

different types of gas turbine engines.
LO Describe the principles of operation of

impulse, reaction and impulse-reaction
axial flow turbines.
of a

in a turbine stage.

principle of active clearance control.
LO Describe the implications of tip losses

and the means to minimise them.
LO Explain why
the available
engine
thrust is limited by the turbine
inlet
temperature.
LO Explain the divergent gas-flow annulus

through an axial-flow turbine.
LO Describe
the
following
combustion chamber and
differences between them:
types
state
of
the
can type;
can-annular, cannular or tuboannular;
annular;
reverse-flow annular.
LO Describe the principle of operation of a

simplex and a duplex fuel spray nozzle
(atomiser).
021 11 02 04 Turbine
LO Name the main components

turbine stage and their function.
LO Describe
turbine.
the working
principle
turbine-blade
of
convection,
impingement and film cooling.
Page 134

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the high

mechanical-thermal
stress in the turbine blades and
wheels.
LO Explain the term creep.
LO Explain the consequences of creep on

the turbine.
LO Explain the terms low-cycle

and high-cycle fatigue.
LO Describe the working principle of the

exhaust unit.

in the exhaust unit.
LO Define the term choked

exhaust
nozzle (not applicable to turboprops).
LO Explain how jet exhaust noise can be

reduced.
LO Name and explain the main task of the

engine air intake.
LO Describe the use of a convergent airintake ducting on helicopters.
LO Describe the reasons

for and the
dangers of the following operational
problems concerning engine air intake:
fatigue
021 11 02 05 Aeroplane: exhaust

of the exhaust unit and their function:
jet pipe,
propelling nozzle,
exhaust cone.
021 11 02 06 Helicopter: air intake
airflow separations,
intake icing,
intake damage,
foreign object damage,
heavy in-flight turbulence.
Page 135

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe
the
conditions
circumstances
during
operations
when
foreign
damage is most likely to occur.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
and
ground
object
LO Describe and explain the principles of

air intake filter systems that can
be
fitted
to
some
helicopters
for
operations
in
icing
and
sand
conditions.
LO Describe the function of the

heated
pads on some helicopter air intakes.

exhaust unit.

in the exhaust unit.
021 11 02 07 Helicopter: exhaust

of the exhaust unit and their function.
jet pipe,
exhaust cone.
021 11 03 00 Additional
systems
components
and
021 11 03 01 Engine fuel system

LO Name the main
components of the
engine fuel system and state their
function.
LO Name the two types of engine-driven

high-pressure pumps, such as:
LO State the tasks of the fuel control unit.
LO List the possible input parameters to a

fuel control unit to achieve a given
thrust/power setting.
gear-type,
swash plate-type.
021 11 03 02 Engine control system
Page 136

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the tasks of the engine control

system.
LO List the following different types of

engine control systems
(refer
to
AMC to CS-E 50 Engine control system
(1) Applicability)
and state
their
respective engine control
(output)
parameters:
hydro mechanical (Main Engine

Control (MEC));
hydro mechanical with a limited
authority electronic supervisor
(Power Management
System/Control (PMS/PMC));
single channel full-authority
engine control with hydromechanical backup;
dual channel full-authority
electronic engine control system
with no backup or any other
combination (FADEC).
LO Describe a
FADEC as a full-authority
dual-channel
system
including
functions such as an electronic engine
control
unit, wiring, sensors, variable
vanes, active clearance control, bleed
configuration, electrical signaling of
TLA (see also AMC to CS-E-50), and
an EGT protection function and engine
over speed.
LO Explain how redundancy is achieved by

using more than one channel in a
FADEC system.
LO State the consequences of a FADEC

single input data failure.
LO State that all input and output data

are checked by both channels.
Page 137

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State that a FADEC system uses its

own sensors and that in some cases
also data from aircraft systems
used.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
is
LO State that a FADEC must have its own

source of electrical power.
021 11 03 03 Engine lubrication
LO Explain that each spool is fitted with at

least one ball bearing two or more
roller bearings.
LO Explain the use of compressor air in

oil-sealing systems (e.g.
labyrinth
seals).
auxiliary
LO Describe
how the gearbox is driven
and lubricated.
LO State the
tasks
lubrication system.
of
an
engine

of a lubrication system and state their
function:
oil tank and centrifugal breather,

oil pumps (pressure and
scavenge pumps),
oil filters (including the bypass),
oil sumps,
chip detectors,
coolers.
021 11 03 04 Engine auxiliary gearbox

LO State the
gearbox.
tasks
of
the
021 11 03 05 Engine ignition

LO State the task of the ignition system.
Page 138

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
of the ignition system and state their
function.
LO State why jet turbine engines are

equipped
with
two
electrically
independent ignition systems.
LO Explain
the
different
modes
operation of the ignition system.
of
components of the
and state
their
LO Describe a typical start sequence (on

ground/in flight) for a turbofan.
LO Define self-sustaining RPM.
IR
CPL
power sources,
trembler mechanism (vibrator),
transformer,
diodes,
capacitors,
discharge gap (high-tension
tube),
igniters.
021 11 03 06 Engine starter

LO Name the main
starting
system
function.
LO Explain the principle

engine start.
of a
turbine
LO Describe the following two types

starters:
of
electric,
pneumatic.
021 11 03 07 Reverse thrust
Page 139


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
of a reverse-thrust system and state
their function:
reverse-
LO Identify
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of using reverse thrust.
LO Describe and explain

different
types
of
systems:
LO Explain the implications of reversing

the cold stream (fan reverser) only on
a high bypass ratio engine.
LO Describe
the
protection
features
against inadvertent
thrust-reverse
deployment in flight as present on
most transport aeroplanes.
indications
LO Describe the controls and
provided for
the
thrust-reverser
system.
021 11 03 08
CPL
reverse-thrust select lever,

power source (pneumatic or
hydraulic),
actuators,
doors,
annunciations.
LO Explain the principle

thrust system.
IR
of a
the following
thrust-reverser
hot-stream reverser,
clamshell or bucket-door system,
cold-stream reverser (only
turbofan engines),
blocker doors,
cascade vanes.
Helicopter
specifics on
design,
operation and
components
for:
Additional
components
and
systems
such
as
lubrication
system, ignition circuit,
starter,
accessory gearbox
LO State the
system.
task
of
the
lubrication
Page 140

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO List
and
describe
the
common
helicopter lubrication systems.

of a helicopter lubrication system:
LO Identify and name the components of

a helicopter lubrication system from a
diagram.
LO Identify
the
indications used
to
monitor a lubrication system including
warning systems.
LO Explain
the
differences
and
appropriate use of straight oil and
compound oil, and describe the oil
numbering system for aviation use.
LO Explain and describe

the
ignition
circuit for engine start and engine
relight facility when the selection is set
for
both automatic
and
manual
functions.
LO Explain and describe the starter motor

and the sequence of events when
starting, and that for most helicopters
the starter becomes the generator
after the starting sequence is over.
LO Explain and describe why the engine

drives the accessory gearbox.
reservoir;
pump assembly;
external oil filter;
magnetic chip detectors,
electronic chip detectors;
thermostatic oil coolers;
breather.
021 11 04 00 Engine operation and monitoring

021 11 04 01 General
Page 141

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the following aeroplane engine

limitations:
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain spool-up time.
LO Explain the reason for the difference

between ground and approach flight
idle values (RPM).
LO State the parameters that can be used

for
setting
and
monitoring
the
thrust/power.
LO Describe
the
terms
alpha range,
beta range and reverse thrust as
applied to a turboprop power lever.
LO Explain the dangers of inadvertent

beta-range selection in flight for a
turboprop.
LO Explain the purpose of engine

trending.
LO Explain how the exhaust gas

temperature is used to monitor turbine
stress.
Helicopter
IR
CPL
take-off,
go-around,
maximum continuous
thrust/power,
maximum climb thrust/power.
x
LO Describe the effect of engine

Acceleration and deceleration on the
EGT.
LO Describe the possible effects on engine

components when EGT limits are
exceeded.
LO Explain why engine-limit exceedances

must be reported.
LO Explain the limitations on the use of
the thrust-reverser system at low

forward speed.
Page 142

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain the term engine seizure.
LO State the possible causes

of engine
seizure and explain their preventative
measures.
LO Explain the reason for the difference in

the pressures of the fuel and oil in the
heat exchanger.
LO Explain oil-filter clogging

(blockage)
and the implications for the lubrication
system.
LO Give
examples
of
instruments of an engine.
monitoring
LO Describe the
indications and
the
possible causes of
the
following
aeroplane starting malfunctions:
IR
CPL
021 11 04 02 Starting malfunctions
false (dry or wet) start,

tailpipe fire (torching),
hot start,
abortive (hung) start,
no N1 rotation,
no FADEC indications.
LO Describe the
indications and
the
possible causes of
the
following
helicopter starting malfunctions:
LO
false (dry or wet) start,

tailpipe fire (torching),
hot start,
abortive (hung) start,
no N1 rotation,
freewheel failure,
no FADEC indications.
021 11 04 03 Re-light envelope

LO Explain the re-light envelope.
021 11 05 00 Performance aspects

021 11 05 01 Thrust, performance aspects, and
limitations
Page 143


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Describe the variation

of thrust and
specific fuel consumption with altitude
at constant TAS.
LO Describe the variation

of thrust and
specific fuel consumption with TAS at
constant altitude.
LO Explain the term flat-rated engine by

describing the change of
take-off
thrust, turbine inlet temperature and
engine RPM with OAT.
LO Define the term

Ratio (EPR).
Pressure
LO Explain the use of reduced

(flexible)
and derated thrust for take-off, and
explain
the
advantages
and
disadvantages when compared with a
full-rated take-off.
LO Describe the effects of use of bleed air

on RPM, EGT, thrust and specific fuel
consumption.
021 11 05 02
Engine
Helicopter
IR
CPL
Helicopter engine ratings, engine

performance
and
limitations,
engine
handling:
torque,
performance
aspects,
engine
handling and limitations.
LO Describe engine rating torque limits

for take-off, transient and maximum
continuous.
LO Describe turbine outlet

(TOT) limits for take-off.
temperature
LO Explain why TOT is a limiting factor for

helicopter performance.
Page 144

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe and explain the relationship

between maximum torque available
and density altitude, which leads to
decreasing torque available with
the
increase of density altitude.
LO Explain that hovering downwind on

some
helicopters
will
noticeably
increase the engine TOT.
LO Explain the reason why the engine

performance is less when
aircraft
accessories are switched on, i.e. antiice, heating, hoist, filters.
LO Describe the effects of use of bleed air

on engine parameters.
LO Explain that
on some
helicopter
exceeding the TOT limit may cause the
main rotor to droop (slow down).
021 11 06
00 Auxiliary Power Unit (APU)
021 11 06
01 Design, operation, functions,

operational limitations
LO State that an APU is a gas turbine
engine and list its tasks.
LO State the difference between the two

types of APU inlets.
LO Define maximum operating and

maximum starting altitude.
LO Name the typical APU control and

monitoring instruments.
LO Describe the APUs automatic

shutdown protection.
021 12 00 00 PROTECTION AND DETECTION

SYSTEMS
021 12 01 00 Smoke detection
Page 145

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
021 12 01 01 Types, design, operation,

LO Explain the operating principle of the
following types of smoke detection
sensors:
LO Explain the operating principle of a

built-in fire-extinguishing system and
describe its components.
LO State that two discharges must be

provided for
each
engine
(see
CS 25.1195(c)).
optical,
ionising.
LO Give an example of warnings,

indications and function tests.
021 12 02 00 Fire-protection systems
021 12 02 01 Fire extinguishing (engine and
cargo compartments)
LO Explain why generally double-loop

systems are used.
LO Give
an
example
of
warnings,
indications and function test of a fireprotection system.
021 12 02 02 Fire detection

LO Explain the following principles
involved in fire detection:
resistance and capacitance,

gas pressure.
LO Explain fire-detection applications such

as:
bimetallic,
continuous loop,
gaseous loop (gas-filled
detectors).
021 12 03 00 Rain-protection system
Page 146

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Explain the principle and method of
operation of the following windshield
rain-protecting
systems
for
an
aeroplane:
IR
CPL
wipers,
liquids (rain repellent),
_____________
LO
_____________ Explain the principle and method of
operation of wipers for a helicopter.
coating.
021 13 00 00 OXYGEN SYSTEMS

x
and
two
LO Describe the following two oxygen

systems that can be used to supply
oxygen to passengers:
LO Describe
the
actuation
methods
(automatic and manual) and
the
functioning of a passenger
oxygen
mask.
LO Compare chemical oxygen generators

to gaseous systems with respect to:
LO Describe the basic operating principle

of a cockpit
oxygen system and
describe the following different modes
of operation:
normal (diluter demand),

100 %,
emergency.
LO Describe the operating principle

the purposes of the following
portable oxygen systems:
smoke hood,
portable bottle.
fixed system (chemical oxygen

generator or gaseous);
portable.
capacity,
flow regulation.
LO State the dangers
of
grease or
oil
related to the use of oxygen systems.
Page 147

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
021 14 00 00 HELICOPTER:
SYSTEMS
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
MISCELLANEOUS
021 14 01 00 Variable rotor speed

LO Explain the system when pilots can
beep the NR an additional amount
when manoeuvring, landing and taking
off, normally at higher altitudes to
obtain extra tail-rotor thrust, which
makes manoeuvring more positive and
safer.
LO Explain the system for beeping the NR

to its upper limit to enable safer takeoff.
rotor-head
LO Describe the following configuration of

rotor systems and
their advantages
and disadvantages:
021 14 02 00 Active vibration suppression

how the active
vibration suppression system works
through high-speed actuators
and
accelerometer inputs.
021 14 03 00 Night-vision goggles
LO To be introduced at a later date.
021 15 00 00 HELICOPTER: ROTOR HEADS
021 15 01 00 Main rotor
021 15 01 01 Types
LO Describe
systems:
the
following
teetering,
articulated,
hingeless,
bearingless.
tandem,
coaxial,
side by side.
Page 148

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
LO Explain how flapping, dragging and

feathering is achieved in each rotorhead system.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO List and describe the methods used on

how to detect damage and cracks.
LO Explain and describe the structural

limitations
to
respective
rotor
systems, including the dangers
of
negative G inputs to certain rotorhead systems.
LO Describe
the
various
lubrication methods.
rotor-head
LO Describe the material technology used

in
rotor-head
design,
including
construction
using
the
following
materials or mixture of materials:
materials,
limitations
components
and
stresses,
structural
LO Identify from a diagram

structural components of
types of rotor-head system.
the
the
main
main
composites,
fibreglass,
alloys,
elastomers.
021 15 01 04 Adjustment
LO Describe and explain the methods of
adjustment which are possible
on
various
helicopter
rotor-head
assemblies.
021 15 02 00 Tail rotor
021 15 02 01 Types
Page 149


Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
LO Describe
systems:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Identify from a diagram the main

structural components of the four
main types of tail-rotor systems.
LO Explain and describe the methods to

detect damage and cracks on the tail
rotor and assembly.
LO Explain and describe the structural

limitations to the respective tail-rotor
systems and
possible
limitations
regarding the turning rate of the
helicopter.
LO Explain and describe the following

methods that helicopter designers use
to minimise tail-rotor drift and roll:
LO Explain pitch-input mechanisms.
LO Explain the relationship between tailrotor thrust and engine power.
LO Describe how the vertical fin on some

helicopters reduces the power demand
of the Fenestron.
021 15 02 02
the
following
tail-rotor
delta 3 hinge;
multi-bladed delta 3 effect;
Fenestron or ducted fan tail
rotor;
No Tail Rotor (NOTAR) highvelocity air jet flows from
adjustable nozzles (the Coand
effect).
reducing the couple arm (tail

rotor on a pylon);
offsetting the rotor mast;
use of bias in cyclic control
mechanism.
Design and construction
Page 150

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the reason for limitations on

multi-engine helicopter transmissions
in various engine-out situations.
LO Describe how the passive vibration

control works with gearbox mountings.
LO Describe the main function of the disc

type of rotor brake.
LO Describe both hydraulic and

operated rotor-brake systems.
LO List and describe the various tail-rotor

designs and construction
methods
used on current helicopters in service.
LO Describe the rigging and adjustment of
the tail-rotor
system
to
obtain
optimum position of the pilots yaw
pedals.
021 16 00 00 HELICOPTER: TRANSMISSION
021 16 01 00 Main gearbox
021 16 01 01 Different types, design, operation,
limitations
LO Describe
the following main principles
of helicopter transmission systems for
single and twin-engine helicopters:
drive for the main and tail rotor;

accessory drive for the
generator(s) alternator(s),
hydraulic and oil pumps, oil
cooler(s) and tachometers.
021 16 02 00 Rotor brake
cable
LO Describe the different options for the

location of the rotor brake.
Page 151

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
LO List
the
following
considerations for the
brakes:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain how the hoist/winch can be

driven by an
off-take from the
auxiliary gearbox.
LO Explain how power

for the
airconditioning system is taken from the
auxiliary gearbox.
LO Describe how power is transmitted

from the engine to the main rotor
gearbox.
LO Describe the material and construction

of the driveshaft.
LO Explain the
need
for
alignment
between the engine and the main rotor
gearbox.
LO Identify how temporary misalignment

occurs between driving and driven
components.
operational
use of rotor
rotor speed at engagement of

rotor brake;
risk of blade sailing in windy
conditions;
risk of rotor-brake overheating
and possible fire when brake is
applied above the maximum
limit, particularly when spilled
hydraulic fluid is present;
avoid stopping blades over jetpipe exhaust with engine
running;
cockpit annunciation of rotor-brake
operation.
021 16 03 00 Auxiliary systems
021 16 04 00 Driveshaft
installation
and
associated
Page 152

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL

driveshaft speed and torque.
LO Describe the methods with which

power is delivered to the tail rotor.
LO Describe and identify the construction

and materials of tail
rotor/Fenestron
driveshafts.

the
various
arrangements when the drive changes
direction and the
need
for
an
intermediate or tail gearbox.
LO Explain the lubrication requirements

for
intermediate
and
tail-rotor
gearboxes and
methods of checking
levels.
LO Explain how on most helicopters the

tail-rotor gearbox contains gearing,
etc., for the tail-rotor
pitch-change
mechanism.
LO Explain the use of:
flexible couplings;
Thomas couplings;
flexible disc packs;
driveshaft support bearings and
temperature measurement;
subcritical and supercritical
driveshafts.
021 16 05 00 Intermediate and tail gearbox
021 16 06 00 Clutches
LO Explain the purpose of a clutch.
Describe and explain the operation of
a:
centrifugal clutch,
actuated clutch.
LO List the typical
various clutches.
components
of
the
Page 153

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
LO Identify the following

methods
which clutch serviceability can
ascertained:
brake-shoe dust;
vibration;
main-rotor run-down time;
engine speed at time of mainrotor engagement;
belt tensioning;
start protection in a belt-drive
clutch system.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the purpose of a freewheel.
LO Describe and explain the operation of

a:
cam and roller type freewheel,
sprag-clutch type freewheel.
LO List the typical components of the
various freewheels.
LO Identify the
various locations
of
freewheels in
power
plant
and
transmission systems.
LO Explain the implications regarding the

engagement and disengagement of the
freewheel.
LO Describe the different types of blade

construction and the need for torsional
stiffness.
LO Describe the principles of heating

systems/pads on some blades for antiicing/de-icing.
by
be
021 16 07 00 Freewheels
021 17 00 00 HELICOPTER: BLADES

021 17 01 00 Main-rotor blade
021 17 01 01 Design, construction
materials
components
LO List the
materials used
in
construction of main-rotor blades.
and
the
Page 154

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe main-rotor blade-loading on

the ground and in flight.
LO Describe where the most common

stress areas are on rotor blades.
LO Describe the various blade-tip shapes

used
by different manufacturers and
compare
their
advantages
and
disadvantages.
LO Describe how on some rotor-blade

tips, static and dynamic balancing
weights are attached to threaded rods
and screwed into sockets in the
leading edge spar and others in a
support embedded into the blade tip.
LO List the main structural components of

a main-rotor blade and their function.
021 17 01 03 Stresses
021 17 01 04 Structural limitations

LO Explain the structural limitations
terms of bending and rotor RPM.
in
LO Explain the use of trim tabs.
021 17 01 06 Tip shape
021 17 02 00 Tail-rotor blade

021 17 02 01 Design, construction
LO Describe the most common design of
tail-rotor
blade
construction,
consisting of
stainless steel shell
reinforced by a honeycomb filler and
stainless steel leading abrasive strip.
Page 155

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
021 17 02
LO Describe
how
anti-icing/de-icing
systems are designed into the blade
construction of some helicopters.
02 Structural
materials
components
and
the
03 Stresses
LO Describe the tail-rotor blade-loading
on the ground and in flight.
04 Structural limitations
LO Describe the structural limitations
tail-rotor blades.
of
LO Describe the method of checking the

strike indicators placed on the tip of
some tail-rotor blades.
021 17 02
CPL
LO List the main structural components of

a tail-rotor blade and their function.
021 17 02
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
LO Explain that
ballast weights
are
located at the inboard trailing edge
and tip of blades, and that the weights
used are determined when the blades
are manufactured.
LO List the
materials
used
in
construction of tail-rotor blades.
021 17 02
Helicopter
05 Adjustment
LO Describe the adjustment of yaw pedals
in the cockpit to obtain full control
authority of the tail rotor.
Page 156

Subject: 022 - AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE - INSTRUMENTATION

ATPL (A) CPL (A) ATPL(H)/IR ATPL (H)
CPL(H)
IR(A) & (H)
ATPL(
Time
H)/IR
allowed
1:30
1:00
1:30
1:30
1:00
0:30
ATPL(
(hours)
H)
Distribution of questions with regard
to the topics of the syllabus
CPL(H
022 01
08
08
08
08
08
XX
) 08
IR(A)
022 02
08
06
08
06
06
&
022 03
04
04
04
04
04
04
022 04
04
05
06
06
05
04
022 05
05
XX
03
03
XX
XX
022 06
08
06
XX
XX
XX
XX
022 07
XX
XX
14
14
08
XX
022 08
03
02
XX
XX
XX
XX
022 09
02
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
022 10
02
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
022 11
04
XX
04
04
XX
XX
022 12
06
04
06
06
04
03
022 13
04
04
05
05
04
03
022 14
01
XX
01
01
XX
XX
022 15
01
XX
01
01
XX
XX
Total
39
60
questions
60
60
39
20
3
9
C. SUBJECT 022 INSTRUMENTATION

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR

022 00 00 00
Page 157

AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE

INSTRUMENTATION
022 01 00 00 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTS
022 01 01 00 Pressure gauge
LO Define pressure, absolute
and differential pressure.
pressure
for
the
LO List
and describe
the
following
different
types
of
sensors
used
according to the pressure to be
measured:
LO Solid-state sensors (to be introduced

at a later date)
LO For each type of

applications such as:
LO List the following

pressure:
units
Pascal,
bar,
inches of mercury (in Hg),
pounds per square inch (PSI).
LO State the relationship

different units.
used
between
aneroid capsules,
bellows,
diaphragms,
bourdon tube.
sensor
identify
liquid-pressure measurement
(fuel, oil, hydraulic);
air-pressure measurement
(bleed-air systems, airconditioning systems);
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
gauge.
LO Pressure probes for

Ratio (EPR).
Engine
Pressure
Page 158

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
LO Give examples of display for each of

the applications above.
LO Explain the need for remote-indicating

systems.
LO Explain temperature.
LO List the following units that can be

used for temperature measurement:
LO State the relationship between these

different units.
LO Describe and explain the

principles of the following
sensors:
LO State
the
relationship
for
a
thermocouple
between
the
electromotive
force
and
the
temperature to be measured.
LO For each type,

such as:
022 01 02 00 Temperature sensing
Kelvin,
Celsius,
Fahrenheit.
operating
types of
expansion type (bimetallic strip),

electrical type (resistance,
thermocouple).
identify
applications
gas-temperature measurement
(ambient air, bleed-air systems,
air-conditioning systems, air
inlet, exhaust gas, gas turbine
outlets);
liquid-temperature measurement
(fuel, oil, hydraulic).
LO Give examples of display for each of

the applications above.
022 01 03 00 Fuel gauge
LO State that the quantity of fuel can be
measured by volume or mass.
Page 159

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
units
used for fuel
quantity when measured by mass:
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
_____________
LO State the relationship between these
_____________ different units.

pound.
LO Define capacitance and permittivity,
and state their relationship with
density.
LO List and explain the parameters that

can affect the
measurement of the
volume and/or mass of the fuel in a
wing fuel tank:
temperature;
aircraft accelerations and attitudes;
and explain how the fuel-gauge
system design compensates for
these changes.
LO Describe and explain the operating
principles of the following types of fuel
gauges:
float system;
capacitance type fuel-gauge
system;
ultrasound type of fuel gauge: to
be introduced at a later date.
022 01 04 00 Fuel flowmeters
LO State that fuel flow may be measured

by volume or mass per unit of time.

units used for fuel
flow when measured by mass per
hour:
kilograms;
LO Define fuel flow and where

measured.
it is
kilogrammes/hour,
pounds/hour.
units used for fuel
flow when measured by volume per
hour:
litres/hour,
US gallons/hour.
Page 160

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO List
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
of
LO For each type, identify applications

such as engine-speed
measurement
(crankshaft speed for piston engines,
spool speed for gas turbine engines),
wheel-speed measurement for antiskid systems (anti-skid systems for
aeroplane only), and give examples of
display.
LO State that engine speed is most

commonly displayed as a percentage.
LO List and describe the following two

parameters used to represent thrust:
N1, EPR.
LO Explain the operating principle of the

EPR gauge and the consequences for
the pilot in case of a malfunction
including blockage and leakage.
and describe
the
following
different types of fuel flowmeter:
mechanical,
electrical (analogue),
electronic (digital),
and explain how the signal can be

corrected to measure mass flow.
LO Explain how total fuel consumption is
obtained.
022 01 05 00 Tachometer
LO List
the
tachometers:
following
types
mechanical (rotating magnet);

electrical (three-phase tachogenerator);
electronic (impulse measurement
with speed probe and phonic
wheel);
and describe the operating
principle of each type.
022 01 06 00 Thrust measurement
Page 161

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Give examples of display for N1 and
EPR.
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
022 01 07 00 Engine torquemeter

LO Define torque.
LO Explain
the
relationship
power, torque and RPM.
LO List the
torque:
between
used
for
can
be
LO List
and describe
the
following
different types of torquemeters:
LO Compare the two systems with regard

to design and weight.
LO Give examples of display.
LO State the purpose of a synchroscope.

synchroscope.
LO State the purpose of a vibrationmonitoring system for a jet engine.

principle of a
vibration-monitoring system using the
following two types of sensors:
following
units
Newton meters,
inch or foot pounds.
LO State that engine torque

displayed as a percentage.
mechanical,
electronic,
and explain their operating principles.
022 01 08 00 Synchroscope
of a

022 01 09 00 Engine-vibration monitoring
piezoelectric crystal,
magnet.
LO State that no specific unit is displayed

for a vibration-monitoring system.
Page 162

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Define static,
total and
dynamic
pressures and state the
relationship
between them.
LO Define impact
pressure
as total
pressure minus static pressure and
discuss the conditions when dynamic
pressure equals impact pressure.
LO Describe a typical
pitot/static system
and list the possible outputs.
LO Explain the redundancy

interconnections of typical
systems.
022 01 10 00 Time measurement

LO Explain
the
use
of
time/date
measurement
and
recording
for
engines and system maintenance.
022 02 00 00 MEASUREMENT
PARAMETERS
OF
AIR-DATA
022 02 01 00 Pressure measurement

022 02 01 02 Pitot/static
errors
system:
design
and
LO Describe the design and the operating

principle of a:
static source,
pitot tube,
combined pitot/static probe.
LO For each of these indicate the various

locations, and describe the following
associated errors:
position errors;
instrument errors;
errors due to a non-longitudinal
axial flow (including manoeuvreinduced errors);
and the means of correction and/or

compensation.
and
the
pitot/static
Page 163

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
interpret the effect
sensed pressure.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
of heating and
of heating on
LO List
the affected instruments

and
explain the consequences for the pilot
in case of a malfunction
including
blockage and leakage.
LO Describe alternate static sources and

their effects when used.
LO Solid-state sensors (to be introduced

at a later date).
022 02 02 00 Temperature measurement

LO Define
OAT,
SAT,
measured temperature.
TAT
and
LO Define ram rise and recovery factor.
LO State the relationship

different temperatures
Mach number.
between the
according to
LO Describe the following types of airtemperature

probes
and
their
features:
022 02 02 02 Design and operation
expansion type: bimetallic strip,

direct reading;
electrical type wire resistance,
remote reading.
LO For each of these indicate the various

locations, and describe the following
associated errors:
position errors,
instrument errors,
and the means of correction and/or
compensation.
interpret the effect
sensed temperature.
of heating and
of heating on
Page 164

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
022 02 03 00 Angle-of-attack measurement

angle-of-attack sensors:
LO For each type, explain the operating

principles.
LO Explain how both types are protected

against ice.
LO Give examples of systems that use the

angle of attack as an input, such as:
LO Define ISA.
LO List the following two units used for

altimeters:
LO Define
the
following
barometric
references: QNH, QFE, 1013,25.
LO Explain the operating principles of an

altimeter.
of
null-seeking (slotted) probe,

vane detector.
air-data computer;
Stall Warning Systems;
flight-envelope protection
systems.
LO Give examples of different types

angle-of-attack (AoA) displays.
of
022 02 04 00 Altimeter
feet,
metres,
and state
them.
the
relationship
between
height, altitude;
indicated altitude, true altitude;
pressure altitude, density
altitude.
Page 165

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Describe and compare the
three types of altimeters:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Describe the following errors:

pitot/static system errors;
temperature error (air column not
at ISA conditions);
time lag (altimeter response to
change of height);
and the means of correction.
LO Give examples of altimeter corrections
table from an Aircraft
Operating
Handbook (AOH).
LO Describe the effects of a blockage or a

leakage on the static pressure line.
of a
LO Describe and compare the following

two types of vertical speed indicators:
barometric type,
inertial type (inertial information
provided by an inertial reference
unit).
LO Describe the following VSI errors:
pitot/static system errors,
time lag,
and the means of correction.
following
simple altimeter (single capsule);

sensitive altimeter (multicapsule);
servoassisted altimeter.
LO Give examples of associated displays:
pointer, multi-pointer, drum, vertical
straight scale.
022 02 05 00
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
LO List the two units used for VSI:

metres per second,
feet per minute,
and state the relationship
them.
between
LO Explain the operating principles

VSI.
Page 166

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Describe the
effects on a VSI
of a
blockage or a leakage on
the static
pressure line.
LO Give examples of a VSI display.
LO Define IAS, CAS, EAS, TAS and

state and explain the
relationship
between these speeds.
LO Describe the following ASI errors and

state when they must be considered:
022 02 06 00
Airspeed Indicator (ASI)
LO List the following three units used for

airspeed:
nautical miles/hour (knots),

statute miles/hour,
kilometres/hour,
and state the relationship between
them.
pitot/static system errors,

compressibility error,
density error.
LO Explain the operating principles of an
ASI (as appropriate to aeroplanes or
helicopters).
LO Give examples of an ASI display:
pointer, vertical straight scale.
LO Interpret ASI corrections tables as
used in an Aircraft Operating
Handbook (AOH).
LO Define and explain the following colour
codes that can be used on an ASI:
white arc (flap operating speed

range);
green arc (normal operating
speed range);
yellow arc (caution speed range);
red line (VNE);
blue line (best rate of climb
speed, one-engine-out for multiengine piston light aeroplanes).
Page 167

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO Describe the effects on an ASI of a
blockage or a leakage in the static
and/or total pressure line(s).
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
x
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
x
022 02 07 00 Machmeter
LO Define Mach number
and Local
Speed of Sound (LSS), and perform
simple calculations that include these
terms.

Machmeter.
principle of a
LO Explain why a Machmeter suffers only

from pitot/stati c system errors.
LO Give examples
of
a
Machmeter
display:
pointer,
drum,
vertical
straight scale, digital.
LO Describe the effects on a Machmeter

of a blockage or a leakage in the static
and/or total pressure line(s).
LO State the relationship between

Mach
number, CAS and TAS, and interpret
their variations according to FL and
temperature changes.
LO State the existence of MMO.
022 02 08 00 Air-Data Computer (ADC)

ADC.
principle of an
LO List the following possible input data:
TAT,
static pressure,
total pressure,
measured temperature,
angle of attack,
flaps and landing gear position,
stored aircraft data.
Page 168
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO List the following possible output data:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
LO Explain how
position,
instrument,
compressibility and density errors can
be compensated/corrected to achieve
a TAS calculation.
LO Explain why accuracy is improved for

each output datum when compared to
raw data.
LO Give examples of instruments and/or

systems which may use ADC output
data.
LO State that an ADC can be a standalone system

or integrated with the
Inertial Reference Unit (ADIRU).
LO Explain the ADC architecture for airdata measurement including sensors,

processing units
and displays,
as
opposed
to
stand-alone
air-data
measurement instruments.
LO Explain the advantage of an ADC for

air-data
information
management
compared to raw data.
IR
IAS,
TAS,
SAT,
TAT,
Mach number,
angle of attack,
altitude,
vertical speed,
VMO/MMO pointer.
LO For each output, list the datum/data

sensed and explain the principle
calculation.
022 03 00
00 MAGNETISM DIRECT-READING
COMPASS AND FLUX VALVE
022 03 01
00 Earths magnetic field

LO Describe
Earth.
the magnetic
field
of
of
the
Page 169

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Explain the properties of a magnet.
LO List
LO Describe the purpose and the use of a

deviation correction card.
LO Describe and explain the design of a

vertical card-type compass.
LO Describe the deviation compensation.
LO Describe and interpret the effects of

the following errors:
magnetic variation,
magnetic dip (inclination).
022 03 02 00 Aircraft magnetic field
LO Define and
terms:
explain
the
following
magnetic and non-magnetic

material;
hard and soft iron;
permanent magnetism and
electromagnetism.
LO Explain the principles and the reasons

for:
compass swinging (determination

of initial deviations);
compass compensation
(correction of deviations found);
compass calibration
(determination of residual
deviations).
the causes of
the
aircrafts
magnetic field and explain how it
affects the accuracy of the compass
indications.
022 03 03 00 Direct-reading magnetic compass

LO Define the role of
magnetic compass.
direct-reading
acceleration,
turning,
attitude,
deviation.
Page 170

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Explain how to use and interpret the
direct-reading
compass
indications
during a turn.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Explain the purpose of a flux valve.
LO Explain its operating principle.
and
LO Give the
remote-reading
compass
system as example of application.
LO State
that
because
of
the
electromagnetic deviation
correction,
the flux-valve output itself does
not
have a deviation correction card.
LO Describe and interpret the effects of

the following errors:
LO Define a gyro.
LO Explain the fundamentals of the theory

of gyroscopic forces.
LO Define the degrees of freedom of a

gyro.
022 03 04 00 Flux valve
LO Indicate
various
precautions needed.
locations
acceleration,
turning,
attitude,
deviation.
022 04 00 00 GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS

022 04 01 00 Gyroscope: basic principles
Remark: As a convention, the degrees

of freedom of a gyroscope do not
include its own axis of rotation (the
spin axis).
rigidity,
precession,
wander (drift/topple).
Page 171

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Distinguish between:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Describe a free (space) gyro and a tied

gyro.
LO Describe and compare electrically and

pneumatically-driven gyroscopes.
LO Explain the construction and operating

principles of a:
LO Explain the purpose of a rate-of-turn

and balance (slip) indicator.
LO Define a rate-one turn.
LO Describe
the
construction
and
principles of operation of a rate-ofturn indicator.
LO State the degrees

of freedom
rate-of-turn indicator.
of a
LO Explain the relation between

angle, rate of turn and TAS.
bank
LO Explain why the indication of a rate-ofturn

indicator is only correct for one
TAS and when turn is coordinated.
LO Describe
the
construction
and
principles of operation of a balance
(slip) indicator.
LO Explain the purpose of a balance (slip)

indicator.
real wander and apparent

wander;
apparent wander due to the
rotation of the Earth and
transport wander.
rate gyro,
rate-integrating gyro.
022 04 02 00 Rate-of-turn indicator Turn
Coordinator Balance (slip)
indicator
Page 172

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Describe the indications of a rate-ofturn and balance

(slip)
indicator
during a balanced, slip or skid turn.
LO Describe
the
construction
and
principles of operation of a turn
coordinator
(or
turn-and-bank
indicator).
LO Compare the rate-of-turn indicator and

the turn coordinator.
attitude
LO Describe the different

designs and
principles of operation
of attitude
indicators (air-driven, electric).
LO State the degrees of freedom.
LO Describe the gimbal system.
LO Describe the effects of the

aircrafts
acceleration and turns on
instrument
indications.
LO Describe the attitude

instrument markings.
LO Explain the purpose of a vertical gyro

unit.
LO List
and describe
the
following
components of a vertical gyro unit:
022 04 03 00
Attitude indicator (artificial

horizon)

indicator.
of the
display
and
inputs: pitch and roll sensors;

transmission and amplification
(synchros and amplifiers);
outputs: display units such as
Attitude Direction Indicator
(ADI), auto-flight control
systems.
Page 173

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO State
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of a vertical gyro unit
compared to an attitude indicator with
regard to:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO State the degrees of freedom.
LO Describe the gimbal system.
LO Define the following different errors:
design (power source, weight and

volume);
accuracy of the information
displayed;
availability of the information for

several systems (ADI, AFCS).
022 04 04 00 Directional gyroscope
LO Explain the purpose of the directional
gyroscope.
directional gyroscopes:
of
air-driven directional gyro;

electric directional gyro.
design and manufacturing

imperfections (random wander);
apparent wander (rotation of the
Earth);
transport wander (movement
relative to the Earths surface);
and explain their effects.
LO Calculate
the
apparent
wander
(apparent drift rate in degrees per
hour) of an uncompensated
gyro
according to latitude.
022 04 05 00 Remote-reading compass systems
LO Describe the principles of operation of
a remote-reading compass system.
Page 174

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO Using a block diagram, list and explain
the
function
of
the
following
components of
a
remote-reading
compass system:
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
Solid-state systems AHRS (the

following paragraph
is to
be
introduced at a later date)
LO State that the Micro-Electromechanical

Sensors (MEMS) technology can be
used to make:
flux detection unit;

gyro unit;
transducers, precession
amplifiers, annunciator;
display unit (compass card,
synchronising and set-heading
knob, DG/compass switch).
LO State
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of a
remote-reading
compass system compared to a directreading magnetic compass with regard
to:
022 04 06 00
design (power source, weight and

volume);
deviation due to aircraft
magnetism;
turning and acceleration errors;
attitude errors;
accuracy and stability of the
information displayed; availability
of the information for several
systems (compass card, RMI,
AFCS).
solid-state accelerometers;
solid-state rate sensor
gyroscopes;
solid-state magnetometers
(measurement of the Earths
magnetic field).
LO Describe the basic principle of a solidstate Attitude and Heading Reference

System (AHRS) using a solid-state 3axis rate sensor, 3-axis accelerometer
and a 3-axis magnetometer.
Page 175

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO Compare the solid-state AHRS with the
mechanical gyroscope and flux-gate
system with regard to:
LO List and describe the main components

of a stabilised inertial platform.
LO Explain the different corrections made

to stabilise the platform.
LO List the following two effects that must

be compensated for:
LO Explain the alignment of the system,

the different phases associated and
the conditions required.
LO Explain the Schuler condition and give

the value of the Schuler period.
size and weight,

accuracy,
reliability,
cost.
022 05 00
00 INERTIAL
022 05 01
00 Inertial Navigation Systems (INS)

(stabilised inertial platform)
022 05 01
01 Basic principles
NAVIGATION
AND
REFERENCE SYSTEMS (INS AND
IRS)
LO Explain the basic principles of inertial

navigation.
02 Design
022 05 01
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
x
022 05 01
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Coriolis,
centrifugal.
03 Errors, accuracy
LO State that there are three
types of errors:
different
bounded errors,
unbounded errors,
other errors.
LO Give average values for bounded and

unbounded errors according to time.
Page 176
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO State that an average value for the
position error of the INS according to
time is 1,5 NM/hour or more.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
and
LO Give an
average value of alignment
time at midlatitudes.
LO List the outputs given by an INS.
LO Describe
and
explain
the
consequences concerning the loss of
alignment by an INS in flight.
principle of a
LO State the differences

between
a
strapped-down inertial system (IRS)
and a stabilised
inertial
platform
(INS).
LO Explain the construction and operating

principles of a Ring Laser Gyroscope
(RLG).
LO Explain the different computations and

corrections to be made to achieve data
processing.
LO Explain the alignment of the system,

the different phases associated and
the conditions required.
022 05 01 04 Operation
LO Give examples
display panels.
of INS
control
022 05 02 00 Inertial Reference Systems (IRS)

(strapped-down)
022 05 02 01 Basic principles
strapped-down IRS.
022 05 02 02 Design
LO List and describe the following
components of an IRS:
main
rate sensors (laser gyros),

inertial accelerometers,
high-performance processors,
display unit.
Page 177
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Explain why the Schuler condition
still required.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
is
LO Describe the lock-in

(laser
lock)
phenomena
and
the
means
to
overcome it.
LO State that an IRS can be a stand-alone

system or integrated with an ADC
(ADIRU).
LO Compare IRS and INS, and give recent

examples of control panels.
LO List the outputs given by an IRS.
LO Give
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of an IRS compared to
an INS.
022 05 02 03 Errors, accuracy

LO Compare IRS and INS for errors and
accuracy.
022 06 00 00 AEROPLANE: AUTOMATIC FLIGHT

CONTROL SYSTEMS
022 06 01 00 General:
loops
Definitions
and
control
LO State the following purposes of an

Automatic
Flight
Control
System
(AFCS):
enhancement of flight controls;

reduction of pilot workload.
LO Define and explain the following two

functions of an AFCS:
aircraft control: control of the

aeroplanes movement about its
centre of gravity (CG);
aircraft guidance: guidance of the
aeroplanes CG (flight path).
LO Define and
open loop.
explain closed
loop and
Page 178
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Explain that the inner loop
aircraft control
and outer loop
aircraft guidance.
is for
is for
LO List the following different elements of

a
closed-loop control
system and
explain their function:
control
LO List the following different types of

autopilot systems:
1-axis, 2-axis and
3-axis.

of an autopilot system.

lateral modes: roll, heading, VOR/LOC,
NAV or LNAV.
LO Describe the purpose of control laws

for pitch and roll modes.

longitudinal (or vertical) modes: pitch,
vertical speed, level change, altitude
hold (ALT), profile or VNAV, G/S.
LO Give basic examples for pitch and roll

channels of inner loops and outer
loops with the help of a diagram.
LO Explain the influence of gain variation

on precision and stability.
LO Explain gain adaptation with regard to

speed, configuration or flight phase.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
input signal;
error detector;
signal processing (computation of
output signal according to control
laws);
output signal;
control element;
feedback signal.
022 06 02 00 Autopilot
system:
operation
LO Define
the
channels.
three
design
basic
and
Page 179
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
common (or mixed) modes: take-off,
go-around and approach.
LO List the different types of actuation

configuration
and
compare
their
advantages/disadvantages.
LO List the inputs and outputs of a 3-axis

autopilot system.
LO Describe
and
explain
synchronisation function.
the
LO Give examples
disengagement
conditions.
and
and
LO Define the Control Wheel Steering

(CWS) mode
according to
CS-25
(see AMC 25.1329, paragraph 4.3).
LO Describe the CWS mode operation.
LO Describe with the help of a control

panel of an autopilot system
and a
flight mode annunciator/indicator the
actions and the checks performed by a
pilot through a complete sequence:
Remark: The landing

studied in 022 06 04 00.
of
sequence
engagement
systems
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
is
from Heading (HDG) selection to

VOR/LOC guidance
(arm/capture/track);
from Altitude selection (LVL
change) to Altitude (ALT) hold
(arm/intercept/hold).
LO Describe and explain the different

phases
and
the
associated
annunciations/indications
from level
change to altitude capture and from
heading mode to VOR/LOC capture.
Page 180
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Describe and explain the existence of
operational limits for lateral modes
(LOC capture)
with
regard
to
speed/angle of
interception/distance
to threshold, and for
longitudinal
modes (ALT or G/S capture) with
regard to V/S.
LO State the purpose of a Flight Director

(FD) system.

of an FD system.
LO List the different types of display.
LO Explain the differences between an FD

system and an Autopilot (AP) system.
LO Explain how an FD and an AP can be

used together, separately (AP with no
FD, or FD with
no AP), or none of
them.
LO Give examples of different situations

with the respective indications of the
command bars.
022 06 03 00 Flight
Director:
operation
design
and
022 06 04 00 Aeroplane:
Flight
Annunciator (FMA)
LO Explain
the
purpose
importance of the FMA.
Mode
and
the
LO State that the FMA provides:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
AFCS lateral and vertical modes;

auto-throttle modes;
FD selection, AP engagement and
automatic landing capacity;
failure and alert messages.
022 06 05 00 Autoland: design and operation

system.
of an
autoland
Page 181
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

of an autoland system.
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
fail passive system;

fail operational (fail active)
system;
alert height;
according to CS-AWO.
LO Describe and explain the autoland
sequence
and
the
associated
annunciations/indications from initial
approach
to
roll-out
(AP
disengagement) or go-around.
LO List and
explain the
operational
limitations to perform an autoland.
022 07 00 00 HELICOPTER: AUTOMATIC FLIGHT

CONTROL SYSTEMS
022 07 01 01 Stabilisation
LO Explain the similarities and differences
between SAS and AFCS (the latter can
actually fly the helicopter to perform
certain functions
selected by the
pilot). Some AFCSs just have altitude
and heading hold whilst others include
a vertical speed or IAS hold mode,
where a constant rate of climb/decent
or IAS is maintained by the AFCS.
022 07 01 02 Reduction of pilot workload

LO Appreciate how effective the AFCS is
in
reducing
pilot
workload
by
improving
basic
aircraft
control
harmony and decreasing disturbances.
022 07 01 03 Enhancement
capability
of
helicopter
Page 182

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO Explain how
an
AFCS
improves
helicopter flight safety during:
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
x
LO Explain that the earlier autohover

systems use Doppler velocity sensors
and the later systems use inertial
sensors plus
GPS,
and
normally
include a two-dimensional
hovervelocity indicator for the pilots.
LO Explain why some SAR helicopters

have both radio-altimeter height hold
and barometric altitude hold.
LO Explain the various redundancies and

independent systems that are built
into the AFCSs.
LO Appreciate that the pilot can override

the system in the event of a failure.
search and rescue because of

increased capabilities;
flight by sole reference to
instruments;
underslung load operations;
white-out conditions in snowcovered landscapes;
an approach to land with lack of
visual cues.
LO Explain that the Search

and Rescue
(SAR) modes of AFCS include the
following functions:
022 07 01 04
ability to autohover;
automatically transition down
from cruise to a predetermined
point or over-flown point;
ability for the rear crew to move
the helicopter around in the
hover;
the ability to automatically
transition back from the hover to
cruise flight;
the ability to fly various search
patterns.
Failures
Page 183

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
LO Explain a series actuator hard

over
which equals aircraft attitude runaway.
LO Explain the
consequences
of
saturation of the series actuators.
the
LO Explain the principles of operation of

the series and parallel
actuators,
spring-box clutches and the autotrim
system.
LO Explain the principle of operation

the electronic hydraulic actuators
the system.
LO Describe the typical layout of the AFCS

control panel.
LO Describe the system

warnings.
022 07 02 00 Components: Operation

022 07 02 01 Basic sensors
LO Explain the basic sensors
system and their functions.
in
LO Explain that the number of sensors will

be dependent on the number of couple
modes of the system.
022 07 02 02 Specific sensors
LO Explain
the
function
of
the
microswitches and strain gauges in the
system which sense pilot input to
prevent excessive feedback
forces
from the system.
022 07 02 03 Actuators
of
in
022 07 02 04 Pilot/system
interface:
control
panels,
system
indication,
warnings
indications
and
LO Explain the functions of the redundant
sensors simplex and duplex channels
(single/dual channel).
Page 184

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
022 07 03 00 Stability
(SAS)
Augmentation
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
System
022 07 03 01 General principles and operation

LO Explain the general principles
and
operation of an SAS with regard to:
LO Explain
and describe
the general
working principles and primary use of
SAS by damping pitch, roll and yaw
motions.
LO Describe a simple SAS with forced trim

system which uses magnetic clutch
and springs to hold cyclic control
in
the position where
it was
last
released.
LO Explain the interaction of trim with

SAS/Stability
and
Control
Augmentation System (SCAS).
LO Appreciate that the system can be

overridden by the pilot and individual
channels deselected.
LO Describe the operational limits of the

system.
LO Explain why the system should be

turned off in severe turbulence
or
when extreme flight attitudes
are
reached.
rate damping;
short-term attitude hold;
effect on static stability;
effect on dynamic stability;
aerodynamic cross-coupling;
effect on manoeuvrability;
control response;
engagement/disengagement;
authority.
Page 185

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
LO Explain the safety design features built

into some SASs to limit the authority
of the actuators to 1020 % of the
full-control throw in order to allow the
pilot to override if actuators demand
an unsafe control input.
LO Explain how cross-coupling

produces
an adverse effect on roll to yaw
coupling, when
the helicopter
is
subject to gusts.
LO Explain
the
collective-to-pitch
coupling, side-slip-to-pitch
coupling
and inter-axis coupling.
022 07 04 00 Autopilot
equipment
Automatic
stability

LO Explain the general autopilot principles
with regard to:
long-term attitude hold;

fly-through;
changing the reference (beep
trim, trim release).
022 07 04 02 Basic modes (3/4 axes)

LO Explain the AFCS operation on cyclic
axes (pitch/roll), yaw axis, and on
collective (fourth axis).
022 07 04 03 Automatic guidance (upper modes
of AFCS)
hold system in an AFCS.
attitude-

of the
hold system in an AFCS.
heading-

verticalspeed hold system in an AFCS.
LO Explain the function of the navigationcoupling system in an AFCS.
Page 186

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
LO Explain the function of the VOR/ILScoupling system in an AFCS.
LO Explain the function of the hover-mode

system in an AFCS (including Doppler
and radio altimeter systems).
LO Explain the function of the SAR mode

(automatic transition to hover and
back to cruise) in an AFCS.
LO List the different types of display.
LO State the difference between the FD

system and the autopilot
system.
Explain how each
can
be used
independently.

of an FD system.
LO Give examples of different situations

with the respective indications of the
command bars.
LO Explain the
architecture
of
the
different FDs fitted to helicopters and
the importance
to monitor
other
instruments as well as the FD, because
on some helicopter types which have
the collective setting on the FD, there
is no protection against a collective
transmission overtorque.
LO Describe the collective setting and yaw

depiction on FD for some helicopters.
022 07 04 04 Flight
Director:
operation
design

Director (FD) system.
022 07 04 05 Automatic
(AFCP)
Flight
of
Control
LO Explain
the
purpose
importance of the AFCP.
and
and
Flight
Panel
the
Page 187

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO State that the AFCP provides:
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
x
AFCS basic and upper modes;

FD selection, SAS and AP
engagement;
failure and alert messages.
022 08 00 00 TRIMS YAW DAMPER FLIGHTENVELOPE PROTECTION

022 08 01 00 Trim
systems:
operation
LO Explain the
system.
design
and
of
trim
LO State the existence of a trim system

for each of the three axes.
LO Give examples of trim indicators and

their function.
LO Describe and explain an automatic

pitch-trim system for a
conventional
aeroplane.
LO Describe and explain an automatic

pitch-trim system for a fly-by-wire
aeroplane.
LO State that for a fly-by-wire aeroplane

the
automatic
pitch-trim
system
operates also during manual flight.
LO Describe the consequences of manual

operation on the trim wheel when the
automatic
pitch-trim
system
is
engaged.
LO Describe and explain the engagement

and disengagement conditions of the
autopilot according to trim controls.
LO Define Mach trim and state that the

Mach-trim system can be independent.
purpose
the
Page 188

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO State that for a fly-by-wire aeroplane
an autotrim system can be available
for each of the three axes.

of a yaw-damper system.
LO Explain the purpose of the Dutch-roll

filter (filtering of the yaw input signal).
LO Explain the operation of a yaw-damper

system and state the
difference
between a yaw-damper system and a
3-axis autopilot operation on the
rudder channel.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
Remark: For the fly-by-wire

LOs,
please refer to reference 21.5.4.0.
022 08 02 00 Yaw damper: design and operation
damper system.
of
the
yaw-
022 08 03 00 Flight-Envelope Protection (FEP)

LO Explain the purpose of the FEP.
LO List the input parameters of the FEP.
LO Explain the following functions of the

FEP:
stall protection,
overspeed protection.
LO State that the stall protection function

and the overspeed protection function
apply to both mechanical/conventional
and fly-by-wire control systems, but
other functions (e.g. pitch or bank
limitation) can only apply to fly-bywire control systems.
022 09 00 00 AUTO-THROTTLE
AUTOMATIC
THRUST CONTROL SYSTEM
LO State the purpose of the auto-throttle
(AT) system.
Page 189
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Explain the operation of an AT system
with regard to the following modes:
take-off/go-around;
climb or Maximum Continuous
Thrust (MCT): N1 or EPR
targeted;
speed;
idle thrust;
landing (flare or retard).
LO Describe the control loop of an

system with regard to:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
AT
inputs: mode selection unit and

switches (disengagement and
engagement: TO-GA switches),
radio altitude, airground logic
switches;
error detection: comparison
between reference values (N1 or
EPR, speed) and actual values;
signal processing (control laws of
the thrust-lever displacement
according to error signal);
outputs: AT servo-actuator;
feedback: Thrust Lever Angle (TLA),
data from ADC (TAS, Mach
number), engine parameters (N1
or EPR).
LO State the existence of AT

systems
where thrust modes are determined by
the lever position (no thrust mode
panel or thrust rating panel, no TOGA
switches).
LO Explain the limitations of an AT system

in case of turbulence.
022 10 00 00 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

022 10 01 00 Voice communication,
transmission
modes
and
LO State the purpose of

transmission system.
data
link
transmission
a data
link
Page 190
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Compare voice communication versus
data link transmission systems.
LO State that VHF, HF and SATCOM

devices can be
used for
voice
communication
and
data
link
transmission.
LO State
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of each transmission
mode with regard to:
range;
line-of-sight limitations;
quality of the signal received;
interference due to ionospheric
conditions;
data transmission speed.
LO State that the satellite communication

networks do not cover extreme polar
regions.
LO Define
downlink
communications.
uplink
ATIS
and
LO State that a D-ATIS is an

message received by data link.
022 10 01 02
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
Systems: Architecture, design and

operation
LO Name the two following

service providers:
data
link
SITA,
ARINC,
and state their function.
LO Describe the ACARS network.
LO Describe the two following

systems
using the VHF/HF/SATCOM data link
transmission:
Aircraft Communication
Addressing and Reporting System
(ACARS);
Air Traffic Service Unit (ATSU).
Page 191
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO List and describe the following possible
onboard components of an ATSU:
Operations
data
link
Out of the gate, Off the ground,

On the ground, Into the gate
(OOOI);
load sheet;
passenger information
(connecting flights); weather
reports (METAR, TAF);
maintenance reports (engine
exceedances);
free-text messages.
LO Give
examples
of
Air
Traffic
Communications
(ATC)
data
link
messages such as:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
communications management
unit (VHF/HF/SATCOM);
Data Communication Display Unit
(DCDU);
Multi-Control Display Unit (MCDU)
for AOC, ATC and messages from
the crew (downlink
communication);
ATC message visual warning;
printer.
LO Give examples of Airline

Communications
(AOC)
messages such as:
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
departure clearance,
oceanic clearance.
022 10 02 00 Future Air

(FANS)
Navigation
Systems
LO State the existence of the

ICAO
Communication,
Navigation,
Surveillance/Air Traffic
Management
(CNS/ATM) concept.
LO Define and explain the FANS concept

(including FANS A and FANS B).
LO State that FANS A uses the ACARS

network.
Page 192
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO List and explain the following FANS A
applications:
ATS Facility Notification (AFN);

Automatic Dependent
Surveillance (ADS);
ControllerPilot Data Link
Communications (CPDLC).
LO Compare the ADS application with the

secondary surveillance radar function,
and the CPDLC application with VHF
communication systems.
LO State that an ATC centre can use the

ADS application only,
or the CPDLC
application only, or both of them (not
including AFN).
LO Describe a notification phase

ON) and state its purpose.
(LOG
LO List the different types of messages of

the CPDLC function and give examples
of CPDLC data link messages.
LO List the
contracts:
ADS
LO State that the

controller can
modify
the periodic, on demand and on
event contracts or the parameters of
these contracts (optional data groups),
and that these modifications do
not
require crew notification.
LO Describe the emergency mode.
022 11 00 00
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
different
types
of
periodic,
on demand,
on event,
emergency mode.
FLIGHT
(FMS)
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
LO Remark: The use of an FMS as a

navigation system is detailed in Radio
Navigation (062), reference 062 05 04
00.
Page 193
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
022 11 01 00 Design
LO State the purpose of an FMS.
FMS
LO Describe
the
different
possible
configurations
of this
architecture
during degraded modes of operation.
LO List the possible inputs and outputs of

an FMS.
LO Describe
a
architecture.
typical
dual
Remark: No standard of FMS can be

given because the FMS is type specific
for aircraft manufacturers and the FMS
standard is defined by the airline
customer.
LO Describe the
with AFCS.
interfaces of
the FMS
LO Describe the interfaces of

with the AT system.
the FMS
022 11 02 00 Navigation
database
database,
aircraft
LO Describe the contents and the main

features of the navigation database
and of the aircraft database: read-only
information, updating cycle.
LO Define and
factor.
LO List and describe data computation

and functions
including
position
computations
(multisensors),
flight
management,
lateral/vertical
navigation and guidance.
LO State
the
difference
between
computations based on measured data
(use of sensors) and computations
based on database information and
give examples.
explain the performance
022 11 03 00 Operations, limitations
Page 194
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO Define and
(CI).
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
IR
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
Index
LO Describe
navigation
accuracy
computations and approach capability,
degraded modes of operation: back-up
navigation, use of raw data to confirm
position/RAIM
function
for
RNAV
procedures.
LO Describe
fuel
computations
with
standard
and
non-standard
configurations including one engine
out, landing gear down, flaps, spoilers,
use of the anti-icing system, increase
of consumption due to an
MEL/CDL
item, etc.
LO Describe automatic radio

and tuning (COMM, NAV).
explain the Cost
navigation
022 11 04 00 Manmachine interface

(Multifunction Control Display Unit
(MCDU))
LO Give examples and describe the basic
functions
of
the
manmachine
interface (MCDU).
022 12 00 00 ALERTING SYSTEMS, PROXIMITY
SYSTEMS
022 12 01 00 General
LO State definitions,
category, criteria
and characteristics of alerting systems
according to CS 25/AMJ 25.1322 for
aeroplanes and CS-29 for helicopters
as appropriate.
022 12 02 00 Flight Warning Systems (FWS)

LO State the purpose of an FWS and list
the
typical
sources
(abnormal
situations) of a warning and/or an
alert.
LO List the main components of an FWS.
Page 195

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
022 12 03 00 Stall Warning Systems (SWS)

LO State the function of an SWS.
LO List the different types of stall warning

systems.
LO List the main components of an SWS.
LO List the inputs and outputs of an SWS.
LO State the characteristics of an

according to CS 25.207(c).
SWS
022 12 04 00 Stall protection

LO State the function of a stall protection
system.
LO List the
different
types of
protection
systems
including
difference between mechanical
fly-by-wire controls.
stall
the
and
LO List the main

components of a
protection system.
stall
LO List the inputs and outputs of a stall

protection system.
LO Explain the difference between a stall

warning system and a stall protection
system.
022 12 05 00 Overspeed warning

LO Explain the purpose of an overspeed
warning system (VMO/MMO pointer).
LO Explain the design

VMO/MMO pointer.
mechanical
LO State that for large aeroplanes, an

aural warning must be associated to
the overspeed warning if an electronic
display is used (see AMC 25.11,
paragraph 10.b(2), p. 2-GEN-22).
LO Give examples of VMO/MMO pointer:

barber pole pointer,
barber pole
vertical scale.
of a
Page 196
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
022 12 06 00 Take-off warning

LO State the purpose of a
take-off
warning system and list the typical
abnormal situations which generate a
warning (see AMC 25.703, paragraphs
4 and 5).
022 12 07 00 Altitude alert system

LO State the function and
altitude alert system.
LO Describe the principle of the distance

(height) measurement.
LO State the bandwidth

range used.
frequency
LO List the different components of a

radio altimeter
and describe
the
different types of displays.
LO List the systems using radio-altimeter

information.
LO State the
range and
radio altimeter.
describe
an
LO List and describe the different types of

displays and possible alerts.
022 12 08 00 Radio altimeter
LO State the function of
radio altimeter.
low-altitude
and
accuracy of a
LO Describe and explain the cable-length

compensation.
022 12 09 00 Ground-proximity warning systems
(GPWS)
022 12 09 01 GPWS:
design,
indications
operation,
LO State the purpose of a

groundproximity warning system (GPWS).
LO List the components of a GPWS.
LO List the inputs and outputs of a GPWS.
Page 197

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO List and describe the different modes
of operation of a GPWS.
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
LO State the purpose of a TAWS for

aeroplanes and HTAWS for helicopters
and explain the difference from a
GPWS.
LO List the
HTAWS.
LO List the inputs and outputs of a TAWS/

HTAWS.
LO Give examples of terrain displays and

list the different possible alerts.
LO Give examples of time response left to

the pilot according to
look-ahead
distance,
speed
and
aircraft
performances.
LO Explain why the TAWS/HTAWS must

be coupled
to a
precise-position
sensor.
IR
022 12 09 02 Terrain-Avoidance Warning System

(TAWS), other name:
Enhanced
GPWS (EGPWS)
components
of
TAWS/
022 12 09 03 Runway awareness and advisory

system (to be introduced at a later
date)
LO Explain that a runway awareness and
advisory system is a software upgrade
of the existing TAWS (EGPWS) to
reduce runway incursions.
and
LO State that
ACAS II is an
ICAO
standard for anti-collision purposes.
LO State that TCAS II

version 7
compliant with the ACAS II standard.
022 12 10 00 ACAS/TCAS
operations
principles
is
Page 198

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Explain that
ACAS II is an anticollision
system
and
does
not
guarantee any specific separation.
LO Describe the purpose of an ACAS II

system as an anti-collision system.
(RA)
LO State that RAs are calculated

in the
vertical plane only (climb or descent).
LO Explain the
difference between
a
corrective RA and a preventive RA (no
modification of vertical speed).
LO Explain that if two aircraft are fitted

with ACAS II,
the
RA
will
coordinated.
LO State that ACAS II equipment can take

into
account
several
threats
simultaneously.
LO State that a detected aircraft without

altitude-reporting can only generate a
TA.
LO Describe the TCAS II system in with

regard to:
of
TCAS II
LO State that the standard

detection
range is approximately 30 NM.
LO State that the normal

period is 1 second.
LO Define a Resolution Advisory

and a Traffic Advisory (TA).
be
antenna used;
computer and links with radio
altimeter, air-data computer and
mode-S transponder.
LO Identify the
TCAS II.
inputs and
LO Explain the
principle
interrogations.
LO Explain the
surveillance.
principle
outputs
of
interrogation
of
reduced
Page 199

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Explain that in high-density

traffic
areas the period can be extended to
5 seconds and the transmission power
reduction can reduce
the
range
detection down to 5 NM.
LO Identify the
equipment which
an
intruder must be fitted with in order to
be detected by TCAS II.
LO Explain in the anti-collision process:
that the criteria used to trigger an

alarm (TA or RA) are the time to
reach the closest point of
approach (called TAU) and the
difference of altitude;
that an intruder will be classified
as proximate when being less
than 6 NM and 1 200 ft from the
TCAS-equipped aircraft;
that the time limit to CPA is
different depending on aircraft
altitude, is linked to a sensitivity
level (SL), and state that the
value to trigger an RA is from 15
to 35 seconds;
that, in case of an RA, the
intended vertical separation
varies from 300 to 600 ft (700 ft
above FL420), depending on the
S L;
that below 1 000 ft above
ground, no RA can be generated;
that below 1 450 ft (radioaltimeter value) increase
descent RA is inhibited;
that, in high altitude,
performances of the type of
aircraft are taken into account to
inhibit climb and increase climb
RA.
Page 200

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO List
and interpret
the
following
information available from TCAS:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
LO Explain that an RA is presented as a

possible vertical speed on a TCAS
indicator or on the Primary Flight
Display (PFD).
LO Describe the possible presentation of

an RA on a VSI or on a PFD.
LO Explain that the pilot must

not
interpret the horizontal track of an
intruder upon the display.
the different possible statuses of

a detected aircraft: other,
proximate, intruder;
the appropriate graphic symbols
and their position on the
horizontal display;
different aural warnings.
022 12 11 00 Rotor/engine
system
overspeed
alert
022 12 11 01 Design, operation, displays, alarms

LO Describe the basic design principles,
operation, displays and warning/alarm
systems fitted to different helicopters.
022 13 00 00 INTEGRATED
INSTRUMENTS
ELECTRONIC DISPLAYS
022 13 01 00 Electronic display units

022 13 01 01 Design, limitations
LO List the different technologies used,
e.g. CRT and LCD, and the associated
limitations:
cockpit temperature,
glare.
022 13 02 00 Mechanical
integrated
instruments: Attitude and Director
Indicator
(ADI)/Horizontal
Situation Indicator (HSI)
LO Describe an ADI and an HSI.
Page 201

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO List all the information that can be
displayed for either instruments.
022 13 03 00 Electronic
Flight
Systems (EFIS)
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR
Instrument
Remarks:
1 The use of EFIS as navigation
display system is also detailed in Radio
Navigation (062), reference 062 05 05
02 (EFIS instruments).
2 Reference to AMC 25-1322 can be
used for aeroplanes only.
022 13 03 01 Design, operation
LO List
and
describe
the
components of an EFIS.
different
LO List the following possible inputs and

outputs of an EFIS:
control panel,
display units,
symbol generator,
remote-light sensor.

generator unit.
of the symbol
022 13 03 02 Primary
Flight Display
Electronic
Attitude
Indicator (EADI)
(PFD),
Director
LO State that a PFD (or an EADI) presents

a dynamic colour display of all the
parameters necessary to control the
aircraft.
Page 202

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO List
and describe
the
following
information that can be displayed on
the PFD unit of an aircraft:
flight mode annunciation;

basic T:
attitude,
IAS,
altitude,
heading/track indications;
vertical speed;
maximum-airspeed warning;
selected airspeed;
speed-trend vector;
selected altitude;
current barometric reference;
steering indications (FD command
bars);
selected heading;
flight path vector (FPV);
radio altitude;
decision height;
ILS indications;
ACAS (TCAS) indications;
failure flags and messages.
LO List
and describe
the
following
information that can also be displayed
on the PFD unit of an aeroplane:
022 13 03 03
IR
take-off and landing reference

speeds;
minimum airspeed;
lower selectable airspeed;
Mach number.
Navigation
Display
Electronic
Horizontal
Indicator (EHSI)
(ND),
Situation
LO State that an ND (or an

provides a mode-selectable
flight navigation display.
LO List and describe the following
modes displayed on an ND unit:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
EHSI)
colour
four
MAP (or ARC),

VOR (or ROSE VOR),
APP (or ROSE LS),
PLAN.
Page 203

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO List
and
explain
the
following
information that can be displayed with
the MAP (or ARC) mode on an ND unit:
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
x
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
x
selected and current track;

selected and current heading
(magnetic or true-north
reference);
cross-track error;
origin and destination airport with
runway selected;
bearings to or from the tuned and
selected stations;
active and/or secondary flight
plan;
range marks;
ground speed;
TAS and ground speed;
wind direction and speed;
next-waypoint distance and
estimated time of arrival;
additional navigation facilities
(STA), waypoint (WPT) and
airports (ARPT);
weather radar information;
traffic information from the ACAS
(TCAS);
terrain information from the
TAWS or HTAWS (EGPWS);
Page 204
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
LO List
and
explain
the
following
the VOR/APP (or ROSE VOR/ROSE LS)
mode on an ND unit:
x
x
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
IR

selected and current heading
(magnetic or true-north
reference)
VOR course or ILS localizer
course
VOR (VOR or ROSE VOR mode) or
LOC course deviation (APP or
ROSE LS);
glide-slope pointer (APP or ROSE
LS);
frequency or identifier of the
tuned station;
ground speed;
LO List
and
explain
the
following
the PLAN mode on an ND unit:
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

origin and destination airport with
runway selected;
active and/or secondary flight
plan;
range marks;
ground speed;
next-waypoint distance and
estimated time of arrival;
additional navigation facilities
(STA), waypoint (WPT) and
airports (ARPT);
LO Give examples
between units.
of
possible
transfers
LO Give examples of EFIS control panels.
Page 205

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
022 13 04 00 Engine
warnings,
procedure
systems
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
parameters,
crew
aircraft
systems,
and
mission
display
x
LO Describe the architecture

of each
system and give examples of display.
LO Give the following different names by

which engine
parameters,
crew
warnings,
aircraft
systems
and
procedures
display
systems
are
known:
LO State the purpose of a mission display

unit.
LO Describe
LO State the
systems:
purpose
of the
following
engine instruments centralised

display unit;
crew alerting system associated
with an electronic checklist
display unit;
that the aircraft systems display
unit enables the display of normal
and degraded modes of operation
of the aircraft systems.
Multifunction Display Unit

(MFDU);
Engine Indication and Crew
Alerting Systems (EICAS);
Engine and Warning Display
(EWD);
Electronic Centralised Aircraft
Monitor (ECAM).
LO Give the names of the following

different display systems and describe
their main functions:
Vehicle Engine Monitoring Display

(VEMD);
Integrated Instruments Display
System (IIDS).
the architecture
of each
system and give examples of display.
022 13 05 00 Engine first limit indicator
Page 206
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
LO Describe the principles of design and

operation, and compare the different
indications and displays available.
LO Describe what information can be

displayed on the screen, when in the
limited screen composite mode.
IR
022 13 06 00 Electronic Flight Bag (EFB) (to be

introduced at a later date)
022 14 00 00 MAINTENANCE, MONITORING AND
RECORDING SYSTEMS
LO State the basic technologies used for
this equipment and its performances.
Remark: No
knowledge
of
the
applicable operational requirements is
necessary.
022 14 01 00 Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR)
LO State the purpose of a CVR.
LO List the main components of a CVR:
a shock-resistant tape recorder

associated with an underwater
locating device;
an area microphone;
a control unit with the following
controls: auto/on, test and erase,
and a headset jack.
LO List the following main

recorded on the CVR:
parameters
voice communications
transmitted from or received on
the flight deck;
the aural environment of the
flight deck;
voice communication of flight
crew members using the
aeroplanes interphone system;
voice or audio signals introduced
into a headset or speaker;
voice communication of flight
crew members using the public
address system, when installed.
022 14 02 00 Flight Data Recorders (FDR)
Page 207

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
LO State the purpose of an FDR.
LO List the main components of an FDR:
a data interface and acquisition

unit;
a recording system (digital flight
data recorder);
two control units (start sequence,
event mark setting).
LO List the following main

recorded on the FDR:
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
parameters
time or relative time count;

attitude (pitch and roll);
airspeed;
pressure altitude;
heading;
normal acceleration;
propulsive/thrust power on each
engine and cockpit thrust/power
lever position, if applicable;
flaps/slats configuration or
cockpit selection;
ground spoilers and/or speed
brake selection.
LO State that additional

parameters can
be recorded according to FDR capacity
and
the
applicable
operational
requirements.
022 14 03 00 Maintenance
systems
and
monitoring
022 14 03 01 Helicopter Operations Monitoring

Programme
(HOMP):
design,
operation, performance
LO Describe the HOMP as a helicopter
version of the aeroplane
Flight Data
Monitoring (FDM) programmes.
LO State that the HOMP software consists

of three integrated modules:
Flight Data Events (FDE);

Flight Data Measurements (FDM);
Flight Data Traces (FDT).
LO Describe and explain the information

flow of HOMP.
Page 208
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
x
LO Describe the ground station features

of IHUMS.
LO Summarise the
including:
LO Describe
HOMP
operation
management processes.
and
022 14 03 02 Integrated
Health
&
Usage
Monitoring
System
(IHUMS):
design, operation, performance
LO Describe the main features of IHUMS:
rotor system health;

cockpit voice recorder/flight data
recorder;
gearbox system health;
engine health;
exceedance monitoring;
usage monitoring;
transparent operation;
ground station features;
exceedance monitoring;
monitoring;
gearbox health;
rotor track & balance;
engine performance trending;
usage monitoring;
quality controlled to level 2.
benefits
of
IHUMS
reduced risk
of
catastrophic
failure of rotor or gearbox;
improved rotor track & balance
giving lower vibration levels;
accurate recording of flight
exceedances;
cockpit voice recorder/flight data
recorder allows accurate accident
/incident investigation & HOMP;
maintenance cost savings.
LO State the
HOMP.
benefits
of
IHUMS
and
022 14 03 03 Aeroplane
Condition
Monitoring
System (ACMS): general, design,
operation
LO State the purpose of an ACMS.
Page 209
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL

Learning Objectives
LO Describe the
including:
structure of
an ACMS
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
inputs: aircraft systems (such as

air conditioning, autoflight, flight
controls, fuel, landing gear,
navigation, pneumatic, APU,
engine), MCDU;
data management unit;
recording unit: digital recorder;
outputs: printer, ACARS or ATSU.
LO State that maintenance messages sent

by an ACMS can be
transmitted
without crew notification.
022 15 00 00 DIGITAL
COMPUTERS
CIRCUITS
AND
022 15 01 00 Digital circuits and

computers:
General, definitions and design
LO Define a computer as a machine for
manipulating data according to a
list
of instructions.
LO List the following main components of

a stored-programme (Von
Neumann
architecture) on a basic computer:
and
LO Define
and
explain
the
terms
multitasking and multiprocessing.
Central Processing Unit (CPU)

including the Arithmetic Logic
Unit (ALU) and the control unit;
memory;
input and output devices
(peripherals);
and state their functions.

LO State the existence of the
buses and their function.
LO Define the
software.
terms
different
hardware
Page 210
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL CPL
/IR
LO With the help of the relevant 022

references, give examples of airborne
computers, such as ADC, FMS, GPWS,
etc., and list the possible peripheral
equipment for each system.
LO Describe the principle of the following

technologies used for memories:
LO State the difference between assembly

languages, high-level languages and
scripting languages.
LO Define the term Operating System

(OS) and give different
examples
including airborne systems such as
FMS or ATSU (for aeroplanes only).
LO State the existence of

Software
Considerations in Airborne Systems
and Equipment Certification
(see
document referenced
RTCA/DO-178B
or EUROCAE ED-12B).
LO List the specific

criticality according
ED-12B document.
022 15 02 00
chip circuit,
magnetic disk,
optical disk.
Software: General, definitions and
certification specifications
levels of safety
to the EUROCAE
Page 211
IR

Subject: 031 - FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING - MASS AND

BALANCE
ATPL(A)
CPL(A) ATPL(H)/IR
ATPL(H)
CPL(H) IR(A) & (H)
Time
1:00
1:00
1:00
1:00
1:00
allowed
(hours)
031 01
03
03
03
03
03
031 02
05
05
05
05
05
031 03
05
05
05
05
05
031 04
05
05
05
05
05
031 05
05
05
05
05
05
031 06
02
02
02
02
02
Total
25
25
25
25
25
questions
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
D. SUBJECT 031 MASS AND BALANCE

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
Syllabus details details and

associated Learning Objectives
ATPL
030 00 00 00
FLIGHT
PERFORMANCE
PLANNING
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
AND
Page 212
IR
CPL

031 00 00 00
MASS
AND
BALANCE
AEROPLANES/HELICOPTERS
031 01 00 00
PURPOSE OF MASS-AND-BALANCE
CONSIDERATIONS
031 01 01 00
Mass limitations
031 01 01 01
Importance
with
structural limitations
regard
to
LO Describe the relationship

between
aircraft mass and structural stress.

between
aircraft mass and performance.
LO Describe that aircraft mass must be

limited to ensure adequate aircraft
performance.
LO Describe that the actual aircraft mass

must be known during flight as the
basis
for
performance-related
decisions.
Remark: See also 021 01 01 00.

LO Describe that mass must be limited to
ensure adequate margins of strength.
031 01 01 02
Importance
performance
with
regard
to
Remark: See also subjects 032/034

and 081/082.
031 01 02 00
Centre-of-gravity (CG) limitations
031 01 02 01
Importance
with
regard
stability and controllability
to
Remark: See also subjects

081/082.
LO Describe the relationship between CG
position and stability/controllability of
the aircraft.
Page 213

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

ATPL
IR
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
CPL
LO Describe the consequences if CG is in

front of the forward limit.

behind the aft limit.
LO Describe the relationship between CG

position and aircraft performance.
LO Describe the effects of CG position on

performance
parameters
(speeds,
altitude, endurance and range).
031 01 02 02 Importance
performance
with
if CG is
regard
to
Remark: See also subjects 032/034

and 081/082.
031 02 00 00 LOADING
031 02 01 00 Terminology
031 02 01 01 Mass terms
LO Define the following mass terms:
basic empty mass;

dry operating mass;
operating mass;
take-off mass;
landing mass;
ramp/taxiing mass;
in-flight mass (gross mass);
zero-fuel mass.
031 02 01 02 Load terms (including fuel terms)

Remark: See also subject 033.
LO Define the following load terms:
payload/traffic load;
block fuel;
taxiing fuel;
take-off fuel;
trip fuel;
reserve fuel (contingency,
alternate, final reserve and
additional fuel);
extra fuel.
Page 214

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane


various
load-and-mass
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
CPL
components
listed above.
LO Calculate
the
components
mass
from
of
particular
other
given
components.
LO Convert
fuel
density given
mass,
volume
and
in different units used
in aviation.
031 02 02
00
Mass limits
031 02 02
01
Structural limitations
LO Define
the
limitations:
following
structural
LO Maximum zero-fuel mass.
LO Maximum ramp/taxiing mass.
LO Maximum take-off mass.
LO Maximum in-flight (gross) mass.
LO
Maximum in-flight (gross) mass with

external load.
LO Maximum landing mass.

031 02 02
02
Performance limitations
LO Define
the
following
performance
limitations:
031 02 02
03
performance-limited take-off mass;

performance-limited landing
mass;
regulated take-off mass;
regulated landing mass.
Cargo-compartment limitations
LO Define
the
following
compartment limitations:
LO Maximum floor load (maximum load
per unit of area).
cargo-
Page 215

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Calculate the maximum mass for

take-off (regulated take-off
mass)
given mass-and-load components and
structural/performance limits.
LO Calculate the maximum mass for

landing (regulated
landing
mass)
given mass-and-load components and
structural/performance limits.
LO Calculate the allowed mass for takeoff.
LO Calculate the maximum allowed traffic

load and fuel load in order not to
exceed the given allowed take-off
mass.
LO Calculate under
load/over
load
given allowed mass for
take-off,
operating mass and actual
traffic
load.
LO Extract
the appropriate
standard
masses for passengers, baggage and
crew from relevant documents or
operator requirements.
LO Calculate the traffic

standard masses.
LO Maximum running load (maximum

load per unit of fuselage length).
031 02 03 00 Mass calculations

031 02 03 01 Maximum masses for take-off and
landing
031 02 03 02 Allowed traffic load and fuel load
031 02 03 03 Use of
standard
masses
passengers, baggage and crew
load by
for
using
031 03 00 00 FUNDAMENTALS OF CENTRE-OFGRAVITY CALCULATIONS

031 03 01 00 Definition
(CG)
of
Centre
of
Gravity
Page 216

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Name where the datum and moment

arms for aircraft can be found.
LO Extract the appropriate

given documents.
LO Name where the CG position for an

aircraft at basic empty mass can be
found.
LO Name where the CG limits

aircraft can be found.
for an
LO Extract the CG limits from

aircraft documents.
given
LO Define and
CG.
explain the meaning
of
031 03 02 00 Conditions of equilibrium (balance

of
forces
and
balance
of
moments)
LO Define datum
(reference
moment arm and moment.
point),
LO Name the conditions of equilibrium.

031 03 03 00 Basic calculations of CG
LO Resolve numerical problems using the
principle of equilibrium of forces and
moments.
031 04 00 00 MASS-AND-BALANCE DETAILS OF
AIRCRAFT
031 04 01 00 Contents
of
documentation
mass-and-balance
031 04 01 01 Datum, moment arm
031 04 01 02 CG position
datum
as
data
distance
from
from
LO State
the
different
forms
in
presenting CG position as distance
from datum or other references.
Page 217

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
031 04 01 03 CG position as percentage of Mean

Aerodynamic Chord (% MAC)
Remark: Knowledge of the definition
of MAC is covered under reference
081 01 01 05.
x
LO Explain the principle of using % MAC

for the description of the CG position.
LO Calculate the CG position as % MAC.
LO Extract % MAC information

aircraft documents.
from
031 04 01 04 Longitudinal CG limits

given sample documents.
data
from
data
from
031 04 01 05 Lateral CG limits

031 04 01 06 Details of passenger and cargo

compartments
LO Extract the appropriate data
(e.g.
seating
schemes,
compartment
dimensions and limitations)
from
031 04 01 07 Details of fuel system relevant to

mass-and-balance considerations
LO Extract the appropriate data
(e.g.
fuel-tank capacities
and
fuel-tank
positions)
from
given
sample
documents.
031 04 02 00 Determination of aircraft empty
mass and CG position by weighing
031 04 02 01 Weighing
aspects)
of
aircraft
(general
Page 218

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

ATPL
LO Explain the general procedure and
regulations for weighing of aircraft
(conditions, intervals, reasons and
requirements for reweighing).
Remark:
See
the
operational requirements.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
applicable
LO Extract and interpret entries from/in

mass (weight) report of an aircraft.
031 04 02 02 Calculation
of
mass and
CG
position of an
aircraft
using
weighing data
LO Calculate the mass and CG position of
an aircraft from given reaction forces
on jacking points.
031 04 03 00 Extraction of basic empty mass
and
CG
data
from
aircraft
documentation
031 04 03 01 Basic empty mass (BEM) and/or
dry operating mass (DOM)
LO Extract values for BEM and/or DOM
from given documents.
031 04 03 02 CG
position and/or moment at
BEM/DOM
LO Extract values for CG position
moment at BEM and/or DOM from
given documents.
031 04 03 03 Deviations
configuration
from
and
standard
LO Extract values from given documents

for
deviation
from
standard
configuration as a
result of varying
crew, optional equipment, optional
fuel tanks, etc.
031 05 00 00 DETERMINATION OF CG POSITION
031 05 01 00 Methods
031 05 01 01 Arithmetic method
Page 219

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
index
LO Define the terms index,

loaded
index and dry operating index.
LO State the advantage(s) of the index

method.
LO Calculate the CG position

by using the formula:
of aircraft
CG position = sum of moments/total

mass.
031 05 01 02 Graphic method
LO Determine the CG position of aircraft
by using the loading graphs given in
sample documents.
031 05 01 03 Index method
LO Explain the
method.
principle
of the
031 05 02 00 Load and trim sheet

031 05 02 01 General considerations
LO Explain the principle and the purpose
of load sheets.
LO Explain the principle and the purpose

of trim sheets.
031 05 02 02 Load sheet and CG envelope for

light
aeroplanes
and
for
helicopters
LO Add loading data
and
calculate
masses in a sample load sheet.
LO Calculate moments and CG positions.
LO Check CG position at zero-fuel mass

and take-off mass to be within the CG
envelope
including
last-minute
changes, if applicable.
031 05 02 03 Load sheet for large aeroplanes
Page 220

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

ATPL
LO Explain
LO Explain
LO Explain
the purpose of load-sheet

sections and methods for
crosschecking the actual and limiting mass
values.
Calculate and/or complete a sample

load sheet.

sections
and the
methods
for
establishing allowed
mass for takeoff, allowed traffic load and under
load.
sections
and the
methods
for
assessing load distribution.
LO
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
031 05 02 04 Trim sheet for large aeroplanes

LO Explain the purpose of the trim sheet
and the methods to determine the CG
position.
LO Check that the zero-fuel mass index is

within the limits.
LO Determine the fuel index by using the

fuel index
correction table and
determine the CG position as % MAC.
LO Check that the take-off mass index is

within the limits.
for
the
difference
between
LO Explain
certified and operational CG limits.
LO Determine
take-off.
stabiliser trim units
031 05 02 05 Last-minute changes

LO Complete a load and trim sheet for
last-minute changes.
031 05 03 01 Repositioning
the load
of CG
by shifting
Page 221

Syllabus
reference

Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
x
x
x
IR
CPL
LO Calculate the mass to be moved over

a given distance, or to/from given
compartments, to establish a defined
CG position.
LO Calculate the distance to move a given

mass to establish a defined
CG
position.
LO Calculate the amount of additional

load or ballast to be loaded at a given
position or compartment to establish
a defined CG position.
or
LO Calculate the loading position
compartment for a given amount of
additional load or ballast to establish a
defined CG position.
LO Calculate the required

floor-contact
area for a given load
to avoid
exceeding the maximum permissible
floor load of a cargo compartment.
LO Calculate the
maximum
mass of a
container with given
floor-contact
area to avoid exceeding the maximum
permissible floor load of a cargo
compartment.
LO Calculate the linear load distribution

of a container to avoid exceeding the
maximum permissible running load.
031 05 03 02 Repositioning of CG by additional

load or ballast
031 06 00 00 CARGO HANDLING

031 06 01 00 Types of cargo (general aspects)
LO Explain the basic idea of typical types
of cargo, e.g. containerised cargo,
palletised cargo, bulk cargo.
031 06 02 00 Floor-area load and running-load
limitations in cargo compartments
031 06 03 00 Securement of load
Page 222

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

ATPL
LO Explain the reasons for having
adequate tie-down of loads.
LO Name the basic methods for securing
loads.
an
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Page 223

Subject: 032 - FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING -PERFORMANCE

(AEROPLANES)
ATPL (A)
Time
allowed
(hours)
1:00
CPL(A) ATPL(H)/IR
0:45
ATPL(H)
CPL(
CPL(H) IR(A) & (H)

X
X XX
XX
XX
XX

032 01
05
05
XX
XX
XX
XX
032 02
10
10
XX
XX
XX
XX
032 03
10
10
XX
XX
XX
XX
032 04
10
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Total
questions
35
25
XX
XX
XX
XX
E. SUBJECT 032 PERFORMANCE (AEROPLANE)

(1) For theoretical-knowledge examination purposes:
Climb angle is assumed to be air mass-related.
Page 224

Flight-path angle is assumed to be ground-related.
Screen height for take-off is the vertical distance between the take-off surface and the take-off
flight path at the end of the take-off distance.
Screen height for landing is the vertical distance between the landing surface and the landing
flight path from which the landing distance begins.
Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
030 00 00 00 FLIGHT
PERFORMANCE
PLANNING
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
AND
032 00 00 00 PERFORMANCE AEROPLANES

032 01 00 00 GENERAL
032 01 01 00 Performance legislation
032 01 01 01 Airworthiness
requirements
according to CS-23 and CS-25
LO Interpret
the
European
Union
airworthiness requirements according
to
CS-23
relating
to
aeroplane
performance.
LO Interpret
the
European
Union
airworthiness requirements according
to
CS-25
relating
to
aeroplane
performance.
LO Name the general differences between

aeroplanes as certified according to
CS-23 and CS-25.
032 01 01 02 Operational regulations

LO Interpret the applicable
operational
requirements
related
to
aeroplane
performance.
Page 225
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Determine the opposing forces during

horizontal steady flight.
LO Interpret the thrust/power

required
and thrust/power available curves.
LO Describe the meaning of excess thrust

and power using appropriate graphs.
LO Describe the effect of excess

and power on speed and/or
performance.
LO Calculate the climb gradient from given

thrust, drag and aeroplane mass.
LO Explain climb, level flight and descent

performance
in
relation
to
the
combination
of thrust/power available
and required.
LO Explain the difference

and gradient.
LO Name and define the

performance
classes
for
commercial
air
transportation
according
to
the
applicable operational requirements.
Helicopter
032 01 02 00 General performance theory

032 01 02 01 Stages of flight
LO Describe the following stages of flight:
take-off;
climbing flight;
level flight;
descending flight;
approach and landing.
032 01 02 02 Definitions, terms and concepts

LO Define steady flight.
LO Resolve the
forces during
climbing and descending flight.
LO Define the terms

climb gradient.
steady
thrust
climb
between angle
climb
angle
and
Page 226
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Define the terms flight-path angle and

flight-path gradient.
LO Define the terms descent angle and

descent gradient.
LO Explain
the
climb/descent
angle.
LO Define service and absolute ceiling.
LO Define the terms clearway (CWY) and

stopway (STW) according to CSDefinitions.
LO Define the terms:
its
range
and
Specific
Fuel
difference
angle and
between
flight-path
Helicopter
Take-Off Run Available (TORA);

Take-Off Distance Available
(TODA);
Accelerate-Stop Distance
Available (ASDA);
according to the applicable operational

requirements.
LO Define screen
various values.
LO Define
the
endurance.
height
terms
LO Define the aeroplanes

Consumption (SFC).
and
Remark:
Engine
specific
consumption is covered in 021.
list
fuel
LO Define the aeroplanes Specific Range

(S R).
032 01 02 03
Variables influencing performance
Page 227
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Name and understand the following

factors
that
affect
aeroplane
performance, particularly:
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Explain
the
effect
of
the
wind
component on take-off and landing
performance.
LO Determine the regulatory factors for

take-off and landing according to the
LO Explain the effects of

wind
and
altitude
performance.
temperature,
on
climb
LO Explain the effects of altitude

and
temperature on cruise performance.
LO Explain the effects of mass, wind and

speed on descent performance.
Helicopter
temperature;
air density;
wind;
aeroplane mass;
aeroplane configuration;
aeroplane anti-skid system status;
aeroplane centre of gravity;
aerodrome runway surface;
aerodrome runway slope.
032 02 00 00 PERFORMANCE CLASS B SINGLEENGINE AEROPLANES

032 02 01 00 Definitions of speeds used
LO Define the following speeds according
to CS-23:
stall speeds VS, VS0 and VS1;

rotation speed VR;
speed at 50 ft above the take-off
surface level;
reference speed landing VREF.
032 02 02 00 Effect of variables on single-engine

aeroplane performance
032 02 03 00 Take-off and landing
Page 228
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Interpret the take-off and landing

requirements
according
to
the
LO Define the following distances:
LO Explain the effects of the different

recommended power settings on range
and endurance.
LO Explain the effects of wind and altitude

on maximum endurance speed.
LO Find the minimum or maximum wind

component.
LO Find the take-off distance and groundroll distance.
LO Find the
mass.
LO Find the maximum rate-of-climb speed.
LO Find the time, distance and

climb.
Helicopter
take-off distance;
landing distance;
ground-roll distance;
maximum allowed take-off mass;
maximum allowed landing mass.
LO Explain the effect of flap-setting on the

ground-roll distance.
032 02 04 00 Climb, cruise and descent
032 02 05 00 Use of aeroplane performance data

032 02 05 01 Take-off
maximum
allowed
take-off
LO Find the take-off speed.

032 02 05 02 Climb
fuel
to
LO Find the rate of climb.

032 02 05 03 Cruise
LO Find
power settings,
cruise
true
airspeed (TAS) and fuel consumption.
Page 229
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Find range and endurance.
LO Find the difference between still air

distance (NAM) and ground distance
(NM).
LO Find the minimum or maximum wind

component.
LO Find the landing distance and groundroll distance.
LO Explain the effect of the critical engine

inoperative on the power required and
the total drag.
LO Explain the effect of engine failure on

controllability under given conditions.
LO Explain the effect of flap-setting on the

LO For both fixed and constant speed

propellers,
explain
the
effect
of
airspeed on thrust during the take-off
run.
LO Explain the effect of pressure altitude

on performance-limited take-off mass.
LO Explain the effect of runway conditions

on the take-off distance.
032 02 05 04 Landing
032 03 00 00 PERFORMANCE CLASS B

ENGINE AEROPLANES
MULTI-
032 03 01 00 Definitions of terms and speeds

LO Define and explain the following terms:
critical engine;
speed for best angle of climb (VX);
speed for best rate of climb (VY).
032 03 02 00 Effect of variables on multi-engine

aeroplane performance
032 03 02 01 Take-off and landing
Page 230
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Determine the regulation factors for

take-off according to the applicable
LO Explain
the
percentage
of
accountability
for
headwind
and
tailwind components during take-off
and landing calculations.
LO Interpret obstacle clearance

off.
at take-
LO Explain the effect of selected

power
settings, flap settings and aeroplane
mass on the rate of climb.
LO Describe the effect of engine failure on

take-off climb performance.
LO Explain the effect of brake release

before take-off power
is set on the
take-off and accelerate-stop distance.
LO Explain the effect of mass on the speed

for best angle and best rate of climb.
LO Explain the effect of mass on the speed

for best angle and best rate of descent.
LO Explain the effect of temperature and

altitude on fuel flow.
LO Explain the effect of wind on the

maximum range speed and speed for
maximum climb angle.
LO Explain the effect of mass, altitude,

wind, speed and configuration on glide
descent.
LO Describe the various cruise techniques.
032 03 02 02
Helicopter
Climb, cruise and descent
LO Explain the effect

consumption.
of
CG
on
fuel
Page 231
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Explain the effect of runway conditions

on the landing distance.
LO Determine the regulatory factors for

landing according to the applicable
LO Find take-off field-length data.
LO Calculate the field-length limited takeoff mass.
LO Find the accelerate-go distance as well

the accelerate-stop distance data.
LO Find the
distance.
LO Calculate the maximum effort take-off

data.
LO Calculate all engine and critical engineout take-off climb data.
LO Calculate obstacle
climb data.
LO Find rate of climb and climb gradient.
LO Calculate single engine service ceiling.
LO Calculate
data.
climb
LO Find
power settings,
cruise
true
airspeed (TAS) and fuel consumption.
LO Calculate range and endurance data.
LO Describe the effect of loss of engine

power
on
climb
and
cruise
performance.
Helicopter
032 03 02 03 Landing
032 03 03 00 Use of aeroplane performance data

032 03 03 01 Take-off
ground-roll
and
clearance
take-off
take-off
032 03 03 02 Climb
obstacle
clearance
032 03 03 03 Cruise and descent
Page 232
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 03 03 04 Landing
LO Find landing field-length data.
LO Find landing climb data in the event of

balked landing.
LO Find landing distance and

distance.
and
affecting
LO State the effects of thrust-to-weight

ratio and flap-setting on ground roll.
LO Find short-field landing

ground-roll
distance
032 04 00 00 PERFORMANCE CLASS A
AEROPLANES CERTIFIED
ACCORDING TO CS-25 ONLY
032 04 01 00 Take-off
LO Explain the essential forces
the aeroplane during take-off.
032 04 01 01 Definitions of terms used

LO Define the terms Aircraft Classification
Number
(ACN)
and
Pavement
Classification Number (PCN).
Page 233
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Define and explain the following speeds

in accordance
with CS-25 or CSDefinitions:
reference stall speed (VSR);
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
reference stall speed in the

landing configuration (VSR0);
reference stall speed in a specific
configuration (VSR1);
1-g stall speed at which the
aeroplane can develop a lift force
(normal to the flight path) equal
to its weight (VS1g);
minimum control speed with
critical engine inoperative (VMC);
minimum control speed on or near
the ground (VMCG);
minimum control speed at take-off
climb (VMCA);
engine failure speed (VEF);
take-off decision speed (V1);
rotation speed (VR);
minimum take-off safety speed
(V2MIN);
minimum unstick speed (VMU);
lift-off speed (VLOF);
max brake energy speed (VMBE);
max tyre speed (V Max Tyre);
reference landing speed (VREF);
minimum control speed, approach
and landing (VMCL).
LO Explain the interdependence between of

the above mentioned speeds if there is
any.
LO Define the following distances in

accordance with CS-25:
take-off run with all engines
operating and one engine
inoperative;
take-off distance with all engines
operating and one engine
inoperative;
accelerate-stop distance with all
engines operating and one engine
inoperative.
Page 234
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Define the term

Aeroplane-Specific
Fuel Consumption (ASFC).
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
Remark:
Engine-specific
fuel
consumption is covered in subject 021.
032 04 01 02 Take-off distances
LO Explain the effects of the following
runway (RWY) variables on take-off
distances:
RWY slope;
RWY surface conditions: dry, wet
and contaminated;
RWY elevation.
LO Explain the effects of the

aeroplane
variables
on
distances:
following
take-off

meteorological
variables on take-off
distances:
aeroplane mass;
take-off configuration;
bleed-air configurations.
wind;
temperature;
pressure altitude.
Explain
the influence of errors
in
LO
rotation
technique
on
take-off
distance:
early and late rotation;
too high and too low rotation

angle;
too high and too low rotation rate.

LO Explain the take-off distances for
specified conditions and configuration
for all engines operating and one
engine inoperative.
LO Explain the effect of using clearway on

the take-off distance required.
LO Explain the influence of V1 and V2MIN on

take-off distance.
Page 235
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the time interval allowed for

between engine failure and recognition
when assessing the TOD.
LO Explain the effect of a miscalculation of

V1 on the take-off distance required.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 01 03 Accelerate-stop distance

LO Explain the accelerate-stop distance for
for all engines operating and one
engine inoperative.
LO Explain the effect of using a stopway

on
the
accelerate-stop
distance
required.
LO Explain the effect of miscalculation of

V1 on the accelerate-stop
distance
required.
LO Explain the effect of runway slope on

the accelerate-stop distance.
LO Explain the additional time allowance

for
accelerate-stop
distance
determination
and
discuss
the
deceleration procedure.
LO Explain the use of brakes, anti-skid,

use of reverse thrust, ground spoilers
or
lift
dumpers,
brake
energy
absorption limits, delayed temperature
rise and tyre limitations.
032 04 01 04 Balanced field length concept

LO Define the term balanced field length.
LO Understand the relationship between

take-off
distance,
accelerate-stop
distance and V1 when using a balanced
field.
LO Describe the applicability of a balanced

field length.
032 04 01 05 Unbalanced field length concept
Page 236
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Define the
length.
term
unbalanced
LO Describe
the
applicability
unbalanced field length.
field
an
of
LO Explain the effect of a stopway on the

allowed take-off mass and appropriate
V1 when using an unbalanced field.
LO Explain the effect of a clearway on the

allowed take-off mass and appropriate
V1 when using an unbalanced field.
032 04 01 06 Runway Length-Limited

Mass (RLTOM)
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
Take-Off
LO Define
RLTOM
for
balanced
unbalanced field length.
and
actual
LO Explain the difference between the flatrated and

non-flat-rated
part
in
performance charts.
LO Determine
the
changes
in
the
configuration, power, thrust and speed
in the take-off flight-path segments.
LO Determine the differences in

gradient requirements for two,
and four-engine aeroplanes.
032 04 01 07 Take-off climb

LO Define the segments
take-off flight path.
of the
climbthree
LO State the maximum bank angle when

flying at V2.
LO Explain the effects of aeroplane

and
meteorological variables on the takeoff climb.
LO Describe the influence of

airspeed
selection, acceleration and turns on the
climb gradients, best
rate-of-climb
speed and best angle-of-climb speed.
Page 237
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Determine the
mass.
climb-limited
take-off
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 01 08 Obstacle-limited take-off

LO Describe the operational regulations for
obstacle clearance in the net take-off
flight path.
LO Define actual
and net
take-off flight
path with one engine inoperative in
accordance with CS-25.
LO Determine the effects of aeroplane and

meteorological
variables
on
the
determination of obstacle-limited takeoff mass.
LO Determine the obstacle-limited take-off

mass.
032 04 01 09 Performance-limited take-off mass

LO Define
mass.
performance-limited
take-off
032 04 01 10 Take-off performance on wet and

contaminated runways
LO Explain the differences between the
take-off performance determination on
a wet or contaminated runway and on
a dry runway.
032 04 01 11 Use of reduced and derated thrust

LO Explain
the
advantages
disadvantages of using reduced
derated thrust.
and
and
LO Explain the difference between reduced

and derated thrust.
LO Explain when reduced and derated

thrust may and may not be used.
Page 238
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Explain the effect of using reduced and
derated thrust on take-off performance
including take-off speeds,
take-off
distance,
climb
performance
and
obstacle clearance.
LO Explain the
assumed
temperature
method for determining reduced thrust
performance.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 01 12 Take-off
performance
using
different take-off flap settings
LO Explain
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of using different takeoff flap settings to optimise
the
performance-limited take-off mass.
032 04 01 13 Take-off
performance
using
increased V2 speeds
(improved
climb performance)
LO Explain
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of using increased V2
speeds.
LO Explain under what circumstances this

procedure can be used.
032 04 01 14 Brake-energy and tyre-speed limit

LO Explain
the
effects
on
take-off
performance of brake-energy and tyrespeed limits.
LO Explain under which

becomes limiting.
conditions
this
032 04 01 15 Use of aeroplane flight data

LO Determine the maximum masses that
satisfy all the regulations for take-off
from the aeroplane performance data
sheets.
Page 239
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Determine the relevant speeds for
from the aeroplane performance data
sheets.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 02 00 Climb
032 04 02 01 Climb techniques
constant IAS.
of
climbing
with
LO Explain the effect of

constant Mach number.
climbing
with
LO Explain the correct sequence of climb

speeds for jet transport aeroplanes.
LO Determine the effect on TAS when

climbing in and above the troposphere
at constant Mach number.
032 04 02 02 Influence of
performance
variables
on
climb
LO Explain the effect of aeroplane mass on

the rate of climb (ROC).

variables on ROC.
meteorological
LO Explain the
effect
of
aeroplane
acceleration
during a
climb
with
constant IAS or Mach number.
LO Explain the effect on the operational

speed limit when climbing at constant
IAS.
of

LO Explain the term cross over altitude
which
occurs during the climb speed
schedule (IASMach number).
LO Calculate the time to climb.
032 04 03 00 Cruise
032 04 03 01 Cruise techniques
Page 240
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Define the cruise procedures maximum
endurance and maximum range.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 03 02 Maximum endurance

LO Explain fuel flow in relation to TAS and
thrust.
LO Find
the
endurance.
speed
for
maximum
032 04 03 03 Maximum range

LO Define the term maximum range.
032 04 03 04 Long-range cruise

LO Define the term long-range cruise.
LO Explain differences between flying the

speed for long
range and
maximum
range with regard to fuel-flow and
speed stability.
032 04 03 05 Influence of variables

performance
on
cruise
LO Explain the effect and CG position and

actual mass of aircraft on range and
endurance.
LO Explain the effect of altitude on range

and endurance.
LO Explain the effect of meteorological

variables on range and endurance.
032 04 03 06 Cruise altitudes

LO Define the term optimum altitude.
LO Explain the factors which affect
choice of optimum altitude.
x
the
LO Explain the factors which might affect

or limit
the
maximum
operating
altitude.
LO Explain the necessity for step climbs.
Page 241
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
boundary
LO Analyse the influence

of bank angle,
mass and 1.3G buffet onset factor on a
step climb.
LO Describe
(BOB).
the buffet
onset
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 03 07 Cost Index (CI)

LO Define the term cost index.
LO Understand the reason for economical

cruise speed.

LO Determine the all-engines
operating
power settings and
speeds from the
aeroplane performance data sheets for:
maximum range;
maximum endurance;
high-speed and normal cruise;
high and low-speed buffet
(speed/Mach number only).
LO Determine the selection

of cruise
technique considering cost
indexing
and passenger requirements
against
company requirements.
LO Determine the fuel consumption from

the aeroplane performance data sheets
for
various
cruise
configurations,
holding, approach and transit to an
alternate in normal conditions and after
an engine failure.
032 04 04 00 En route one engine inoperative

032 04 04 01 Drift down
LO Describe the determination of en route
flight path data with one
engine
inoperative
in
accordance
with
CS 25.123.
LO Determine the
minimum
obstacleclearance height prescribed in the
Page 242
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Define the speed during drift down.
LO Explain the influence of deceleration on

the drift-down profiles.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 04 02 Influence of variables on the en

route
one
engine
inoperative
performance
LO Identify the factors which affect the en
route net flight path.

LO Find one-engine-out service
ceiling,
range and endurance
from
given
engine inoperative charts.
LO Find
the
maximum
continuous
power/thrust
settings
from
given
engine inoperative charts.
032 04 05 00 Descent
032 04 05 01 Descent techniques
LO Explain the effect of descending
at
LO Explain the effect of descending at with

constant IAS.
LO Explain the
correct
descent
speeds for
aeroplanes.
sequence
of
jet
transport
LO Determine the effect on TAS when

descending
in
and
above
the
troposphere at constant Mach number.
LO Describe the following limiting speeds

for descent:
maximum operating speed (VMO);

maximum Mach number (MMO).
LO Explain the effect of a descent at

constant Mach number on the margin
to low and high-speed buffet.
Page 243
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 05 02 Influence of variables on descent

performance
LO Explain
the
influence
of
mass,
configuration and altitude on rate of
descent and glide angle.

LO Determine the following information for
all-engines operating and
one engine
inoperative
from
the
aeroplane
performance data sheets:
descent rates;
time and distance for descent;
fuel used during descent.
032 04 06 00 Approach and landing

032 04 06 01 Approach requirements
LO Describe the CS-25
the approach climb.
requirements for
LO Describe the CS-25

the landing climb.
requirements for

pressure altitude on approach and
landing-climb performance.
032 04 06 02 Landing field-length requirement

LO Describe
the
landing
distance
determined according to
CS 25.125
(demonstrated landing distance).
LO Recall
the
landing
field-length
requirements
for
dry,
wet
and
contaminated runways in the applicable
LO Define the Landing Distance Available

(LDA).
032 04 06 03 Influence of variables on landing

performance
Page 244
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the effect of runway slope,

surface conditions and wind on the
maximum landing mass for a
given
runway length in accordance with the
LO Explain the effect on landing distance

and maximum allowable landing mass
of the following devices affecting:
deceleration;
reverse;
anti-skid;
ground spoilers or lift dumpers;
autobrakes.

pressure altitude on the
maximum
landing mass for a given
runway
length.
LO Explain the effect of hydroplaning on

landing distance required.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
032 04 06 04 Quick turnaround limit

LO Define the quick turnaround limits and
explain their purpose.

LO Determine the field length required for
landing with a given landing mass from
the aeroplane performance data sheets
in accordance
with the
applicable
LO Determine the
landing and approach
climb-limited landing mass from the
aeroplane performance data sheets.
LO Determine the landing-field

lengthlimited
landing
mass
from
the
aeroplane performance data sheets.
LO Find the
structural-limited
landing
mass from the aeroplane performance
data sheets.
Page 245
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Calculate
the
maximum
landing mass as the lowest of:
allowable
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL/ ATPL
IR
approach climb and landing climblimited landing mass;

landing-field length-limited
landing mass;
structural-limited landing mass.
LO Determine
the
maximum
quick
turnaround mass and time under given
conditions
from
the
aeroplane
performance data sheets.
LO Determine the limiting landing mass in

respect of PCN.
Page 246
IR
CPL

Subject: 033 - FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING - FLIGHT

PLANNING AND MONITORING
ATPL(A) CPL(A) ATPL(H)/IR ATPL(H)
CPL(H) IR(A) & (H)
Time
2:00
1:30
2:00
1:30
1:30
1:30
allowed
(hours)
033 01
05
05
05
05
05
033 02
033 03
10
10
XX
10
10
10
XX
10
XX
10
033 04
033 05
08
05
08
05
08
05
08
05
08
05
033 06
Total
questions
05
05
05
05
05
XX
10
05
08
05
05
43
33
43
33
33
33
F. SUBJECT 033 FLIGHT PLANNING & MONITORING

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
033 00 00 00
FLIGHT
PLANNING
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
AND
MONITORING
Page 247
033 01 00 00 FLIGHT PLANNING

FLIGHTS

FOR
VFR
Remark: Using
training
route
manual VFR charts or the European
Central Question
Bank
(ECQB)
annexes.
033 01 01 00 VFR navigation plan
033 01 01 01 Routes, airfields,
heights
altitudes from VFR charts
and
x
LO Calculate the minimum pressure or

true altitude from minimum gridarea altitude using OAT and QNH.
LO Calculate
the
vertical
and/or
horizontal distance and time to
climb to a given level or altitude.
LO Calculate
and/or
time to
level or
the
frequency
and/or
identifiers of radio-navigation aids
from charts.
LO Select routes and

altitudes taking
the following criteria into account:
classification of airspace;
controlled airspace;
uncontrolled airspace;
restricted areas;
minimum safe altitude;
VFR semicircular rules;
conspicuous points;
navigation aids.
the
vertical
horizontal distance and
descend from a given
altitude.
LO Find
033 01 01 02 Courses and distances from VFR
Page 248

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
charts
x
LO Calculate, or obtain from the chart,

courses and distances.
LO Find the highest obstacle within

a
given distance on either side of the
course.
LO Find the following data from the

chart and transfer them to the
navigation plan:
LO Explain the reasons for studying the

visual departure procedures and the
available approach procedures.
LO Find all visual procedures which can

be expected
at the
departure,
destination and alternate airfields.
LO Find the following data

charts or directory:
LO Choose waypoints in
with specified criteria.
accordance
waypoints and/or turning

points;
distances;
true/magnetic courses.
033 01 01 03 Aerodrome
charts
aerodrome directory
and
from
the
aerodrome regulations and

opening hours;
terrain high points and manmade
structures;
altitudes;
courses and radials;
helipads (for helicopters only);
any other relevant information.
033 01 01 04 Communications
and
navigation planning data
radio-
LO Find the communication frequencies

and call signs for the following:
control agencies and service

facilities;
Page 249

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Flight Information Services

(FIS);
weather information stations;
Automatic Terminal
Information Service (ATIS).
x
LO Complete the navigation plan with

the courses and distances as taken
from charts.
LO Find the
routes.
arrival
LO Determine the position of Top of

Climb (ToC) and Top of Descend
(ToD) from given appropriate data.
LO Determine variation and

magnetic courses.
calculate
LO Calculate the True Airspeed (TAS)

from given aircraft
performance
data, altitude
and
Outside-Air
Temperature (OAT).
LO Calculate
Wind
Correction
Angles (WCA) and Drift and Ground
Speeds (GS).
LO Calculate
individual
and
accumulated times for each leg to
Find the frequency and/or identifier

LO of the appropriate radio-navigation
aids.
033 01 01 05 Completion of navigation plan
departure
033 02 00 00 FLIGHT PLANNING

FLIGHTS
and
FOR
IFR
Remark:
Using
training
route
manual IFR charts or the ECQB
annexes.
033 02 01 00 IFR navigation plan
033 02 01 01 Airways and routes
LO Select the preferred
airway(s)
or
Page 250

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
route(s) considering:
altitudes and flight levels;

standard routes;
ATC restrictions;
shortest distance;
obstacles;
any other relevant data.
033 02 01 02 Courses and distances from en

route charts
LO Determine courses and distances.
LO Determine bearings and distances

of waypoints from radio-navigation
aids.
033 02 01 03 Altitudes
LO Define
the
altitudes:
following
minimum
Minimum En route Altitude

(M EA);
Minimum Obstacle-Clearance
Altitude (MOCA);
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
(MORA);
Grid Minimum Off-Route
Altitude (Grid MORA);
Maximum Authorised Altitude
(MAA);
Minimum Crossing Altitude
(MCA);
Minimum Holding Altitude
(MHA).
LO Extract
the
following
minimum
altitudes from the chart(s):
Minimum En route Altitude

(M EA);
Minimum Obstacle-Clearance
Altitude (MOCA);
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
(MORA);
Grid Minimum Off-Route
altitude (Grid MORA);
Maximum Authorised Altitude
(MAA);
Minimum Crossing Altitude
(MCA);
Page 251

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
Minimum Holding Altitude

(MHA).
033 02 01 04 Standard Instrument Departures

(SIDs) and Standard
Arrival
Routes (STARs)
studying
LO State the reasons why SID and

STAR charts show procedures only
in a pictorial presentation style
which is not to scale.
LO Interpret all data and information

represented on SID and
STAR
charts, particularly:
routings,
distances,
courses,
radials,
altitudes/levels,
frequencies,
restrictions.
LO Identify
LO State the reasons for being familiar

with instrument-approach
procedures and appropriate data for
departure, destination and alternate
airfields.
LO Select instrument-approach
Procedures appropriate for
departure, destination and alternate
airfields.
LO Interpret all procedures,

data and
information
represented
on
instrument-approach charts,
particularly:
LO Explain the reasons

SID and STAR charts.
might be
flight.
for
SIDs and STARs which

relevant to a planned
033 02 01 05 Instrument-approach charts
courses and radials;

distances;
Page 252

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
altitudes/levels/heights;
restrictions;
obstructions;
frequencies;
speeds and times;
Decision Altitudes/Heights
(DA/ H);
(DA/H) and Minimum Descent
Altitudes/Heights (MDA/H);
visibility and Runway Visual
Ranges (RVR);
approach light systems.
033 02 01 06 Communications
and
navigation planning data
radiox
LO Complete the navigation plan with

the
courses,
distances
and
frequencies taken from charts.
LO Find
the
Standard
Instrument
Departure and Arrival Routes to be
flown and/or to be expected.
LO Determine the position of Top of

Climb (ToC) and Top of Descent
(ToD) from given appropriate data.
LO Determine variation and

magnetic/true courses.
calculate
LO Calculate True Airspeed (TAS) from

given aircraft performance
data,
altitude and Outside-Air emperature
(OAT).
LO Find the communication frequencies

and call signs for the following:
control agencies and service

facilities;
Flight Information Services
(FIS);
weather information stations;
Automatic Terminal
Information Service (ATIS).
LO Find
the
frequency
and/or
identifiers of radio-navigation aids.
033 02 01 07 Completion of navigation plan
Page 253

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Calculate Wind Correction Angles

(WCA) / Drift and Ground
Speeds (GS).
LO Determine all relevant

altitudes/levels, and particularly
MEA, MOCA, MORA, MAA, MCA, MRA
and MSA.
LO Calculate
individual
and
accumulated times for each leg to
033 03 00 00 FUEL PLANNING

033 03 01 00 General
033 03 02
LO Convert to
volume,
mass and
density given in different
units
which are
commonly
used in
aviation.
LO Determine relevant data from the

Flight Manual, such as fuel capacity,
fuel flow/consumption at different
power/thrust settings, altitudes and
atmospheric conditions.
LO Calculate
the
attainable
flight
time/range
from
given
fuel
flow/consumption
and
available
amount of fuel.
LO Calculate the required fuel from

given fuel flow/consumption and
required time/range to be flown.
LO Calculate the required fuel for a VFR

flight
from
given
expected
meteorological
conditions
and
expected
delays under
defined
conditions.
LO Calculate the required fuel for an

IFR flight from
given expected
meteorological
conditions
and
expected
delays under
defined
conditions.
00 Pre-flight
fuel
planning
for
Page 254

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
commercial flights
033 03 02 01 Taxiing fuel
x
LO Define trip fuel and name the

segments of flight for which the trip
fuel is relevant.
LO Determine the trip fuel for the flight

by using data from the navigation
plan and fuel tables and/or graphs
from the Flight Manual.
having
LO State and explain the requirements

for contingency fuel according to
the
applicable
operational
requirements.
LO Calculate the contingency fuel by

using requirements according to the
applicable
operational
requirements.
LO State and explain the requirements

for contingency fuel according to
the
applicable
operational
requirements.

applicable operational requirements
for IFR flights.
LO Determine the fuel required for

engine
start
and
taxiing
by
consulting the fuel-usage tables
and/or graphs from
the Flight
Manual taking into account all the
relevant conditions.
033 03 02 02 Trip fuel
033 03 02 03 Reserve fuel and its components

Contingency fuel
LO Explain the reasons
contingency fuel.
for
Page 255

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL

for VFR
flights
in a
hostile
environment.

for VFR flights in a non-hostile
environment.
Alternate fuel
LO Explain the reasons and regulations
for having alternate fuel and name
the segments of flight for which the
fuel is relevant.
LO Calculate the
alternate fuel
in
accordance
with the
applicable
operational
requirements
and
relevant data from
the navigation
plan and the Flight Manual.
LO Calculate the
alternate fuel
in
accordance
with the
applicable
operational
requirements
and
relevant data from
the navigation
plan and the Flight Manual.
Final reserve fuel
for having final reserve fuel.
LO Calculate the final

reserve fuel for
an aeroplane with piston engines
and for an aeroplane with turbinepower units in accordance with the
and by using relevant data from the
Flight Manual.
LO Calculate the final reserve fuel for a

VFR flight (by day with reference to
visual landmarks)
in accordance
Page 256

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
with the
applicable
operational
requirements and by using relevant
data from the Flight Manual.
LO Calculate the final reserve fuel for a
IFR flight in accordance with the
and by using relevant data from the
Flight Manual.
Additional fuel
for having additional fuel.
LO Calculate the additional fuel for an

IFR flight without a destination
alternate in accordance with the
for an isolated aerodrome.
LO Calculate
the additional fuel for a

flight to an isolated heliport in
accordance
with
the
applicable
033 03 02 04 Extra fuel

for having extra fuel in accordance
with the
applicable
operational
requirements.

for having extra fuel in accordance
with the
applicable
operational
requirements.
LO Calculate
LO Calculate the total fuel required for

a flight.
LO Complete the fuel log.
the possible extra

under given conditions.
fuel
033 03 02 05 Calculation of total fuel

and
completion of the fuel section of
the navigation plan (fuel log)
Page 257

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
033 03 03 00 Specific
procedures
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
fuel-calculation
033 03 03 01 Decision-point procedure

for the decision-point procedure as
stated in the applicable operational
requirements.
LO Calculate the contingency fuel and

trip fuel required in accordance with
the decision-point procedure.
033 03 03 02 Isolated-aerodrome procedure

LO Explain the basic procedures for an
isolated aerodrome as stated in the
applicable
operational
requirements.
LO Calculate the additional

fuel for
aeroplanes
with
reciprocating
engines according to the isolatedaerodrome procedures.

fuel for
aeroplanes with turbine
engines
according to the isolated-aerodrome
procedures.
033 03 03 03 Predetermined point procedure

LO Explain the
basic idea of the
predetermined-point procedure as
requirements.

fuel for
aeroplanes
with
reciprocating
engines
according
to
the
predetermined-point procedure.

fuel for
aeroplanes with turbine
engines
according to the
predeterminedpoint procedure.
Page 258

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
033 03 03 04 Fuel-tankering
LO Explain the basic idea
tankering procedures.
fuel-
LO Explain that there is an optimum

fuel quantity to be tankered (as a
function of the fuel-price
ratio
between departure and destination
airports and air distance to fly).
LO Calculate tankered fuel by using

given appropriate graphs, tables
and/or data.
of
033 03 03 05 Isolated-heliport procedure

LO Explain the
basic idea of the
isolated-heliport
procedures
as
requirements.
LO Calculate
the
additional
fuel
according to the isolated-heliport
procedures
as
stated
in
the
for flying IFR.
LO Calculate
the
additional
fuel
according to the isolated-heliport
procedures
as
stated
in
the
for flying VFR and navigating by
means other than by reference to
visual landmarks.
033 04 00 00 PRE-FLIGHT PREPARATION

033 04 01 00 NOTAM briefing
033 04 01 01 Ground facilities and services
LO Check that the ground facilities and
services required for the planned
flight are available and adequate.
033 04 01 02 Departure,
destination
alternate aerodromes
and
Page 259

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Find and analyse the latest state at

the departure,
destination
and
alternate aerodromes, in
particular
for:
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Confirm
the optimum
altitude/FL
from given wind, temperature and
aircraft data.
LO Confirm true altitudes from given

atmospheric data to ensure that
statutory minimum clearance
is
attained.
LO Confirm
opening hours;
Work in Progress (WIP);
special procedures due to
Work in Progress (WIP);
obstructions;
changes of frequencies for
communications, navigation
aids and facilities.
033 04 01 03 Airway routings

structure
and
airspace
LO Find and analyse the latest en route

state for:
airway(s) or route(s);
restricted, danger and
prohibited areas;
changes of frequencies for
communications, navigation
aids and facilities.
033 04 02 00 Meteorological briefing

033 04 02 01 Extraction
and
analysis
of
relevant
data
from
meteorological documents
Remark: This item is taught and
examined in subject 050.
033 04 02 02 Update of navigation plan using
the
latest
meteorological
information
magnetic
ground speeds.
headings
and
Page 260

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Confirm the individual leg times and

the total time en route.
LO Confirm the total time en route for

the trip to the destination.
LO Confirm
the
total
time
from
destination to the alternate airfield.
of
LO Calculate the position of a PET and

the ETA at the PET from given
relevant data.
of
LO Calculate the position of a PSR and

the ETA at the PSR from
given
relevant data.
033 04 02 03 Update of mass and balance

033 04 02 04 Update of performance data
examined
in subject
032
aeroplanes and subject 034
helicopters.
for
for
033 04 02 05 Update of fuel log

LO Calculate the revised fuel data in
accordance
with
the
changed
conditions.
033 04 03 00 Point of Equal Time (PET) and
Point of Safe Return (PSR)
033 04 03 01 Point of Equal Time (PET)
LO Define PET.
LO Explain
the
basic
determination of PET.
idea
033 04 03 02 Point of Safe Return (PSR)

LO Define PSR.
LO Explain
the
basic
determination of PSR.
idea
Page 261

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
033 05 00 00 ICAO FLIGHT PLAN (ATS Flight

Plan)
033 05 01 00 Individual Flight Plan
033 05 01 01 Format of Flight Plan
LO State the reasons for a fixed format
of an ICAO ATS Flight Plan (FPL).
LO Determine the correct entries to

complete an
FPL plus decode and
interpret the entries in a completed
FPL, particularly for the following:
the
LO Explain the difference between

an
Individual Flight Plan (FPL) and a
Repetitive Flight Plan (RPL).
LO Explain the basic idea of an RPL and

state the general requirements for
aircraft identification (Item 7);

flight rules and type of flight
(Item 8);
number and type of aircraft
and wake-turbulence category
(Item 9);
equipment (Item 10);
departure aerodrome and time
(Item 13);
route (Item 15);
destination aerodrome, total
estimated elapsed time and
alternate aerodrome
(Item 16);
other information (Item 18);
supplementary information (Item
19).
033 05 01 02 Completion of an ATS Flight Plan

(FPL)
LO Complete the FPL by using
information from the following:
navigation plan;
fuel plan;
operators records for basic
aircraft information.
033 05 02 00 Repetitive Flight Plan
Page 262

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
its use.
033 05 03
00 Submission of an ATS Flight Plan

(FPL)
033 06 00
00 FLIGHT MONITORING AND INFLIGHT REPLANNING
033 06 01
00 Flight monitoring
033 06 01
01 Monitoring of track and time
033 06 01
LO Assess deviations from the planned

course, headings (by maintaining
desired courses) and times.
LO State the
deviations.
LO Calculate the ground speed by using

actual in-flight parameters.
LO Calculate the expected leg times by

using actual flight parameters.
LO Explain why fuel

checks
must be
carried out in flight at regular
intervals and why relevant fuel data
must be recorded.
LO Assess deviations of
consumption
from
consumption.
possible
LO Calculate the fuel

quantities used,
fuel
consumption
and
fuel
remaining at navigation checkpoints
/waypoi nts.
LO Compare the
actual
with
the
planned fuel consumption by means
of calculation
or
flight-progress
reasons
for
possible
02 In-flight fuel management
LO State the
deviations.
reasons
actual fuel
planned
for
Page 263

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
chart.
LO Assess the remaining range and
endurance by means of calculation
or flight-progress chart.
LO Justify that
the commander
is
responsible that even in case of
diversion the remaining fuel
is not
less than the fuel required to
proceed to an aerodrome where a
safe landing can be made, with final
reserve fuel remaining.
LO Perform
in-flight
updates,
if
necessary, based on the results of
in-flight monitoring, specifically by:
033 06 01 03 Monitoring
parameters
of
primary
flight
Explain
the
methodology
for
monitoring
of
primary
flight
parameters during the application of
the procedures requiring a high
flight crew workload within a short
time frame (including monitoring of
primary flight
parameters,
in
particular pitch, thrust and speed).
033 06 02 00 In-flight replanning
in case of
deviation from planned data
selecting a new
destination/alternate
aerodrome;
adjusting flight parameters
and power settings.
LO Explain why, in the case of an inflight update, the commander has

to check the following:
the suitability of the new

destination and/or alternate
aerodrome;
meteorological conditions on
revised routing and at revised
destination and/or alternate
Page 264

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
aerodrome;
the aircraft must be able to
land with the prescribed final
reserve fuel.
LO Assess the revised

destination/
alternate aerodrome
landing mass
from given latest data.
Page 265

Subject: 034 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING - PERFORMANCE

(HELICOPTERS)
Exam length, total questions and distribution of questions
ATPL(A) CPL(A) ATPL(H)/IR ATPL(H) CPL(H) IR(A) & (H)
Time
XX
1:00
00:45
1:00
XX
IR(A)XX
&
allowed
(hours)
034 01
XX
XX
15
15
15
034 02
XX
XX
05
05
05
034 03
XX
XX
05
05
XX
034 04
XX
XX
10
10
XX
Total
XX
XX
35
35
20
questions
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
G. SUBJECT 034 PERFORMANCE (HELICOPTER)

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
030 00 00 00 FLIGHT
PERFORMANCE
PLANNING
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
AND
Page 266

034 00 00 00 PERFORMANCE HELICOPTER

034 01 00 00 GENERAL
034 01 01 00 Performance legislation
034 01 01 01 Airworthiness requirements
LO Interpret
the
airworthiness
requirements in CS-27 and CS-29 as
related to helicopter performance.
LO Name the
general
differences
between helicopters
as certified
according to CS-27 and CS-29.
LO State the responsibility to

comply
with the operational procedures.
LO Interpret
the
European
regulation on operations.
034 01 01 02 Operational regulations
Union
LO Use and interpret diagrams and

tables associated with
CAT A and
CAT B procedures in order to select
and develop class
1, 2 and 3
performance profiles according to
available heliport size and
location
(surface or elevated).
LO Use and interpret diagrams and
tables
associated
with
CAT B
procedures in order to
select and
develop
class-3
single-engine
helicopter
performance
profiles
according to available heliport size
and location (surface or elevated).
Page 267

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Interpret
the
charts
showing
minimum clearances associated with
Category A & B procedures.
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
034 01 02 00 General performance theory

034 01 02 01 Stages of flight
LO Explain
flight:
the
following
stages
of
take-off,
climb,
level flight,
descent,
approach and landing.
LO Describe the necessity for different

take-off and landing procedures.
034 01 02 02 Definitions and terms
Category A;
Category B;
Performance Class 1, 2 and 3;
congested area;
elevated heliport;
helideck;
heliport;
hostile environment;
maximum approved passenger
seating configuration;
non-hostile environment;
obstacle;
rotor Radius (R);
take-off mass;
Touchdown and Lift-Off Area
(TLOF);
safe forced landing;
speed for best rate of climb
(Vy);
never exceed speed (VNE);
velocity landing gear extended
(VLE);
velocity landing gear operation
(VLO);
cruising speed and maximum
cruising speed.
Page 268

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
x
LO Define the terms climb angle and

climb gradient.
LO Define the terms flight-path angle

and flight-path gradient.
LO Define
VmaxRange
(speed
for
maximum range) and VmaxEnd (speed
for maximum endurance).
LO Define and calculate the gradient by

using power, wind and helicopter
mass.
LO Explain
the
terms
operational
ceiling and absolute ceiling.
LO Explain
OEI.
IR
CPL
reported headwind component;

Take-off Decision Point (TDP);
Defined Point After Take-Off
(DPATO) ;
Take-Off Distance Required
(TODR);
Take-Off Distance Available
(TODA);
Distance Required (DR);
Rejected Take-Off Distance
Required (RTODR);
Rotation Point (RP);
Committal Point (CP);
Defined Point Before Landing
(DPBL);
Landing Decision Point (LDP);
Landing Distance Available
(LDA);
Landing Distance Required
(LD R);
Take-off safety speed (V1);
Take-off safety speed for Cat A
rotorcraft (VTOSS)(V2).
LO Understand
significance
and OEI.
the
of the
meaning
and
acronyms AEO
the term
service
ceiling
Page 269

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Hovering In Ground
Effect (HIGE)
and Hovering out of Ground Effect
(HOGE).
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
034 01 02 03 Power required/power available

curves
LO Understand and interpret the graph
power
required/power
available
versus TAS.
034 01 02 04 Critical height-velocity graphs
LO Understand and interpret the critical
height-velocity graphs.
034 01 02 05 Influencing
performance
variables
on
LO Explain how the following factors

effect helicopter performance:
pressure altitude;
humidity;
temperature;
wind;
helicopter mass;
helicopter configuration;
helicopter CG.
034 02 00 00 PERFORMANCE
CLASS
3
SINGLE-ENGINE
HELICOPTERS
ONLY
034 02 01 00 Effect of variables on singleengine helicopter performance
LO Determine wind component, altitude
and temperature for hovering, takeoff and landing.
Page 270

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain that operations are only

from/to heliports and over such
routes,
areas
and
diversions
contained
in
a
non-hostile
environment where a safe forced
landing can be carried out.
(Consider the exception: Operations
may be conducted in a
hostile
environment when approved).
LO Explain the
effect of temperature,
wind and altitude on climb, cruise
and descent performance.
be
LO Explain that if HIGE is unlikely to be

achieved, then
mass must
be
restricted to HOGE.
LO State that the

helicopter must be
capable of flying its intended track
without flying below the appropriate
minimum flight altitude and be able
to perform a safe forced landing.
LO Explain the effect of altitude on the

maximum endurance speed.
034 02 02 00 Take-off and landing (including

hover)
LO Explain the take-off
requirements.
and
landing
LO Explain the maximum allowed takeoff and landing mass.

LO Explain that mass
restricted to HIGE.
has
to
034 02 03 00 Climb, cruise and descent
034 02 04 00 Use of helicopter performance

data
034 02 04 01 Take-off (including hover)
LO Find the maximum wind component.
Page 271

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Find the maximum allowed take-off

mass for certain conditions.
LO Find the
critical
parameters.
LO Find the time, distance and fuel to

climb for certain conditions.
LO Find the rate of climb under given

conditions and the best rate-ofclimb speed VY.
LO Find the cruising speed and fuel

consumption for certain conditions.
LO Calculate the range and endurance

under given conditions.
LO Find the maximum wind component.
LO Find the maximum allowed landing

mass for certain conditions.
LO Find the
critical
parameters.
height-velocity
034 02 04 02 Climb
034 02 04 03 Cruise
034 02 04 04 Landing (including hover)
height-velocity
034 03 00 00 PERFORMANCE CLASS 2

General remark:
The
Learning
Objectives
for
Performance Class 2 are principally
identical with those of Performance
Class 1. (See 034 04 00 00)
Additional Learning
shown below.
Objectives
are
034 03 01 00 Operations without an assured

safe forced landing capability
of the
LO State the responsibility
operator in order to assure a safe
forced landing.
034 03 02 00 Take-off
Page 272

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
the
climb
and
LO State
requirements for take-off.
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
other
LO State the height above the take-off

surface at which at least the
requirements for the take-off flight
path for Performance Class 1 are to be
met.
LO State the requirements for the climb

capability for OEI.
LO State the options for a Performance

Class 2 operation in case of critical
power-unit failure at any point in
the approach path.
LO State the limitations for operations

to/from a helideck.
IR
CPL
034 03 03 00 Take-off Flight Path
034 03 04 00 Landing
CLASS
1
034 04 00 00 PERFORMANCE
HELICOPTERS
CERTIFICATED
ACCORDING TO CS-29 ONLY
034 04 01 00 Takeoff
034 04 01 01 Take-off distances
variables on the flight path and
take-off distances:
take-off with HIGE or HOGE;
take-off procedure;
obstacle clearances both
laterally and vertically;
take-off from non-elevated
heliports;
take-off from elevated
heliports or helidecks;
take-off from a Touchdown and
Lift-Off Area (TLOF).
variables on take-off distances:
mass;
take-off configuration;
bleed-air configurations.
Page 273

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
meteorological variables on take-off
distances:
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
x
LO Explain the take-off distances

for
specified
conditions
and
configuration for AEO and OEI.
LO Explain the effect of obstacles

the take-off distance required.
LO Explain the influence of V1 and VTOSS

speeds on the take-off distance.
LO State the assumed

between
engine
recognition.
time
and
LO Explain the effect of calculation

of
TDP and V1 on the take-off distance
required.
LO Explain that the flight must be

carried out visually up to TDP.
LO Explain
the
rejected
take-off
distance
required
for
specified
conditions and configuration for AEO
and OEI.
LO Explain the effect of calculation

of
V1 on the rejected take-off distance
required.
LO Explain
the
time-to-decide
allowance
(decision
time)
and
deceleration procedure.
IR
CPL
wind;
temperature;
pressure altitude.
034 04 01 02 Rejected
required
take-off
reaction
failure
on
distance
034 04 01 03 Landing distance from TDP with

V1 to a complete stop on the
ground
Page 274

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
x
LO Define the segments of the take-off

flight path.
LO Explain the effect of changes in the

configuration on power and speed in
the segments.
LO Explain
the
requirements for OEI.
LO State the minimum altitude over the

take-off path when flying at V1 to
VTOSS.
LO Describe the influence of airspeed

selection, acceleration and turns on
the climb gradient and best rate-ofclimb speed.
LO Explain the effect of climbing with

best rate-of-climb speed (VY).
LO Explain the influence of altitude on

VY.
LO Understand the relationship of takeoff distance and landing

distance
from TDP with V1 to a
complete
ground stop.
IR
CPL
034 04 01 04 Take-off climb
climb-gradient
034 04 01 05 Obstacle-limited take-off

LO Describe the operational regulations
for obstacle clearance of the takeoff flight path in the departure
sector with OEI.
034 04 01 06 Use of helicopter flight data
LO Determine
from
the
helicopter
performance
data
sheets
the
maximum masses that satisfy all
the regulations for take-off.
034 04 02 00 Climb
034 04 02 01 Climb techniques
Page 275

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL

LO Find the rate of climb and calculate
the time to climb to a given altitude.
LO Explain fuel flow in relation to TAS.
LO Explain the
endurance.
034 04 03 00 Cruise
034 04 03 01 Cruise techniques
LO Explain the cruise procedures for
maximum
endurance
and
maximum range.
034 04 03 02 Maximum endurance
for
maximum
for
maximum
for
maximum
LO Explain the factors which might

affect or limit the operating altitude.
LO Understand the relation between

power setting, fuel consumption,
cruising speed and altitude.
speed
034 04 03 03 Maximum range

LO Explain
range.
the
speed
034 04 03 04 Maximum cruise

LO Explain
cruise.
the
speed
034 04 03 05 Cruise altitudes

LO Determine the fuel consumption
from the helicopter
performance
data sheets in accordance with
altitude and helicopter mass.
034 04 04 00 En route one engine inoperative
034 04 04 01 Requirements
flights for OEI
for
en
route
Page 276

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
x
LO Explain the drift-down techniques.
LO State the reduction in the flightpath

width
when
navigational
accuracy can be achieved.
LO Find
the
single-engine
service
ceiling, range and endurance from
given engine-inoperative charts.
LO Find
the
maximum
continuous
power settings from given engineinoperative charts.
LO Find the amount of fuel to be

jettisoned
to
reduce
helicopter
mass.
LO Calculate the relevant

parameters
for drift-down procedures.
LO Explain the procedure for critical

power-unit failure prior to and after
the landing decision point.
LO Explain that the portion of

after the landing decision
must be carried out visually.
LO State the
flight-path
requirements.
clearance
IR
CPL
034 04 05 00 Descent
LO Find the
rate of descent and
calculate the time to descent to a
given altitude.
034 04 06 00 Landing
034 04 06 01 Landing requirements
LO State the requirements for landing.
034 04 06 02 Landing procedures
flight
point
Page 277

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the procedures and required

obstacle clearances for landings on
different heliports/helidecks.
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
x
IR
CPL

LO Determine
from
the
helicopter
performance
data
sheets
the
maximum masses that satisfy all
the regulations for landing.
Page 278

Subject: 040 - HUMAN PERFORMANCE

ATPL (A)
CPL (A)
ATPL(H)/IR ATPL(H)
Time
1:00
0:45
1:00
1:00
allowed
(hours)
CPL(H) IR(A) &(H)

0:45
0:45

040 01
040 02
02
33
01
26
02
33
02
01
33
01
26
01
26
040 03
Total
questions
13
48
09
36
13
48
13
09
48
09
36
09
36
H. SUBJECT 040 HUMAN PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
040 00 00 00
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
HUMAN PERFORMANCE
Page 279
IR
CPL

040 01 00 00
HUMAN
CONCEPTS
040 01 01 00
Human factors in aviation
040 01 01 01
Becoming a competent pilot
FACTORS:
BASIC
LO State that competency is based on

the knowledge, skill and ability of the
individual pilot.
LO Outline the factors in training that

will ensure the future competency of
the individual pilot.
LO Give an estimate of the accident rate

in commercial aviation in comparison
to other means of transport.
LO State
in
general
terms
the
percentage of aircraft accidents which
are caused by human factors.
LO Summarise the
modern aviation.
in
LO Identify the role of accident statistics

in developing a
strategy for future
improvements to flight safety.
LO Explain the three components of the

Threat and Error Management (TEM)
model.
LO Explain and give examples of latent

threats.
040 01 02 00
040 01 03 00
Accident statistics
accident
trend
Flight safety concepts
LO Explain and
give
examples
environmental threats.
of
Page 280

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain and give a definition of error

according to the TEM model of ICAO
Annex 1.
LO Give
examples
of
different
countermeasures which may be used
in order to manage threats, errors
and undesired aircraft states.
LO Explain
and
give
procedural error.
LO Explain
and
give
organisational threats.
examples
of
examples
of
LO Explain
and
give
examples
undesired aircraft states.
of
the
the
LO Analyse the interaction between the

various components of the SHELL
model.
LO Explain how the interaction between

individual
crew members can affect
flight safety.
LO Identify and explain the interaction

between flight crew and management
as a factor in flight safety.
LO Describe and compare the elements

of the SHELL model.
LO Summarise the relevance of
SHELL model to the work in
cockpit.
040 01 04 00
Safety culture
LO Distinguish between open

and closed cultures.
cultures
LO Illustrate
how safety
culture
reflected in national culture.
is
LO Question the established expression

safety first in a commercial entity.
Page 281

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Swiss
that
LO Distinguish between just culture and

non-punitive culture.
LO Name the five components which

form safety culture (according
to
James Reason).
LO State the units used in measuring

total and partial pressures of the
gases in the atmosphere.
LO State in terms of % and mm Hg the

values of oxygen, nitrogen and other
gases present in the atmosphere.
LO State that the volume percentage of

the gases in ambient air will remain
constant for all altitudes at which
conventional aircraft operate.
LO State the physiological significance of

the following laws:
Boyles Law;
Daltons Law;
Henrys Laws;
the General Gas Law.

LO State the ICAO standard temperature
LO Explain
James
Cheese Model.
Reasons
LO State the
important factors
promote a good safety culture.
040 02 01 00
Basics of flight physiology
040 02 01 01
The atmosphere
at Mean Sea Level and the Standard

Temperature Lapse Rate.
LO State at what approximate altitudes
in the
standard atmosphere the
atmospheric pressure will be 1/4, 1/2
and 3/4 of MSL pressure.
Page 282

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the
effects
of
increasing
altitude on the overall pressure and
partial pressures of the various gases
in the atmosphere.
LO Explain the
differences
in
expansion between
alveolar
ambient air when climbing.
LO State the condition

required
for
human beings to be able to survive at
any given altitude.
LO State and explain the importance of

partial pressure.
LO List the main components of the

respiratory system and their function.
LO Identify the different volumes of air

in the lungs and state the normal
respiratory rate.
LO State how oxygen and carbon dioxide

are transported throughout the body.
LO Explain the process by which oxygen

is transferred to the tissues and
carbon dioxide is eliminated from the
body and the oxygen requirement of
tissues.
LO Explain the role of carbon dioxide in

the
control
and
regulation
respiration.
040 02 01 02
Respiratory
system
and
LO Describe the
basic
external respiration
respiration.
LO List the
rate.
gas
and
circulatory
of
processes
of
and
internal
factors determining
pulse
Page 283

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Name the major components of the

circulatory system and describe their
function.
LO State the values for a normal pulse

rate and the average cardiac output
(heart rate stroke volume) of an
adult at rest.
LO Name the four chambers of the heart

and state the function
of the
individual chambers.
LO Differentiate between arteries, veins

and capillaries in their structure and
function.
LO State the functions of the coronary

arteries and veins.
LO Define systolic and diastolic blood

pressure.
LO State the normal

blood pressure
ranges and units of measurement.
LO State that in an average pilot blood

pressure will rise slightly with age as
the arteries lose their elasticity.
LO List the main constituents of the

blood and describe their functions.
LO Stress the function of haemoglobin in

the circulatory system.
LO Define
anaemia
common causes.
its
LO Indicate the effect of

increasing
altitude
on haemoglobin
oxygen
saturation.
and
state
Hypertension and hypotension

LO Define
hypertension
hypotension.
and
Page 284

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO List the effects that high and low

blood pressure will have on some
normal functions of the human body.
LO State that both hypotension and

hypertension may disqualify the pilot
from obtaining a medical clearance to
fly.
LO List the factors which can lead to

hypertension in an individual.
LO State the corrective actions that may

be taken
to reduce
high blood
pressure.
LO Stress that hypertension is the major

factor of strokes in the general
population.
LO Define the two major forms

of
hypoxia (hypoxic and anaemic), and
the common causes of both.
LO State the symptoms of hypoxia.
Coronary artery disease

LO Differentiate between
heart attack.
LO Explain the major
coronary disease.
LO
State
angina
risk
the role played
and
factors
by
for
physical
exercise in
reducing the chances of
developing coronary disease.
Hypoxia
LO State why
oxygen.
LO
living
tissues
require
State that healthy people are able to

compensate
for
altitudes up
approximately 10 00012 000 ft.
to
Page 285

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Name
the
three
physiological
thresholds
and
allocate
the
corresponding altitudes for each of
them.
LO State the altitude at which short-term

memory begins to be affected by
hypoxia.
LO Define the term Time

Consciousness (TUC).
LO Explain the dangers of flying above

10 000 ft without using additional
oxygen or being in a pressurised
cabin.
LO
of
Useful
LO State that
TUC
varies between
individuals,
but
the
approximate
values are:
a) for a person seated (at rest)
b) for a person moderately active
20 000 ft
30 000 ft
35 000 ft
40 000 ft
List
the
a) 30 min
b) 5 min
a) 12 min
b) not required
a) 3090 sec
b) not required
a) 1520 sec
b) not required
factors
determining
the
severity of hypoxia.
LO State the precautions
when giving blood.
LO
to be
taken
State the equivalent altitudes when

breathing ambient air and 100 %
oxygen for MSL and
approximately
10 000, 30 000 and 40 000 ft.
Hyperventilation
LO
Describe the role of carbon dioxide in

hyperventilation.
LO Define the term hyperventilation.
Page 286

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State that
hyperventilation may be
caused
by
psychological
or
physiological reasons.
LO List the signs and

hyperventilation.
LO State the normal range of cabin

pressure altitude
in
pressurised
commercial aircraft and
describe its
protective function for aircrew and
passengers.
LO
LO State the threshold for the onset of

decompression sickness in terms of
altitude.
LO State the approximate altitude above

which decompression sickness
is
likely to occur.
LO List the symptoms of decompression

sickness.
LO Indicate how decompression sickness

may be treated.
LO List the vital actions the crew has to

perform when cabin pressurisation is
lost.
List
the
factors
causing
hyperventilation.
LO
Describe
the
hyperventilation
coordination.
symptoms
of
effects
of
on
muscular
LO List the measures which may be

taken to counteract hyperventilation.
Decompression sickness/illness
Identify the causes of decompression

sickness in flight operation.
LO State how decompression

can be prevented.
sickness
Page 287

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Define the hazards of diving and
flying, and give the recommendations
associated with these activities.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the effects of acceleration

on the circulation and blood volume
distribution.
LO List the factors

determining the
effects of acceleration on the human
body.
LO Describe the measures which may be

taken
to
increase
tolerance
to
positive acceleration.
LO List
the
effects
of
positive
acceleration with respect to type,
sequence and the corresponding Gload.
LO State how the presence

of carbon
monoxide in the blood affects the
distribution of oxygen.
LO List the signs and symptoms

carbon-monoxide poisoning.
Acceleration
LO
Define linear, angular
and 'radial
acceleration'.
Carbon monoxide
LO
State how carbon monoxide may be

produced.
LO
Indicate
how
poisoning
can
countermeasures
adopted.
040 02 01 03
of
carbon-monoxide
be
treated
that
can
and
be
High-altitude environment
Ozone
LO State how an increase in altitude may

change the proportion of ozone in the
atmosphere.
Page 288

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
LO State the sources of radiation at high

altitude.
LO List the effects of excessive exposure

to radiation.
LO State the effect of sun storms on the

amount of radiation at high altitude.
LO List the harmful effects that may

result from the extra
radiation that
may be generated as the result of a
sun storm (solar flares).
LO List the methods of reducing the

effects of extra radiation that may be
generated as the result of a sun
storm (solar flares).
and
the
the
LO State the methods of reducing the

effects of insufficient humidity.
LO List the physiological effects of dry

cabin air on the human
body and
indicate measures to diminish these
effects. Stress the effects that
low
humidity can have on the efficient
functioning of the eye.
LO List the
ozone.
possible harmful
effects
of
IR
CPL
Radiation
Humidity
LO Define the terms
relative humidity.
humidity
LO List the factors which affect

relative
humidity
of
both
atmosphere and cabin air.
Extreme temperatures
LO Explain the change in the need for
oxygen of the human
body when
exposed to extreme environmental
temperatures.
Page 289

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
040 02 02 00
Man
and
environment:
sensory system
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
the
x
LO Name the main parts of the central

nervous system.
LO State the basic functions

of the
Central
Nervous System (CNS), the
Peripheral Nervous System (PNS) and
the Autonomic (vegetative) Nervous
System (ANS).
LO Discuss broadly how information is

processed by the
nervous systems
and the role of reflexes.
LO Define the division of the peripheral

nerves into sensory
and
motor
nerves.
LO State that a nerve impulse

electrochemical phenomenon.
LO Define the term sensory threshold.
LO Define
the
term
sensitivity,
especially in the context of vision.
LO Give examples of sensory adaptation.
LO Define the term habituation and

state its implication for flight safety.
LO Define the biological control systems

as neurohormonal processes that are
highly self-regulated in the normal
environment.
LO List the different senses.

LO State the multisensory
human perception.
040 02 02 01
040 02 02
Helicopter
02
nature
of
Central, peripheral and autonomic

nervous systems
is an
Vision
Functional anatomy
Page 290

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Name the most important parts of the

eye and the pathway to the visual
cortex.
LO State the basic functions of the parts

of the eye.
LO Define accommodation.
LO Distinguish between the functions of

the rod and cone cells.
LO Describe the distribution of rod and

cone cells in the retina and explain
their relevance on vision.
LO Explain the terms visual acuity,

visual
field,
central
vision,
peripheral vision and fovea and
explain their function in the process
of vision.
LO List the factors which may degrade

visual acuity and the importance of
lookout.
LO State the
limitations of night vision
and the different scanning techniques
by both night and day
(regularly
spaced eye movements each covering
an overlapping sector of about 10).
LO Explain the adaptation mechanism in

vision to cater for reduced and
increased levels of illumination.
LO State the time necessary for the eye

to adapt both to dark and bright
light.
LO State the effect

of hypoxia
smoking on night vision.
Visual
vision
foveal
and
peripheral
and
Page 291

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the basis of depth perception

and
its
relevance
to
flight
performance.
LO List the possible monocular cues for

depth perception.
LO State
the
problems
of
vision
associated with higher energy blue
light and ultraviolet rays.
LO List the measures which may be

taken to protect oneself from flash
blindness.
LO State
the
possible
problems
associated with contact lenses.
LO State the current rules/regulations

governing the wearing of corrective
spectacles and contact lenses when
operating as a pilot.
LO Explain the nature of colour blindness

and the significance of the blind spot
on the retina in detecting other traffic
in flight.
Binocular and monocular vision
LO Distinguish between
binocular vision.
monocular and
Defective vision
LO Explain long
sightedness,
sightedness and astigmatism.
short
the
causes
of
and
the
LO List
precautions that may be taken to
reduce the probability of vision
loss
due to:
presbyopia,
cataracts,
______________
LO List the types of sunglasses which

______________
glaucoma. could cause perceptional problems in
flight.
Page 292

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
040 02 02 03
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Hearing
Descriptive
anatomy
and
functional
LO State the audible range of the human

ear.
LO State the unit of measure

intensity of sound.
for the
LO Name the most important parts of the

ear and
the
associated
neural
pathway.
LO State the basic functions

different
parts of
the
system.
of the
auditory
LO Differentiate between the functions of

the vestibular
apparatus and the
cochlea in the inner ear.
LO State the role of the Eustachian tube

in equalising pressure between the
middle ear and the environment.
LO Indicate the effects of colds or flu on

the ability to equalise pressure in the
above.
LO State the decibel level of received

noise that will cause NIHL.
LO Indicate the factors, other than noise

level, which may lead to NIHL.
LO Identify the potential

occupational
risks which may cause hearing loss.
Hearing loss
LO Define the
main causes of
following hearing defects/loss:
conductive deafness;
Noise-Induced Hearing Loss
(NIHL);
presbycusis.
the
effects
LO Summarise
environmental noise on hearing.
the
of
Page 293

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO List the main sources of hearing loss

in the flying environment.
LO List the precautions that may be

taken to reduce the probability of
onset of hearing loss.
the
LO State the functions of the vestibular

apparatus on the ground and in
flight.
LO Distinguish
between the component
parts of the vestibular apparatus in
the detection of linear and
angular
acceleration as well as on gravity.
LO Explain
how the semicircular canals
are stimulated.
its
LO Indicate that vibration can cause

undesirable
human
responses
because of the resonance of the skull
and the eyeballs.
LO List the causes of motion sickness.
LO Describe the necessary actions to be

taken to counteract the symptoms of
motion sickness.
LO State the interaction between vision,

equilibrium,
proprioception
and
hearing to obtain spatial orientation
in flight.
LO Define the term illusion.
040 02 02 04
Equilibrium
Functional anatomy
LO List the
main elements
vestibular apparatus.
of
Motion sickness
LO Describe
airsickness
accompanying symptoms.
040 02 02 05
and
Integration of sensory inputs
Page 294

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Give examples of visual illusions

based on
shape constancy, size
constancy,
aerial
perspective,
atmospheric perspective, the absence
of focal or ambient cues, autokinesis,
vectional
false horizons and surface
planes.
LO Relate these illusions to problems

that may be experienced in flight and
identify the danger attached to them.
LO State the conditions which cause the

black-hole effect and empty-field
myopia.
LO Give examples
of approach and
landing illusions, state the danger
involved and give recommendations
to
avoid
or
counteract
these
problems.
LO State the
problems associated with
flickering lights (strobe lights, anticollision lights, etc.).
LO Give examples of vestibular illusions

such as somatogyral (the Leans),
Coriolis, somatogravic and G-effect
illusions.
LO Relate
the
above-mentioned
vestibular
illusions
to
problems
encountered in flight and
state the
dangers involved.
LO List and describe the function of the

proprioceptive senses (seat-of-thepants sense).
LO Relate illusions of the proprioceptive

senses to the problems encountered
during flight.
Page 295

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State that
the
seat-of-the-pants
sense is completely unreliable when
visual contact with the ground is lost
or when flying in IMC or poor visual
horizon.
LO Differentiate between vertigo, Coriolis

effect and spatial disorientation.
LO Explain
the
flicker
effect
(stroboscopic effect) and discuss the
countermeasures.
LO Explain how spatial disorientation can

result from a mismatch in sensory
input and information processing.
LO List the measures to prevent and/or

overcome spatial disorientation.
040 02 03
00 Health and hygiene
040 02 03
01 Personal hygiene
LO Summarise the
hygiene as a
performance.
040 02 03
Helicopter
role of personal
factor in human
02 Body rhythm and sleep

LO Name some internal
body rhythms
and their relevance to sleep.
LO Explain the term circadian rhythm.
LO State the approximate duration of a

free-running rhythm.
LO Explain
the
significance
of
internal clock in regulating
normal circadian rhythm.
the
the
LO State the effect of the circadian

rhythm of body temperature on an
individuals
performance
standard
and the effect on an individuals sleep
patterns.
Page 296

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Differentiate between REM and nonREM sleep.
LO Explain the function of

describe the effects of
sleep on performance.
LO Explain the simple calculations for the

sleep/wake credit/debit situation.
LO Explain how sleep debit can become

cumulative.
LO State the
time formula
for the
adjustment of body rhythms to the
new local time scale after crossing
time zones.
LO State the
problems
caused
by
circadian disrhythmia (jet lag) with
regard to an individuals performance
and sleep.
LO Differentiate between the effects of

westbound and eastbound travel.
LO Explain the interactive

effects of
circadian rhythm and vigilance on a
pilots performance during flight as
the duty day elapses.
LO Describe the main effects of lack of

sleep on an individuals performance.
LO List the possible coping strategies for

jet lag.
LO List and describe the stages

sleep cycle.
040 02 03 03
of a
sleep and
insufficient
IR
CPL
Problem areas for pilots

Common minor ailments
LO State the role of the Eustachian tube

in equalising pressure between the
middle ear and the environment.
Page 297

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State that the in-flight environment

may increase
the
severity
of
symptoms which may be minor while
on the ground.
LO List the negative effects of suffering

from colds or flu on flight operations
especially with regard to the middle
ear, the sinuses, and the teeth.
LO Indicate the effects of colds or flu on

the ability to
equalise
pressure
between the middle ear and the
environment.
LO State when a pilot should

seek
medical advice from an AME, and
when the aeromedical section of an
authority should be informed.
LO Describe the measures to prevent

and/or clear
problems
due to
pressure changes during flight.
LO Define barotrauma.
otic, sinus,
gastrointestinal and aerodontalgia (of
the teeth) barotraumas and explain
avoidance strategies.
LO Explain why
the effects of otic
barotrauma can be worse in the
descent.
LO State the effects

of gastrointestinal
upsets that may occur during flight.
LO List the precautions that should

be
observed to reduce the occurrence of
gastrointestinal upsets.
LO Indicate the
major
gastrointestinal upsets.
Entrapped gases and barotrauma
Gastrointestinal upsets
sources
of
Page 298

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define obesity.
LO State the cause of obesity.
LO State the harmful effects of obesity

on the following:
possibility of developing
coronary problems;
increased chances of developing

diabetes;
ability to withstand G forces;
the development of problems

with the joints of the limbs;
general circulatory problems;
ability to cope with hypoxia

and/or decompression sickness.
LO State
the
relationship
between
obesity and Body Mass Index (BMI).
LO Calculate the BMI of an individual

(given weight in kilograms and height
in metres) and state whether this BMI
indicates that
the
individual
is
underweight, overweight, obese or
within the normal range of body
weight.
LO Describe the problems associated with

Type 2 (mostly adult) diabetes
risk factors;
insulin resistance;
complications (vascular,
neurological) and the
consequences for the medical
licence;
pilots are not protected from Type

2 diabetes more than other
people.
Obesity
Back pain
Page 299

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Describe the typical back problems
(unspecific back pain, slipped disc)
that pilots have. Explain also the
ways of preventing and treating these
problems:
good sitting posture;
lumbar support;
good physical condition;
in-flight exercise, if possible;
physiotherapy.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the significance

of food
hygiene with regard to general health.
LO Stress the importance of and methods

to be adopted by aircrew especially
when travelling abroad to avoid
contaminated food and liquids.
LO List the major contaminating sources

in foodstuffs.
LO State the major

healthy diet.
of a
avoid
LO State the role vitamins and trace

elements are playing in a healthy
diet.
LO State the importance

hydration.
Food hygiene
constituents
LO State
the
measure
hypoglycaemia.
to
of
adequate
Tropical climates
LO List the problems associated
operating in tropical climates.
with
Page 300

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State the possible causes/sources of

incapacitation in tropical or poorly
developed countries with reference
to:
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
standards of hygiene;
quality of water supply;
insectborne diseases;
parasitic worms;
rabies or other diseases that
may be spread by contact with
animals;
sexually transmitted diseases.
LO State the precautions to be taken to

reduce the
risks
of
developing
problems in tropical areas.
Infectious diseases
LO State the major infectious diseases
that may kill or severely incapacitate
individuals.
LO State which preventative hygienic

measures, vaccinations, drugs and
other measures reduce the chances
of catching these diseases.
LO State the precautions which must be

taken to ensure that disease-carrying
insects are not transported between
areas.
040 02 03 04
Intoxication
Tobacco
LO State the harmful effects of tobacco

on:
the respiratory system;
the cardiovascular system;
the ability to resist hypoxia;
the ability to tolerate G forces;
night vision.
Caffeine
LO Indicate the level of caffeine dosage
at which performance is degraded.
Page 301

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the maximum acceptable limit

of alcohol for flight crew according to
the applicable regulations.
LO State
the
effects
consumption on:
of
LO List the factors which may be

associated with the development of
alcoholism.
LO Define the unit of alcohol and state

the approximate elimination
rate
from the blood.
LO State the maximum daily and weekly

intake of units of alcohol which may
be consumed
without
causing
damage to organs and systems in the
body.
LO Discuss the actions that might be

taken if a crew member is suspected
of being an alcoholic.
LO State the reasons why aviation

professions
are
particularly
vulnerable to the excessive use of
alcohol.
LO Besides
coffee,
indicate
beverages containing caffeine.
other
Alcohol
of
alcohol
the ability to reason;

inhibitions and self-control;
vision;
the sense of balance and
sensory illusions;
sleep patterns;
______________
LO
______________ State the effects alcohol may have if
consumed together with other drugs.
hypoxia.
LO List the signs
alcoholism.
and symptoms
Drugs and self-medication
Page 302

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the dangers associated with the

use of non-prescription drugs.
LO State the side effects of common

non-prescription drugs used to treat
colds, flu, hay fever and
other
allergies,
especially
medicines
containing
antihistamine
preparations.
LO Interpret the rules relevant to using

(prescription
or
non-prescription)
drugs that the pilot has not used
before.
LO Interpret the general

rule that if a
pilot is so unwell that they require
any medication, then they should
consider themselves unfit to fly.
in an
when
health
LO List those aircraft-component

parts
which if burnt may give off toxic
fumes.
LO State that incapacitation

is most
dangerous when its onset is insidious.
LO List the major

incapacitation.
in-flight
LO State the importance of crew to be

able to recognise and promptly react
upon incapacitation of other crew
members, should it occur in flight.
LO Explain
coping
procedures.
Toxic materials
LO List those materials
aircraft
which
uncontained, cause
problems.
040 02 03
040 03 00
present
may,
severe
05 Incapacitation in flight
causes of
methods
and
00 BASIC AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY
Page 303

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
040 03 01
00 Human information processing
040 03 01
01 Attention and vigilance
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Differentiate between attention and

vigilance.
divided attention.
LO Define hypovigilance.
LO Identify the factors which may affect

the state of vigilance.
LO List the factors that may

hypovigilance during flight.
forestall
LO Indicate
vigilance.
reduced
perceptual
LO Illustrate
why
perception
is
subjective and state the relevant
factors which influence interpretation
of perceived information.
LO Describe
illusions.
perceptual
perceptual
LO Give examples where

perception
plays a decisive role in flight safety.
LO Stress how persuasive and believable

mistaken perception can manifest
itself both on an individual and a
group.
the
selected and
signs
of
LO Name the factors

that
persons level of attention.
040 03 01
Helicopter
affect
02 Perception
LO Name the
process.
basis of
LO Describe
perception
process).
the
LO Illustrate
concepts.
the
mechanism
of
(bottom-up/top-down
some
some
basic
basic
Page 304

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
040 03 01
040 03 01
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
03 Memory
LO Explain the link between the types of
memory
(to
include
sensory,
working/short-term
and long-term
memories).
LO Describe the differences between the

types of memory in terms of capacity
and retention time.
LO Justify the importance of sensorystore

memories
in
processing
information.
LO State the average maximum number

of separate items that may be held in
working memory.
LO Stress how interruption can

short-term/working memory.
affect
LO Give examples of items that are

important for pilots to hold in working
memory during flight.
LO Describe how the capacity of

working-memory
store
may
increased.
the
be
LO State the subdivisions

of long-term
memory and give examples of their
content.
LO Explain that skills are kept primarily

in the long-term memory.
LO Explain amnesia and

memory.
how it effects
LO Name the common problems with

both the
long
and
short-term
memories and the best methods to
try to counteract them.
04 Response selection
Learning
techniques
principles
and
Page 305

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
between the
LO Explain and distinguish
following basic forms of learning:
classical and operant
conditioning (behaviouristic
approach);
learning by insight (cognitive
approach);
learning by imitating
(modelling).
LO Find pilot-related examples for each

of these learning forms.
LO State the factors which are necessary

for and promote
the quality of
learning.
LO Explain ways to facilitate the

memorisation of information with the
following learning techniques:
mnemonics;
mental training.
LO Describe the advantage of planning
and anticipation of future actions:
define the term skills;
state the three phases of
learning a skill (Anderson).
LO Explain the term motor programme

or mental schema.
LO Describe
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of mental schemata.
LO Explain the Rasmussen model which

describes the guidance of a pilots
behaviour in different situations.
LO State the possible problems or risks

associated
with
skill-based,
rule-based
and
knowledge-based
behaviour.
LO Explain the
following
phases
connection with the acquisition
automated behaviour:
cognitive phase;
associative phase;
automatic phase.
in
of
Page 306

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
Motivation
LO Define motivation.
LO Explain the influences of

different
levels of motivation on performance
taking
into
consideration
task
difficulty.
LO Explain the Model of human needs

(Maslow) and relate this to aviation.
LO Explain the relationship

motivation and learning.
LO Define the term situation awareness.
LO List the cues which

indicate loss of
situation awareness and name the
steps to regain it.
LO List the factors which influence ones

situation awareness both
positively
and negatively,
and stress
the
importance of situation awareness in
the context of flight safety.
LO Define the term mental model in

relation to a surrounding complex
situation.
LO Describe
the
advantages/
disadvantages of mental models.
between
LO Explain
the
problems
overmotivation, especially
in
context
of
extreme
need
achievement.
040 03 02
00 Human error and reliability
040 03 02
01 Reliability of human behaviour
of
the
of
LO Name and explain the factors which

influence human reliability.
040 03 02
02 Mental
models
awareness
and
situation
Page 307

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
error
isolated
LO Distinguish
between
the
main
forms/types of errors (i.e. slips,
faults, omissions and violations).
LO Discuss the above

relevance in flight.
LO Distinguish between
internal
and
external factors in error generation.
LO Identify possible sources

error generation.
of internal
LO Define and discuss the two errors

associated with motor programmes.
LO List the three main sources

of
external error generation in the
cockpit.
LO Give
examples to
illustrate
the
following factors in external error
generation in the cockpit:
ergonomics,
economics,
social environment.
LO Name the major goals in the design

of
human-centred
manmachine
interfaces.
LO Explain the
relationship
between
personal mental models and the
creation of cognitive illusions.
040 03 02 03
Theory and model of human error
LO Define the term error.

LO Explain
chain.
the concept
of
the
an
error and an error chain.
errors and their
LO Distinguish between an active and a

latent error and give examples.
040 03 02 04
Error generation
Page 308

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Define the term error tolerance.
LO List (and describe)

strategies which
are used to reduce human error.
and
LO Describe the major factors on which

decision-making
should be based
during the course of a flight.
LO Describe the main human attributes

with regard to decision-making.
LO Discuss the nature

influence on the
process.
of bias and its

decision-making
LO Describe the main error sources and

limits in an individuals decisionmaking mechanism.
LO State the factors upon which an

individuals risk assessment is based.
LO Explain the relationship between risk

assessment,
commitment
and
pressure of time on decision-making
strategies.
LO Explain the risks associated with

dispersion
and/or
channelised
attention during the application
of
procedures requiring a high workload
within a short time frame (e.g. a
go-around).
LO Describe the positive and negative

influences exerted by other group
members on an individuals decisionmaking process.
040 03 03 00
Decision-making
040 03 03 01
Decision-making concepts
LO Define the
terms
decision-making.
deciding
Page 309

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the general

idea behind the
creation of a model for decisionmaking based upon:
definition of the aim;
collection of information;
risk assessment;
development of options;
evaluation of options;
decision;
implementation;
consequences;
review and feedback.
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Justify the need for being aware of

not only ones own performance but
that of others before and
during a
flight and the possible consequences
and/or risks.
LO Stress the overall importance of

constantly and positively striving to
monitor for
errors
and thereby
maintaining situation awareness.
040 03 04
00 Avoiding and managing

cockpit management
040 03 04
01 Safety awareness
040 03 04
Helicopter
02
errors:
Coordination
(multi-crew concepts)
LO Name the objectives

crew concept.
multi-
LO State and explain the elements of

multi-crew concepts.
LO Explain
the
concept
Standard
Operating Procedures (SOPs).
LO Illustrate the purpose and procedure

of crew briefings.
LO Illustrate the purpose and procedure

of checklists.
of the
Page 310

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
ATPL ATPL
/IR
LO Distinguish between cooperation and

coaction.
LO Define the term group.
of
and
LO Explain the term synergy.
LO Define the term cohesion.
LO Define the term groupthink.
LO Explain the function of role and norm

in a group.
LO Name the different role patterns

which occur in a group situation.
LO Explain
how
behaviour
can
affected by the following factors:
persuasion,
conformity,
compliance,
LO Describe
the
communication
in
team.
040 03 04 03
CPL
Helicopter
function
of
a
coordinated
IR
CPL
Cooperation
LO Illustrate
the
influence
interdependence in a group.
LO List
the
advantages
disadvantages of team work.
LO State the essential conditions

good teamwork.
for
be
______________
LO
______________ Distinguish between status and role.
obedience.
LO Stress the inherent dangers of a
situation where there is a mix of role
and status within the cockpit.
LO Explain the terms leadership
followership.
and
Page 311

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
LO Describe the trans-cockpit authority

gradient and its affiliated leadership
styles (i.e. autocratic,
laissez-faire
and synergistic).
LO Name the most important attributes

of a positive leadership style.
040 03 04 04
IR
CPL
Communication
LO Explain the function of information.
LO Define the term communication.
LO List the
most basic components of
interpersonal communication.
LO Explain the advantages of two-way

communication as opposed to oneway communication.
LO Explain
Watzlawicks
statement
One cannot not communicate.
LO Distinguish between verbal and nonverbal communication.
LO Name the functions

communication.
LO Describe the general aspects of nonverbal communication.
LO Describe
the
advantages/
disadvantages of implicit and explicit
communication.
LO State the attributes

problems of
using
language.
and possible
professional
LO Name
and
explain
the
major
obstacles to effective communication.
LO Give examples of aircraft

accidents
arising from poor communication.
LO Explain
the
intrapersonal
conflict.
of
non-verbal
difference
between
and
interpersonal
Page 312

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the factors which determine

an individuals behaviour.
LO Define
and
personality,
behaviour.
between
and
of personality and
LO State that with behaviours good and

bad habits can be formed.
LO Explain how behaviour is generally a

product of personality and attitude.
LO Discuss some effects that personality

and attitudes may have on flight crew
performance.
LO Describe the escalation

human conflict.
process
in
LO List the typical consequences

conflicts between crew members.
of
LO Explain the following terms as part of

the communication
practice with
regard to preventing or resolving
conflicts:
inquiry,
active listening,
advocacy,
feedback,
metacommunication,
negotiation.
040 03 05
00 Human behaviour
040 03 05
01
Personality,
attitude
02
and
behaviour
distinguish
attitude
LO State the origin

attitudes.
040 03 05
Helicopter
Individual
differences
personality and motivation
in
Page 313

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Define the term self-concept and the

role it plays in any change
of
personality.
LO Explain how
a
self-concept
of
underconfidence may lead to an
outward show of aggression and selfassertiveness.
LO Describe the individual differences in

personality by means of a common
trait
model
(e.g.
Eysencks
personality factors) and use it to
describe todays ideal pilot.
Self-concept
Self-discipline
LO Define self-discipline and justify its
importance for flight safety.
040 03 05
03 Identification
of
hazardous
attitudes (error proneness)
LO Summarise examples of attitudes and
behaviour
(including
their signs)
which, if prevalent in a crew member,
might represent a hazard to flight
safety.
LO Describe the personality attitude and

behaviour patterns of an ideal crew
member.
LO Summarise how a persons attitude

influences their work in the cockpit.
040 03 06
00 Human overload and underload
040 03 06
01 Arousal
LO Explain the term arousal.
arousal and performance.
between
Page 314

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the term homeostasis.
LO Explain the term stress and why

stress is a natural human reaction.
LO State that the physiological response

to stress is generated by the fight or
flight response.
LO Describe
the
function
of
the
Autonomic Nervous System (ANS) in
stress response.
LO Explain the biological reaction to

stress by means of the General
Adaptation Syndrome (GAS).

arousal and stress.
of
LO List
and
discuss
the
major
environmental sources of stress in
the cockpit.
LO Discuss the concept of break point

with regard to stress, overload and
performance.
LO Explain the circumstances

under
which underload may occur and its
possible dangers.
040 03 06 02
Stress
between
LO State the relationship between stress

and performance.
LO State
the
stressors.
basic
LO Name the
principal
domestic stress.
categories
causes
LO State that the stress experienced as

a result of particular demands varies
between individuals.
of
Page 315

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the factors which lead to

differences in the levels of stress
experienced by individuals.
LO List the
factors
influencing
tolerance of stressors.
LO Explain a simple model of stress.

stress and anxiety.
between
anxiety on
LO State the general effect of acute

stress on the human system.
LO Name the three phases of GAS.
LO Name the
symptoms
relating to the different
GAS.

stress, arousal and vigilance.
LO State the general effect

of chronic
stress on the human system.
LO Explain the
differences
between
psychological,
psychosomatic
and
somatic stress reactions.
LO Name
the
typical
common
physiological
and
psychological
symptoms of human overload.
LO Describe the effects

human behaviour.
LO Explain how stress is cumulative and

how stress from one situation can be
transferred to a different situation.
LO Explain how successful completion of

a stressful
task will
reduce the
amount of stress experienced when a
similar situation arises in the future.
LO Describe the effects of

human performance.
the
of stress
phases of
of stress
on
Page 316

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the
term
fatigue
and
differentiate between the two types
of fatigue.
LO Name the causes for both types.
LO Identify the symptoms and describe

the effects of fatigue.
LO List the strategies which prevent or

delay the onset of fatigue
and
hypovigilance.
LO List and describe coping strategies for

dealing with stress factors and stress
reactions.
LO Distinguish between short-term and

long-term
methods
of
stress
management.
LO Give examples of short-term methods

of stress management.
LO Give examples of long-term methods

of coping with stress.
LO Describe
the
effect
underload/overload on
in the cockpit.
of
human
effectiveness
LO List sources and symptoms of human

underload.
040 03 06
03 Intentionally left blank
040 03 06
04 Intentionally left blank
040 03 06
05 Fatigue and stress management
040 03 07
00 Advanced cockpit automation
040 03 07
01 Advantages and disadvantages

LO Define and explain the basic concept
of automation.
Page 317

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
CPL
LO State
the
advantages
and
disadvantages of the two components
of the manmachine
system with
regard to
information input and
processing,
decision-making
and
output activities.
LO Explain the ironies of automation.
to
of
the
LO Explain
the
following
terms
in
connection with automatic systems:
passive monitoring;
blinkered concentration;
confusion;
mode awareness.
LO Give examples of actions which may

be taken to counteract ineffective
monitoring of automatic systems.
LO Define complacency.
of
methods
disadvantages
02 Automation complacency
LO State the main weaknesses in
monitoring of automatic systems.
040 03 07
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
LO List the advantages/disadvantages of

automation in the cockpit in respect
of level
of vigilance,
attention,
workload, situation awareness and
crew coordination.
LO Give
examples
overcome
the
automation.
040 03 07
Helicopter
03 Working concepts
LO Analyze the influence of automation
on crew communication and describe
the potential disadvantages.
LO Summarize how the negative effects

of automation on pilots may be
alleviated.
LO Interpret the role of automation with

respect to flight safety.
Page 309

Subject: 050 - METEOROLOGY

ATPL(A) CPL(A) ATPL(H)/IR ATPL(H) CPL(H)
Time
2:0 0
1:30
2:00
2:0 0
1:30
allowe
d
Distribution
of questions with regard to the topics of the syllabus
(hours)
050 01
11
09
11
11
09
050 02
11
06
11
11
06
050 03
04
04
04
04
04
050 04
07
06
07
07
06
050 05
03
03
03
03
03
050 06
07
07
07
07
07
050 07
06
02
06
06
02
050 08
08
03
08
08
03
050 09
11
09
11
11
09
050 10
16
14
16
16
14
Total
84
63
84
84
63
questions
Page 310
IR(A) & (H)

1:30
09
06
04
06
03
07
02
03
09
14
63

I. SUBJECT 050 METEOROLOGY

The operation of an aircraft is affected by the weather conditions within the atmosphere.
The pilot must prove that they fulfil the following objectives in order to complete a safe
flight in given meteorological conditions.
(1)
Training aims
(i)
Knowledge. After completion of the training, the pilot must be able to:
understand the physical processes in the atmosphere ;
interpret the actual and forecast weather conditions in the atmosphere ;
show understanding of the meteorological hazards and their effects on an
aircraft.
(ii)
Skills. After completion of the training, the pilot must be able to:
collect all the weather information which may affect a given flight ;
analyse and evaluate available weather information before flight as well as
that collected in flight;
apply a solution to any problems presented by weather conditions.
Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL
CPL
LO Describe the vertical division of the

atmosphere, based on the temperature
variations with height.
LO List the different layers and their main

qualitative characteristics.
LO Describe the troposphere.
LO Describe the main characteristics of the

tropopause.
050 00 00 00
METEOROLOGY
050 01 00 00
THE ATMOSPHERE
050 01 01 00
Composition,
division
050 01 01 01
Structure of the atmosphere
050 01 01 02
extent,
ATPL/ ATPL
IR
IR
CPL
vertical
Troposphere
Page 311

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the proportions of the most

important gases in the air in the
troposphere.
LO Describe the variations of the flight

level
and
temperature
of
the
tropopause from the poles to the
equator.
LO Describe the breaks in the tropopause

along the boundaries of the main air
masses.
LO Indicate the variations of the flight

level of the tropopause with the
seasons
and
the
variations
of
atmospheric pressure.
LO Describe the stratosphere.
LO Describe the main differences of the

composition
of
the
air
in
the
stratosphere
compared
to
the
troposphere.
LO Mention the vertical extent of the

stratosphere up to the stratopause.
LO Describe
the
reason
temperature increase in
layer.
050 01 01 03
Stratosphere
050 01 02 00
Air temperature
050 01 02 01
Definition and units
for
the
the ozone
LO Define air temperature.
LO List the units of measurement of air

temperature
used
in
aviation
meteorology
(Celsius,
Fahrenheit,
Kelvin).
(Refer to 050 10 01 01)

050 01 02 02
Vertical distribution of temperature
Page 312

H. SUBJECT 050 METEOROLOGY
Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the mean vertical distribution

of temperature up to 20 km.
LO Mention the general causes of the cooling

of the air in the troposphere with
increasing altitude.
LO Calculate
the
temperature
and
temperature deviations at specified
levels.
LO Explain how local cooling or warming

processes result in transfer of heat.
LO Describe radiation.
LO Describe solar radiation reaching the

Earth.
LO Describe the filtering effect

atmosphere on solar radiation.
LO Describe terrestrial radiation.
LO Explain how terrestrial radiation is

absorbed by some components of the
atmosphere.
LO Explain the greenhouse effect due to

water vapour and some other gases in
the atmosphere.
LO Explain the effect of absorption and

radiation in connection with clouds.
LO Explain the process of conduction.
LO Explain the role of conduction in the

cooling
and
warming
of
the
atmosphere.
LO Explain the process of convection.
050 01 02 03
Transfer of heat
LO Name
the
situations
convection occurs.
of
in
LO Explain the process of advection.
Page 313
the
which

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/
IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Name the situations in which advection

occurs.
LO Describe the
turbulence.
LO Describe the development and types of

inversions.
LO Explain the characteristics of inversions

and of an isothermal layer.
transfer
of
heat
by
LO Describe the transfer of latent heat.

050 01 02 04
Lapse rates
LO Describe
qualitatively
and
quantitatively the temperature lapse
rates of the troposphere (mean value
0.65 C/100 m or 2 C/1 000 ft and
actual values).
050 01 02 05
Development of inversions, types

of inversions
LO Explain the reasons for the formation

of the following inversions:
ground inversion (nocturnal

radiation/advection), subsidence
inversion, frontal inversion,
inversion above friction layer,
valley inversion.
Explain
the reasons for the formation of
LO
the following inversions:
tropopause inversion.
050 01 02 06
Temperature near the Earths
surface, surface effects, diurnal and

seasonal variation, effect of clouds,
effect of wind
LO Describe how the temperature near the
Earths
surface
is
influenced
by
seasonal variations.
LO Explain the cooling and warming of the

air on the earth or sea surfaces.
Page 314

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Sketch the diurnal variation of the

temperature of the air in relation to the
radiation of the sun and of the Earth.
LO Describe qualitatively the influence of

the clouds on the cooling and warming
of the surface and the air near the
surface.
LO Distinguish between the influence of

low or high clouds and thick or thin
clouds.
LO Explain the influence of the wind on the

cooling and warming of the air near the
surfaces.
LO Define atmospheric pressure.
LO List the units of measurement of the

atmospheric pressure used in aviation
(hPa, inches).
LO Describe
the
principle
of
the
barometers
(mercury
barometer,
aneroid barometer).
LO Describe isobars on surface weather

charts.
LO Define high, low, trough, ridge,

wedge, col.
050 01 03 00
Atmospheric pressure
050 01 03 01
Barometric pressure, isobars
(Refer to 050 10 01 01)
050 01 03 02
Pressure variation with

contours (isohypses)
LO Explain
height.
the
pressure
height,
variation
Page 315
with

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe qualitatively the variation of

the barometric lapse rate.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Define QFF.
LO Explain the reduction of measured

pressure to mean sea level, QFF.
LO Mention the use of QFF for surface

weather charts.

pressure, temperature and density.
LO Describe the vertical variation of the

air density in the atmosphere.
LO Describe the effect of humidity changes

on the density of air.
Remark: The average value for the

barometric lapse rate near mean sea
level is 27 ft (8 m) per 1 hPa, at about
5 500 m/AMSL is 50 ft (15 m) per
1 hPa.
LO Describe and interpret contour lines
(isohypses) on a constant pressure
chart.
(Refer to 050 10 02 03)
050 01 03 03
050 01 03 04
Reduction of pressure to mean sea

level, QFF
Relationship
between
pressure
centres
and
centres aloft
surface
pressure
LO Illustrate with a vertical cross section

of isobaric surfaces the relationship
between surface pressure systems and
upper-air pressure systems.
050 01 04 00
Air density
050 01 04 01
Relationship
between
temperature and density
050 01 05 00
pressure,
ICAO Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
Page 316

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
050 01 05 01
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
ICAO Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
LO Explain the use of standardised values

for the atmosphere.
LO List the main values of the ISA (mean

sea-level pressure, mean sea-level
temperature, the vertical temperature
lapse rate up to 20 km, height and
temperature of the tropopause).
LO Calculate the standard temperature in

Celsius for a given flight level.
LO Determine a standard temperature

deviation by the difference between the
given outside-air temperature and the
standard temperature.
LO Define
the
following
terms
and
acronyms and explain how they are
related to each other: height, altitude,
pressure altitude, flight level, level,
true altitude, true height, elevation,
QNH, QFE, and standard altimeter
setting.
LO Describe the terms transition altitude,

transition level, transition layer,
terrain clearance, lowest usable flight
level.
LO Name the altimeter settings associated

to height, altitude, pressure altitude
and flight level.
LO Describe
procedures.
050 01 06 00
Altimetry
050 01 06 01
Terminology and definitions
050 01 06 02
050 01 06 03
Altimeter settings
the
altimeter-setting
Calculations
Page 317

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Calculate the different readings on the

altimeter when the pilot changes the
altimeter setting.
LO Illustrate with a numbered example the

changes of altimeter setting and the
associated changes in reading when
the pilot climbs through the transition
altitude or descends through the
transition level.
LO Derive the reading of the altimeter of

an aircraft on the ground when the
pilot uses the different settings.
LO Explain the influence of the air

temperature on the distance between
the ground and the level read on the
altimeter and between two flight levels.
LO Explain the influence of pressure areas

on true altitude.
LO Determine the true altitude/height for

a given altitude/height and a given ISA
temperature deviation.
LO Calculate the terrain clearance and the

lowest usable flight level for given
atmospheric temperature and pressure
conditions.
Page 318

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
Remark: The following rules shall be

considered for altimetry calculations:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
050 01 06 04
All calculations are based on

rounded pressure values to the
nearest lower hPa;
The value for the barometric lapse
rate near mean sea level is 27 ft
(8 m) per 1 hPa;
To
determine
the
true
altitude/height, the following rule
of thumb, called the 4 %-rule,
shall be used: the altitude/height
changes by 4 % for each 10 C
temperature deviation from ISA;
If no further information is given,
the
deviation
of
outside-air
temperature
from
ISA
is
considered to be constantly the
same given value in the whole
layer;
The elevation of the airport has to
be
taken
into
account.
The
temperature correction has to be
considered for the layer between
ground and the position of the
aircraft.
Effect of accelerated airflow due to

topography
LO Describe qualitatively how the effect of

accelerated airflow due to topography
(Bernoulli effect) affects altimetry.
LO Define wind.
LO State the units of wind direction and

speed (kt, m/s, km/h).
050 02 00 00
WIND
050 02 01 00
Definition
wind
050 02 01 01
Definition and measurement
and
measurement
of
(Refer to 050 10 01 01)

LO Explain how
meteorology.
050 02 02 00
wind
is
measured
Primary cause of wind
Page 319
in

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
050 02 02 01
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
Primary cause of wind, pressure

gradient, Coriolis force, gradient
wind
LO Define the term horizontal pressure

gradient.
LO Explain how the pressure gradient

force acts in relation to the pressure
gradient.
LO Explain how the Coriolis force acts in

relation to the wind.
LO Explain the
development
geostrophic wind.
LO Indicate how the geostrophic wind

flows
in
relation
to
the
isobars/isohypses in the northern and
in the southern hemisphere.
LO Analyse the effect of changing latitude

on the geostrophic-wind speed.
LO Explain the gradient wind effect and

indicate how the gradient wind differs
from the geostrophic wind in cyclonic
and anticyclonic circulation.
LO Describe why and how the wind

changes direction and speed with
height in the friction layer in the northern
and in the southern hemisphere (rule of
thumb).
LO State
the
surface
and
air-mass
conditions that influence the wind in
the friction layer (diurnal variation).
LO Name the factors that influence the

vertical extent of the friction layer.
LO Explain
the
relationship
between
isobars and wind (direction and speed).
050 02 02 02
of
the
Variation of wind in the friction

layer
Page 320

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/
IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
Remark:
Approximate
value
for
variation of wind in the friction layer
(values to be used in examinations):
Wind speed
Type of
landscape in friction
layer in %
of the
geostrophic
wind
The wind in
the friction
layer blows
across the
isobars
towards the
low pressure.
Angle between
wind direction
and isobars.
over
water
ca 70 %
ca 10
over land
ca 50 %
ca 30
WMO-NO. 266
050 02 02 03
Effects
of
divergence
convergence
and
LO Describe atmospheric convergence and

divergence.
LO Explain the effect of convergence and

divergence on the following: pressure
systems at the surface and aloft; wind
speed; vertical motion and cloud
formation (relationship between upperair conditions and surface pressure
systems).
050 02 03 00
General global circulation
050 02 03 01
General
globe
circulation
around
the
LO Describe and explain the general global

circulation.
(Refer to 050 08 01 01)
Page 321

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
LO Name and sketch or indicate on a map

the global distribution of the surface
pressure and the resulting wind pattern
for all latitudes at low level in January
and July.
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
x
x
LO Sketch or indicate on a map the

westerly and easterly tropospheric
winds at high level in January and July.
050 02 04 00
Local winds
050 02 04 01
Anabatic
and
katabatic
winds,
mountain and valley winds, Venturi
effects, land and sea breezes

katabatic winds.
IR
CPL
and
LO Describe and explain mountain and

valley winds.
LO Describe and explain the Venturi effect,

convergence in valleys and mountain
areas.
LO Describe and explain land and sea

breezes, sea-breeze front.
LO Describe and explain the origin and

formation of mountain waves.
LO State the conditions necessary for the

formation of mountain waves.
LO Describe the structure and properties

of mountain waves.
LO Explain how mountain waves may be

identified
by
their
associated
meteorological phenomena.
anabatic
050 02 05 00
Mountain waves (standing waves,

lee waves)
050 02 05 01
Origin and characteristics
050 02 06 00
Turbulence
050 02 06 01
Description and types of turbulence
Page 322

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe turbulence and gustiness.
LO List the common types of turbulence

(convective, mechanical, orographic,
frontal, clear-air turbulence).
LO Explain the formation of convective

turbulence, mechanical and orographic
turbulence, frontal turbulence, clear-air
turbulence.
(Refer to 050 02 06 03)
LO State where turbulence will normally be

found (rough-ground surfaces, relief,
inversion
layers,
CB,
TS
zones,
unstable layers).
LO Describe the term CAT.
LO Explain the formation of CAT.
050 02 06 02
050 02 06 03
Formation
turbulence
and
location
of
Clear-Air
Turbulence
(CAT):
Description, cause and location
(Refer to 050 02 06 02)

LO State where CAT is found in association
with jet streams, in high-level troughs
and in other disturbed high-level air
flows.
(Refer to 050 09 02 02)

050 02 07 00
Jet streams
050 02 07 01
Description
LO Describe jet streams.
LO State the defined minimum speed of a

jet stream.
LO State the typical figures

dimensions of jet streams.
050 02 07 02
Formation
streams
and
for
properties of
Page 323
the
jet

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Sketch or describe where polar front

and arctic jet streams are found in the
troposphere in relation to the tropopause
and to fronts.
LO Sketch or describe the isotherms, the

isotachs, the pressure surfaces and the
movements of air in a cross section of
a polar front jet stream.
LO Describe and indicate the areas of

worst wind shear and CAT.
LO Explain the formation and state the

heights, the speeds, the seasonal
variations of speeds, the geographical
positions, the seasonal occurrence and
the seasonal movements of the arctic
(front) jet stream, the polar front jet
stream, the subtropical jet stream, and
the tropical (easterly/equatorial) jet
stream.
050 02 07 03
050 02 07 04
Location
of
jet
streams
associated CAT areas
IR
CPL
and
Jet stream recognition
LO State how jet streams may be recognised

from their associated meteorological
phenomena.
050 03 00 00
THERMODYNAMICS
050 03 01 00
Humidity
050 03 01 01
Water vapour in the atmosphere
LO Describe humid air.
LO Describe
the
significance
for
meteorology of water vapour in the
atmosphere.
LO Indicate the sources of atmospheric

humidity.
050 03 01 02
Mixing ratio
Page 324

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Define mixing ratio and saturation

mixing ratio.
LO Name the unit used in meteorology to

express the mixing ratio (g/kg).
LO Explain the
mixing ratio.
the
LO Recognise the lines of equal mixing

ratio on a simplified diagram (T, P).
LO Define saturation
vapour.
LO Illustrate with a diagram (T, mixing

ratio) the influence of the temperature
on the saturation mixing ratio, at
constant pressure.
LO Explain the influence of the pressure on

the saturation mixing ratio.
LO Define dew point.
LO Recognise the dew-point curve on a

simplified diagram (T, P).
LO Define relative humidity.
LO Explain the factors influencing the

relative humidity at constant pressure.
LO Explain the diurnal variation of the

relative humidity.
factors
influencing
of
air
by
water
Remark: A simplified diagram (T,P)

contains:
on the x-axis: temperature (T);
on the y-axis: height

corresponding to pressure (P).
The degree of saturation/mixing ratio
and stability/instability are shown as
functions of temperature change with
height (as lines or curves in the
diagram).
050 03 01 03
Temperature/dew
humidity
point,
Page 325
relative

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe
the
relationship between
relative humidity, the amount of water
vapour and the temperature.

temperature and dew point.
evaporation,
and melting
LO List the conditions for condensation/

evaporation.
LO Explain the condensation process.
LO Explain the nature of and the need for

condensation nuclei.
LO Explain the effects of condensation on

the weather.
LO List the
melting.
LO Explain the process of freezing.

freezing nuclei.
LO Define supercooled water.
LO List the conditions for sublimation.
LO Explain the sublimation process.

sublimation nuclei.
between
LO Estimate the relative humidity of the

air from the difference between dew
point and temperature.
050 03 02 00
Change of state of aggregation
050 03 02 01
Condensation,evaporation,
sublimation, freezing and melting,
latent heat
LO Define condensation,
sublimation, freezing
and latent heat.
conditions
for
freezing/
(Refer to 050 09 01 01)
Page 326

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the absorption or release of

latent heat in each change of state of
aggregation.
LO Explain the influence of atmospheric

pressure, the temperature of the air
and of the water or ice on the changes
of state of aggregation.
LO Illustrate all the changes of state of

aggregation with practical examples.
LO Describe the adiabatic processes.
LO Describe the adiabatic process in an

unsaturated rising or descending air
particle.
LO Explain the variation of temperature

with changing altitude.
LO Explain the changes which take place

in mixing ratio with changing altitude.
LO Explain the changes which take place

in relative humidity with changing
altitude.
LO Use the dry-adiabatic and mixing-ratio

lines on a simplified diagram (T, P) for
a climbing or descending air particle.
LO Describe the adiabatic process in a

saturated rising or descending air
particle.
LO Explain the variation of temperature

with changing altitude.
LO Explain the difference in temperature

lapse rate between saturated and
unsaturated air.
050 03 03 00
Adiabatic processes
050 03 03 01
Adiabatic processes, stability of the

atmosphere
Page 327

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the influence of different air

temperatures on the temperature lapse
rate in saturated air.
LO Use the saturated adiabatic lines on a

simplified diagram (T, P) for a climbing
or descending air particle.
LO Find the condensation level, or base of

the clouds, on a simplified diagram
(T, P).
LO Explain the static stability

atmosphere with reference
adiabatic lapse rates.
the
the
LO Define qualitatively and quantitatively

the
terms
stability,
conditional
instability, instability and indifferent
(neutral).
LO Explain with a sketch on a simplified

diagram
(T,
P)
the
different
possibilities of atmospheric stability:
absolute stability, absolute instability,
conditional instability and indifferent
(neutral).
LO Illustrate with a sketch of the adiabatic

lapse
rates
and
the
vertical
temperature profile of the atmosphere
the effect of an inversion on the
vertical motion of air.
LO Illustrate with a schematic sketch of

the saturated adiabatic lapse rate and
the vertical temperature profile the
instability inside a cumuliform cloud.
LO Illustrate with a schematic sketch the

formation of the subsidence inversion.
LO Illustrate with a schematic sketch the

formation of Foehn.
Page 328
of
to

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the effect on the stability of the

air caused by advection of air (warm or
cold).
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain cloud formation by adiabatic

cooling, conduction, advection and
radiation.
LO Describe cloud formation based on the

following lifting processes: unorganised
lifting in thin layers and turbulent
mixing; forced lifting at fronts or over
mountains; free convection.
LO Determine cloud base and top in a

simplified
diagram
(temperature,
pressure, humidity).
LO Explain
the
influence
of
relative
humidity on the height of the cloud
base.
LO Illustrate in a thermodynamic diagram

the meaning of convective temperature
(temperature at which formation of
cumulus starts).
LO List cloud types typical for stable and

unstable air conditions.
LO Summarise the conditions

dissipation of clouds.
Remark: Dry adiabatic lapse rate =

1 C/100 m or 3 C/1 000 ft; average
value at lower levels for saturated
adiabatic lapse rate = 0.6 C/100 m or
1.8 C/1 000 ft (values to be used in
examinations).
050 04 00 00
CLOUDS AND FOG
050 04 01 00
Cloud formation and description
050 04 01 01
Cloud formation
050 04 01 02
for
the
Cloud types and cloud classification
Page 329

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe cloud
classification.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
cloud
LO Identify by shape cirriform, cumuliform

and stratiform clouds.
LO Identify by shape and typical level the

10 cloud types (genera).
LO Describe and identify by shape the

following species and supplementary
feature:
castellanus,
lenticularis,
fractus, humilis, mediocris, congestus,
calvus, capillatus and virga.
types
and
LO Distinguish between low, medium and

high-level clouds according to the WMO
cloud etage(including heights):
for mid latitudes.
LO Distinguish between low, medium and

high-level clouds according to the WMO
cloud etage (including heights):
for all latitudes.

LO Distinguish between ice clouds, mixed
LO Explain the influence of inversions on

vertical movements in the atmosphere.
LO Explain the influence of an inversion on

the formation of stratus clouds.
LO Explain the
influence
of
ground
inversion on the formation of fog.
LO Determine on a simplified diagram the

top of a cumulus cloud caused by an
inversion.
LO Describe the role of the tropopause

inversion with regard to the formation
of clouds.
clouds and pure-water clouds.

050 04 01 03
050 04 01 04
Influence of inversions on cloud

development
Flying conditions in each cloud type
Page 330

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Assess the 10 cloud types for icing and

turbulence.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Define fog, mist and haze with

reference to the WMO standards of
visibility range.
LO Explain the formation of fog, mist and

haze in general.
LO Name the factors contributing in

general to the formation of fog and
mist.
LO Name the factors contributing to the

formation of haze.
LO Describe freezing fog and ice fog.
LO Explain the formation of radiation fog.
LO Explain
the
conditions
for
development of radiation fog.
the
LO Describe the significant characteristics

of radiation fog, and its vertical extent.

dissipation of radiation fog.
LO Explain the formation of advection fog.
LO Explain
the
conditions
for
development of advection fog.
LO Describe the different possibilities of

advection-fog formation (over land, sea
and coastal regions).

of advection fog.
050 04 02 00
Fog, mist, haze
050 04 02 01
General aspects
050 04 02 02
050 04 02 03
Radiation fog
for
the
Advection fog
Page 331
the

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL

dissipation of advection fog.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
the

of steam fog.

dissipation of steam fog.
the

of frontal fog.

dissipation of frontal fog.
the
LO Summarise the features of orographic

fog.
LO Explain
the
conditions
for
development of orographic fog.
the

of orographic fog.

dissipation of orographic fog.
050 04 02 04
for
the
Steam fog
LO Explain the formation of steam fog.

LO Explain
the
conditions
development of steam fog.
050 04 02 05
for
for
the
Frontal fog
LO Explain the formation of frontal fog.

LO Explain
the
conditions
development of frontal fog.
050 04 02 06
for
for
Orographic fog (hill fog)
for
050 05 00 00
PRECIPITATION
050 05 01 00
Development of precipitation
050 05 01 01
Process of development of
precipitation
Page 332
the

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Distinguish between the two following

processes by which precipitation is
formed.
LO Summarise the outlines of the icecrystal

process (Wegener-BergeronFindeisen).
LO Summarise
the
outlines
coalescence process.
the
LO Describe the atmospheric conditions

that favour either process.
LO Explain the development of snow, rain,

drizzle and hail.
LO List
and
describe
the
types
of
precipitation given in the TAF and
METAR codes (drizzle, rain, snow, snow
grains, ice pellets, hail, small hail,
snow pellets, ice crystals, freezing
drizzle, freezing rain).
LO State the
ICAO/WMO approximate
diameters for cloud, drizzle and rain
drops.
LO State the approximate weights and

diameters for hailstones.
LO Explain
the
mechanism
for
the
formation of freezing precipitation.
LO Describe the weather conditions that

give rise to freezing precipitation.
LO Distinguish between the

precipitation generated in
and stratiform cloud.
of
050 05 02 00
Types of precipitation
050 05 02 01
Types of precipitation, relationship

with cloud types
types of
convective
LO Assign typical precipitation types and

intensities to different clouds.
Page 333

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
050 06 00 00
AIR MASSES AND FRONTS
050 06 01 00
Air masses
050 06 01 01
Description,
classification
source regions of air masses
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
and
LO Define the term air mass.
LO Describe the properties of the source

regions.
LO Summarise the classification

masses by source regions.
LO State the classifications of air masses

by
temperature and
humidity at
source.
LO State the characteristic

each of the air masses.
in
LO Name the three main air masses that

affect Europe.
LO Classify air masses

weather chart.
on
of
weather
air
surface
Remark: Names and abbreviations of air

masses used in examinations:
050 06 01 02
first letter: humidity
continental (c),
maritime (m),
second letter: type of air mass
Arctic (A),
Polar (P),
Tropical (T),
Equatorial (E),
third letter: temperature
cold (c),
warm (w).
Modifications of air masses
LO List the environmental factors that

affect the final properties of an air
mass.
Page 334

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain how maritime and continental

tracks modify air masses.
LO Explain the effect of passage over cold

or warm surfaces.
LO Explain how air-mass weather is

affected by the season, the air-mass
track and by orographic and thermal
effects over land.
LO Assess the tendencies of the stability

for an air mass and describe the typical
resulting air-mass weather including
the hazards for aviation.
LO Describe the boundaries between air

masses (fronts).
LO Define front
(frontal zone).
surface
LO Name the global frontal systems (polar

front, arctic front).
LO State
the
approximate
seasonal
latitudes and geographic positions of
the polar front and the arctic front.
LO Define a warm front.
LO Describe the cloud, weather, ground

visibility and aviation hazards at a
warm front depending on the stability
of the warm air.
LO Explain the seasonal differences in the

weather at warm fronts.
LO Describe the structure, slope

dimensions of a warm front.
050 06 02 00
Fronts
050 06 02 01
General aspects
050 06 02 02
and
frontal
Warm front, associated clouds and

weather
Page 335
and

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Sketch a cross section of a warm front

showing weather, cloud and aviation
hazards.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Define a cold front.

visibility and aviation hazards at a cold
front depending on the stability of the
warm air.

weather at cold fronts.
LO Describe the structure,

dimensions of a cold front.
LO Define
fronts
and
air
masses
associated with the warm sector.

visibility and aviation hazards in a
warm sector.

weather in the warm sector.
LO Sketch a cross section of a warm sector

hazards.

visibility and aviation hazards behind
the cold front.

weather behind the cold front.
050 06 02 03
Cold front, associated clouds and

weather
slope
and
LO Sketch a cross section of a cold front

hazards.
050 06 02 04
050 06 02 05
Warm sector,
and weather
associated
clouds
Weather behind the cold front
Page 336

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
050 06 02 06
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
Occlusions, associated clouds and

weather
LO Define the term occlusion.
LO Define a cold occlusion.
LO Define a warm occlusion.

visibility and aviation hazards in a cold
occlusion.

visibility
and
aviation hazards in a
warm occlusion.

weather at occlusions.
LO Sketch a cross section of cold and

warm occlusions showing weather,
cloud and aviation hazards.
LO On a sketch illustrate the development of

an occlusion and the movement of the
occlusion point.
LO Define a stationary or quasi-stationary

front.

visibility and aviation hazards in a
stationary or quasi-stationary front.
LO Describe the movements of fronts and

pressure systems and the life cycle of a
mid-latitude depression.
LO State the rules for predicting the

direction and the speed of movement
of fronts.
050 06 02 07
050 06 02 08
Stationary front, associated clouds

and weather
Movement of fronts and pressure

systems, life cycle
Page 337

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the difference between the speed

of movement of cold and warm fronts.
LO State the rules for predicting the

direction and the speed of movement
of frontal depressions.
LO Describe, with a sketch if required, the

genesis, development and life cycle of
a frontal depression with associated
cloud and rain belts.
050 06 02 09
Changes
of
meteorological
elements at a frontal wave
LO Sketch a plan and a cross section of a

frontal wave (warm front, warm sector
and cold front) and illustrate the changes
of pressure, temperature, surface wind
and wind in the vertical axis.
050 07 00 00
PRESSURE SYSTEMS
050 07 01 00
The principal pressure areas
050 07 01 01
Location of the principal pressure

areas
LO Identify or indicate on a map the

principal global high-pressure and lowpressure areas in January and July.
LO Explain how these pressure areas are

formed.
LO Explain how the pressure areas move

with the seasons.
050 07 02 00
Anticyclone
050 07 02 01
Anticyclones,
types,
general
properties,
cold
and
warm
anticyclones, ridges
and wedges,
subsidence
LO List the different types of anticyclones.
Page 338

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the
effect
of
high-level
convergence in producing areas of high
pressure at ground level.
LO Describe air-mass subsidence, its effect

on the environmental lapse rate, and
the associated weather.
LO Describe the formation of warm and

cold anticyclones.
LO Describe the formation of ridges and

wedges.
LO Describe the properties of and the

weather associated with warm and cold
anticyclones.
LO Describe the properties of and the

weather associated with ridges and
wedges.
LO Describe the blocking anticyclone and

its effects.
LO Describe the
effect
of
high-level
divergence in producing areas of low
pressure at ground level.
LO Describe the formation and properties

of thermal, orographic (lee lows), polar
and secondary depressions.
LO Describe the formation, the properties

and the associated weather of troughs.
(Refer to 050 08 03 02)
050 07 03 00
Non-frontal depressions
050 07 03 01
Thermal, orographic, polar and

secondary depressions; troughs
050 07 04 00
Tropical revolving storms
050 07 04 01
Characteristics of tropical revolving

storms

formation of tropical revolving storms.
Page 339

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Explain how a tropical revolving storm

moves during its life cycle.
LO Name the stages of the development of

tropical
revolving
storms
(tropical
disturbance,
tropical
depression,
tropical storm, severe tropical storm,
tropical revolving storm).
LO Describe the meteorological conditions

in and near a tropical revolving storm.
LO State the approximate dimensions of a

tropical revolving storm.
LO List the areas of origin and occurrence

of tropical revolving storms, and their
specified names (hurricane, typhoon,
tropical cyclone).
LO State the expected times of occurrence

of tropical revolving storms in each of
the
source
areas,
and
their
approximate frequency.
050 07 04 02
Origin and local names, location

and period of occurrence
050 08 00 00
CLIMATOLOGY
050 08 01 00
Climatic zones
050 08 01 01
General
circulation
troposphere
and
stratosphere
in
the
lower
LO Describe the general tropospheric and

low stratospheric circulation.
(Refer to 050 02 03 01)
050 08 01 02
Climatic classification
LO Name the
world
climate
groups
accordingtoKoeppensclassification.
Page 340
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
LO Describe the characteristics of the

tropical rain climate, the dry climate,
the
mid-latitude
climate
(warm
temperate rain climate), the subarctic
climate (cold snow-forest climate) and
the snow climate (polar climate).
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
x
x
LO Explain how the seasonal movement of

the sun generates the transitional
climate zones.
LO Describe the typical weather in the

tropical transitional climate (savannah
climate)
and
in
the
temperate
transitional
climate
(Mediterranean
climate).
LO State the typical locations of each

major climatic zone.

formation of tropical rain showers and
thunderstorms (mesoscale convective
complex, cloud clusters).
LO Describe the characteristics of tropical

squall lines.
LO Explain the formation of convective cloud

structures caused by convergence at
the boundary of the NE and SE trade
winds (Intertropical Convergence Zone
(ITCZ)).
LO State the typical figures for tropical

surface
air
temperatures
and
humidities, and heights of the zerodegree isotherm.
050 08 02 00
Tropical climatology
050 08 02 01
Cause and development of tropical

showers
and
thunderstorms:
humidity, temperature, tropopause
050 08 02 02
Seasonal variations of weather and

wind, typical synoptic situations
Page 341
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Describe the seasonal variations of

weather and winds, and describe the
typical synoptic situations.
LO Indicate on a map the trade winds

(tropical easterlies) and describe the
associated weather.
LO Indicate on a map the doldrums and

describe the associated weather.
LO Indicate on a sketch the latitudes of

subtropical high (horse latitudes) and
describe the associated weather.
LO Indicate on a map the major monsoon

winds.
LO Identify or indicate on a map the

positions of the ITCZ in January and July.
LO Explain the seasonal movement of the

ITCZ.
LO Describe the weather and winds at the

ITCZ.
LO Explain the variations in weather that

are found at the ITCZ.
LO Explain the flight hazards associated

with the ITCZ.
LO Define in general the term monsoon.
LO Describe
conditions.
(Refer to 050 08 02 04 for a

description of the weather)
050 08 02 03
050 08 02 04
Intertropical
Convergence
(ITCZ),
weather
in
the
general seasonal movement
Monsoon,
outbreaks
sandstorms,
the
major
(Refer to 050 08 02 02)
Page 342
Zone
ITCZ,
cold-air
monsoon
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Explain how
trade winds change
character after a long track and
become monsoon winds.
LO Explain the formation of the SW/NE

monsoon over West Africa and describe
the weather, stressing the seasonal
differences.
LO Explain the formation of the SW/NE

monsoon over India and describe the
weather,
stressing
the
seasonal
differences.
LO Explain the formation of the monsoon

over the Far East and northern
Australia and describe the weather,
stressing the seasonal differences.
LO Describe the formation and properties

of sandstorms.
LO Indicate when and where outbreaks of

cold polar air can enter subtropical
weather systems.
LO Name well-known examples of polar-air

outbreaks (Blizzard, Pampero).
LO Describe and explain the formation of

easterly waves, the associated weather
and the duration of the weather
activity.

the
distribution of easterly waves.
global
LO Explain the effect of easterly waves on

tropical weather systems.
050 08 02 05
Easterly waves
050 08 03 00
Typical weather situations in the

mid-latitudes
050 08 03 01
Westerly situation (westerlies)
Page 343
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Identify on a weather chart the typical

westerly situation with travelling polar
front waves.
LO Describe the typical weather in the

region of the travelling polar front
waves
including
the
seasonal
variations.
LO State the differences between the

northern and the southern hemisphere
(roaring forties).
050 08 03 02
High-pressure area
LO Describe the high-pressure zones with

the associated weather.
LO Identify on a weather chart the highpressure regions.
LO Describe the weather associated with

wedges in the polar air.
LO Identify on a surface weather chart the

typical flat-pressure pattern.
LO Describe the weather associated with a

flat-pressure pattern.
LO Define cold-air pool.
LO Describe the formation of a cold-air

pool.
LO Describe the characteristics of a coldair pool with regard to dimensions,

duration of life, geographical position,
seasons, movements, weather activities
and dissipation.
LO Identify
charts.
(Refer to 050 07 02 01)

050 08 03 03
050 08 03 04
Flat-pressure pattern
Cold-air pool (cold-air drop)
cold-air
pools
on
Page 344
weather

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the problems and dangers of

cold-air pools for aviation.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the classical mechanism for

the development of Foehn winds
(including Chinook).
LO Describe the weather associated with

Foehn winds.
LO Describe
the
formation
of,
the
characteristics of, and the weather
associated with the Mistral, the Bora,
the Scirocco, the Ghibli and the Khamsin.
050 08 04 00
Local
winds
weather
050 08 04 01
Foehn, Mistral,
Bora,
Ghibli and Khamsin
050 08 04 02
and
associated
Scirocco,
Harmattan
LO Describe the Harmattan wind and the

associated visibility problems.
050 09 00 00
FLIGHT HAZARDS
050 09 01 00
Icing
050 09 01 01
Conditions for ice accretion
LO Summarise the
general
conditions
under which ice accretion occurs on
aircraft (temperatures of outside air;
temperature of the airframe; presence
of supercooled water in clouds, fog,
rain
and
drizzle;
possibility
of
sublimation).
LO Indicate the general weather conditions

under which ice accretion in Venturi
carburettor occurs.
LO Explain the general weather conditions

under which ice accretion on airframe
occurs.
Page 345

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the formation of supercooled

water in clouds, rain and drizzle.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain qualitatively the relationship

between the air temperature and the
amount of supercooled water.
LO Explain qualitatively the relationship

between the type of cloud and the size
and
number of
the
droplets in
cumuliform and stratiform clouds.
LO Indicate in which circumstances ice can

form on an aircraft on the ground: air
temperature, humidity, precipitation.
LO Explain in which circumstances ice can

form on an aircraft in flight: inside
clouds, in precipitation, outside clouds
and precipitation.
LO Describe
the
different
factors
influencing the intensity of icing: air
temperature, amount of supercooled
water in a cloud or in precipitation,
amount of ice crystals in the air, speed
of the aircraft, shape (thickness) of the
airframe parts (wings, antennas, etc.).
LO Explain the effects of topography on

icing.
LO Explain the higher concentration of water

drops in stratiform orographic clouds.
(Refer to 050 03 02 01)
050 09 01 02
Types of ice accretion
LO Define clear ice.

LO Describe
the
conditions
formation of clear ice.
for
the
LO Explain the formation of the structure

of clear ice with the release of latent heat
during the freezing process.
Page 346

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the aspect of clear

appearance, weight, solidity.
ice:
LO Define rime ice.

LO Describe
the
conditions
formation of rime ice.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
for
the
LO Describe the aspects of rime

ice:
the
LO Describe the aspects of mixed ice:

LO Describe the possible process of ice

formation in snow conditions.
LO Define hoar frost.
the
LO Describe the aspects of hoar frost:

appearance, solidity.
LO Describe, in general, the hazards of

icing.
LO Assess the dangers of the different

types of ice accretion.
LO Describe the position of the dangerous

zones of icing in fronts, in stratiform
and cumuliform clouds, and in the
different precipitation types.
LO Define mixed ice.

LO Describe
the
conditions
formation of mixed ice.
LO Describe
the
conditions
formation of hoar frost.
050 09 01 03
for
for
Hazards of ice accretion, avoidance
LO State the ICAO qualifying terms for the

intensity of icing.
(See ICAO ATM Doc 4444)
Page 347

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Indicate the possibilities of avoidance:
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/
IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Describe the effects of turbulence on

an aircraft in flight.
in the flight planning: weather

briefing, choice of track and
altitude;
during flight: recognition of the
dangerous zones, choice of
appropriate track and altitude.
050 09 02 00
Turbulence
050 09 02 01
Effects on flight, avoidance
LO State the ICAO qualifying terms for the

intensity of turbulence.
(See ICAO ATM Doc 4444)
050 09 02 02

altitude;
during flight: choice of
Clear-Air Turbulence (CAT): effects

on flight, avoidance
LO Describe the effects on flight caused by

CAT.
(Refer to 050 02 06 03)

altitude;
during flight: choice of
050 09 03 00
Wind shear
050 09 03 01
Definition of wind shear
LO Define wind
horizontal).
shear (vertical
Page 348
and

LO Define low-level wind shear.

050 09 03 02
Weather conditions for wind shear
Page 349

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the conditions, where and

how wind shear can form (e.g.
thunderstorms, squall lines, fronts,
inversions, land and sea breeze,
friction layer, relief).
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the effects on flight caused by

wind shear.
LO Name the cloud types which indicate

the development of thunderstorms.
LO Describe
the
different
types
of
thunderstorms, their
location,
the
conditions for and the process of
development, and list their properties
(air
mass
thunderstorms,
frontal
thunderstorms, squall lines, supercell
storms, orographic thunderstorms).
LO Describe and sketch the stages of the life

history of a thunderstorm: initial, mature
and dissipating stage.
LO Assess
the
average
duration
of
thunderstorms
and
their
different
stages.
LO Describe
supercell,
stage.
050 09 03 03
Effects on flight, avoidance
in the flight planning;

during flight.
050 09 04 00
Thunderstorms
050 09 04 01
Conditions for and process of

development,
forecast,
location,
type specification
050 09 04 02
Structure
history
of
thunderstorms,
supercell
tornado
life
storm:
initial,
and
dissipating
Page 350

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Summarise the flight hazards of a fully

developed thunderstorm.
LO Indicate on
a
dangerous zones
thunderstorm.
LO Describe and asses the St. Elmosfire

weather phenomenon.
LO Describe the development of lightning

discharges.
LO Describe the effect of lightning strike

on aircraft and flight execution.
LO Define the term downburst.
LO Distinguish between macroburst and

microburst.
LO State the weather situations leading to

the formation of downbursts.
LO Describe the process of development of

a downburst.
LO Give the
downburst.
050 09 04 03
sketch the
most
in and around a
Electrical discharges
LO Describe the basic outline of

electric field in the atmosphere.
LO Describe
the
differences
in
thunderstorm.
050 09 04 04
Development
downbursts
electrical
potential
and
around
a
and
typical
effects
duration
of
of
LO Describe the effects of downbursts.

050 09 04 05
the
Thunderstorm avoidance
Page 351

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain how the pilot can anticipate

each type of thunderstorms: pre-flight
weather briefing, observation in flight,
use
of
specific
meteorological
information, use of information given
by ground weather radar and by airborne
weather radar (Refer to 050
10 01 04), use of the stormscope
(lightning detector).
LO Describe practical examples of flight

techniques used to avoid the hazards
of thunderstorms.
LO Define the tornado.
LO Describe the formation of a tornado.
LO Describe the typical features of a tornado

such as appearance, season, time of day,
stage
of
development,
speed
of
movement and wind speed (including
Fujita scale).
LO Compare the occurrence of tornadoes

in Europe with the occurrence in other
locations, especially in the United
States of America.
LO Compare
properties
devils.
050 09 05 00
Tornadoes
050 09 05 01
Properties and occurrence
the
dimensions
of tornadoes and
and
dust
050 09 06 00
Inversions
050 09 06 01
Influence on aircraft performance
LO Explain the influence of inversions on

the aircraft performance.
Page 352

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Compare the flight hazards during

take-off and approach associated to a
strong inversion alone and to a strong
inversion combined with marked wind
shear.
050 09 07 00
Stratospheric conditions
050 09 07 01
Influence on aircraft performance
LO Summarise
the
advantages
stratospheric flights.
of
LO List the influences of the phenomena

associated with the lower stratosphere
(wind,
temperature,
air
density,
turbulence).
050 09 08 00
Hazards in mountainous areas
050 09 08 01
Influence of terrain on clouds and

precipitation, frontal passage
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
x
IR
CPL
x
LO Describe
the
influence
of
a
mountainous terrain on cloud and
precipitation.
LO Describe the effects of the Foehn.
LO Describe
the
influence
of
a
mountainous area on a frontal passage.
LO Describe the vertical movements, wind

shear
and
turbulence
typical
of
mountain areas.
LO Indicate in a sketch of a chain of

mountains
the
turbulent
zones
(mountain waves, rotors).
LO Explain the influence of relief on ice

accretion.
050 09 08 02
050 09 08 03
Vertical
movements,
mountain
waves, wind shear, turbulence,
ice accretion
Development and effect of valley

inversions
Page 353

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the formation of valley

inversion due to katabatic winds.
LO Describe the valley inversion formed by
warm winds aloft.
LO Describe the effects of a valley
inversion for an aircraft in flight.
050 09 09 00
Visibility-reducing phenomena
050 09 09 01
Reduction of visibility caused by

precipitation and obscurations
LO Describe the reduction of visibility

caused by precipitation: drizzle, rain,
snow.
LO Describe the reduction
caused by obscurations:
of
visibility
fog, mist, haze, smoke, volcanic

ash.
LO Describe the reduction

caused by obscurations:
of
visibility
sand (SA), dust (DU).

LO Describe
the
differences
between
ground visibility, flight visibility, slant
visibility and vertical visibility when an
aircraft is above or within a layer of
haze or fog.
050 09 09 02
Reduction of visibility caused by

other phenomena

caused by:
low drifting and blowing snow.

caused by:
low drifting and blowing dust and

sand.
Describe
the reduction of visibility
LO
caused by:
dust storm (DS) and sandstorm

(SS)
Page 354
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/
IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
caus
ed
by:
icing
(windshiel
d).
xx
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx

Page 355

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
caused by:
the position of the sun relative to

the visual direction
Describe
the reduction of visibility
LO
caused by:
the reflection of suns rays from

the top of the layers of haze, fog
and clouds.
050 10 00 00 METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/
IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define surface wind.
LO Describe
the
meteorological
measurement of surface wind.
LO List the ICAO units for the wind

direction and speed used in METARs
(kt, m/s, km/h).
LO Define gusts, as given in METARs.
LO Distinguish wind given in METARs and

wind given by the control tower for
take-off and landing.
LO Define visibility.
LO Describe
the
meteorological
measurement of visibility.
LO Define prevailing visibility.
LO Define ground visibility.
x
LO
x
x
Describe
050 10 01 00
Observation
050 10 01 01
Surface observations
(Refer to 050 02 01 01)
LO List the
(m, km).
units
used
for
LO Define runway visual range.
Page 356
visibility

the
meteorological measurement of
runway visual range.
LO Indicate where the transmissometers/
forward-scatter meters are placed on
the airport.
Page 357

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO List the units used for runway visual

range (m).
LO List
the
different
possibilities
to
transmit information to pilots about
LO Compare visibility and runway visual

range.
LO Indicate the means of observation of

present weather.
LO Indicate the means of observing

clouds: type, amount, height of base
(ceilometers) and top.
LO List
the
clouds
considered
in
meteorological reports, and how they are
indicated in METARs (TCU, CB).
LO Define oktas.
LO Define cloud base.
LO Define ceiling.
LO Name the unit and the reference level

used for information about cloud base
(ft).
LO Define vertical visibility.
LO Explain briefly how and when vertical

visibility is measured.
LO Name the unit

visibility (ft).
vertical

air temperature (thermometer).
LO List the units used for air temperature

(Celsius, Fahrenheit, Kelvin).
used
for
(Refer to 050 01 02 01)

relative humidity (hygrometer and
psychrometer)
and
dew-point
temperature (calculation).
Page 358

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/
IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
LO Name the units of relative humidity

(%)
and
dew-point
temperature
(Celsius, Fahrenheit).

atmospheric pressure (mercury and
aneroid barometer).
LO List the units of atmospheric pressure

(hPa, inches).
(Refer to 050 01 03 01)

050 10 01 02
Radiosonde observations
LO Describe the principle of radiosondes.

LO Describe and interpret the sounding by
radiosonde given on a simplified T-P
diagram.
050 10 01 03
Satellite observations
LO Describe the basic outlines of satellite

observations.
LO Name the main uses of satellite
pictures in aviation meteorology.
LO Describe the different types of satellite
imagery.
LO Interpret qualitatively the satellite
pictures in
order
to
get
useful
information for the flights:
location of clouds (distinguish

between stratiform and
cumuliform clouds).
LO Interpret qualitatively the satellite
pictures in order to get useful
information for the flights:
location of fronts.
Interpret
qualitatively the satellite
LO
pictures in order to get useful
Page 359
x
x
infor
mati
on
for
the
flight
s:
locati
on of jet
streams.
050 10 01 04 Weatherradar observations

(Refer to
050 09
04 05)
xx
x
x

x
x
xx
xx
Page 360

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the basic principle and the

type of information given by a ground
weather radar.
LO Interpret
images.
LO Describe the basic principle and the

type of information given by airborne
weather radar.
LO Describe the limits and the errors of

airborne weather radar information.
LO Interpret typical
radar images.
LO Describe routine air report and special

air report.
LO State the obligation

prepare air reports.
to
LO Name the weather phenomena to be

stated in a special air report.
LO Decode
and
interpret
significant
weather charts (low, medium and high
level).
LO Describe from a significant weather chart

the flight conditions at designated
locations and/or along a defined flight
route at a given flight level.
050 10 01 05
ground
weather
airborne
weather
Aircraft observations and reporting
of
050 10 02 00
Weather charts
050 10 02 01
Significant weather charts
050 10 02 02
radar
Surface charts
Page 361
pilot

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Recognise
the
following
weather
systems on a surface weather chart
(analysed and forecast): ridges, cols
and troughs; fronts; frontal side, warm
sector and rear side of mid-latitude
frontal lows; high and low-pressure
areas.
LO Determine from surface weather charts

the wind direction and speed.
LO Define constant-pressure chart.
LO Define isohypse (contour line).
LO Define isotherm.
LO Define isotach.
LO For designated locations and/or routes

determine from forecast upper-wind
and temperature charts, if necessary
by
interpolation, the spot/average
values for outside-air temperature,
temperature deviation from ISA, wind
direction and wind speed.
LO Name the most common flight levels

corresponding to the constant pressure
charts.
050 10 02 03
Upper-air charts
(Refer to 050 01 03 02)
LO Describe forecast
temperature charts.
upper-wind
050 10 03 00
Information for flight planning
050 10 03 01
Aviation weather messages
and
LO Describe, decode and interpret the

following aviation weather messages
(given in written and/or graphical
format): METAR, SPECI, TREND, TAF,
SIGMET, AIRMET, GAMET, special air
report,
volcanic
ash
advisory
information.
Page 362

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
CPL
LO Describe, decode and interpret the

tropical cyclone advisory information in
written and graphical form.
LO Describe the general meaning of MET

REPORT and SPECIAL REPORT.
LO List, in general, the cases when a

SIGMET and an AIRMET are issued.
LO Describe, decode (by using a code

table) and interpret the following
messages: Runway State Message (as
written in a METAR), GAFOR.
rEMARK: For Runway State Message

and GAFOR, refer to the Air Navigation
Plan European Region Doc 7754.
050 10 03 02
Meteorological
aviation
broadcasts
for
LO Describe the meteorological content of

broadcasts for aviation:
050 10 03 03
VOLMET, ATIS;
HF-VOLMET.
Use of meteorological documents
LO Describe meteorological briefing and

advice.
LO List the information that a flight crew can

receive from meteorological services for
pre-flight planning and apply the content
of this information on a designated flight
route.
LO List the meteorological information that

a flight crew can receive from flight
information services during flight and
apply the content of this information
for the continuation of the flight.
050 10 03 04
Meteorological warnings
Page 363

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe
and
interpret
aerodrome
warnings and wind-shear warnings and
alerts.
050 10 04 00
Meteorological services
050 10 04 01
World area forecast system and

meteorological offices
LO Name the main objectives of the world

area forecast system:
world area forecast centres

(upper-air forecasts)
meteorological offices (aerodrome

forecasts, briefing documents).
Name
the main objectives of the world
LO
meteorological watch offices

(SIGMET, AIRMET).
aeronautical meteorological
stations (METAR, MET reports).
volcanic ash advisory centres.

tropical cyclone advisory centres.

050 10 04 02 International organisations
LO Describe
briefly
the
following
organisations and their chief activities:
International Civil Aviation

Organization (ICAO)
(Refer to subject 010);
World Meteorological Organization

(WMO)
Page 364
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/
IR
IR
ATPL
CPL

Subject: 061 - GENERAL NAVIGATION

Time
2:0 0
1:30
2:00
2:0 0
1:30
XX
allowed
(hours)
061 01
12
07
12
12
07
XX
061 02
04
04
04
04
04
XX
061 03
14
12
14
14
12
XX
061 04
16
11
16
16
11
XX
061 05
14
11
14
14
11
XX
Total
60
45
60
60
45
XX
questions
Page 365

J. SUBJECT 061 GENERAL NAVIGATION

For the purposes of theoretical-knowledge examinations, orthomorphic and conformal
charts are taken as being the same type of chart.
Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
060 00 00 00
NAVIGATION
061 00 00 00
GENERAL NAVIGATION
061 01 00 00
BASICS OF NAVIGATION
061 01 01 00
The solar system
061 01 01 01
E a r t h s orbit, seasons and

apparent movement of the sun
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL CPL
ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the solar system consists

of the Sun, a number of planets of
which the Earth is one, and a large
number of asteroids and comets.
LO State that Keplers first law explains that

the planets revolve in elliptical orbits
with the Sun at one focus. Each
planet has its orbital period.
LO State that
Keplers second law
explains the variation in the speed of
a planet in its orbit. Each planet
revolves so that its radius vector
sweeps out equal areas in equal
intervals of time.
LO State that the highest speed of the

Earth in its orbit is when the Earth is
closest to the Sun (perihelion).
LO State that the lowest speed of the Earth

in its orbit is when the Earth is furthest
away from the Sun (aphelion).
LO Explain in which direction the Earth

rotates on its axis.
Page 366

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Explain that the axis of rotation of

the Earth is inclined to its orbital path
around the Sun at an angle of about
66,5 degrees.
LO Define the term ecliptic and plane

of the ecliptic. Ecliptic is the
apparent path of the Sun around the
Earth. The plane of the ecliptic is
inclined to the plane of the equator at
an
angle
of
approximately
23,5 degrees. The inclination of the
polar axis to the plane of the ecliptic
is the reason for the seasons.
LO Explain that the Earth completes one

orbit
around
the
Sun
in
approximately 365,25 days.
LO Describe the effect of the inclination

of the Earths rotation axis to the plane
of its orbit around the Sun, being
the seasons and variation of sunrise
and sunset with latitude and time of the
year.
LO Define the terms apparent Sun and

mean
Sun
and
state
their
relationship.
LO Define the celestial equator. It is the

projection of the Earths equator onto the
celestial sphere.
LO Define
the
term
declination.
Declination is the angular distance of
a celestial body north or south of the
celestial equator.
LO State that the mean Sun is conceived

to move eastward along the celestial
equator at a rate that provides a
uniform measure of time equal to the
average time reckoned from the true
Sun.
Page 367

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Define the polar circles, the tropic

of
Cancer and
the
tropic
of
Capricorn.
LO Explain summer and winter solstice.
LO Explain the terms spring and autumn

equinox.
LO Explain at which time of the year the

duration of daylight changes at the
highest rate.

declination of the Sun, latitude and
the period of daylight.
LO State that the perihelion occurs early

January and aphelion occurs early
July.
LO Illustrate the position of the Earth

relative to the Sun with respect to
the seasons and months of the year.
LO Define zenith. The point on the sky

vertically overhead an observer.
LO State that the Earth is not a true

sphere. It is flattened slightly at the
poles. The value for flattening is
1/298.
LO Given the Earth flattening and either

the semimajor or semiminor axis in
NM/km, calculate the distance of the
other axis.
LO State
that
the
Earth
may
be
described as an ellipsoid or oblate
spheroid.
061 01 02 00
The Earth
061 01 02 01
Great circle, small circle, rhumb

line
Page 368

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Explain that the Equator has its plane

perpendicular to the Earths axis and
divides the Earth into the northern
and southern hemisphere.
LO Given that the distance of the

circumference
of
the
Earth
is
40 000 km
or
approximately
21 600 NM,
calculate
the
approximate Earth diameter or Earth
radius.
LO Define a great circle in relation to

the surface of a sphere.
LO Describe the geometric propertiesof

a great circle, including vertex.
LO Define a small circle in relation to

the surface of a sphere.
LO Define a rhumb line. A line which

cuts all meridians at the same angle.
LO Explain the term convergency of

meridiansbetween two positions.
LO Explain how the value of convergency

can be determined using calculation.
LO The formula to calculate convergency

between two positions relatively close
to each other is:
LO Calculate the value of convergency

between two stated positions.
LO Explain that the difference between

great-circle track and rhumb-line
track at a specified position is called
conversion angle.
061 01 02 02
Convergency, conversion angle
convergency = difference of longitude

sin (mean latitude).
Page 369

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO State that over short distances and

out-of-polar regions the average
great-circle
true
track
is
approximately equal to the rhumbline true track between two positions.
LO Explain how the value of conversion

angle can be calculated as half the
value of convergency.
LO Calculate the great-circle track and

rhumb-line track angle at specified
position involving calculations of
convergency and conversion angle.
LO Define geographic latitude as the

angle between the plane of the
equator and the local plumb line on
the ellipsoid.
LO Define geocentric latitude as the

angle between the plane of the
equator and a line from the position
to the centre of the Earth.
LO State that the maximum difference

between geographic and geocentric
latitude
occurs
at
altitude
of
45 degrees.
LO Describe a parallel of latitude as a

small circle connecting all positions
on the Earth with the same latitude.
LO Calculate the difference of latitude

between two given positions lat/long.
LO State that the 1-degree difference of

latitude equals 60 nautical miles.
LO Convert the difference of latitude to

distance.
LO Calculate the mean latitude between

two positions.
061 01 02 03
Latitude, difference of latitude
Page 370

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
061 01 02 04
IR
ATPL CPL
Longitude, difference of longitude
LO Describe a meridian as a semigreat

circle, which runs north and south
from pole to pole.
LO Explain that the meridians and their

anti-meridian complete a great circle.
LO State that the Greenwich meridian is

also known as the prime meridian.
LO Define
longitude as
the
angle
measured at the polar axis between the
plane of the prime meridian and the
local meridian.
LO Explain that the Greenwich antimeridian is the maximum longitude

possible, namely 180 eastwest.
LO Calculate the difference of longitude

between two given positions lat/long.
LO Name examples of great circles on

the surface of the Earth.
LO Name examples of small circles on

LO Define a
rhumb
line.
A
line
intersecting all meridians at the same
angle.
LO Explain the geometrical properties of

a rhumb line. Parallels and meridians
are special cases of rhumb lines.
061 01 02 05
Use of latitude and longitude

coordinates to locate any specific
position
LO Explain that along the equator a

difference of longitude of 1 equals a
distance of 60 NM.
Page 371

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Explain that because the meridians

converge towards the poles, the
distance
between
meridians
will
decrease with increase in latitude.
LO State that the Earths distance along a

parallel of latitude is also known as
departure.
LO Calculate
the
Earths distance
between two meridians along a
parallel of latitude (departure) using
the following formula:
LO Given a position lat/long, distances

travelled northsouth in NM/km and
distances
travelled
eastwest
in
NM/km along a parallel of latitude.
Calculate the new position.
LO Given
two
positions
on
same
meridian (or one on the antimeridian), calculate the distance.
LO Explain the principles of zone time.
LO Explain that, because the Earth

rotates on its axis from west to east,
the celestial bodies appear to revolve
around the Earth from east to west.
LO Define and explain the term transit.

Explain that transit means that a
celestial body crosses the observers
meridian.
LO Explain that the time period of a day

is the elapsed time between two
successive transits of a heavenly
body.
distance = difference of longitude

60 cosine latitude.
061 01 03 00
Time and time conversions
061 01 03 01
Apparent time
Page 372

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Explain that the term sidereal dayis

the time measured with reference to
a fixed point on the celestial sphere.
LO State that if the day is measured by

the apparent passage of the Sun, the
length of a day will vary.
LO Explain the reason for the variation in

the length of an apparent day, being
a combination of the variation in the
Earths orbital speed around the Sun
and the inclination of the Earths
rotation axis to the plane of the ecliptic.
LO Illustrate
that,
since
both
the
direction of rotation of the Earth
around its axis and its orbital rotation
around the Sun are the same, the Earth
must rotate through more than
360 to produce successive transits.
LO State that the period between two

successive transits of the Sun is
called an apparent solar day, and
that the time based on this is called
apparent time.
LO State that in order to have a constant

measurement of time, which will still
have the solar day as a basis, the
average length of an apparent solar
day is taken. This average day is
called mean solar day. It is divided
into 24 hours of mean time.
LO State that the mean Sun is a

fictitious Sun orbiting along the plane
of the equator at a constant angular
velocity that provides a uniform
measure of time.
LO State that the time between two

successive transits of the mean Sun
over a meridian is constant.
Page 373

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Explain that the difference between

apparent time and mean time is
defined as the equation of time.
LO State that the time of orbital

revolution of the Earth in 1 year around
the Sun is approximately
365 calendar days.
LO State that the calendar year is

365 days and every 4th year a leap
year with 366 days and 3 leap years are
suppressed every 4 centuries.
LO State that time can also be measured

in arc since, in one day of mean solar
time, the mean Sun is imagined to
travel in a complete circle round the
Earth, a motion of 360 in 24 hours.
LO Illustrate the relationship between

time and arc along the equator.
LO Deduce conversion values for arc to

time and visa versa.
LO State that the Greenwich meridian is

selected as standard meridian, and
that LMT at the Greenwich meridian
is equal to Greenwich mean time
(GMT).
LO State that UTC is based on atomic

time and GMT on the Earthsrotation,
but in practice they are considered as
the same.
LO State that the conversion factor

between LMT and UTC is arc (change
of longitude) converted to time.
LO Convert arc to time.
LO Convert time to arc.
LO Convert between UTC and LMT.
061 01 03 02
Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)
Page 374

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
061 01 03 03
IR
ATPL CPL
Local Mean Time (LMT)
LO State that the beginning of

mean day at any location is
mean Sun is in transit with
meridian. This is known as
or 0000 hours LMT.
the local
when the
the antimidnight
LO State that when the mean Sun is in

transit with the locations meridian, it is
noon or 1200 hours LMT.
LO State that standard time is the time

used by a particular country (or part
of a country) determined by the
government
of
that
particular
country.
LO State that some countries use

summer time (daylight saving time).
LO State that conversion from UTC to

standard time and visa versa is
usually done using extracts from the
air almanac published in appropriate
documents.
LO Given
appropriate
documents,
convert from UTC to ST of a specific
country and from ST of a specific
country to UTC.
LO Explain the effect on the LMT when

approaching the 180 meridian line
from either side.
LO State that the dateline

follow exactly the 180
meridian.
LO State that the LMT at locations at

different longitudes varies by an
amount corresponding to the change
in longitude.
061 01 03 04
061 01 03 05
Standard times (STs)
Dateline
does not
eastwest
Page 375

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Explain that when crossing the anti meridian of Greenwich, one day is
lost or gained depending on the
direction of travel.
LO State that the dateline is the actual

place where the change is made and,
although
mainly
at
the
180
meridian, there are some slight
divergences
in
order
to
avoid
countries being divided by the dateline.
LO State that when calculating times,

the dateline is automatically taken
into account by doing all conversions
via UTC.
LO Calculate conversions of LMT and

GMT/UTC and ST for cases involving
the international dateline.
LO State that SR or SS is when the Suns

upper edge is at the observers horizon.
State how atmospheric refraction
affects this apparent sighting.
LO Explain that SR and SS occur at

different times on the same meridian
depending on the latitude for a given
day.
LO Explain that SR will occur earlier and

SS will occur later with increase in
altitude.
LO State that the times for SR and SS

given
in
the
air
almanac are
calculated
for
the
Greenwich
meridian.
061 01 03 06
Determination of sunrise (SR),

sunset (SS) and civil twilight
Page 376

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Explain that at the spring and

autumn equinox, SR and SS occur
approximately at the same time at all
latitudes.
LO State that, except in high latitudes,

the times of SR and SS at any place
change only a little each day. So, for all
places of the same latitude, SR or SS
will occur at approximately the same
LMT.
LO State that the reason for the

variation of the duration of daylight
and night throughout the year is the
inclination of the Earthsrotation axis to
the ecliptic.
LO State that SR and SS times are

tabulated against specified dates and
latitudes.
LO State that at equator SR is always

close to 0600 LMT and SS close to
1800 LMT (within 15 minutes).
LO Calculate examples of SR and SS at

mean sea level in LMT, ST or UTC, given
SR and SS tables, latitudes and
longitude of the place in question and
the date.
LO Given SR or SS time in UTC or ST for

a given position, calculate SR or SS
for another position on the same
latitude in UTC or ST.
LO Explain the meaning of the term

twilight.
LO Define the duration of evening civil

twilight. The time from sunset to the
time when the centre of the Sun is
6 below the horizon.
Page 377

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Define the duration of morning civil

twilight. The time from the point
when the centre of the Sun is
6 below the horizon to the time of
sunrise.
LO State that the beginning of morning

civil twilight and the end of evening
civil twilight has been tabulated in UTC,
valid for the prime meridian, with
latitude and date as the entering
argument. It may be taken to be LMT
for any other meridian.
LO Calculate examples of twilight in UTC

and ST given a twilight table, latitude
and longitude of the place in question
and the date.
LO Determine the duration of morning

and evening civil twilight.
LO Explain the effect of declination and

latitude on the duration of twilight.
LO State that all meridians run in north

south direction, and that the truenorth direction is along any meridian
towards the geographic north pole.
LO State that true directions are measured

clockwise as an angle in degrees from
true north (TN).
061 01 04 00
Directions
061 01 04 01
True north
061 01 04 02
Terrestrial magnetism: magnetic

north, inclination and variation
LO State
that
a
freely
suspended
compass needle will turn to the
direction of the local magnetic field.
The
direction of
the
horizontal
component of this field is the
direction of magnetic north (MN).
Page 378

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO State that the magnetic poles do not

coincide with the geographic poles.
LO State that the magnetic variation

varies as a function of time due to
the movement of
the northern
magnetic pole.
LO Define magnetic dip or inclination.

The angle between the horizontal and
the total component of the magnetic
field.
LO State that the angle of inclination at

the magnetic poles is 90.
LO Explain that the accuracy of the

compass depends on the strength of
the horizontal component of the Earths
magneticfield.
LO State that, in the polar areas, the

horizontal component of the Earths
magnetic field is too weak to permit
the use of a magnetic compass.
LO State
that,
in
a
direct-reading
compass, the magnetic element will
align along a magnetic field. This
direction is called compass north
(CN) and is the direction 000 on the
compass rose. The field is the
resultantoftheEarthsmagneticfield and
the magnetic field of the aircraft.
LO State that the effect of the aircraft

magnetism on the compass changes
with different headings, as well as
with different latitudes.
061 01 04 03
Compass
north
deviation,
compass
Page 379

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO State
that
the
angle
between
magnetic north and compass north is
called deviation (DEV) and is given in
degrees east (+ or E) or west
(or W) of the magnetic north.
LO State that deviation is kept to a

minimum by compass swinging.
LO State that the angle between the true

north and magnetic north is called
variation (VAR) being measured in
degrees east (+ or E) or west
(or W) of the true north.
LO Define an isogonal line. A line

joining positions of equal variation.
LO Convert between compass, magnetic

and true directions.
061 01 04 04
061 01 04 05
Isogonals, relationship between

true and magnetic north
Gridlines, isogrives
LO Explain the purpose of a grid north

(GN) based on a suitable meridian on
a polar stereographic chart (reference
or datum meridian).
LO Explain that the gridlines or the grid

meridians are drawn on the chart
parallel to the reference meridian.
LO State that the angle between the grid

north (GN) and true north (TN) is called
grid convergence being measured in
degrees east (+ or E) if GN is west of
TN or west ( or W) if GN is east of TN.
LO State that the angle between the grid

north (GN) and magnetic north (MN)
is
called
grivation (griv)
being
measured in degrees east (+ or E) or
west (or W) of the grid north.
Page 380

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
ATPL CPL
LO State that a line joining points, which

have the same grivation, is called an
isogriv.
LO Convert between compass, magnetic,

true and grid directions.
061 01 05 00
Distance
061 01 05 01
Units of distance and height used in

navigation: nautical miles, statute
miles, kilometres, metres, feet
IR
LO Define the nautical mile. A distance

being equal to 1 852 km.
LO In map/charts, distance between two

positions
is
measured
along
a
meridian at mean latitude, where
1 minute of latitude presents 1 NM.
LO State that when dealing with heights

and altitudes the unit used is metres
or feet subject to the choice of
individual States.
LO State that horizontal distances are

calculated in metres, kilometres and
nautical miles.
LO Given
two
positions
or
latitude/longitude
difference,
calculate the distance.
061 01 05 02
Conversion
another
from
one
unit
to
LO Convert between the following units:

nautical miles (NM), statute miles
(SM), kilometres (km), metres (m)
and feet (ft).
061 01 05 03
Relationship
between
nautical
miles and minutes of latitude and
minutes of longitude
Page 381

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Given two positions on the same

latitude and distance between the
two positions in km or NM, calculate
the difference of longitude between
the two positions.
LO Flying a rhumb-line true track of 090,

180, 270 and 360 degrees given an
initial geographical position, flight
time and ground speed, calculate the
new geographic position.
LO Direct-reading compass (DRC).
LO Interpret the indications on a DRC,

given an indication on the compass,
deviation or deviation table and
variation.
LO State that the serviceability test

consists of
comparing the DRC
indication to another reference (e.g.
other compass system or runway
direction).
LO State that the compass should be

checked when carrying magnetic
freight or freight with a large ferrous
metal content.
061 02 00 00
MAGNETISM AND COMPASSES
061 02 01 00
Knowledge of the principles of

the
direct-reading
(standby)
compass
061 02 01 01
The use of this compass
061 02 01 02
Serviceability tests
LO State the pre-flight serviceability

check of the DRC, such as:
general condition;
check indication is within the

limits.
Page 382

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
061 02 01 03
Situations requiring a
swing
compass
LO State
the
occurrences
when
a
compass swing may be required:
if transferred to another base

involving a large change in
latitude;
major changes in aircraft

equipment;
aircraft hit by lightning;
aircraft parked in the same

direction for a long period of
time
when a new compass is fitted;
at any time when the compass

or recorded deviation is suspect;
when specified in the aircraft

maintenance schedule.
061 03 00 00
CHARTS
LO Define the term conformal. At any

given point on the chart, distortions (as
a result of the projection) in eastwest
direction must be the same as in
northsouth direction. The meridians
and parallels must cut each other at
right angles.
LO State that on a conformal chart the

angles measured on the chart are the
same as on the Earth.
LO State that different chart projections

are
used,
depending
on
the
application and area of use involved.
LO State that all charts, although they

have been developed mathematically,
are designated as projections.
061 03 00 00
General properties of
miscellaneous types of
projections
Page 383

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
LO State that the following projection
surfaces are used when projecting
charts:
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Define the scaleof a chart. The ratio

of the chart length compared to the
Earthsdistance that it represents.
LO Use the scale of a chart to calculate

particular distances.
LO Calculate scale given chart length and

Earth distance.
LO Define the term chart convergency.

The angle between two given meridians
on the chart.
LO Define parallel of origin. The parallel

where the projection surface touches
the surface of the reduced Earth.
LO State that the direct Mercator is a

cylindrical projection. The parallel of
origin is the equator.
LO State that the convergency on the

chart is 0.
LO State that the scale increases with

increasing distance from the equator.
LO State that on a direct Mercator: scale

at any latitude = scale at the equator
secant latitude (1/cosine latitude).
LO Given the scale at

calculate the
scale
latitudes.
latitude,
different
LO Given a chart length at one atitude,

show that it represents a different
Earth distance at other latitudes.
061 03 01 01
plane,
cylindrical,
conical.
Direct Mercator
one
at
Page 384

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR

/IR
061 03 01 02
Lambert conformal conic
LO State that the Lambert conformal

chart is based on a conical projection.
Only
Lambert
conformal
charts
mathematically produced with two
standard parallels will be considered.
LO Define the term standard parallel.

The latitudes where the cone cuts the
reduced Earth.
LO State that at the parallel of origin, Earth

convergency
is
equal
to
chart
convergency.
LO State that the parallel of origin is

close to the mean latitude between
the standard parallels.
LO Explain the scale variation throughout

the charts as follows:
LO Define
the
term
constant
of
cone/convergency factor. The ratio
between the top angle of the
unfolded cone and 360, or sine of
the parallel of origin.
LO Chart convergency = difference of

longitude constant of cone.
LO Given appropriate data, calculate

initial, final or rhumb-line tracks
between two positions (lat/long).
the scale indicated on the chart

will be correct at the standard
parallels;
the scale will increase away
from the parallel of origin;
the scale within the standard
parallels differs by less than 1 %
from the scale stated on the
chart.
Page 385
x
x

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Given two positions (lat/long) and

information to determine convergency
between the two positions, calculate
the parallel of origin.
LO Given a Lambert chart, determine the

parallel of origin, or constant of cone.
LO Given constant of cone or parallel of

origin, great-circle track at one
position and great-circle track at
another
position,
calculate
the
difference of longitude between the two
positions.
061 03 01 03
Polar stereographic
LO State that the polar stereographic

projection is based on a plane
projection, and state that the parallel
of the origin is the pole.
LO State that chart convergency

difference of longitude.
LO State that the scale is increasing with

increasing distance from the pole.
LO Given
two
positions
(lat/long),
rhumb-line true track or initial/final
great-circle true track, calculate the
missing track angles.
LO Calculate the chart scale at a specific

latitude when difference of longitude
and chart distance along the parallel
of longitude are given.
061 03 02 00
The representation of meridians,

parallels, great circles and rhumb
lines
061 03 02 01
Direct Mercator
LO State that meridians are straight

parallel lines, which cut parallels of
latitudes at right angles.
Page 386

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO State that parallels of latitude are

straight lines parallel to the equator.
LO State that a straight line on the chart

is a rhumb line.
LO State that the great circle is a line

convex to the nearest pole.
LO For
great-circle
track
angle
calculations over short distances, the
conversion angle may be calculated
by the formula:

lines, which cut parallels of latitudes
at right angles.

arcs of concentric circles.
LO State that great circles are curved lines

concave towards the parallels of origin.
LO State that for short distances the

great
circle is
approximately a
straight line.
conversion angle =
difference of longitude sin
mean latitude.
LO Given rhumb-line true track between

two positions (lat/long), calculate
initial or final great-circle true track.
061 03 02 02
061 03 02 03
Lambert conformal conic
Polar stereographic

lines radiating from the pole, which
cut parallels of latitudes at right
angles.

concentric
circles,
and
in
this
projection
the
distance
apart
increases away from the pole.
Page 387

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
LO State
that
great
circles
are
approximately straight lines close to
the pole. The exact great circle being
concave to the pole.
061 03 03 00
The use of current aeronautical

charts
061 03 03 01
Plotting positions
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Enter the position on a chart using

range and bearing from a VOR DME
station,
and
derive
geographical
coordinates.
LO Enter the positions on a chart using

geographical coordinates and derive
tracks and distances.
LO Plot DME ranges on an aeronautical

chart
and
derive
geographical
coordinates.
LO Describe the methods used to provide

information on chart scale. Use the
chart scales stated and beware of the
limitations of the stated scale for
each projection.
061 03 03 02
Methods of indicating scale and

relief
LO Describe the methods of representing

relief and demonstrate the ability to
interpret data.
061 03 03 03
Conventional signs
LO Interpret conventional
symbols on ICAO and
frequently used charts.
061 03 03 04
signs and
other most
Measuring tracks and distances
LO Given two positions, measure the

track and the distance between them.
061 03 03 05
Plotting bearings
Page 388

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Resolve bearings of an NDB station

for plotting on an aeronautical chart.
LO Resolve radials from VOR stations for

plotting on an aeronautical chart.
061 04 00 00
DEAD
RECKONING
NAVIGATION
061 04 01 00
Basis of dead reckoning
(DR)
LO Explain the triangle of velocities, e.g.

true heading/TAS, W/V, and true
track/GS.
061 04 01 01
Track
LO Explain
the
concept of
vectors
including adding together or splitting
in two directions.
061 04 01 02
Heading
(compass,
true, grid)
magnetic,
LO Calculate (compass, magnetic, true,

grid) heading from given appropriate
data.
061 04 01 03
Wind velocity
LO Calculate wind velocity from given

appropriate data.
061 04 01 04
Airspeed (IAS, CAS, TAS, Mach

number)
LO Calculate TAS from IAS/CAS and

Mach number from given appropriate
data.
061 04 01 05
Ground speed
LO Calculate ground speed from given

appropriate data.
061 04 01 06
ETA
LO Calculate ETA, flying

distance, and GS.
time
Page 389
from

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
LO Calculate revised directional data for
heading, track, course and W/V, e.g.
true, magnetic, compass and grid
from given appropriate data.
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Conversion
between
kilograms/
pounds/litres/U.S.
gallons/imperial
gallons.
LO Conversion
of
Kilometres/nautical
miles.
LO Conversion of distances. Feet/metres.
LO Conversion of volumes and weight of

fuel using density in mass per unit
volume.
061 04 01 07
Drift, wind correction angle
LO Calculate drift and wind correction

angle from given appropriate data.
061 04 02 00
Use of the navigational computer
061 04 02 01
Speed
LO Given appropriate data, determine

speed.
061 04 02 02
Time
LO Given
time.
061 04 02 03
appropriate data, determine
Distance
LO Given appropriate data, determine

distance.
061 04 02 04
Fuel consumption
LO Calculation
of
flow/flying time.
061 04 02 05
061 04 02 06
fuel
used/fuel
Conversions
distances.
miles/statute
Airspeed
Page 390

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR

/IR
LO Calculation of airspeed problems
including
IAS/EAS/CAS/TAS/
and
Mach number from given appropriate
data.
061 04 02 07
Wind velocity
LO Given appropriate
wind velocity.
data,
determine
LO Given appropriate data,

true
altitude/indicated
density altitude.
determine
altitude/
LO Describe the role and purpose of DR

navigation.
LO Demonstrate mental DR techniques.
LO Define speed factor. Speed divided

by 60, used for mental flight-path
calculations.
LO Calculate head/tailwind component.
x
component)
/SF (speed
factor)
061 04 02 08
061 04 03 00
True altitude
The triangle of velocities
LO Solve problems to determine:
heading
ground speed;
track/course
drift angle/wind correction

angle
head/tail/crosswind
components
061 04 04 00
Determination of DR position
061 04 04 01
Confirmation of
(DR)
flight
progress
LO Calculate wind correction angle (WCA)

using the formula:
WCA
XWC
(crosswind
Page 391

Page 392

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
LO Distance,
speed
calculations.
IR
ATPL CPL
time
LO Demonstrate DR position graphically

and by means of a DR computer.
LO Given any four of the parts of the

triangle of velocities, calculate the
other two.
LO Apply the validity of wind triangle

symbols correctly. Heading vector
one arrow, track/course vector two
arrows, and W/V vector three arrows.
LO Calculate True Altitude (T ALT) from

given
indicated
altitude,
airfield
elevation,
Static-Air
Temperature
(SAT)/Outside-Air Temperature (OAT)
and QNH/QFE.
LO Calculate indicated altitude

from
given
T ALT,
airfield
elevation,
SAT/OAT and QNH/QFE.
LO Calculate density altitude from given

pressure altitude and SAT/OAT.
LO Calculate density altitude from given

airfield
elevation,
SAT/OAT
and
QNH/QFE.
061 04 04 02
and
Lost procedures
LO Describe course of action when lost.

061 04 05 00
Measurement of DR elements
061 04 05 01
Calculation
of
altitude,
adjustments, corrections, errors
Remark: For questions involving
height calculation, 30 ft/hpa is to be
used unless another figure is
specified in the question.
061 04 05 02
Determination of temperature
LO Define OAT/SAT. The temperature of

the surrounding air.
Page 393

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Define Ram-Air Temperature (RAT)/

Total-Air
Temperature
(TAT)/
Indicated Outside-Air Temperature
(IOAT). The temperature measured
by the temperature probe affected by
friction and compressibility.
LO Define ram rise. The increase of

temperature
at
the
temperature
probe
due
to
friction
and
compressibility.
LO RAT (TAT, IOAT) = OAT (SAT) + ram

rise.
LO Explain the difference in

using
OAT/SAT compared to RAT/TAT/IOAT
in airspeed calculations.
LO Calculate TAS from given IAS/CAS,

OAT/SAT and pressure inputs.
LO Calculate CAS from given

OAT/SAT and pressure inputs.

map reading.
LO Define the term visual checkpoint.
061 04 05 03
Determination
speed
of
appropriate
LO Explain the relationship between:
061 04 05 04
IAS,
CAS,
EAS,
and TAS.
TAS,
Determination of Mach number
LO Calculate Mach number from given

TAS and OAT/SAT.
061 05 00 00
IN-FLIGHT NAVIGATION
061 05 01 00
Use of visual observations and

application to in-flight navigation
Page 394

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR

/IR
LO Discuss the general features of a
visual checkpoint and give examples.
LO State that the evaluation of the

differences between DR positions and
actual position can refine flight
performance and navigation.
LO Establish fixes on navigational charts

by plotting visually derived intersecting
lines of position.
LO Describe the use of a single observed

position line to check flight progress.
LO Describe how to prepare and align a

map/chart
for
use
in
visual
navigation.
LO Describe visual-navigation techniques

including:
use of DR position to locate

identifiable landmarks
identification of charted
features/landmarks;
factors affecting the selection of

landmarks
an understanding of seasonal
and meteorological effects on
the appearance and visibility of
landmarks;
selection of suitable landmarks;
estimation of distance from

landmarks from successive
bearings;
estimation of the distance from

a landmark using an
approximation of the sighting
angle and the flight altitude.
LO Describe the action to be taken if
there
is
no
available at a
point.
visual
checkpoint
scheduled turning
Page 395

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Understanding the difficulties and

limitations that may be encountered
in map reading in some geographical
areas due to the nature of terrain,
lack of distinctive landmarks or lack
of detailed and accurate charted
data.
LO State the function of contour lines on

a topographical chart.
LO Indicate the role of layer tinting

(colour gradient) in relation to the
depiction of topography on a chart.
LO Using the contours shown on a chart,

describe
the
appearance
of
a
significant feature.
LO Understand that in areas of snow and

ice from horizon to horizon and
where the sky is covered with a uniform
layer of clouds so that no shadows are
cast,
the
horizon disappears,
causing earth and sky to blend.
LO Average TAS used for climb problems

is calculated at the altitude 2/3 of the
cruising altitude.
LO Average TAS used for descent

problems is calculated at the altitude
1/2 of the descent altitude.
LO WV used for climb problems is the

WV at the altitude 2/3 of the cruising
altitude.
LO WV used for descent problems is the

WV at the altitude 1/2 of the descent
altitude.
061 05 02 00
Navigation in climb and descent
061 05 02 01
Average airspeed
061 05 02 02
Average wind velocity (WV)
Page 396

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Calculate the average climb/descent

GS from given TAS at various altitudes,
WV at various altitudes and true track.
LO Calculate the flying time and distance

during
climb/descent from
given
average rate of climb/descent and
using average GS.
LO Calculate the rate of descent on a given

glide-path angle using the following
formulae:
LO Given distance, speed and present

altitude,
calculate
the
rate
of
climb/descent in order to reach a
certain position at a given altitude.
LO Given speed, rate of climb/descent

and altitude, calculate the distance
required in order to reach a position
at a given altitude.
LO Given speed, distance to go and

altitude to climb/descent, calculate
the rate of climb/descent.
LO State that most Aircraft Operating

Handbooks supply graphical material to
calculate climb and descent problems.
LO Given distance, speed and present

altitude,
calculate
the
rate
of
climb/descent in order to reach a
certain position at a given altitude.
LO Given speed, rate of climb/descent

and altitude, calculate the distance
required in order to reach a certain
position at a given altitude.
valid for 3-glide path:

rate of descent = (GS (ground speed)
10) / 2
rate of descent = SF (speed factor)
glide-path angle 100
LO State the effect on TAS and Mach

number when climbing/descending
with a constant CAS.
061 05 02 03
Ground speed/distance covered

during climb or descent
Page 397

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
061 05 02 04
IR
ATPL CPL
Gradients versus rate of

climb/descent
LO Calculate
climb/descent
gradient
(ft/NM, % and degrees), GS or
vertical speed according to the
following formulae:
LO Gradient in % = altitude difference

(feet) 100 / ground difference
(feet).
LO Gradient in degrees = Arctg (Altitude

difference (feet) / ground distance
(feet)).
LO Rate of climb/descent (feet/min) =

gradient (%) GS (kt).
LO State
that
it
is
necessary
to
determine the position of the aircraft
accurately
before
commencing
descent in order to ensure safe
ground clearance.
LO Calculate revised ground speed to

reach a waypoint at a specific time.
LO Calculate the average ground speed
Vertical speed (feet/min) = (ground

speed (kt) gradient (feet/NM)) / 60
061 05 03 00
Navigation in cruising flight, use

of fixes to revise navigation data
061 05 03 01
Ground-speed revision
based on two observed fixes.

LO Calculate the distance to the position
passing abeam an NDB station by
timing from the position with a
relative bearing of 045/315 to the
position abeam (relative bearing
090/270).
061 05 03 02
Off-track corrections
LO Calculate the track-error angle at a

given course from A to B and an offcourse fix, using the one-in-sixty
rule.
Page 398

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
IR
ATPL CPL
LO Calculate the heading change at an offcourse fix to directly reach the next
waypoint using the one-in-sixty rule.
LO Calculate the
based
upon
observation.
LO Enter the revised navigational en

route data, for the legs concerned,
into the flight log (e.g. updated wind
and
ground
speed,
and
correspondingly losses or gains in
time and fuel consumption).
LO Enter, in the progress of flight, at

checkpoint or turning point, the
actual time over and the estimated
time over for the next checkpoint
into the flight log.
061 05 03 03
Calculation of
direction
average drift angle

an
off-course
fix
wind
speed and
LO Calculate the average wind speed and

direction based on two observed
fixes.
061 05 03 04
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)

revisions
LO Calculate ETA revisions based upon

observed fixes and revised ground
speed.
061 05 04 00
Flight log
LO Given
relevant
flight-plan
calculate the missing data.
Page 399
data,

Subject: 062 - RADIO NAVIGATION

ATPL(A) CPL(A) ATPL(H)/IR ATPL(H)
CPL(H) IR(A) &(H)
Time
1:30
0:30
1:30
1:00
0:30
1:00
allowed
(hours)
062 01
07
04
07
05
04
02
062 02
21
12
21
15
12
23
062 03
12
02
12
08
02
05
062 04
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
062 05
15
XX
15
XX
XX
10
062 06
11
04
11
06
04
04
Total
66
22
66
34
22
44
questions
Page 400

K. SUBJECT 062 RADIO NAVIGATION

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State that radio waves travel at the

speed of light, being approximately
300 000 km/s or 162 000 NM/s.
LO Define a cycle. A complete series of

values of a periodical process.
LO Define Hertz (Hz). 1 Hertz is 1 cycle per

second.
LO Define frequency. The number of cycles

occurring in 1 second in a radio wave
expressed in Hertz (Hz).
LO Define
wavelength.
The
physical
distance travelled by a radio wave during
one cycle of transmission.
LO Define
amplitude.
The
maximum
deflection in an oscillation or wave.
LO State that the relationship

wavelength and frequency is:
060 00 00 00
NAVIGATION
062 00 00 00
RADIO NAVIGATION
062 01 00 00
BASIC RADIO PROPAGATION THEORY
062 01 01 00
Basic principles
062 01 01 01
Electromagnetic waves
062 01 01 02
ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
Frequency, wavelength, amplitude,

phase angle
between
wavelength () = speed of light (c) /

frequency (f
or (meters) = 300 000 / kHz.
LO Define phase. The fraction of one

wavelength expressed in degrees from
000 to 360.
Page 401

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Define
phase
difference/shift.
The
angular
difference
between
the
corresponding points of two cycles of
equal wavelength, which is measurable in
degrees.
062 01 01 03
Frequency bands, sidebands, single

sideband
LO List the bands of the frequency spectrum

for electromagnetic waves:
Very Low Frequency (VLF): 3

30 kHz
Low Frequency (LF): 30300 kHz;
Medium Frequency (MF): 300
3 000 kHz
High Frequency (HF): 330 MHz;
Very High Frequency (VHF): 30300
MHz
Ultra High Frequency (UHF): 300
3 000 MHz
Super High Frequency (SHF): 3
30 GHz
Extremely High Frequency (EHF): 30
300 GHz
LO State that when a carrier wave is

modulated,
the
resultant
radiation
consists of the carrier frequency plus
additional upper and lower sidebands.
LO State that HF VOLMET and HF two-way
communication use a single sideband.
LO State that a radio signal may be
classified by three symbols in accordance
with the ITU Radio Regulation, Volume 1:
e.g. A1A.
The first symbol indicates the type

of modulation of the main carrier
The second symbol indicates the
nature of the signal modulating the
main carrier
The third symbol indicates the
Page 402
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
nat
ure
of
the
info
rm
atio
n to
be
tra
ns
mit
ted
.
xx

Page 403

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
062 01 01 04
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
Pulse characteristics
LO Define the following terms as associated

with a pulse string:
LO Define carrier wave. The radio wave

acting as the carrier or transporter.
LO Define keying. Interrupting the carrier

wave to break it into dots and dashes.
LO Define modulation. The technical term

for the process of impressing and
transporting information by radio waves.
LO Define
amplitude
modulation.
The
information that is impressed onto the
carrier wave by altering the amplitude of
the carrier.
LO Define
frequency
modulation.
The
information that is impressed onto the
carrier wave by altering the frequency of
the carrier.
LO Describe
pulse
modulation.
modulation form used in radar
transmitting short pulses followed
larger interruptions.
A
by
by
LO Describe
phase
modulation.
A
modulation form used in GPS where the
phase of the carrier wave is reversed.
062 01 01 05
062 01 01 06
pulse length,
pulse power,
continuous power.
Carrier, modulation
Kinds of modulation
(amplitude,
frequency, pulse, phase)
062 01 02 00
Antennas
062 01 02 01
Characteristics
LO Define antenna. A wave-type transducer

for the process of converting a line AC
into a free electromagnetic wave.
Page 404

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the simplest type of antenna is

a dipole which is a wire of length equal to
one-half of the wavelength.
LO State that in a wire which is fed with an

AC (alternating current), some of the
power will radiate into space.
LO State that in a wire parallel to the wire

fed with an AC but remote from it, an AC
will be induced.
LO State that an electromagnetic wave

always consists of an oscillating electric (E)
and an oscillating magnetic (H) field
which propagates at the speed of light.
LO State that the (E) and (H) fields are

perpendicular
to
each
other.
The
oscillations are perpendicular to the
propagation direction and are in-phase.
LO State that the electric field is parallel to

the wire and the magnetic field is
perpendicular to it.
LO State that
the polarisation of
an
electromagnetic
wave
describes
the
orientation of the plane of oscillation of
the electrical component of the wave
with
regard
to
its
direction
of
propagation.
LO State that in linear polarisation the plane

of oscillation is fixed in space, whereas in
circular (eliptical) polarisation the plane
is rotating.
LO Explain the difference between horizontal

and
vertical
polarisation
in
the
dependence of the alignment of the
dipole.
062 01 02 02
062 01 02 03
Polarisation
Types of antennas
Page 405

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO List and describe the common different

kinds of directional antennas:
loop antenna used in old ADF

receivers
parabolic antenna used in weather

radars
slotted planar array used in more

modern weather radars
helical antenna used in GPS

transmitters
062 01 03 00 Wave propagation
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the ionosphere is the ioni sed

component
of
the
Earths
upper
atmosphere from 60 to 400 km above the
surface, which is vertically structured in
three regions or layers.
LO State that the layers in the ionosphere

are named D, E and F layers, and their
depth varies with time.
LO State
that
electromagnetic
waves
refracted from the E and F layers of the
ionosphere are called sky waves.
062 01 03 01
062 01 03 02
Structure of the ionosphere
Ground waves
LO Define ground or surface waves. The

electromagnetic waves travelling along
062 01 03 03
Space waves
LO Define
space
waves.
The
electromagnetic waves travelling through
the air directly from the transmitter to
the receiver.
062 01 03 04
Propagation
bands
with
the
frequency
LO State that radio waves in VHF, UHF, SHF

and EHF propagate as space waves.
Page 406

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State that radio waves in VLF, LF, MF and

HF propagate as surface/ground waves
and sky waves.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State
that
Doppler
effect
is
the
phenomenon that the frequency of an
electromagnetic wave will increase or
decrease if there is relative motion
between
the
transmitter
and
the
receiver.
LO State that the frequency will increase if the

transmitter and receiver are converging,
and will decrease if they are diverging.
LO Define skip distance. The distance

between the transmitter and the point on
the surface of the Earth where the first
sky return arrives.
LO State that skip zone/dead space is the

distance between the limit of the surface
wave and the sky wave.
LO Describe fading. When a receiver picks

up the sky signal and the surface signal,
the signals will interfere with each other
causing the signals to be cancelled out.
LO State that radio waves in the VHF band and

above are limited in range as they are
not reflected by the ionosphere and do
not have a surface wave.
LO Describe
the
physical
reflection,
refraction,
absorption and interference.
062 01 03 05
062 01 03 06
Doppler principle
Factors affecting propagation
062 02 00 00
RADIO AIDS
062 02 01 00
Ground D/F
062 02 01 01
Principles
Page 407
phenomena
diffraction,

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the use of a Ground Direction

Finder
LO Explain why the service provided is
subdivided as
- VHF direction finding (VDF)
- UHF direction finding (UDF).
LO Explain the limitation of range because of
the path of the VHF signal.
LO Describe the operation of the VDF in the
following general terms:
062 02 01 02
radio waves emitted by the radiotelephony (R/T) equipment of the

aircraft
special directional antenna;
determination of the direction of the
incoming signal;
ATC display
Presentation and interpretation
LO Define the term QDM. The magnetic

bearing to the station.
LO Define the term QDR. The magnetic
bearing from the station.
LO Define the term QUJ. The true bearing
to the station.
LO Define the term QTE. The true bearing
from the station.
LO Explain that by using more than one
ground station, the position of an aircraft
can be determined and transmitted to
the pilot.
062 02 01 03
Coverage and range
LO Use the formula:

1.23 transmitterheightinfeet+1.23
receiverheightinfeet,
to calculate the range in NM.
062 02 01 04
Errors and accuracy
Page 408
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO
Explain
why
synchron
ous
transmis
sions will
cause
errors.

xx
xx
xx
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
Page 409
xx
x

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the effect of multipath signals.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the NDB is the ground part of

the system.
LO State that the ADF is the airborne part of

the system.
LO State that the NDB operates in the LF

and MF frequency bands.
LO The
frequency
band
assigned
to
aeronautical NDBs according to ICAO
Annex 10 is 1901 750 kHz.
LO Define a locator beacon. An LF/MF NDB

used as an aid to final approach usually
with
a
range, according to
ICAO
Annex 10, of 1025 NM.
LO Explain the difference between NDBs and

locator beacons.
LO Explain which beacons transmit signals

suitable for use by an ADF.
LO Explain that VDF information is divided

into the following classes according to
ICAO Annex 10:
class A: accurate to a range within

2
class B: accurate to a range within

5
class C: accurate to a range within

10
class D: accurate to less than class

C
062 02 02 00 Non-Directional
Beacon
(NDB)/
Automatic Direction Finder (ADF)
062 02 02 01
Principles
LO Define
the
acronym
Directional Beacon.
LO Define the acronym
Direction Finder.
NDB.
Non-
ADF. Automatic
Page 410
x
x
x
x

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that certain commercial radio

stations transmit within the frequency
band of the NDB.
LO Explain why it is necessary to use a

directionally sensitive receiver antenna
system in order to obtain the direction of
the incoming radio wave.
LO Describe the use of NDBs for navigation.
LO Describe the procedure to identify an

NDB station.
LO Interpret the term cone of silence in
respect of an NDB.
LO State that an NDB station
NON/A1A or a NON/A2A signal.
emits
LO State the function of the Beat Frequency

Oscillator (BFO).
LO State that in order to identify a NON/A1A
NDB, the BFO circuit of the receiver has
to be activated.
LO State that the NDB emitting NON/A1A
gives rise to erratic indications of the
bearing while the station is identifying.
LO Explain that on modern aircraft the BFO
is activated automatically.
062 02 02 02
LO Name the types of indicators in common

use:
electronic navigation display;

Radio Magnetic Indicator (RMI);
fixed card ADF (radio compass);
moving card ADF.
LO Describe the indications given on RMI, fixed

card and moving card ADF displays.
LO Given a display, interpret the relevant
Page 411
A
D
F
i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
.
x
x

xx
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
xx
xx
Page 412

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Calculate the true bearing from the

compass heading and relative bearing.
LO Convert
the
compass
bearing
magnetic bearing and true bearing.
LO State that the power limits the range of

an NDB.
LO Explain the relationship between power and

range.
LO State that the range of an NDB over sea

is better than over land due to better
ground wave propagation over seawater
than over land.
LO Describe the propagation path of NDB

radio
waves
with
respect
to
the
ionosphereandtheEarthssurface.
LO Explain that interference between sky

and ground waves at night leads to
fading.
LO Define the accuracy the pilot has to fly

the required bearing in order to be
considered established during approach
according to ICAO Doc 8168 as within
5.
LO State that there is no warning indication

of NDB failure.
into
LO Describe how to fly the following in-flight

ADF procedures according to
ICAO
Doc 8168, Volume 1:
homing and tracking, and explain

the influence of wind;
interceptions;
procedural turns;
holding patterns
062 02 02 03 Coverage and range
062 02 02 04
Errors and accuracy
Page 413

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Define quadrantal error. The distortion

of the incoming signal from the NDB station
by reradiation from the airframe. This is
corrected for during installation of the
antenna.
LO Explain coastal refraction. As a radio
wave travelling over land crosses the
coast, the wave speeds up over water
and the wave front bends.
LO Define
night/twilight
effect.
The
influence of sky waves and ground waves
arriving at the ADF receiver with a
difference of phase and polarisation
which introduce bearing errors.
LO State that interference from other NDB
stations on the same frequency may
occur
at
night
due
to
sky-wave
contamination.
062 02 02 05
Factors affecting range and accuracy
LO State that there is no coastal refraction

error when:
the propagation direction of the

wave is 90 to the coastline;
the NDB station is sited on the

coastline
LO State
that
coastal
refraction
error
increases with increased incidence.
LO State that night effect
around dusk and dawn.
predominates
LO Define multipath propagation

radio wave (mountain effect).
of
the
LO State that static emission energy from a

cumulonimbus cloud may interfere with
the radio wave and influence the ADF
bearing indication.
062 02 03 00
VOR and Doppler VOR
Page 414
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
062 02 03 01
Principl
es
x
xx
xx
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
Page 415
xx

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the operation of VOR using the

following general terms:
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the frequency band allocated

to VOR according to ICAO Annex 10 is
VHF and the frequencies used are 108.0
117.975 MHz.
LO State
that
frequencies
within
the
allocated VOR range which have an odd
number in the first decimal place, are used
by ILS.
LO State that the following types of VOR are

in operation:
is
LO List the three main components of VOR

airborne equipment:
reference phase;
variable phase
phase difference.
Conventional VOR (CVOR): a firstgeneration VOR station emitting

signals by means of a rotating
antenna;
Doppler VOR (DVOR): a secondgeneration VOR station emitting
signals by means of a combination
of fixed antennas utilising the
Doppler principle;
en route VOR for use by IFR traffic;
Terminal VOR (TVOR): a station
with a shorter range used as part of
the approach and departure
structure at major airports;
Test VOR (VOT): a VOR station
emitting a signal to test VOR
indicators in an aircraft.
LO Describe
how
ATIS
information
transmitted on VOR frequencies.
the antenna
the receiver,
the indicator
Page 416
x
x
x
x

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the identification of a VOR in

terms of Morse-code letters, continuous
tone or dots (VOT), tone pitch, repetition
rate and additional plain text.
LO State that according to ICAO Annex 10, a
VOR station has an automatic ground
monitoring system.
LO State that the VOR monitoring system
monitors change in measured radial and
reduction in signal strength.
LO State that failure of the VOR station to
stay within the required limits can cause
the
removal
of
identification
and
navigation components from the carrier
or radiation to cease.
062 02 03 02
LO Read off the radial on a Radio Magnetic

Indicator (RMI).
LO Read off the angular displacement in
relation to a preselected radial on an HSI
or CDI.
LO Explain the use of the TO/FROM indicator
in order to determine aircraft position
relative to the VOR considering also the
heading of the aircraft.
LO Interpret VOR information as displayed
on HSI, CDI and RMI.
LO Describe the following in-flight VOR
procedures as in ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume 1:
tracking, and explain the influence

of wind when tracking;
interceptions;
procedural turns;
holding patterns
LO State that when converting a radial into a
Page 417
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
true
bearing,
the
variation
at
the
VOR
station
has to be
taken
into
account.

xx
xx
xx
xx
Page 418

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
062 02 03 03
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
Coverage and range
LO Describe the range with respect to the

transmitting power and radio signal.
LO Calculate the range using the formula:
1.23 transmitterheightinfeet+1.23
receiverheightinfeet.
062 02 03 04
Errors and accuracy
LO Define the accuracy the pilot has to fly

the required bearing in order to be
considered established on a VOR track
when flying approach procedures according
to ICAO Doc 8168 as within half-full
scale deflection of the required track.
LO State that due to reflections from terrain,
radials can be bent and lead to wrong or
fluctuating indications, which is called
scalloping.
LO State that DVOR is less sensitive to site
error than CVOR.
062 02 04 00
DME
062 02 04 01
Principles
LO State that DME operates in the UHF band

between 9601215 MHz according to
ICAO Annex 10.
LO State that the system comprises two
basic components:
the aircraft component, the

interrogator;
the ground component, the
transponder.
Page 419

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe
the
principle
of
distance
measurement using DME in terms of:
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the distance measured by DME

is slant range.
LO Illustrate that a position line using DME

is a circle with the station at its centre.
LO Describe how the pairing of VHF and UHF

frequencies
(VOR/DME)
enables
the
selection of two items of navigation
information from one frequency setting.
LO Describe, in the case of co-location, the

frequency
pairing
and
identification
procedure.
LO Explain
that
depending
on
the
configuration, the combination of a DME
distance with a VOR radial can determine
the position of the aircraft.
LO Explain that military TACAN stations may

be used for DME information.
LO Explain that when identifying a DME

station co-located with a VOR station, the
identification signal with the higher-tone
frequency is the DME which idents
approximately every 40seconds.
LO Calculate ground distance

slant range and altitude.
given
LO Describe the use of DME to fly a DME arc

in accordance with ICAO Doc 8168, Volume
1.
062 02 04 02
pulse pairs;
fixed frequency division of 63 MHz;
propagation delay;
50-microsecond delay time;
irregular transmission sequence;
search mode;
tracking mode;
memory mode.
from
Page 420
x
x
x
x

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State that a DME system may have a

ground speed read-out combined with
the DME read-out.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Explain why a ground station can

generally respond to a maximum of
100 aircraft.
LO Explain which aircraft will be denied a

DME range first when more than
100 interrogations are being made.
LO State that the ground speed read-out

combined with DME is only correct when
tracking directly to or from the DME
station.
LO State that, close to the station, the

ground speed read-out combined with
DME is less than the actual ground
speed.
062 02 04 03
062 02 04 04
LO
Coverage and range
Errors and accuracy

State that the error of the DME N
according to ICAO Annex 10 should not
exceed + 0.25 NM + 1.25 % of the
distance measured.
For installations installed after 1 January
1989, the total system error should not
exceed0.2NMDMEP.
062 02 04 05
062 02 05 00
ILS
062 02 05 01
Principles
LO Name the three main components of an

ILS:
the localiser (LLZ);

the glide path (GP);
range information (markers or DME).
Page 421

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State the site

components:
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Explain that marker beacons produce

radiation
patterns
to
indicate
predetermined
distances
from
the
threshold along the ILS glide path.
LO Explain
that
marker
beacons
are
sometimes replaced by a DME paired with
the LLZ frequency.
LO State that in the ILS frequency assigned

band
108.0111.975 MHz,
only
frequencies which have an odd number in
the first decimal, are ILS frequencies.
LO State that the LLZ operates in the 108,0

111.975 MHz VHF band, according to
ICAO Annex 10.
LO State that the GP operates in the UHF

band.
LO Describe the use of the 90-Hz and the

150-Hz signals in the LLZ and GP
transmitters/receivers, stating how the
signals at the receivers vary with angular
deviation.
LO Draw the radiation pattern with respect

to the 90-Hz and 150-Hz signals.
LO Describe
how
the
UHF
glide-path
frequency is selected automatically by
being paired with the LLZ frequency.
LO Explain the term Difference of Depth of

Modulation (DDM).
locations
of
the
ILS
the localiser antenna should be

located on the extension of the
runway centre line at the stop-end;
The glide-path antenna should be
located 300 metres beyond the
runway threshold, laterally displaced
approximately 120 metres to the
side of the runway centre line.
Page 422

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State
that
the
difference
in
modulation
depth
increases
displacement from the centre line.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
the
with
LO State that both the LLZ and the GP

antenna radiate side lobes (false beams)
which could give rise to false centre-line
and false glide-path indication.
LO Explain that the back beam from the LLZ

antenna may be used as a published
non-precision approach.
LO State that according to ICAO Annex 10

the nominal glide path is 3.
LO Name the frequency, modulation and

identification assigned to all marker
beacons according to ICAO Annex 10:
all marker beacons operate on 75-MHz
carrier frequency.
The modulation frequencies are:
outer marker: 400 Hz;
middle marker: 1 300 Hz;
inner marker: 3000 Hz.

The audio frequency modulation (for
identification)
is
the
continuous
modulation of the audio frequency and is
keyed as follows:
outer marker: 2 dashes per second

continuously;
middle marker: a continuous series

of alternate dots and dashes;
inner marker: 6 dots per second

continuously.
LO State that according to ICAO Doc 8168,
the final-approach area contains a fix or

facility that permits verification of the ILS
glide pathaltimeter relationship. The
outer marker or DME is usually used for
this purpose.
062 02 05 02
Page 423

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Describe the ILS identification regarding

frequency and Morse code and/or plain
text.
LO Calculate the rate of descent for a 3- glidepath angle given the ground speed of the
aircraft and using the formula:
sound,
LO State that the outer-marker cockpit

indicator is coloured blue, the middle
marker amber, and the inner marker white.
Rate of Descent (ROD) in

(ground speed in kt 10) / 2.
ft/min
LO Calculate the rate of descent using the

following formula when flying any glidepath angle:
ROD ft/min = Speed Factor (SF) glidepath angle 100.
LO Interpret
the
markers
modulation, and frequency.
by
LO State that in accordance with ICAO

Annex 10, an ILS installation has an
automatic ground monitoring system.
LO State that the LLZ and GP monitoring
system monitors any shift in the LLZ and
GP mean course line or reduction in
signal strength.
LO State that a failure of either the LLZ or
the GP to stay within the predetermined
limits will cause:
removal of identification and

navigation components from the
carrier;
radiation to cease;
a warning to be displayed at the

designated control point.
LO State that an ILS receiver has an
automatic monitoring function.
Page 424

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the circumstances in which

warning flags will appear for both the LLZ
and the GP:
absence of the carrier frequency;
absence of the 90 and 150-Hz

modulation simultaneously;
the percentage modulation of either

the 90 or 150-Hz signal reduced to
0
LO Interpret the indications on a Course
Deviation
Indicator
(CDI)
and
a
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI):
full-scale deflection of the CDI

needle corresponds to
approximately 2,5 displacement
from the ILS centre line;
full-scale deflection on the GP

corresponds to approximately 0,7
from the ILS GP centre line.
LO
Interpret the aircrafts position in relation to

the extended runway centre line on a
back-beam approach.
LO Explain the setting of the course pointer

of an HSI for front-beam and back-beam
approaches.
062 02 05 03
Coverage and range
LO Sketch the standard coverage area of the

LLZ and GP with angular sector limits in
degrees and distance limits from the
transmitter in accordance with ICAO
Annex 10:
LLZ coverage area is 10 on either

side of the centre line to a distance
of 25 NM from the runway, and 35
on either side of the centre line to a
distance of 17 NM from the runway;
- GP coverage area is 8 on either side of
the centre line to a distance of
minimum 10 NM from the runway.
062 02 05 04
Errors and accuracy
LO Explain that ILS approaches are divided

into facility performance categories
Page 425
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
define
d in
ICAO
Annex
10

Page 426

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Define the following ILS operation

categories:
Category I,
Category II
Category IIIA
Category IIIB
Category IIIC
LO Explain
that
all
Category-III
ILS
operations
guidance
information
is
provided from the coverage limits of the
facility to, and along, the surface of the
runway.
LO Explain why the accuracy requirements

are progressively higher for CAT I, CAT II
and CAT III ILS.
LO State the vertical-accuracy requirements

above the threshold for CAT I, II and III for
the signals of the ILS ground installation.
LO Explain the following in accordance with

ICAO Doc 8168:
the accuracy the pilot has to fly the

ILS localiser to be considered
established on an ILS track is within
the half-full scale deflection of the
required track;
the aircraft has to be established
within the half-scale deflection of
the LLZ before starting descent on
the GP;
the pilot has to fly the ILS GP to a
maximum of half-scale fly-up
deflection of the GP in order to stay
in protected airspace.
LO State that if a pilot deviates by more

than half-scale deflection on the LLZ or
by
more
than
half-course
fly-up
deflection on the GP, an immediate
missed approach should be executed
because obstacle clearance may no
longer be guaranteed.
Page 427

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Describe ILS beam bends. Deviations

from the nominal position of the LLZ and
GP respectively. They are ascertained by
flight test.
LO Explain
multipath
interference.
Reflections from large objects within the
ILS coverage area.
LO Define the ILS-critical area. An area of

defined dimensions about the LLZ and GP
antennas
where
vehicles,
including
aircraft, are excluded during all ILS
operations.
LO Define the ILS-sensitive area. An area

extending beyond the critical area where
the
parking
and/or
movement
of
vehicles, including aircraft, is controlled
to prevent the possibility of unacceptable
interference to the ILS signal during ILS
operations.
LO Describe the effect of FM broadcast

stations that transmit on frequencies just
below 108 MHz.
062 02 05 05
062 02 06 00
Microwave Landing System (MLS)
062 02 06 01
Principles
LO Explain the principle of operation:
horizontal course guidance during

the approach;
vertical guidance during the

approach;
horizontal guidance for departure

and missed approach;
DME (DME/P) distance;
transmission of special information

regarding the system and the
approach conditions.
LO State that MLS operates in the S band on
200 channels.
Page 428

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the reason why MLS can be

installed at airports on which, as a result of
the effects of surrounding buildings and/or
terrain, ILS siting is difficult.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Interpret the display of airborne equipment

designed to continuously show the position
of the aircraft in relation to a preselected
course and glide path along with distance
information,
during approach and
departure.
LO Explain that segmented approaches can

be carried out with a presentation with
two cross bars directed by a computer
which has been programmed with the
approach to be flown.
LO Illustrate that segmented and curved

approaches can only be executed with
DME-P installed.
LO Explain why aircraft are equipped with a

Multimode Receiver (MMR) in order to be
able to receive ILS, MLS and GPS.
LO Explain why MLS without DME-P gives an

ILS lookalike straight-line approach.
062 02 06 02
062 02 06 03
Coverage and range
LO Describe the coverage area for the

approach direction as being within a
sector of 40 of the centre line out to a
range of 20 NM from the threshold
(according to ICAO Annex 10).
062 02 06 04
Error and accuracy
LO State the 95 % lateral and vertical

accuracy within 20 NM (37 km) of the
MLS approach reference datum and 60 ft
above the MLS datum point (according to
ICAO Annex 10).
062 03 00 00
RADAR
Page 415

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
062 03 01 00
Pulse
terms
techniques
and
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
associated
LO Name the different applications of radar

with respect to ATC, MET observations
and airborne weather radar.
LO Describe the pulse technique and echo

principle on which primary radar systems
are based.

maximum theoretical range and the Pulse
Repetition Frequency (PRF).
LO Calculate
the
maximum
theoretical
unambiguous range if the PRF is given
using the formula:
Range in km
300 000
PRF 2
LO Calculate the PRF if the maximum

theoretical unambiguous range of the
radar is given using the formula:
300 000
PRF
range (km) 2
LO Explain that pulse length defines the
minimum theoretical range of a radar.
LO Explain the need to harmonise the
rotation speed of the antenna, the pulse
length and the pulse repetition frequency
for range.
LO Describe, in general terms, the effects of
the following factors with respect to the
quality of the target depiction on the
radar display:
atmospheric conditions:
superrefraction and subrefraction;
attenuation with distance;
Page 416
c
o
n
d
it
i
o
n
a
n
d
s
i
z

e of the reflecting surface.

062 03 02 00
Ground radar
Page 417

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
062 03 02 01
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
Principles
LO Explain that primary radar

bearing and distance of targets.
LO Explain that primary ground radar is used

to detect aircraft that are not equipped with
a secondary radar transponder.
LO Explain why Moving

(MTI) is used.
LO State that modern ATC systems use

computer-generated display.
LO Explain that the radar display enables the

ATS controller to provide information,
surveillance or guidance service.
LO List the two main tasks of the weather

radar in respect of weather and navigation.
LO State the wavelength (approx. 3 cm) and

frequency of
most AWRs
(approx.
9 GHz).
LO Explain how the antenna is attitudestabilised in relation to the horizontal plane

using the aircrafts attitude reference
system.
LO Explain that older AWRs have two

different radiation patterns which can be
produced by a single antenna, one for
mapping (cosecant-squared) and the
other for weather (pencil/cone-shaped).
LO Describe the cone-shaped pencil beam of

about 3 to 5 beam width used for weather
depiction.
062 03 02 02
Target
provides
Indicator
062 03 03 00
Airborne weather radar
062 03 03 01
Principles
Page 418

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain that in modern AWRs a single

radiation pattern is used for both
mapping and weather with the scanning
angle being changed between them.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Explain the danger of the area behind

heavy rain (shadow area) where no radar
waves will penetrate.
LO Explain why the tilt setting should be

higher when the aircraft descends to a
lower altitude.
062 03 03 02
LO Explain the functions of the following

different modes on the radar control
panel:
off/on switch;
function switch, with WX, WX+T and

MAP modes;
gain-control setting (auto/manual);
tilt/autotilt switch
LO Name, for areas of differing reflection
intensity, the colour gradations (green,
yellow, red and magenta) indicating the
increasing intensity of precipitation.
LO Illustrate the use of azimuth-marker lines
and range lines in respect of the relative
bearing and the distance to a thunderstorm
or to a landmark on the screen.
062 03 03 03
Coverage and range
LO Explain how the radar is used for weather

detection and for mapping (range, tilt
and gain, if available).
062 03 03 04
Errors, accuracy, limitations
LO Explain why AWR should be used with

extreme caution when on the ground.
062 03 03 05
Page 419

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Explain why the tilt setting should be

lower when the aircraft climbs to a higher
altitude.
LO Explain why a thunderstorm may not be

detected when the tilt is set too high.
LO Describe the navigation function of the

radar in the mapping mode.
LO Describe the use of the weather radar to

avoid a thunderstorm (Cb).
LO Explain how turbulence (not CAT) can be

detected by a modern weather radar.
LO Explain how windshear can be detected

by a modern weather radar.
062 03 03 06
Application for navigation
062 03 04 00
Secondary surveillance
transponder
062 03 04 01
Principles
radar
and
LO Explain that the Air Traffic Control (ATC)

system is based on the replies provided
by the airborne transponders in response
to interrogations from the ATC secondary
radar.
LO Explain that the ground ATC secondary

radar uses techniques which provide the
ATC with information that cannot be
acquired by the primary radar.
LO Explain that an airborne transponder

provides coded-reply signals in response
to interrogation signals from the ground
secondary radar and from aircraft equipped
with TCAS.
LO Explain the advantages of SSR over a

primary radar.
062 03 04 02
Modes and codes
Page 420

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Explain that the interrogator transmits its

interrogations in the form of a series of
pulses.
LO Name and explain the interrogation

modes:
Mode A and C;
Intermode:
Mode A/C/S all call,
Mode A/C only all call;
LO State that the interrogation frequency is

1 030 MHz and the reply frequency is
1 090 MHz.
LO Explain that the decoding of the time

between
the
interrogation
pulses
determines the operating mode of the
transponder:
Mode A: transmission of aircraft

transponder code;
Mode C: transmission of aircraft

pressure altitude;
Mode S: aircraft selection and

transmission of flight data for the
ground surveillance.
LO State that the ground interrogation signal
LO Explain that the interval between P1 and

P3 determines the mode of interrogation,
Mode A or C.
LO State that the radiated amplitude of P2

from the side lobes and from the main
lobe is different.
Mode S:
Mode S only all call,
broadcast (no reply elicited),
selective.
is transmitted in the form of pairs of

pulses P1 and P3 for Mode A and C, and
that a control pulse P2 is transmitted
following the first interrogation pulse P1.
Page 421

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that Mode-A designation is a

sequence of four digits which can be
manually selected from 4 096 available
codes.
LO State that in Mode-C reply the pressure

altitude is reported in 100-ft increments.
LO State that in addition to the information

pulses provided, a
Special Position
Identification
(SPI)
pulse
can
be
transmitted but only as a result of a
manual selection (IDENT).
LO Explain the need for compatibility of

Mode S with Mode A and C.
LO Explain that Mode-S transponders receive

interrogations
from
other
Mode-S
transponders and SSR ground stations.
LO State that Mode-S surveillance protocols

implicitly use the principle of selective
addressing.
LO Explain that every aircraft will have been

allocated an ICAO Aircraft Address which
is hard-coded into the airframe (Mode-S
address).
LO Explain that the ICAO Aircraft Address

consists of 24 bits (therefore more than
16 000 000 possible codes) allocated by
the registering authority of the State in
which the aircraft is registered.
LO Explain that this (24-bit) address is

included in all Mode-S transmissions, so
that every interrogation can be directed
to a specific aircraft, preventing multiple
replies.
LO State that the ground interrogation signal

is transmitted in the form of P1, P3 and
P4 pulses for Mode S.
Page 422

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Interpret the following Mode-S terms:
selective addressing;
mode all call;
selective call.
LO State that Mode-S interrogation contains
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Mode A/C/S all-call consists of 3 pulses: P1,

P3 and the long P4. A control pulse P2 is
transmitted following P1 to suppress
responses from aircraft in the side lobes
of the interrogation antenna.
LO Mode A/C only all-call consists

pulses: P1, P3 and the short P4.
LO State that there are 25 possible Mode-S

reply forms.
LO State that the reply message consists of a

preamble and a data block.
LO State that the Aircraft Address shall be

transmitted in any reply except in Mode-S
only all-call reply.
LO Explain
that
Mode S
can
provide
enhanced vertical tracking, using a
25-feet altitude increment.
LO Explain how SSR can be used for ADS B.
either:
aircraft address;
all call address;
broadcast address
062 03 04 03
of
LO Explain how an aircraft can be identified

by a unique code.
LO Illustrate how the following information is
presented on the radar screen:
pressure altitude;
flight level;
flight number or aircraft
Page 423
r
e
g
i
s
t
r
a
t
i

on;
ground speed.
Page 424

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Name and interpret the codes 7700, 7600

and 7500.
LO Interpret the selector modes: OFF,

Standby, ON (mode A), ALT (mode A and
C), and TEST.
LO Explain the function of the emission of a

Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse
after pushing the IDENT button in the
aircraft.
LO Explain that the elementary surveillance

provides the ATC controller with the
aircrafts position,
altitude
and
identification.
LO State that the elementary surveillance

needs
Mode-S
transponders
with
Surveillance Identifier (SI) code capacity
and the automatic reporting of aircraft
identification, known as ICAO Level 2s.
LO State that the SI code must correspond

to the aircraft identification specified in
item 7 of the ICAO flight plan or to the
registration marking.
LO State that only the ICAO identification

format is compatible with the ATS ground
system.
LO State that Mode-S-equipped aircraft with

a maximum mass in excess of 5 700 kg
or a maximum cruising true airspeed
capability in excess of 250 kt must
operate
with
transponder
antenna
diversity.
LO Describe
the
different
types
of
communication protocols (A, B, C and D).
LO Explain that elementary surveillance is

based
on
Ground-Initiated
Comm-B
protocols.
ELEMENTARY SURVEILLANCE
Page 425

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
ENHANCED SURVEILLANCE
LO State that enhanced surveillance consists
of the extraction of additional aircraft
parameters known as Downlink Aircraft
Parameters (DAP) consisting of:
magnetic heading;
indicated airspeed;
Mach number;
vertical rate;
roll angle;
track angle rate;
true track angle;
ground speed;
selected altitude
LO Explain that the controllers information is
improved by providing actual aircraft derived data such as magnetic heading,
indicated airspeed, vertical rate and
selected altitude.
LO Explain that the automatic extraction of
an
aircrafts parameters, and their
presentation to the controller, will reduce
their R/T workload and will free them to
concentrate on ensuring the safe and
efficient passage of air traffic.
LO Explain that the reduction in radiotelephony
between
the
air
traffic
controllers and the pilots will reduce pilot
workload and remove a potential source
of error.
062 03 04 04
Errors and accuracy
LO Explain the following disadvantages of

SSR (Mode A/C):
code garbling of aircraft less than

1.7 NM apart measured in the
vertical plane perpendicular to and
from the antenna;
fruiting which results from the

reception of replies caused by
interrogations from other radar
Page 426
s
t
a
t
i
o
n
s
.

Page 426

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
062 04 00 00
INTENTONALLY LEFT BLANK
062 05 00 00
AREA
NAVIGATION
RNAV/FMS
062 05 01 00
General philosophy and definitions
062 05 01 01
Basic RNAV (B-RNAV), Precision

RNAV (P-RNAV), RNP-PNAV
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
SYSTEMS,
LO Define Area Navigation (RNAV) (ICAO

Annex 11). A method of navigation
permitting aircraft operations on any
desired track within the coverage of
station-referenced navigation signals, or
within the limits of a self-contained
navigation system.
LO State that Basic RNAV (B-RNAV) systems

require RNP 5.
LO State that Precision

systems require RNP 1.
LO State that a 2D-RNAV system is able to

navigate in the horizontal plane only.

navigate in the horizontal plane and in
addition has a guidance capability in the
vertical plane.

navigate in the horizontal plane, has a
guidance capability in the vertical plane
and in addition has a timing function.
062 05 01 02
062 05 01 03
RNAV
(PRNAV)
Principles of 2D RNAV, 3D RNAV and

4D RNAV
Required
Navigation
Performance
(RNP) in accordance with ICAO Doc
9613
LO State that RNP is a concept that applies

to navigation performance within an
airspace.
Page 425

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO The RNP type is based on the navigation

performance accuracy to be achieved
within anairspace.
LO State that RNP X requires a navigation

performance accuracy of X NM both
lateral and longitudinal 95 % of the flying
time (RNP 1 requires a navigation
performance of 1 NM both lateral and
longitudinal 95 % of the flying time).
LO State that RNAV equipment is one

requirement in order to receive approval
to operate in an RNP environment.
LO State that RNAV equipment operates by

automatically determining the aircrafts
position.
LO State the advantages of using RNAV

techniques over more conventional forms
of navigation:
establishment of more direct routes

permitting a reduction in flight
distance;
establishment of dual or parallel

routes to accommodate a greater
flow of en route traffic;
establishment of bypass routes for

aircraft overflying high-density
terminal areas;
establishment of alternatives or
contingency routes either on a
planned or ad hoc basis;
establishment of optimum locations

for holding patterns;
reduction in the number of ground

navigation facilities.
LO State that RNP may be specified for a route,
a number of routes, an area, volume of

airspace, or any airspace of defined
dimensions.
Page 426

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that airborne navigation equipment

uses inputs from navigational systems
such as VOR/DME, DME/DME, GNSS, INS
and IRS.
LO State that aircraft equipped to operate to

RNP 1 and better, should be able to
compute an estimate of its position error,
depending on the sensors being used and
time elapsed.
LO Indicate navigation-equipment failure.
LO The control unit allows the flight crew to:
tune the VOR/DME station used to

define the phantom waypoint;
define the phantom waypoint as a

radial and distance (DME) from the
selected VOR/DME station;
select the desired magnetic track to

follow inbound to the phantom
waypoint;
select between an en route mode,

an approach mode of operation and
the basic VOR/DME mode of
operation.
LO Track guidance is shown on the HSI/CDI.
062 05 02 00
Simple 2D RNAV
Info: First generation of radio-navigation
systems allowing the flight crew to select
a phantom waypoint on the RNAV panel and
select a desired track to fly inbound to the
waypoint.Z
062 05 02 01
062 05 02 02
Flight-deck equipment
Navigation
navigation
computer,
VOR/DME
LO The navigation computer of the simple

2D-RNAV
system
computes
the
navigational problems by simple sine and
cosine
mathematics,
solving
the
triangular problems.
Page 427
062 05 02 03
Navigat
ion computer
input/output

Page 428

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State that the following input data to the
navigation computer is:
the actual VOR radial and DME

distance from the selected VOR
station;
the radial and distance to phantom

waypoint;
the desired magnetic track inbound

to the phantom waypoint
LO State the following output data from the
navigation computer:
desired magnetic track to the

phantom waypoint shown on the
CDI at the course pointer;
distance from the present position

to the phantom waypoint;
deviations from the desired track as

follows:
in en route mode, full-scale
deflection on the CDI is 5 NM;
in approach mode, full-scale
deflection on the CDI is 1
NM;
in VOR/DME mode, full-scale
deflection on the CDI is 10.
LO State that the system is limited to
`operate within the range of the selected
VOR/DME station.
062 05 03 00
4D RNAV
Info: The next generation of area
navigation equipment allowed the flight
crew to navigate on any desired track
within the coverage of VOR/DME stations.
062 05 03 01
Flight-deck equipment
LO State that in order to give the flight crew

control over the required lateral guidance
functions, RNAV equipment should at
least be able to perform the following
functions:
display present position in latitude/

longitude or as distance/bearing to
the selected waypoint;
Page 429
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
s
e
l
e
c
t
o
r
e
n
t
e
r
t
h
e
r
e
q
u
i
r
e
d
f
l
i
g
h
t
p
l
a
n
t
h
r
o
u
g
h
t
h
e
C

ontrol and
Page 430

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Display Unit (CDU)

review and modify navigation data
for any part of a flight plan at any
stage of flight and store sufficient
data to carry out the active flight
plan;
review, assemble, modify or verify a
flight plan in flight, without affecting
the guidance output;
execute a modified flight plan only
after positive action by the flight
crew;
where provided, assemble and
verify an alternative flight plan
without affecting the active flight
plan;
assemble a flight plan, either by
identifier or by selection of
individual waypoints from the
database, or by creation of
waypoints from the database, or by
creation of waypoints defined by
latitude/longitude, bearing/distance
parameters or other parameters;
assemble flight plans by joining
routes or route segments;
allow verification or adjustment of
displayed position;
provide automatic sequencing
through waypoints with turn
anticipation; manual sequencing
should also be provided to allow
flight over, and return to,
waypoints;
display cross-track error on the
CDU;
provide time to waypoints on the
CDU;
execute a direct clearance to any
waypoint;
fly parallel tracks at the selected
offset distance; offset mode should
be clearly indicated;
purge previous radio updates;
carry out RNAV holding procedures
(when defined);
make available to the flight crew
estimates of positional uncertainty,
Page 431
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL e CPL
iATPL
t /IR
h
e
r
a
s
a
q
u
a
l
i
t
y
f
a
c
t
o
r
o
r
b
y

ATPL CPL
Page 432

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
062 05 03 02
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
reference to sensor differences from

the computed position;
conform to WGS-84 geodetic
reference system;
indicate navigation-equipment
failure.
Navigation
navigation
computer,
VOR/DME
LO State that the navigation computer uses

signals from the VOR/DME stations to
determine position.
LO Explain that the system automatically

tunes the VOR/DME stations by selecting
stations which provide the best angular
fix determination.
LO Explain that the computer uses DME/DME

to determine position if possible, and
only if two DMEs are not available the
system will use VOR/DME to determine
the position of the aircraft.
LO Explain that the computer is navigating

on the great circle between waypoints
inserted into the system.
LO State that the system has a navigational

database which may contain the following
elements:
reference data for airports (4-letter

ICAO identifier);
VOR/DME station data (3-letter

ICAO identifier);
waypoint data (5-letter ICAO

identifier);
STAR data;
SID data;
airport runway data including

thresholds and outer makers;
NDB stations (alphabetic ICAO

identifier);
company flight-plan routes.

LO State that the navigational database is valid
for a limited time, usually 28 days.
Page 433

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the navigational database is read

only, but additional space exists so that
crew-created navigational data may be
saved in the computer memory. Such
additional data will also be deleted at the
28-day navigational update
of the
database.
LO State that the computer receives a TAS

input from the air-data computer and a
heading input in order to calculate actual
wind velocity.
LO State that the computer calculates track

error in relation to desired track. This
data can easily be interfaced with the
automatic flight control, and when done so,
it enables the aircraft to automatically
follow the flight plan loaded
into the RNAV computer.
LO State that the computer is able to

perform great-circle navigation when
receiving VOR/DME stations. If out of
range, the system reverts to DR (Dead
Reckoning) mode, where it updates the
position by means of last computed wind
and
TAS
and heading information.
Operation in DR mode is time-limited.
LO State that the system has direct to

capability to any waypoint.
LO State that the system

parallel offset tracking.
capable of
LO State that any waypoint can be inserted into

the computer in one of the following ways:
alphanumeric ICAO identifier;
latitude and longitude;
radial and distance from a VOR

Station.
062 05 03 03 Navigation computer input/output
is
Page 434

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State that the following are input data into

a 4D-RNAV system:
DME distances from DME stations;
radial from a VOR station;
TAS and altitude from the air-data

computer;
heading from the aircrafts heading

system.
LO State that the following are output data
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Explain
that
the
development
of
computers which combine reliable liquid
crystal displays offer the means of
accessing more data and displaying them
to the flight crew.
LO Explain that a flight management system

has the ability to monitor and direct both
navigation and performance of the flight.
LO Explain the two functions common to all

FMS systems:
automatic navigation Lateral

Navigation (LNAV);
flight path management Vertical

Navigation (VNAV).
from
a 4D-RNAV system:
distance to any waypoint;
estimated time overhead;
ground speed and TAS;
true wind;
track error.
062 05 04 00
Flight Management
and general terms
062 05 04 01
Navigation and flight management
System
Page 435
(FMS)

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Name the main components of the FMS

system as being:
Flight Management Computer

(FMC);
Control and Display Unit (CDU);
symbol generator;
Electronic Flight Instrument System

(EFIS) consisting of the NAV
display, including mode selector and
attitude display;
Auto-throttle (A/T) and Flight

Control Computer (FCC).
062 05 04 02 Flight management computer
LO State that the centre of the flight
management system is the FMC with its
stored navigation and performance data.
062 05 04 03
Navigation database
LO State that the navigation database of the

FMC may contain the following data:
reference data for airports (4-letter

ICAO identifier);
VOR/DME station data (3-letter

ICAO identifier);
waypoint data (5-letter ICAO

identifier);
STAR data;
SID data;
holding patterns;
airport runway data;
NDB stations (alphabetic ICAO

identifier);
company flight-plan routes.

LO State that the navigation database is
updated every 28 days.
LO State that the navigational database is
write-protected, but additional space
exists so that crew-created navigational
data may be saved in the computers
memory. Such additional data will also be
deleted at the 28-day navigational
update of the database.
Page 436
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
062 05 04 04
Perfor
mance database
xx

Page 437

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the performance database

stores all the data relating to the specific
aircraft/engine configuration,
and
is
updated by ground staff when necessary.
LO State that the performance database of

the FMC contain the following data:
062 05 04 05
V1, VR and V2 speeds;

aircraft drag;
engine-thrust characteristics;
maximum and optimum operating
altitudes;
speeds for maximum and optimum
climb;
speeds for long-range cruise,
maximum endurance and holding;
maximum Zero-Fuel Mass (ZFM),
maximum Take-Off Mass (TOM) and
maximum Landing Mass (LM);
fuel-flow parameters;
aircraft flight envelope
Typical input/output data from the

FMC
LO State the following are typical input data to

the FMC:
time;
fuel flow;
total fuel;
TAS, altitude, vertical speed, Mach

number and outside-air temperature
from the Air-Data Computer (ADC);
DME and radial information from the

VHF/NAV receivers;
air/ground position;
flap/slat position;
IRS and GPS positions;
Control and Display Unit (CDU)

entries
Page 438

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State that the following are typical output

data from the FMC:
command signals to the flight

directors and autopilot;
command signals to the autothrottle;
information to the EFIS displays

through the symbol generator;
data to the CDU and various

annunciators.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that modern FMS may use a range

of sensors for calculating the position of
the aircraft including VOR, DME, GPS, IRS
and ILS.
LO State that the information from the

sensors used may be blended into a
single position by using the Kalman-filter
method.
LO State that the Kalman filter is an

algorithm for filtering incomplete and
noisy
measurements
of
dynamical
processes so that errors of measurements
from different sensors are minimised,
thus leading to the calculated position
being more accurate than that produced
by any single sensor.
062 05 04 06
Determination of the FMS position of

the aircraft
062 05 05 00
Typical flight-deck equipment fitted

on FMS aircraft
062 05 05 01
Control and Display Unit (CDU)
LO State
that
the
communication link
between the flight crew and the FMC is
the CDU.
Page 435

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the main components of the CDU

as follows:
CDU display including the following

terms:
page title,
data field,
scratch pad;
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that FMS-equipped aircraft typically

has two displays on the instrument panel
in front of each pilot.
LO State that the following data are typically

displayed on the attitude display:
attitude information;
flight director command bars;
radio height and barometric

altitude;
course deviation indication;
glide-path information (when an ILS

is tuned);
speed information.
062 05 05 03 Typical modes of the navigation
display
LO State the following typical modes of the

navigation display:
full VOR/ILS mode showing the

whole compass rose;
expanded (arc) VOR/ILS mode

showing the forward 90 sector;
map mode;
plan mode.
062 05 05 02
line-select keys;
numeric keys;
alpha keys;
function and mode keys used to
select specific data pages on the
CDU display, to execute orders or to
navigate to pages through the data
presented;
warning lights, message light and
offset light.
EFIS instruments (attitude display,

navigation display)
Page 436

Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR

Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
ATPL
062 05 05 04
Typical information on the navigation

display
LO List
and
interpret
the
following
information typically shown on a navigation
display in Full VOR/ILSmode:
the map display will be in full VOR

c mode when a VOR frequency is
selected, and full ILS mode when an
ILS frequency is selected on the VHF
NAV frequency selector;
DME distance to selected DME

station;
a full 360 compass rose.
At the top of the compass rose, present

heading is indicated and shown as digital
numbers in a heading box. Next to the
heading box it is indicated whether the
heading is true or magnetic. True heading
is available on aircraft with IRS.
A triangle (different symbols are used on
different aircraft) on the compass rose
indicates present track. Track indication
is only available when the FMC navigation
computer is able to compute the aircrafts
position. A square symbol on the outside
of the compass rose indicates the
selected heading for the autopilot, and if
heading select mode is activated on the
autopilot, this is the heading the aircraft
will turn to.
Within the compass rose, a CDI is shown.
On the CDI, the course pointer points to the
selected VOR/ILS course SET on the OBS.
On the CDI, the course deviation bar will
indicate angular deflection from the
selected
VOR/ILS
track.
Full-scale
deflection side to side in VOR mode is
20, and 5 in ILS mode. In VOR mode, a
Page 437
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
x
TO/FROM
display.
indication

is
shown
Page 438
on
the

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
The selected
shown.
ILS/VOR
frequency
is
ILS or VOR mode is shown according to

the selected frequency.
If an ILS frequency is selected, a glidepath deviation scale is shown.
Page 439
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO A wind arrow indicating wind direction

according to the compass rose, and velocity
in numbers next to the arrow.
LO Given an EFIS navigation display in full

VOR/ILS mode, read off the following
information:
heading (magnetic/true);
track (magnetic/true);
drift;
wind correction angle;
selected course;
actual radial;
left or right of selected track;
above or below the glide path;
distance to the DME station;
selected heading for the autopilot

heading select bug;
determine whether the display is in

VOR or ILS rose mode
LO Given an EFIS navigation display in
expanded VOR/ILS mode, read off the

following information:
drift;
tailwind/headwind;
wind velocity;
selected course;
actual radial;
left or right of selected track;
above or below the glide path;
distance to the DME station;

heading select bug;
state whether the display is in VOR

or ILS rose mode
Page 440

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Given an EFIS navigation display in map

mode, read off the following information:
drift;
tailwind/headwind;
wind velocity;
left or right of the FMS track;
distance to active waypoint;
ETO next waypoint;

heading select bug;
determine whether a depicted

symbol is a VOR/DME station or an
airport;
determine whether a specific

waypoint is part of the FMS route.
LO Given an EFIS navigation display in plan
mode, read off the following information:
heading (magnetic/true)
track (magnetic/true)
drift;
distance to active waypoint;
ETO active waypoint;
state the selected heading for the

autopilot heading select bug;
measure and state true track of

specific FMS route track.
062 06 00 00
GLOBAL
SYSTEMS
062 06 01 00
GPS, GLONASS, GALILEO
062 06 01 01
Principles
NAVIGATION
SATELLITE
LO State that there are two main Global

Navigation
Satellite
Systems
(GNSS)
currently in existence with a third one which
is planned to be fully operational by 2011.
These are:
USA NAVigation System with Timing

And Ranging Global Positioning
System (NAVSTAR GPS);
Russian GLObal NAvigation Satellite
Page 441
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
S
y
s
t
e
m
(
G
L
O
N
A
S
S
)
;
Eur
opean
GALILEO

Page 442

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State that all three systems (will) consist

of a constellation of satellites which can
be used by a suitably equipped receiver
to determine position.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that there are currently two modes of

operation: Standard Positioning Service
(SPS) for civilian users, and Precise
Positioning Service (PPS) for authorised
users.
LO SPS was originally designed to provide

civilian users with a less accurate
positioning capability than PPS.
LO Name the three segments as follows:
space segment;
control segment;
user segment.
Space segment
LO State that the space segment consists of

a notional constellation of 24 operational
satellites.
LO State that the satellites are orbiting the

Earth in orbits inclined 55 to the plane
of the equator.
LO State that the satellites are in a nearly

circular orbit of the Earth at an altitude
of 20 200 km (10 900 NM).
LO State that the satellites are distributed in

6 orbital planes with at least 4 satellites
in each.
LO State that a satellite completes an orbit

in approximately 12 hours.
LO State that each satellite broadcasts

ranging signals on two UHF frequencies:
L1 1575.42 MHz and L2 1227.6 MHz.
062 06 01 02
Operation
NAVSTAR GPS
Page 443

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that SPS is a positioning and timing

service provided on frequency L1.
LO State that PPS uses both frequencies L1

and L2.
LO In 2005, the first replacement satellite

was launched with a new military M code
on the L1 frequency, and a second signal
for civilian use L2C on the L2 frequency.
LO State that the ranging signal contains a

Coarse Acquisition (C/A) code and a
navigational data message.
LO State that the navigation message contains:
almanac data;
ephemeris;
satellite clock correction

parameters;
UTC parameters;
ionospheric model;
satellite health data.

LO State that it takes 12,5 minutes for a
LO State that the almanac contains the

orbital data about all the satellites in the
GPS constellation.
LO State that the ephemeris contains data

used to correct the orbital data of the
satellites due to small disturbances.
LO State
that
the
clock
correction
parameters are data for the correction of
the satellite time.
LO State that UTC parameters are factors

determining the difference between GPS
time and UTC.
LO State that an ionospheric model is

currently used to calculate the time delay
of the signal travelling through the
ionosphere.
GPS receiver to receive all the

frames in the navigation message.
Page 444
data

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the GPS health message is

used to exclude unhealthy satellites from
the position solution. Satellite health is
determined by the validity of the
navigation data.
LO State that GPS uses the WGS-84 model.
LO State that two codes are transmitted on

the L1 frequency, namely a C/A code and
a Precision (P) code. The P code is not used
for SPS.
LO State that the C/A code is a Pseudo

Random Noise (PRN) code sequence,
repeating every millisecond. Each C/A
code is unique and provides the mechanism
to identify each satellite.
LO State that satellites broadcast the PRN

codes with reference to the satellite vehicle
time which are subsequently changed by
the receiver to UTC.
LO State that satellites are equipped with

atomic clocks, which allow the system to
keep very accurate time reference.
LO State that the control segment comprises:
a master control station;
ground antenna;
monitoring stations
LO State that the master control station is
responsible for all aspects of the
constellation command and control.
LO State that the main tasks of the control

segment are:
managing SPS performance;
navigation data upload;
monitoring satellites.
Control segment
User segment
Page 445
Syllabus
reference


Learning Objectives

Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State
that
GPS
supplies
threedimensional position fixes and speed
data, plus a precise time reference.
LO State that the GPS receiver used in

aviation is a multichannel type.
LO State that a GPS receiver is able to

determine the distance to a satellite by
determining the difference between the
time of transmission by the satellite and
the time of reception.
LO State that the initial distance calculated

to the satellites is called pseudo-range
because the difference between the GPS
receiver and the satellite time references
initially creates an erroneous range.
LO State that each range defines a sphere

with its centre at the satellite.
LO State that three satellites are needed to

determine a two-dimensional position.
LO State that four spheres are needed to

calculate a three-dimensional position,
hence four satellites are required.
LO State that the GPS receiver is able to

synchronise to the correct time base
when receiving four satellites.
LO State that the receiver is able to

calculate aircraft ground speed using the
SV Doppler frequency shift and/or the
change in receiver position over time.
LO Define Receiver Autonomous Integrity

Monitoring (RAIM). A technique whereby
a receiver processor determines the
integrity of the navigation signals.
LO State
that
RAIM
is
achieved
by
consistency check among pseudo-range
measurements.
NAVSTAR GPS integrity
Page 446

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that basic RAIM requires five

satellites. A sixth is for isolating a faulty
satellite from the navigation solution.
LO State that when a GPS receiver uses

barometric altitude as an augmentation
to RAIM, the number of satellites needed
for the receiver to perform the RAIM
function may be reduced by one.
x
LO
GLONASS
LO List the three components of GLONASS:
space segment, which contains the

constellation of satellites;
control segment, which contains the

ground-based facilities;
user segment, which contains the

user equipment.
LO State the composition of the constellation
in the space segment:
24 satellites in 3 orbital planes with

8 equally displaced by 45 of
latitude;
a near-circular orbit at 19 100 km at

an inclination of 64.8 to the
equator;
each orbit is completed in 11 hours

and 15 minutes.
LO State that the control segment provides:
monitoring of
the constellation
status;
correction to orbital parameters;
navigation data uploading.

LO State that the user equipment consists of
receivers and processors for the navigation
signals for the calculation of
the coordinates, velocity and time.
LO State that the time reference is UTC.
LO State that the datum used is PZ-90
Earth-centred Earth-fixed.
Page 447
x
State
that
each

satellite transmits navigation signals on

two frequencies of L-band, L1 1.6 GHz and
L2 1.2 GHz.
Page 448

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that L1 is a standard-accuracy

signal designed for civilian users worldwide
and
L2
is
a
high-accuracy signal
modulated by a special code for authorised
users only.
LO State that the navigation message has a

duration of 2 seconds and contains
immediate data which relates to the
actual satellite transmitting the given
navigation signal and non-immediate data
which relates to all other satellites within
the constellation.
LO State that immediate dataconsists of:
enumeration of the satellite time

marks;
difference between onboard time

scale of the satellite and GLONASS
time;
relative differences between carrier

frequency of the satellite and its
nominal value;
ephemeris parameters.
LO State that non-immediate data consists
of:
data on the status of all satellites

within the space segment;
coarse corrections to onboard time

scales of each satellite relative to
GLONASS time;
orbital parameters of all satellites

within the space segment;
correction to GLONASS time relative

to UTC (must remain within 1
microsecond).
LO State that integrity monitoring includes
checking the quality of the characteristics
of the navigation signal and the data within
the navigation message.
Page 449

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State
that
integrity
monitoring
is
implemented in two ways:
Continuous
automatic
operability
monitoring of principal systems in
each satellite. If a malfunction occurs,
an unhealthy flag appears within the
immediate data of the navigation
message.
Special tracking stations within the

ground-based control segment are
used to monitor the space-segment
performance.
If
a
malfunction
occurs, an unhealthy flag appears
within the immediate data of the
navigation message.
LO State
that
agreements
have
been
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the core of the Galileo

constellation will consist of 30 satellites
with 9 plus a spare replacement in each
of the 3 planes in near-circular orbit at
an altitude of 23 222 km inclined at 56
to the plane of the equator.
LO State that the signals will be transmitted

in 3 frequency bands: 1 1641 215 MHz,
1 2601 300 MHz and 1 5591 591 MHz
(1 5591 591 MHz will be shared with
GPS on a non-interference basis).
LO State that each orbit will take 14 hours.
concluded
between
the
appropriate
agencies for the interoperability by any
approved user of NAVSTAR and GLONASS
systems.
GALILEO
LO State that each satellite has three

sections: timing, signal generation and
transmit.
LO State that in the timing section two
clocks have been developed, a Rubidium
Frequency Standard clock and a more
Page 450
x
x
precise
Passive
Hydroge
n Maser
clock.
xx

x
Page 451

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the signal generation contains

the navigation signals.
LO State that the navigation signals consist

of a ranging-code identifier and the
navigation message.
LO State that the navigation message

basically contains information concerning
the satellite orbit (ephemeris) and the
clock references.
LO State that the navigation message is upconverted on four navigation signal

carriers and the outputs are combined in
a multiplexer before transmission in the
transmit section.
LO State that the navigation antenna has

been designed to minimise interference
between satellites by having equal power
level propagation paths independent of
elevation angle.
LO State that the system is monitored in a

similar way for both GPS NAVSTAR and
GLONASS, but also by a new method based
on spread-spectrum signals.
LO State
that
tracking, telemetry and
command operations are controlled by
sophisticated
data
encryption
and
authentication procedures.
LO GPS,
EGNOS
and
GALILEO
are
compatible, will not interfere with each
other, and the performance of the
receiver will be enhanced by the
interoperability of the systems.
GALILEO future developments

Info: Further Learning Objectives will be
written as details are released.
Page 452
062 06 01 03

Errors and factors affecting accuracy
Page 453

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO List the most significant factors affecting

accuracy:
ionospheric propagation delay;
dilution of position;
satellite clock error;
satellite orbital variations;
multipath.
LO State that Ionospheric Propagation Delay
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that in SPS receivers, IPD is

currently
corrected
by
using
the
ionospheric model from the navigation
message, but the error is only reduced
by 50 %.
LO State that ionospheric delay is the most

significant error.
LO State that dilution of position arises from

the geometry and number of satellites in
view. It is called Position Dilution of
Precision (PDOP).
LO State that errors in the satellite orbits

are due to:
solar wind;
gravitation of the Sun, Moon and

planets.
LO State that multipath is when the signal
(IPD) can almost be eliminated by using

two frequencies.
arrives at the receiver via more than one

path (the signal being reflected from
surfaces near the receiver).
062 06 02 00
Ground, satellite and airborne-based

augmentation systems
062 06 02 01
Ground-Based
Systems (GBAS)
Augmentation
LO Explain the principle of a GBAS: to

measure on ground the signal errors
transmitted by GNSS satellites and relay
the measured errors to the user for
correction.
Page 454
Syllabus
reference


Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the ICAO GBAS standard is

based on this technique through the use
of a data link in the VHF band of ILS
VOR systems (108118 MHz).
LO State that for a GBAS

coverage is about 30 km.
LO Explain that ICAO Standards provide the

possibility to interconnect GBAS stations
to form a network broadcasting largescale differential corrections. Such a
system is identified as Ground Regional
Augmentation System (GRAS).
LO Explain that GBAS ground subsystems

provide two services: precision approach
service and GBAS positioning service.
The precision approach service provides
deviation guidance for final-approach
Segments, while the GBAS positioning
service
provides
horizontal
position
information to support RNAV operations
in terminal areas.
LO Explain that one ground station can

support all the aircraft subsystems within
its coverage providing the aircraft with
approach data, corrections and integrity
information for GNSS satellites in view
via a VHF Data Broadcast (VDB).
LO State that the minimum GBAS plan

coverage is 15 NM from the landing
threshold point within 35 apart the final
approach path and 10 apart between
15 and 20 NM.
LO State that GBAS based on

sometimes
called
Local
Augmentation System (LAAS).
station
Page 455
the
GPS is
Area

Syllabus
reference
Syllabus details and associates

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe the characteristics of a Local

Area Augmentation System (LAAS) with
respect to:
differential corrections applied to a

satellite signal by a ground-based
reference station;
regional service providers to

compute the integrity of the satellite
signals over their region;
extra accuracy for extended

coverage around airports, railways,
seaports and urban areas as
required by the user.
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO State that the frequency band of the data

link is identical to that of the GPS signals.
LO Explain that the use of geostationary

satellites
enables
messages
to
be
broadcast over very wide areas.
LO Explain that pseudo-range measurements

to these geostationary satellites can also
be made, as if they were GPS satellites.
LO State that SBAS consists of

elements:
the ground infrastructure

(monitoring and processing
stations);
the SBAS satellites;
the SBAS airborne receivers.
062 06 02 02
Satellite Based Augmentation System

LO Explain the principle of a SBAS: to measure
on the ground the signal errors transmitted
by GNSS satellites and transmit differential
corrections and integrity messages for
navigation satellites.
Page 456
three

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain that the SBAS station network
measures the pseudo-range between the
ranging source and an SBAS receiver at the
known locations and provides separate
corrections for ranging source ephemeris
errors, clock errors and ionospheric errors.
The user applies corrections for tropospheric
delay.
LO Explain that SBAS can provide approach and
landing operations with vertical guidance
(APV) and precision approach service.
LO Explain the difference between coverage
areaand service area.
LO State that Satellite-Based Augmentation
Systems include:
EGNOS in western Europe and the

Mediterranean;
WAAS in the USA;
MSAS in Japan;
GAGAN in India.
LO Explain that SBAS systems regionally
augment GPS and GLONASS by making
them
suitable
for
safety-critical
applications such as landing aircraft.
062 06 02 03
European
Geostationary
Overlay Service (EGNOS)
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
Navigation
LO State that EGNOS consists of three

geostationary Inmarsat satellites which
broadcast GPS lookalike signals.
LO State that EGNOS is designed to improve
accuracy to 12 m horizontally and 3
5 m vertically.
LO Explain that integrity and safety are
improved by
alerting users
within
6 seconds if a GPS malfunction occurs
(up to 3 hours GPS alone).
062 06 02 04
Helicopter
Airborne-Based Augmentation Systems

(ABAS)
Page 457
Syllabus
reference


Learning Objectives

Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
IR
CPL ATPL ATPL CPL

/IR
LO Explain the principle of ABAS: to use

redundant elements within the GPS
constellation
(e.g.:
multiplicity
of
distance
measurements
to
various
satellites) or the combination of GNSS
measurements with those of
other
navigation sensors (such as inertial
systems) in order to develop integrity
control.
LO State that the type of ABAS using only

GNSS information is named Receiver
Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM).
LO State that a system using information

from additional onboard sensors is named
Aircraft Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
(AAIM).
LO Explain that the typical sensors used are

barometric altimeter, clock and inertial
navigation system.
LO Explain that unlike GBAS and SBAS, ABAS

does not improve positioning accuracy.
Page 458

Subject: 070 - OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES

Time
1:1 5
0:45
1:00
1:0 0
0:45
XX
allowe
d
Distribution
of questions with regard to the topics of the syllabus
(hours)
071 01
25
18
18
18
14
XX
071 02
20
12
14
14
12
XX
071 03
XX
XX
06
06
04
XX
Total
45
30
38
38
30
XX
questions
Page 459

L. SUBJECT 070 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL CPL
070 00 00 00
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
071 01 00 00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
071 01 01 00
ICAO Annex 6
071 01 01 01
Definitions
LO Alternate
aerodrome:
take-off
alternate, en route alternate, ETOPS en
route alternate, destination alternate
(ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 1).
LO Alternate heliport (ICAO Annex
Part III, Section 1, Chapter 1).
LO Flight time aeroplanes
Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 1).
LO Flight
time
Annex
6,
Part
Chapter 1).
071 01 01 02
CPL
helicopters
(ICAO
III,
Section
1,
Applicability
LO State that Part I shall be applicable to the

operation of aeroplanes by operators
authorised to conduct international
commercial air transport operations (ICAO
LO State that Part III shall be applicable to

all helicopters engaged in international
commercial air transport operations or in
international general aviation operations,
except it is not applicable to helicopters
engaged in aerial work (ICAO Annex 6,
071 01 01 03
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
6,
(ICAO
Helicopter
General
LO State compliance with laws, regulations

and procedures (ICAO Annex 6, Part I,
Chapter
3.1/Part
III,
Section
2,
Chapter 1.1).
Page 460

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
LO State flight safety documents system

(ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 3.3).
LO State maintenance release (ICAO Annex

6, Part I, Chapter 8.8/Part III, Section 2,
Chapter 6.7).
LO List and describe the lights to be

displayed by aircraft (ICAO Annex 6 ,
Part I, Appendix 1).
LO State
the
operational
regulations
applicable
to
commercial
air
transportation.
LO Nature of operations and exceptions.
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Flight
Manual
limitations
Flight
through
the
Height
Velocity
(HV)
envelope.
LO Define Helicopter Emergency Medical

Service.
LO Operations over a hostile environment

Applicability.
LO Local area operations Approval.
LO State accident prevention

safety programme (ICAO
Part I, Chapter 3.2).
071 01 02 00
Operational requirements
071 01 02 01
Applicability
071 01 02 02
and flight
Annex 6,
General
LO State
that
a
commercial
air
transportation flight must meet the
LO State the requirements about language

used for crew communication and
operations manual.
LO Explain the relation between MMEL and

MEL.
Page 461

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State the operators requirements

regarding a management system.
LO State
the
operators requirements
regarding accident prevention and
flight safety programme.
LO State
the
operators responsibility
regarding the distinction between cabin
crew members and additional crew
members.
LO State
the
operations
limitations
regarding ditching requirements.
LO State the regulations concerning the

carriage of persons on an aircraft.
LO State
the
crew
members
responsibilities in the execution of their
duties, and define the commanders
authority.
LO State the operators and commanders

responsibilities regarding admission to
the flight deck and carriage of
unauthorised persons or cargo.
LO State the operators responsibility

concerning portable electronic devices.
LO State the operators responsibilities

regarding admission in an aircraft of a
person under the influence of drug or
alcohol.
LO State
the
regulations
endangering safety.
concerning
LO List the documents to be carried on

each flight.

regarding manuals to be carried.
LO List the additional information

forms to be carried on board.
Page 462
and

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO List the items of information to be

retained on
the ground by
the
operator.

regarding inspections.
LO State the responsibility of the operator

and of the commander regarding the
production of and access to records
and documents.
LO State
the
regarding
the
preservation
of
documentation
and
recordings,
including recorders recordings.
LO Define the terms used in leasing and

state the responsibility and requirements
of each party in various cases.
LO State the requirement to be satisfied

for the issue of an Air Operators
Certificate (AOC).
LO State the rules applicable

operator certification.
air
LO State the conditions to be met for the

issue or revalidation of an AOC.
LO Explain the contents and conditions of

the AOC.
LO Define the terms used for operational

procedures.

regarding Operations Manual.
071 01 02 03
071 01 02 04
Operator
supervision
certification
and
to
Operational
procedures
(except
long-range flight preparation)
Page 463

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL

regarding competence of operations
personnel.

regarding establishment of procedures.

regarding use of air traffic services.

regarding authorisation of aerodromes/
heliports by the operator.
LO Explain which elements must be

considered by the operator when
specifying
aerodrome/heliport
operating minima.

regarding departure and approach
procedures.
LO State the parameters to be considered

in noise-abatement procedures.
LO State the elements to be considered

regarding
routes
and
areas
of
operation.
LO State the additional specific navigationperformance requirements.
LO State the maximum distance from an

adequate aerodrome for two-engine
aeroplanes without an ETOPS approval.
LO State the requirement for alternateairport accessibility check for ETOPS

operations.
LO List the factors to be considered when

establishing minimum flight altitude.
LO Describe the components of the fuel

policy.
LO State the requirements for carrying

persons with reduced mobility.
Page 464

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State the operators responsibilities for the

carriage
of
inadmissible
passengers, deportees or persons in
custody.
LO State the requirements for the stowage

of baggage and cargo in the passenger
cabin.
LO State
the
requirements
regarding
passenger seating and
emergency
evacuation.
LO Detail the procedures for a passenger

briefing in respect of emergency
equipment and exits.
LO State the flight preparation forms to be

completed before flight.
LO State the commanders responsibilities

during flight preparation.
LO State
the
rules
for
aerodromes/heliports
selection
(including ETOPS configuration).
LO Explain the planning minima for IFR

flights.
LO State the rules for refuelling/defuelling.
LO State crew members at stationpolicy.
LO State the use of seats, safety belts and

harnesses.
LO State securing of passenger cabin and

galley requirements.
LO State the commanders responsibility

regarding smoking on board.
LO State
under
which
conditions
a
commander can commence or continue
a
flight
regarding
meteorological
conditions.
regarding ice and other contaminants.
Page 465

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL

regarding fuel to be carried and
in-flight fuel management.
LO State the requirements regarding the

use of supplemental oxygen.
LO State the ground-proximity detection

reactions.
LO Explain the requirements for use of

ACAS.

regarding approach and landing.
LO State the circumstances under which a

report shall be submitted.
071 01 02 05
All-weather operations
LO State
the
regarding aerodrome/heliport operating
minima.
LO List the parameters to be considered in

establishing the aerodrome operating
minima.
LO Define the criteria to be taken into

consideration for the classification of
aeroplanes.
LO Define the following terms: circling,

low-visibility
procedures,
lowvisibility take-off, visual approach.
LO Define the following terms: flight control

system, fail-passive flight control
system, fail-operational flight control
system, fail-operational hybrid landing
system.

approach and take-off area.
Page 466
final
LO State the general operating rules for

low-visibility operations.

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Low-visibility
operations
aerodrome/heliport considerations.
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL
/IR
LO State the training and qualification

requirements for flight crew to conduct
LO State the operating procedures for lowvisibility operations.
LO State the operators and commanders

responsibilities
regarding
minimum
equipment for low-visibility operations.
LO VFR operating minima.
LO Aerodrome operating minima: state

under which conditions the commander
can commence take-off.

that take-off minima are expressed as
visibility or RVR.
LO Aerodrome operating minima: state the

take-off RVR value depending on the
facilities.

system
minima
for
non-precision
approach.

under which conditions a pilot can
continue the approach below MDA/H or
DA/H.

lowest minima for precision approach
category
1
(including
single-pilot
operations).

category 2 operations.
Page 467
ATPL
CPL
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO List the equipment for operations

requiring a radio communication.
LO List the equipment for operations

requiring a radio-navigation system.


lowest minima for circling and visual
approach.
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL
/IR

RVR value and cloud ceiling depending on
the facilities (class 1, 2 and 3).

under which conditions an airborne
radar approach can be performed and
state the relevant minima.
071 01 02 06
Instruments and equipment
LO State which items do not require an

equipment approval.
LO State
the
requirements
spare-fuses availability.
regarding
LO State
the
requirements
operating lights.
regarding
LO State
the
requirements
windshield wipers.
regarding
LO List the minimum equipment required

for day and night VFR flights.

for IFR flights.
LO State the required equipment

single-pilot operation under IFR.
for
LO State the requirements for an altitude

alert system.
Page 468

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State the
altimeters.
LO State
the
GPWS/TAWS.
requirements
for
radio
requirements
for
CPL
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State the requirements for ACAS.
LO State the conditions under which an

aircraft must be fitted with a weather
radar.
LO State the requirements for operations

in icing conditions.
LO State the conditions under which a

crew member interphone system and
public address system are mandatory.

cockpit voice recorder is compulsory.
LO State the rules regarding the location,

construction, installation and operation
of cockpit voice recorders.

flight data recorder is compulsory.
LO State the rules regarding the location,

of flight data recorders.
LO State the requirements about seats,

seat safety belts, harnesses and childrestraint devices.
LO State the requirements about Fasten

seat beltand No smokingsigns.
LO State
the
requirements
internal doors and curtains.
regarding
LO State the requirements regarding firstaid kits.
LO State
the
requirements
regarding
emergency medical kits and first-aid
oxygen.
Page 469

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Detail the rules regarding the carriage

and use of supplemental oxygen for
passengers and crew.
LO Detail the rules regarding

protective breathing equipment.
LO Describe the minimum number, type

and
location
of
handheld
fire
extinguishers.
LO Describe the minimum number and

location of crash axes and crowbars.
LO Specify the colours and markings used

to indicate break-in points.
LO State the requirements for means of

emergency evacuation.
LO State
the
megaphones.
for
LO State the requirements for emergency

lighting.
LO State
the
requirements
for
emergency locator transmitter.
an
LO State the requirements for life jackets,

life rafts, survival kits and ELTs.
LO State the additional requirements for

helicopters operating to
or
from
helidecks located in a hostile sea area.
LO State
the
requirements
for
emergency flotation equipment.
requirements
LO State the requirements

survival suit.
for
crew-
crew
LO State the requirements for survival

equipment.
071 01 02 07
Communication
equipment
and
an
navigation
Page 470

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the general requirements for

communication
and
navigation
equipment.
LO State that the radio-communication

equipment
must
provide
communications on 121.5 MHz.

provision of an audio selector panel.
LO List
the
requirements
for
radio
equipment when flying under VFR by
reference to visual landmarks.
LO List
the
requirements
for
communications
and
navigation
equipment when operating under IFR
or under VFR over routes not navigated
by reference to visual landmarks.
LO State the equipment required

operate within RVSM airspace.
to
LO State the requirement regarding crew

composition and in-flight relief.
LO State the requirement for conversion

training and checking.
LO State the requirement for differences

training and familiarisation training.
LO State the conditions for upgrade from

co-pilot to commander.
the
LO State
requirements
commander.
LO State the requirement for recurrent

LO State the requirement for a pilot to

operate oneitherpilotsseat.
LO State the minimum recent experience

for the commander and the co-pilot.
071 01 02 09
Flight crew
minimum
qualification
to
operate
as
a
Page 471

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Specify the route and aerodrome/

heliport qualification required for a
commander or a pilot flying.
LO State the requirement to operate on

more than one type or variant.
LO State that when a flight crew member

operates
both
helicopters
and
aeroplanes, the operations are limited
to one type of each.
LO State the training records requirement.
LO State who is regarded as a cabin crew

member.
LO Detail the requirements

cabin crew members.
LO State the acceptability criteria.
LO State
the
requirements
senior cabin crew members.
regarding
LO State the conditions to operate on

the
LO Explain the structure and subject

headings of the operations manual.
LO State the requirements for a journey

logbook.
LO Describe the requirements regarding

the operational flight plan.
LO State the requirements for documentstorage periods.
071 01 02 10
071 01 02 11
Cabin crew/crew members other

than flight crew
Manuals, logs and records

operations manual.
071 01 02 12
regarding
rules
Flight and duty-time

and rest requirements
for
limitations
LO Explain the definitions used for flighttime regulation.
Page 472

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
LO State the flight and duty limitations.

maximum daily flight-duty period.
LO State the requirements regarding rest

periods.
LO Explain the possible extension of flightduty period due to in-flight rest.
LO Explain the captains discretion in case of

unforeseen circumstances in actual flight
operations.
LO Explain
the
standby.
regarding
LO State
the
requirements regarding
flight-duty, duty and rest-period records.
LO Explain the terminology relevant to

dangerous goods.
LO Explain the scope of the regulation.
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the limitations on the transport

of dangerous goods.
LO State
the
requirements
for
acceptance of dangerous goods.
LO State
the
requirements
regarding
inspection for damage, leakage or
contamination.
LO Explain the loading restrictions.
LO State the requirement for provision of

information to the crew.
LO Explain the requirements for dangerous

goods incident and accident reports.
071 01 02 13
regulation
Transport of dangerous goods by

air
071 01 03 00
Long-range flights
071 01 03 01
Flight management
Page 473
the
Syllabus
reference


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Navigation-planning procedures:
describe the operators

responsibilities concerning ETOPS
routes;
list the factors to be considered by

the commander before
commencing the flight.
LO Selection of a route:
describe the meaning of the term

adequate aerodrome;
describe the limitations on

extended-range operations with
two-engine aeroplanes with and
without ETOPS approval.
LO Selection of cruising altitude (MNPSA
Manual Chapter 4):
specify the appropriate cruising
levels for normal long-range IFR
flights and for those operating on
the North Atlantic Operational
Track Structure.
Selection
of alternate aerodrome:
LO
state the circumstances in which a

take-off alternate must be
selected;
state the maximum flight distance

of a take-off alternate for: twoengine aeroplane, ETOPSapproved aeroplane, three or
four-engine aeroplane;
state the factors to be considered

in the selection of a take-off
alternate;
state when a destination alternate

need not be selected;
state when two destination

alternates must be selected;

in the selection of a destination
alternate aerodrome;

in the selection of an en route
alternate aerodrome.
Page 474
CPL
ATPL ATPL
/IR
CPL
Syllabus
reference


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Minimum time routes:
define, construct and interpret

minimum time route (route giving
the shortest flight time from
departure to destination adhering
to all ATC and airspace
restrictions).
Page 475
CPL
ATPL ATPL
/IR
CPL
071 01 03 02


Transoceanic and polar flight
LO (ICAO Doc 7030)

x
Describe the possible indications of

navigation-system degradation.
Describe by what emergency means

course and INS can be cross-checked in the
case of: three navigation systems, two
navigation systems.
Interpret
VOR,
NDB,
VOR/DME
information to calculate aircraft position
and aircraft course.
Describe the general ICAO procedures

applicable in North Atlantic airspace
(NAT) if the aircraft is unable to continue
the flight in accordance with its air traffic
control clearance.
Describe the ICAO procedures applicable

in North Atlantic Airspace (NAT) in case of
radio-communication failure.
Describe the recommended initial action if

an aircraft is unable to obtain a revised
air traffic control clearance.
Describe the subsequent action for:

aircraft able to maintain assigned flight
level, and aircraft unable to maintain
assigned flight level.
Describe determination of tracks and

courses for random routes in NAT.
Specify the method by which planned

tracks are defined (by latitude and
longitude) in the NAT region: when
operating predominately in an eastwest
direction south of 70N, when operating
predominately in an eastwest direction
north of 70N.
State
the
maximum
flight
time
recommended between significant points.

tracks are defined for flights operating
predominantly in a northsouth direction.
Describe how the desired route must be

specified in the air traffic control flight
plan.
Page 476


LO Polar navigation
x
Terrestrial magnetism characteristics in polar
zones
Explain why magnetic compasses become

unreliable or useless in polar zones.
State in which area VORs are referenced

to the true north.
Specific problems of polar navigation
Describe the general problems of polar

navigation.
Describe what precautions can be taken

when operating in the area of compass
unreliability as a contingency against INS
failure.
Describe how grid navigation can be used

in conjunction with a Directional Gyro
(DG) in polar areas.
Use polar stereographic chart and grid

coordinates to solve polar navigation
problems.

coordinates to calculate navigation data.
Use INS information to solve polar

navigation problems.
Define, calculate:
transport precession,
Earth-rate
(astronomic)
precession,
convergence factor.
Describe the effect of using a free gyro to

follow a given course.
Describe the effect of using a gyro

compass with hourly rate corrector unit to
Convert grid navigation data into true

navigation data, into magnetic navigation
data, and into compass navigation data.
Justify the selection of a different north

reference at a given position.
Calculate the effects of gyro drift due to

the Earths rotation (15 degrees / h sin
Lm).
071 01 03 03
MNPS airspace
LO Geographical limits:
x
state the lateral dimensions (in general

terms) and vertical limits of
MNPS
airspace (ICAO Doc 7030 NAT/RAC-2
3.2.1);
Page 477


state that operators must ensure that
crew follow NAT MNPSA Operations
Manual procedures (ICAO Doc 7030
NAT/RAC-2 3.2.3).
LO Define the following acronyms: MNPS, MNPSA, x
OCA, OTS, PRM, PTS, RVSM, LRNS, MASPS,
SLOP, WATRS (MNPSA Manual, Glossary of
Terms).
LO Aircraft system requirements (MNPSA Manual,

Chapter 1):
navigation requirements for unrestricted
MNPS airspace operations;
routes for use by aircraft not equipped

with two LRNSs: routes for aircraft with
only one LRNS, routes for aircraft with
short-range navigation equipment only;
performance monitoring.
LO Organised Track System (MNPSA Manual ,
Chapter 2):
construction of the Organised Track

System (OTS);
NAT track message;
OTS changeover periods.

LO Other routes and route structures within or x
adjacent to NAT MNPS airspace (MNPSA
Manual, Chapter 3):
other routes within NAT MNPS airspace;
route structures adjacent to NAT MNPS

airspace: North American routes (NARs),
Canadian domestic track systems, routes
between
North
America
and
the
Caribbean area.
LO Flight planning (MNPSA Manual, Chapter 4):
x
all flights should plan to operate on greatcircle tracks joining successive significant
waypoints;
during the hours of validity of the OTS,

operators are encouraged to flight plan as
follows: in accordance with the OTS or
along a route to join or leave an outer track
of the OTS or on a random route to remain
clear of the OTS;
flight levels available on OTS tracks

during OTS periods;
flight levels on random tracks or outside

OTS
periods
(appropriate
direction
levels).
Page 478

LO Oceanic ATC
Chapter 5):
Clearances
(MNPSA
Manual ,
it is recommended that pilots should

request their Oceanic Clearance at least
40 minutes prior to the oceanic entry
point ETA;
pilots should notify the Oceanic Area
control Centre (OAC) of the maximum
acceptable flight level possible at the
boundary;
at some airports, which are situated close
to oceanic boundaries, the Oceanic
Clearance must be obtained before
departure;
if an aircraft, which would normally be
RVSM
and/or
MNPS
approved,
encounters, whilst en route to the NAT
Oceanic Airspace, a critical in-flight
equipment failure, or at dispatch is
unable to meet the MEL requirements for
RVSM or MNPS approval on the flight,
then the pilot must advise ATC at initial
contact
when
requesting
Oceanic
Clearance;
After obtaining and reading back the
clearance, the pilot should monitor the
forward estimate for oceanic entry, and if
this changes by 3 minutes or more,
should pass a revised estimate to ATC;
the pilot should pay particular attention
when the issued clearance differs from
the flight plan, as a significant proportion
of navigation errors investigated in the
NAT involve an aircraft which has followed
its flight plan rather than its differing
clearance;
if the entry point of the oceanic route on
which the flight is cleared differs from
that originally requested and/or the
oceanic flight level differs from the
current
flight
level,
the
pilot
is
responsible for requesting and obtaining
the necessary domestic re-clearance;
there are three elements to an Oceanic
Clearance: route, Mach number and flight
level. These elements serve to provide for
the three basic elements of separation:
lateral, longitudinal and vertical.
Page 479


Communications
and
position-reporting
LO
x
procedures (MNPSA Manual, Chapter 6)
HF voice communications
Pilots communicate with OACs via aeradio

stations staffed by communicators who
have no executive ATC authority. Messages
are relayed, from the ground station to the
air traffic controllers in the relevant OAC for
action.
Frequencies from the lower HF bands tend

to be used for communications during
night-time and those from the higher bands
during daytime.
When initiating contact with an aeradio

station, the pilot should state the HF
frequency in use.
SATCOM voice communications
Since oceanic traffic typically communicates with
ATC through aeradio facilities, a SATCOM call
made due to unforeseen inability to communicate
by other means should be made to such a facility
rather than the ATC centre, unless the urgency
of the communication dictates otherwise.
An air-to-air VHF frequency has been established
for worldwide use when aircraft are out of range
of VHF ground stations which utilise the same or
adjacent
frequencies.
This
frequency
(123.45 MHz) is intended for pilot-to-pilot
exchanges
of
operationally
significant
information.
Standard position report message type.
Some aircraft flying in the NAT are required to
report MET observations of wind speed and
direction plus outside-air temperature. Any
turbulence encountered should be included in
these reports.
General guidance for aircraft operating in, or
proposing to operate in, the NAT region, which
experience a communications failure: general
provisions, onboard HF equipment failure, poor
HF
propagation
conditions,
loss
of
HF
communications prior to entry into the NAT, loss
of HF communications after entering the NAT.
All turbine-engine aeroplanes having a maximum
certified take-off mass exceeding 5,700 kg or
authorised
to
carry
more
than
19 passengers are required to carry and operate
ACAS II in the NAT region.
Page 480


LO Application of Mach number technique (MNPSA x
Manual, Chapter 7):
practical experience has shown that when

two or more turbojet aircraft, operating
along the same route at the same flight
level, maintain the same Mach number,
they are more likely to maintain a
constant time interval between each other
than when using other methods;
pilots must ensure that any required

corrections to the indicated Mach number
are taken into account when complying
with the true Mach number specified in
the ATC clearance;
after leaving oceanic airspace, pilots must

maintain their assigned Mach number in
domestic controlled airspace unless and
until the appropriate ATC unit authorises
a change.
LO MNPS flight operation & navigation procedures x
(MNPSA Manual, Chapter 8):
the pre-flight procedures for any NAT

MNPS flight must include a UTC time
check and resynchronisation of the
aircraft master clock;
state the use of the Master Document;
state the requirements for position
plotting;
PRE-FLIGHT PROCEDURES: alignment of
IRS,
Satellite
Navigation
Availability
Prediction Programme for flights using
GNSS LRNS, loading of initial waypoints,
flight plan check;
IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURES: ATC Oceanic
Clearance, entering the MNPS airspace
and reaching an oceanic waypoint,
routine monitoring;
Strategic
Lateral
Offset
Procedure
(SLOP): state that along a route or track
there will be three positions that an
aircraft may fly: centre line or one or two
miles right.
Page 481


LO RVSM flight in MNPS airspace (MNPSA Manual, x
Chapter 9):
state the altimeter cross-check to be

performed before MNPS airspace entry;

performed into the MNPS airspace;
in NAT MNPS airspace, pilots always have

to report to ATC immediately on reaching
any new cruising level;
crews should report when a 300 ft or

more deviation occurs.
LO Navigation system degradation or failure x
(MNPSA Manual, Chapter 10)
For this part, consider aircraft equipped with
only two operational LRNSs. State the
requirements for the following situations:
one system fails before take-off;
one system fails before the OCA boundary

is reached;
one system fails after the OCA boundary

is crossed;
the remaining system fails after entering

MNPS airspace.
Special
procedures for in-flight contingencies
LO
General
Until a revised clearance is obtained, the

specified
NAT
in-flight
contingency
procedures should be carefully followed.
The general concept of these NAT in-flight

contingency procedures is, whenever
operationally feasible, to offset from the
assigned route by 15 NM and climb or
descend to a level which differs from
those normally used by 500 ft if below
FL410 or by 1 000 ft if above FL410.
State the factors which may affect the

direction of turn: direction to an alternate
airport, terrain clearance, levels allocated
on adjacent routes or tracks and any known
SLOP offsets adopted by other nearby
traffic.
Deviations around severe weather
071 01 03 04
State that if the deviation is to be greater

than 10 NM, the assigned flight level
must be changed by 300 ft depending
on the followed track and the direction of
the deviation (Table 1).
ETOPS
Page 482


LO State that ETOPS approval is part of an AOC.
x
LO State that prior to conducting an ETOPS flight, x
an operator shall ensure that a suitable ETOPS
en route alternate is available, within either the
approved diversion time or a diversion time
based on the MEL-generated serviceability status
of the aeroplane, whichever is shorter.
LO State the requirements for take-off alternate.
LO State the planning minima for ETOPS en route

alternate.
071 02 00 00
SPECIAL OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND

HAZARDS (GENERAL ASPECTS)
071 02 01 00
Operations Manual
071 02 01 01
Operating procedures
LO State that all non-type-related operational x

policies, instructions and procedures needed for
a safe operation are included in Part A of the
Operations Manual.
LO State that the following items are included into x

Part A: de-icing and anti-icing on the ground,
adverse and potentially hazardous atmospheric
conditions, wake turbulence, incapacitation of
crew members, use of the minimum equipment
and configuration deviation list(s), security,
handling of accidents and occurrences.

Part A: altitude alerting system procedures,
ground proximity warning system procedures,
policy and procedures for the use of TCAS/ACAS.
LO State that the following items are included into

Part A: rotor downwash.
LO Define the following terms: commencement of x
flight, inoperative, MEL, MMEL, rectification
interval.
LO Define the limits of MEL applicability.
LO Identify the responsibilities of the operator and

the authority with regard to MEL and MMEL.
LO State the responsibilities of the crew members

with regard to MEL.
LO State the responsibilities of the commander with

regard to MEL.
Page 483

071 02 01 02
Aeroplane/helicopter operating matters

type-related
LO State that all type-related instructions and x

procedures needed for a safe operation are
included in Part B of the Operations Manual.
They will take account of any differences
between types, variants or individual aircraft
used by the operator.

Part B: abnormal and emergency procedures,
configuration deviation list, minimum equipment
list, emergency evacuation procedures.

Part B: emergency procedures, configuration
deviation
list,
minimum
equipment
list,
emergency evacuation procedures.
071 02 02 00
Icing conditions
071 02 02 01
On ground de-icing/anti-icing procedures,

types of de-icing/anti-icing fluids
LO Define the following terms: anti-icing, de-icing,

one-step de-icing/anti-icing, two-step deicing/anti-icing, holdover time. (ICAO Doc 9640
Glossary)
LO Define the following weather conditions: drizzle, x

fog, freezing fog, freezing drizzle, freezing
rain, frost, rain, rime, slush, snow, dry
snow, wet snow. (ICAO Doc 9640 Glossary)
LO Describe
The
clean
aircraft
concept as x
presented in the relevant chapter of ICAO
Doc 9640. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 2)
LO List the types of de-icing/anti-icing

available. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 4)
LO State the procedure to be followed when an x

aeroplane has exceeded the holdover time.
(ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 4)
LO Interpret the fluid holdover time tables and list x

the factors which can reduce the fluid protection
time. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 5 + Attachment
tables)
Page 484
fluids


LO State that the pre-take-off check, which is the x
x
responsibility of the pilot-in-command, ensures
that the critical surfaces of the aeroplane are
free of ice, snow, slush or frost just prior to takeoff. This check shall be accomplished as close to
the time of take-off as possible and is normally
made from within the aeroplane by visually
checking the wings. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 6)
LO State that an aircraft has to be treated
symmetrically. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 11)
LO State that an operator shall establish procedures x

to be followed when ground de-icing and antiicing and related inspections of the aeroplane(s)
are necessary.
LO State that a commander shall not commence x

take-off unless the external surfaces are clear of
any deposit which might adversely affect the
performance and/or controllability of the aircraft
except as permitted in the Flight Manual.
LO State that the effects of icing are wide-ranging, x

unpredictable and dependent upon individual
aeroplane design. The magnitude of these effects
is dependent upon many variables, but the
effects can be both significant and dangerous.
LO State that in icing conditions, for a given speed x

and a given angle of attack, wing lift can be
reduced by as much as 30 % and drag increased
by up to 40 %. State that these changes in lift
and drag will significantly increase stall speed,
reduce
controllability
and
alter
flight
characteristics. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 1)
LO State that ice on critical surfaces and on the x

airframe may also break away during take-off
and be ingested into engines, possibly damaging
fan and compressor blades. (ICAO Doc 9640,
Chapter 1)
LO State that ice forming on pitot tubes and static x

ports or on angle-of-attack vanes may give false
altitude, airspeed, angle-of-attack and enginepower information for air-data systems. (ICAO
Doc 9640, Chapter 1)
071 02 02 02
Procedure to apply in case of performance

deterioration, on ground/in flight
Page 485

LO State that ice, frost and snow formed on the x

critical surfaces on the ground can have a totally
different effect on aircraft flight characteristics
than ice formed in flight. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter
1)
LO State that flight in known icing conditions is x

subject to limitations found in Part B of the
Operations Manual.
LO State where procedures and performances

regarding flight in expected or actual icing
conditions are located.
LO State that presence of birds constituting a x

potential hazard to aircraft operations is part of
the pre-flight information. (ICAO Annex 15,
Chapter 8)
LO State that information concerning the presence x

of birds observed by aircrews is made available
to the Aeronautical Information Service for such
distribution as the circumstances necessitate.
(ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8)
LO State that AIP ENR 5.6 contains information x

regarding bird migrations. (ICAO Annex 15,
Appendix 1)
LO State significant data regarding bird strikes x

contained in ICAO Doc 9137. (ICAO Doc 9137,
Part 3, 1.1.6)
LO List incompatible land use around airports. (ICAO

Doc 9137, Part 3, 10.4)
the
commanders
responsibilities x
LO Define
regarding the reporting of bird hazards and bird
strikes.
071 02 03 00
Bird-strike risk and avoidance
071 02 04 00
Noise abatement
071 02 04 01
Noise-abatement procedures
LO Define the operator responsibilities regarding

establishment of noise-abatement procedures.
LO State the main purpose of NADP 1 and NADP 2.

(ICAO Doc 8168, Volume 1, Part V, 3.1.1)
Page 486

LO State that the pilot-in-command has the x

authority to decide not to execute a noiseabatement departure procedure if conditions
preclude the safe execution of the procedure.
(ICAO Doc 8168, Volume 1, Part V, 3.2.1.3)
071 02 04 02
Influence
of
the
flight
(departure, cruise, approach)
procedure
LO List the main parameters for NADP 1 and NADP 2 x

(i.e. speeds, heights, etc.). (ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume 1, Part V, Appendix to Chapter 3)
LO State that a runway lead-in lighting system

should be provided where it is desired to
provide visual guidance along a specific
approach path for purposes of noise
abatement. (ICAO Annex 14 - Volume 1,
5.3.7.1/Vol 2, 5.3.4.1)
LO State that detailed information about noiseabatement procedures is to be found in AD 2 and
3 of the AIP. (ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 1)
LO List the adverse operating conditions under x

which noise-abatement procedures in the form of
reduced-power take-off should not be required.

which
noise-abatement
procedures
during
approach should not be required. (ICAO
Doc 8168, Volume 1, Part V, 3.4.4)
LO State the rule regarding the use of reverse thrust

on landing. (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume 1, Part V,
3.5)
071 02 04 03
071 02 04 04
Influence by the pilot (power setting, low

drag)
Influence by the pilot (power setting, track

of helicopter)
LO List the adverse operating conditions under

071 02 05 00
Fire and smoke
071 02 05 01
Carburettor fire
LO List the actions to be taken in the event of a

carburettor fire.
Page 487

071 02 05 02
Engine fire
LO List the actions to be taken in the event of an

engine fire.
LO Identify the appropriate handheld extinguishers x

to be used in the cockpit, the passenger cabin
and toilets, and in the cargo compartments.
071 02 05 03
Fire
in
the
cabin,
cockpit,
cargo
compartment
LO Identify the different types of extinguishants and
the type of fire on which each one may be used.
LO Describe the precautions to be considered in the
application of fire extinguishant.
071 02 05 04
Smoke in the cockpit and cabin
LO List the actions to be taken in the event of

smoke in the cockpit or in the cabin.
LO Describe the problems and safety precautions x

following overheated brakes after landing or a
rejected take-off.
071 02 05 05
Actions in case of overheated brakes
071 02 06 00
Decompression of pressurised cabin
071 02 06 01
Slow decompression
LO Indicate how to detect a slow decompression or

an automatic pressurisation system failure.
LO Describe the actions required following a slow
decompression.
071 02 06 02 Rapid and explosive decompression
LO Indicate how to detect a rapid or an explosive

decompression.
LO Describe the effects on aircraft occupants of a slow x

decompression and a rapid or explosive
decompression.
071 02 06 03
Dangers and action to be taken
LO Describe the actions required following a rapid or

explosive decompression.
071 02 07 00
Wind shear and microburst
071 02 07 01
Effects and recognition during departure

and approach
LO Define the meaning of the term low-level

windshear. (ICAO Circular 186, Chapter 1)
Page 488


LO Define: vertical wind shear, horizontal wind x
x
x
x
x
shear, updraft and downdraft wind shear. (ICAO
Circular 186, Chapter 2)
the
meteorological
phenomena x
LO Identify
associated with wind shear. (ICAO Circular 186,
Chapter 3)
LO Explain recognition of
LO Describe the effects of and actions required when x

encountering wind shear, at take-off and
approach. (ICAO Circular 186, Chapter 4)
LO Describe the precautions to be taken when wind x

shear is suspected, at take-off and approach.
(ICAO Circular 186, Chapter 4)
LO Describe the effects of and actions required

following entry into a strong downdraft wind
shear. (ICAO Circular 186, Chapter 4)
LO Describe a microburst and its effects. (ICAO

(ICAO
LO Describe tip vortices circulation. (ICAO Doc

9426, Part II)
LO Explain when vortex generation begins and ends.

(ICAO Doc 9426, Part II)
LO Describe vortex circulation on the ground with

and without crosswind. (ICAO Doc 9426, Part II)
LO Describe the wind conditions which are worst x

for wake turbulence near the ground. (ICAO
Doc 9426, Part II)
071 02 07 02
shear.
(ICAO
Actions to avoid and actions to take during

encounter
071 02 08 00
Wake turbulence
071 02 08 01
Cause
LO Define the term

Doc 4444, 4.9)
071 02 08 02
wind
wake
turbulence.
List of relevant parameters
LO List the three main factors which, when

combined, give the strongest vortices (heavy,
clean, slow). (ICAO Doc 9426, Part II)
071 02 08 03
Actions to be taken when crossing traffic,

during take-off and landing
Page 489


LO Describe the actions to be taken to avoid wake x
x
x
x
x
turbulence,
specially
separations.
(ICAO
Doc 4444, 5)
071 02 09 00
Security (unlawful events)
071 02 09 01
ICAO Annex 17
LO Give the following definitions: aircraft security x

check, screening, security, security-restricted
area, unidentified baggage. (ICAO Annex 17,
1)
LO Give the objectives

Annex 17, 2.1)
LO Describe the commanders responsibilities

concerning notifying the appropriate ATS unit.
(ICAO Annex 17 Attachment)

concerning operation of SSR. (ICAO Annex 17
Attachment)

concerning departing from assigned track and/or
cruising level. (ICAO Annex 17
Attachment)

concerning the action required or being
requested by an ATS unit to confirm SSR code
and ATS interpretation response. (ICAO Annex
17 Attachment)
training
LO State the requirements regarding reporting

acts of unlawful interference.
LO State the requirements regarding aircraft search

procedures.
071 02 09 02
071 02 09 03
Use of
(SSR)
Secondary
of
security.
(ICAO
Surveillance
Radar
Security

programmes.
regarding
071 02 10 00
Emergency and precautionary landings
071 02 10 01
Definition
ditching,
LO Define
emergency landing.
precautionary
LO Describe a ditching procedure.
Page 490
landing,


LO Describe a precautionary landing.
x
x
x
x
x
LO Explain the factors to be considered when deciding x
to make a precautionary/emergency landing or
ditching.
LO Describe the passenger briefing to be given before x

conducting a precautionary/emergency landing or
ditching (including evacuation).
LO State that the aircraft must be stopped and the x

engine
shut
down
before
launching
an
LO State that evacuation procedures are to be found

in Part B of the Operations Manual.
CS-25
requirements
regarding x
procedures.
(CS
25.803
+
071 02 10 02
Cause
LO List some reasons that may require a ditching, a

precautionary landing or an emergency landing.
071 02 10 03
071 02 10 04
Passenger information
Action after landing
LO Describe the actions and responsibilities of crew

members after landing.
071 02 10 05
Evacuation
the
LO State
evacuation
Appendix J)
071 02 11 00
Fuel jettisoning
071 02 11 01
Safety aspects
LO State that an aircraft may need to jettison fuel x

so as to reduce its landing mass in order to
effect a safe landing. (ICAO Doc 4444, 15.5.3)
LO State that when an aircraft operating within x

controlled airspace needs to jettison fuel, the flight
crew shall coordinate with ATC the following:
route to be flown which, if possible, should be
clear of cities and towns, preferably over water
and away from areas where thunderstorms have
been reported or are expected; the level to be
used, which should be not less than 1 800 m
(6 000 ft); and the duration of fuel jettisoning.
(ICAO Doc 4444,
15.5.3)
LO State that flaps and slats may adversely affect

fuel jettisoning. (CS 25.1001)
Page 491

071 02 11 02
Requirements
LO State that a fuel-jettisoning system must be x

installed on each aeroplane unless it is shown
that the aeroplane meets some CS-25 climb
requirements. (CS 25.1001)
LO State that a fuel-jettisoning system must be

capable of jettisoning enough fuel within
15 minutes. (CS 25.1001)
LO Give the following definitions: dangerous goods, x

dangerous goods accident, dangerous goods
incident, exemption, incompatible, packaging,
UN number. (ICAO Annex 18, Chapter 1)
LO State that detailed provisions for dangerous goods x

transportation are contained in the Technical
Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air (Doc 9284). (ICAO Annex 18,
Chapter 2, 2.2.1)
LO State that in case of an in-flight emergency, the x

pilot-in-command must inform the ATC of
dangerous goods transportation. (ICAO Annex
18, Chapter 9, 9.5)
071 02 12 00
Transport of dangerous goods
071 02 12 01
ICAO Annex 18
071 02 12 02
Technical Instructions (ICAO Doc 9284)
LO Explain the principle of compatibility

segregation. (ICAO Doc 9284)
and
LO Explain the special requirements for the loading

of radioactive materials. (ICAO Doc 9284)
LO Explain the use of the dangerous goods list.

(ICAO Doc 9284)
LO Identify the labels. (ICAO Doc 9284)
LO Identify articles and substances, which would x

otherwise be classed as dangerous goods, that
are excluded from the provisions.
LO State that some articles and substances may be

forbidden for air transportation.
LO State that packing must comply

Technical Instructions specifications.
071 02 12 03
Transport of dangerous goods by air
LO State that dangerous goods transportation is

subject to operator approval.
Page 492
with
the


LO List the labelling and marking requirements.
x
x
x
x
x
LO List the Dangerous Goods Transport Document
requirements.
LO List the Acceptance

requirements.
Goods
LO Explain the need for an inspection prior to

loading on an aircraft.
LO State that some dangerous goods are designated

for carriage only on cargo aircraft.
LO State that accidents or incidents

dangerous goods are to be reported.
involving
LO State that misdeclared or undeclared dangerous

goods found in baggage are to be reported.
LO List the different types of contamination: damp, x

wet or water patches, rime or frost-covered, dry
snow, wet snow, slush, ice, compacted or rolled
snow, frozen ruts or ridges. (ICAO Annex 15,
Appendix 2)
LO Give the definitions of the various types of snow.

(ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2)
the
difference
between
friction x
LO Identify
coefficient and estimated surface friction. (ICAO
Annex 15, Appendix 2)
LO State that when friction coefficient is 0.40 or x

higher, the expected braking action is good. (ICAO
of
071 02 13 00
Contaminated runways
071 02 13 01
Kinds of contamination
Dangerous
LO Define a contaminated runway, a damp

runway, a wet runway, and a dry runway.
071 02 13 02
071 02 13 03
Estimated
coefficient
surface
friction,
friction
Hydroplaning principles and effects
LO Define the different types of hydroplaning.

(NASA TM-85652/Tire friction performance/
pp. 6 to 9)
Page 493


LO Compute the two dynamic hydroplaning speeds x
x
using the following formulas:
Spin-down speed (rotating tire) (kt) = 9 square
root (pressure in PSI)
Spin-up speed (non-rotating tire) (kt) = 7.7
square root (pressure in PSI).
(NASA TM-85652/Tire friction performance /p. 8)
LO State that it is the spin-up speed rather than the x
spin-down speed which represents the actual tire
situation for aircraft touchdown on flooded
runways.
(NASA TM-85652/Tire friction performance/p. 8)
071 02 13 04
Procedures
LO State that some wind limitations may apply in x

case of contaminated runways. Those limitations
are to be found in Part B of the Operations
Manual Limitations.
LO State that the procedures associated with take- x

off and landing on contaminated runways are to
be found in Part B of the Operations Manual
Normal procedures.
LO State that the performances associated with x

contaminated runways are to be found in Part B
of the Operations Manual Performance.
071 02 13 05
SNOWTAM
LO Interpret from a SNOWTAM the contamination

and braking action on a runway.
071 02 14 00
Rotor downwash
071 02 14 01
Describe downwash
LO Describe the downwash.
LO Give the definition of white-out.
LO Describe loss of spatial orientation.
LO Describe take-off and landing techniques.
071 02 14 02
Effects
LO Explain the effects on: soil erosion, water dispersal

and spray, recirculation, damage to property,
loose articles.
071 02 15 00
Operation influence
by
conditions (Helicopter)
071 02 15 01
White-out/sand/dust
Page 494
meteorological

071 02 15 02
Strong winds
LO
LO
LO
071 02 15 03
Describe blade sailing.

Describe wind operating envelopes.
Describe vertical speed problems.
Mountain environment
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LO Describe techniques for failure in: hover, climb,

cruise, approach.
071 03 01 02 Fire in cabin/cockpit/engine
LO Describe the basic actions when encountering

fire in the cabin, cockpit or engine.
LO Describe the basic actions following loss of tail

rotor.
LO Describe the basic actions following loss of
directional control.
071 03 01 04 Ground resonance
LO Describe recovery actions.

071 03 01 05 Blade stall
recovery
to
LO Describe constraints associated with mountain

environment.
071 03 00 00
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (HELICOPTER)
071 03 01 00
Influence of technical problems
071 03 01 01
Engine failure
071 03 01 03
Tail/rotor/directional control failure
LO Describe cause and recovery actions when

encountering retreating blade stall.
071 03 01 06
Settling with power (vortex ring)
LO Describe prerequisite conditions and recovery

actions.
071 03 01 07
Overpitch

071 03 01 08
Overspeed: rotor/engine
LO Describe overspeed control.

071 03 01 09
Dynamic rollover
LO Describe potential
action.
071 03 01 10 Mast bumping
conditions and
conditions
LO Describe
avoidance ofeffect.
conducive
Page 495
and

Subject: 081 - PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT (AEROPLANES)

Time
allowed
(hours)
ATPL(A)
CPL( A)
1:0 0
0:45
ATPL(H)/IR
XX
ATPL(H)
CPL(H)
IR(A) & (H)
XX
XX
XX

081 01
17
14
XX
XX
XX
XX
081 02
06
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
081 03
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
081 04
06
06
XX
XX
XX
XX
081 05
04
03
XX
XX
XX
XX
081 06
03
03
XX
XX
XX
XX
081 07
04
03
XX
XX
XX
XX
081 08
04
04
XX
XX
XX
XX
Total
questions
44
33
XX
XX
XX
XX
Page 496

M. SUBJECT 081 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT (AEROPLANE)

(1)
The following standard conventions are used for certain mathematical symbols:
*
SQRT( )
multiplication
greater than or equal to
less than or equal to
square root of the function, symbol or number in round brackets
(2)
Normally, it should be assumed that the effect of a variable under review is the only
variation that needs to be addressed, unless specifically stated otherwise.
(3)
Candidates are expected in simple calculations to be able to convert knots (kt) into
metres/second (m/s), and know the appropriate conversion factors by heart.
(4)
In the subsonic range, as covered under subject 081 01, compressibility effects normally
are not considered, unless specifically mentioned.
(5) For those questions related to propellers (subject 081 07), as a simplification of the physical
reality, theinflowspeedintothepropellerplaneistakenastheaeroplanesTAS. In addition, when
discussing propeller rotational direction, it will always be specified as
seen from behind the propeller plane.
Syllabu
referenc

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
080 00 00 00
PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT
081 00 00 00
PRINCIPLES
AEROPLANE
081 01 00 00
SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
081 01 01 00
Basics, laws and definitions
081 01 01 01
Laws and definitions
LO
OF
FLIGHT
List
the
SI
units
of
measurement
for
mass,
acceleration, weight, velocity,
density, temperature, pressure,
force, wing loading and power.
Define
mass,
force,
acceleration and weight.
State and interpret Newtons
laws.
first law.
Page 497

ATPL CPL
Page 498


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR

second law

third law
081 01 01 02
Basics about airflow
LO
081 01 01 03
List the atmospheric properties

that effect air density.
Explain how temperature and
pressure changes affect density.
Define static pressure.
Define dynamic pressure.
Define the formula for dynamic
pressure.
Apply the formula for a given
altitude and speed.
State Bernoullis equation.
Define total pressure.
Apply the equation to a Venturi.
Describe how
the IAS is
acquired from the pitot-static
system.
Describe
the
relationship
between density, temperature
and pressure for air.
Describe
the
Equation
of
Continuity.
Define IAS, CAS, EAS, TAS.
Describe steady and unsteady

airflow.
Explain the concept of a
streamline.
Describe and explain airflow
through a stream tube.
Explain the difference between
two
and
three-dimensional
airflow.
Aerodynamic forces and moments

on aerofoils
LO
Describe the force resulting

from the pressure distribution
around an aerofoil.
Resolve the resultant force into
the components lift and drag
Describe the direction of lift and
Page 499
drag.
Define

the
aerodynamic
Page 500


Syllabus details and associate
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference
ATPL CPL ATPL

/IR
081 01 01 04
moment.
List the factors that affect the
aerodynamic moment.
Describe
the
aerodynamic
moment for a symmetrical
aerofoil.
Describe
the
aerodynamic
moment for a positively and
negatively cambered aerofoil.
Forces and equilibrium of forces
(refer to 081 08 00 00).
Define angle of attack.
Shape of an aerofoil section
LO Describe the following parameters of

an aerofoil section:
leading edge;
trailing edge;
chord line;
thickness to chord ratio or
relative thickness;
location of maximum thickness;
camber line;
camber;
nose radius.
Describe a symmetrical and

asymmetrical aerofoil section.
081 01 01 05
an
Wing shape
LO Describe the following parameters of

a wing:
span;
tip and root chord;
taper ratio;
wing area;
wing planform;
mean geometric chord;
mean
aerodynamic
(MAC)
aspect ratio;
dihedral angle;
sweep angle;
wing twist;
geometric;
Page 501
chord

ATPL CPL
Page 502


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
aerodynamic
angle of incidence.
Remark: In certain textbooks, angle
of incidence is used as angle of
attack. For Part-FCL theoreticalknowledge examination purposes this
use is discontinued and the angle of
incidence is defined as the angle
between the aeroplane longitudinal
axis and the wing-root chord line.
081 01 02 00
Two-dimensional airflow around

an aerofoil
081 01 02 01
Streamline pattern
LO
Describe the streamline pattern

around an aerofoil
Describe
converging
and
diverging streamlines and their
effect on static pressure and
velocity
Describe
upwash
and
downwash
and
LO Explain the association between lift
081 01 02 02
Stagnation point
LO
081 01 02 03
Pressure distribution
LO
081 01 02 04
Describe the stagnation point

Explain the effect on the
stagnation point of angle-ofattack changes.
Explain local-pressure changes.
Describe pressure distribution
and local speeds around an
aerofoil including effects of
camber and angle of attack.
Describe where the minimum
local static pressure is typically
situated on an aerofoil.
Centre
of
pressure
aerodynamic centre
LO Explain centre of
aerodynamic centre.
081 01 02 05
pressure
and
Lift and downwash
Page 503

and downwash.
Page 504


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 01 02 06
Drag and wake
LO
081 01 02 07
List two physical phenomena

that cause drag.
Describe skin friction drag.
Describe pressure (form) drag.
Explain why drag and wake
cause
loss
of
energy
(momentum).
Describe the lift and angle-ofattack graph.

Explain the significant points on
the graph.
Describe lift against graph for
a symmetrical aerofoil.
The lift coefficient Cl
LO
081 01 03 02
Coefficients
LO Explain why coefficients are used in

general.
081 01 03 01
The lift graph
LO
081 01 03 00
Flow separation at high angles of

attack
LO Refer to 081 01 08 01.

081 01 02 09
Influence of angle of attack
LO Explain the influence of angle of

attack on lift.
081 01 02 08
Describe the lift formula and

perform simple calculations.
Describe the Cl graph
(symmetrical
and
positively/
negatively cambered aerofoils).
Describe the typical difference
in Cl graph for fast and slow
aerofoil design.
Define ClMAX and stall on the
graph.
The drag coefficient C d
LO
Describe the drag formula and

perform simple calculations.
Discuss the effect of the shape
Page 505
of

body
on
the
Page 506
drag


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 01 04 00
coefficient.
Describe the Cl Cd graph
(aerofoil polar).
Indicate minimum drag on the
graph.
Explain why the ClCd ratio is
important as a measure of
performance.
State the normal values of
ClCd.
Three-dimensional airflow about

an aeroplane
Define angle of attack.

LO
Remark: For theoretical-knowledge
examination purposes, the angle-ofattack definition requires a reference
line. This reference line for 3-D has
been chosen to be the longitudinal
axis and for 2-D the chord line.
081 01 04 01

the angle of attack and the
attitude of an aeroplane.
Streamline pattern
LO
Describe the general streamline

pattern around the wing, tail
section and fuselage.
Explain and describe the causes
of spanwise flow over top and
bottom surfaces.
Describe
tip
vortices
and
local .
Explain how tip vortices vary
with angle of attack.
Explain upwash and downwash
due to tip vortices.
Describe
spanwise
lift
distribution including the effect of
wing planform.
Describe the causes, distribution
and duration of the wake
turbulence behind an aeroplane.
Describe the influence of flap
deflection on the tip vortex.
List
the
parameters
that
influence wake turbulence.
Page 507


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 01 04 02
Induced drag
LO
Explain what causes the induced

drag.
Describe
the
approximate
formula for the induced drag
coefficient.
State the factors that affect
induced drag.
Describe
the
relationship
between induced drag and total
drag in the cruise.
Describe the effect of mass on
induced drag at a given IAS.
Describe the means to reduce
induced drag:
aspect ratio;
winglets;
tip tanks;
wing twist;
camber change.
Describe the influence of lift
distribution on induced drag.
Describe the influence of tip
vortices on the angle of attack.
Explain induced and effective
local angle of attack.
Explain the influence of the
induced angle of attack on the
direction of the lift vector.
Explain the relationship between
induced drag and:
speed;
aspect ratio;
wing planform;
bank angle in a horizontal
coordinated turn.
Explain
the
induced
drag
coefficient.
the induced drag coefficient and
the
angle-of-attack
or
lift
coefficient.
Explain the influence of induced
drag on:
CLangle-of-attack graph,
show the effect on the
Page 508


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 01 05 00
graph
when
comparing
high and low aspect ratio
wings;
CLCD (aeroplane polar),
show the effect on the
graph
when
comparing
high and low aspect ratio
wings;
parabolic aeroplane polar
in a graph and as a
formula (CD = CDp + kCL2).
Total drag
LO State that total drag consists of

parasite drag and induced drag.
081 01 05 01
List the types of drag that are

included in parasite drag.
Describe form (pressure) drag.
Describe interference drag.
Describe friction drag.
Parasite drag and speed

parasite drag and speed.
081 01 05 03
Parasite drag
LO
081 01 05 02
between
Induced drag and speed
LO Refer to 081 01 04 02.

081 01 05 04
Intentionally left blank
081 01 05 05
Total drag and speed
LO
Explain the total dragspeed

graph and the constituent drag
components.
Indicate the speed for minimum
drag.
081 01 05 06
081 01 05 07
The total dragspeed graph
LO
Describe the effect of aeroplane

gross mass on the graph.
Describe the effect of pressure
altitude on:
dragIAS graph;
Page 509

dragTAS graph.
Page 510


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 01 06 00
Describe speed stability from

the graph.
Describe non-stable, neutral
and stable IAS regions.
Explain what happens to the
IAS and drag in the non-stable
region
if
speed
suddenly
decreases.
Ground effect
LO Explain what happens to the tip

vortices, downwash, airflow pattern,
lift and drag in ground effect.
081 01 06 01
Describe the influence of ground

effect on CDi and induced angle
of attack.
Explain the effects on entering
and leaving ground effect.
influence
of
ground
influence
of
ground
Effect on CL
LO Describe the
effect on CL.
081 01 06 04
Effect on stall
LO Describe the
effect on stall.
081 01 06 03
Effect on CDi
LO
081 01 06 02
Effect on take-off and landing

characteristics of an aeroplane
LO
Describe the influence of ground

effect on take-off and landing
characteristics and performance
of an aeroplane.
Describe
the
difference
between:
high
and
low
wing
characteristics;
high
and
low
tail
characteristics.
Explain the effects on static
pressure measurements at the
static ports when entering and
leaving ground effect.
Page 511
081 01 07 00
The
relationship

between
Page 512
lift


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
coefficient and speed in steady,
straight and level flight
081 01 07 01
Represented by an equation
LO Explain the effect on CL during speed

increase/decrease in steady, straight
and level flight, and perform simple
calculations.
081 01 07 02
Represented by a graph
LO Explain, by using a graph, the effect

on speed of CL changes at a given
weight.
081 01 08 00
The stall
081 01 08 01
Flow separation
angles of attack
LO
at
increasing
Define the boundary layer.

Describe the thickness of a
typical boundary layer.
List the factors that affect
thickness.
Describe the laminar layer.
Describe the turbulent layer.
Define the transition point.
List the differences between
laminar and turbulent boundary
layers.
Explain
why
the
laminar
boundary layer separates easier
than the turbulent one.
List the factors that slow down
the airflow over the aft part of
an aerofoil, as the angle of
attack increases.
Define the separation point
and describe its location as a
function of angle of attack.
Define the critical stall angle of
attack.
Describe
the
influence
of
increasing the angle of attack
on:
the forward stagnation point;
Page 513

the pressure distribution;
Page 514


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 01 08 02
the location of the centre of

pressure (straight and swept
back wing);
CL and L;
CD and D;
the pitching moment (straight
and swept back wing);
the downwash at the horizon
stabiliser.
Explain
what
causes
the
possible natural buffet on the
controls in a pre-stall condition.
Describe the effectiveness of
the flight controls in a pre-stall
condition.
Describe and explain the normal
post-stall
behaviour
of
a
wing/aeroplane;
Describe the dangers of using
the controls close to the stall.
The stall speed
LO
Explain VS0, VS1, VSR, VS1g.

Solve the 1G stall speed from
the lift formula.
Describe
and
explain
the
influence
of
the
following
parameters on stall speed:
centre of gravity;
thrust component;
slipstream;
wing loading;
mass;
wing contamination;
angle of sweep;
altitude (for compressibility
effects, see 081 02 03 02).
Define the load factor n.
Explain why the load factor
increases in a turn.
Explain why the load factor
increases in a pull-up and
decreases
in
a
push-over
manoeuvre.
Describe
and
explain
the
influence of the load factor n
on stall speed.
Page 515


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
Explain
the
expression
accelerated stall.
Remark: Sometimes accelerated stall
is also erroneously referred to as
high-speed
stall.
This
latter
expression will not be used for
subject 081.
Calculate the change of stall

speed as a function of the load
factor.
Calculate the increase of stall

speed
in
a
horizontal
coordinated turn as a function
of bank angle.
Calculate the change of stall

speed as a function of the gross
mass.
081 01 08 03
The initial
direction
LO
081 01 08 04
stall
in
span-wise
Explain the initial stall sequence

on the following platforms:
elliptical;
rectangular;
moderate and high taper;
sweepback or delta.
Explain
the
influence
of
geometric twist (wash out) and
aerodynamic twist.
Explain
the
influence
of
deflected ailerons.
Explain the influence of fences,
vortilons, saw teeth, vortex
generators.
Stall warning
LO
Explain why stall warning is

necessary.
Explain when aerodynamic and
artificial stall warnings are used.
Explain why CS-23 and CS-25
require a margin to stall speed.
Describe:
buffet;
stall strip;
flapper switch (leading-edge
stall-warning vane);
Page 516


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
angle-of-attack vane;
angle-of-attack probe;
stick shaker.
081 01 08 05
Describe the recovery after:

stall warning;
stall;
stick-pusher actuation.
Special phenomena of stall
LO
Describe
the
basic
stall
requirements
for
transport
category aeroplanes.
power-off and power-on stalls
and recovery.
Describe stall and recovery in a
climbing and descending turn.
Describe the effect on stall and
recovery characteristics of:
wing sweep (consider both
forward
and
backward
sweep);
T-tailed aeroplane;
canards.
Describe super-stall or deepstall.
Describe the philosophy behind
the stick-pusher system.
Explain the effect of ice, frost or
snow on the stagnation point.
Explain the absence of stall
warning.
Explain the abnormal behaviour
of the stall.
Describe and explain cause and
effects of the stabiliser stall
(negative tail stall).
Describe when to expect inflight icing.
Explain how the effect is
changed
when
retracting/
extending
lift
augmentation
devices.
Describe how to recover from a
stall
after
a
configuration
change caused by in-flight icing.
Explain
the
effect
of
a
Page 517


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
contaminated wing.
Explain what on-ground icing
is.
Describe
the
aerodynamic
effects of de-icing/anti-ice fluid
after the holdover time has
been reached.
Describe
the
aerodynamic
effects of heavy tropical rain on
stall speed and drag.
Explain how to avoid spins.
List the factors that cause a spin
to develop.
Describe
spin
development,
recognition and recovery.
Describe the differences in
recovery
techniques
for
aeroplanes that have different
mass distributions between the
wings and the fuselage.
081 01 09 00
CLMAX augmentation
081 01 09 01
Trailing-edge
flaps
and
the
reasons for use in take-off and
landing
LO
Describe trailing-edge flaps and

the reasons for their use during
take-off and landing.
Identify the different types of
trailing-edge flaps
given
a
relevant diagram:
split flaps;
plain flaps;
slotted flaps;
fowler flaps.
Describe their effect on wing
geometry.
Describe
how
the
wings
effective camber increases.
Describe how the effective
chord line differs from the normal
chord line.
Describe their effect on:
the location of centre of

pressure;
pitching moments;
Page 518


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
Compare their influence on the

CL graph:
indicate the variation in CL

at any given angle of
attack;
indicate the variation in CD

at any given angle of
attack;
indicate their effect on

CLMAX;
indicate their effect on the

stall or critical angle of
attack;
indicate their effect on the

angle of attack at a given
CL.

CLCD graph:
indicate how the (CL/CD)MAX

differs from that of a clean
wing.
Explain the influence of trailingedge flap deflection on the glide

angle.
Describe flap asymmetry:
explain the effect on

aeroplane controllability.
081 01 09 02
stall speed.
Describe trailing-edge flap effect

on take-off and landing:
explain the advantages of

lower-nose attitudes;
explain why take-off and

landing
speeds/distances
are reduced.
Leading-edge devices and the

reasons for their use in take-off
and landing
LO
Describe leading-edge high-lift

devices.
Identify the different types of
leading-edge high-lift devices
given a relevant diagram:
Krueger flaps;
variable camber flaps;
slats.
Page 519


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 01 09 03

CLCD graph;
Describe slat asymmetry:
describe
the
effect
on
aeroplane controllability.
Explain the reasons for using
leading-edge high-lift devices on
take-off and landing:
explain the disadvantage of

increased
nose-up
attitudes;
explain why take-off and

landing
speeds/distances
are reduced.
Vortex generators
LO
081 01 10 00
State their effect on wing

geometry.
Describe the function of the
slot.
Describe
how
the
wings
effective camber increases.
Describe how the effective
chord line differs from the
normal chord line.
State their effect on the stall
speed, also in comparison with
trailing edge flaps.
CL graph,
compared
with
trailing-edge flaps and a clean
wing:
indicate the effect of leadingedge devices on CLMAX;
explain how the CL curve
differs from that of a clean
wing;
indicate the effect of leadingedge devices on the stall or
critical angle of attack.
Explain the purpose of vortex

generators.
Describe their basic operating
principle.
State their advantages and
disadvantages.
Means to reduce the CLCD ratio
Page 520


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 01 10 01
Spoilers and the reasons for use

in the different phases of flight
LO
081 01 10 02
Describe
the
aerodynamic
functioning of spoilers:
roll spoilers;
flight spoilers (speed brakes);
ground spoilers (lift dumpers).
Describe the effect of spoilers
on the C L graph and stall
speed.
Describe
the
influence
of
spoilers on the C LCD graph
and liftdrag ratio.
Speed brakes and the reasons for

use in the different phases of flight
LO
Describe speed brakes and the

reasons for use in the different
phases of flight.
State their influence on the
CLCD graph and liftdrag ratio.
Explain how speed brakes
increase parasite drag.
Describe how speed brakes
affect the minimum drag speed.
Describe their effect on rate and
angle of descent.
081 01 11 00
The boundary layer
081 01 11 01
Different types
LO Refer to 081 01 08 01.

081 01 11 02
Their
advantages
and
disadvantages on pressure drag
and friction drag
081 01 12 00
Aerodynamic degradation
081 01 12 01
Ice and other contaminants
LO
Describe the locations on an

aeroplane where ice build-up
will occur during flight.
Explain the aerodynamic effects
of ice and other contaminants on:
lift (maximum lift coefficient);
Page 521


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
drag;
stall speed;
stalling angle of attack;
stability and controllability.
081 01 12 02
Explain the aerodynamic effects

of icing on the various phases
during take-off.
Deformation and modification of

airframe, ageing aeroplanes
LO
Describe the effect of airframe

deformation and modification of
an
ageing
aeroplane
on
aeroplane performance.
Explain the effect on boundary
layer condition of an ageing
aeroplane.
081 02 00 00
HIGH-SPEED AERODYNAMICS
081 02 01 00
Speeds
081 02 01 01
Speed of sound
LO
081 02 01 02
Define speed of sound.

Explain the variation of the
speed of sound with altitude.
Describe
the
influence
of
temperature on the speed of
sound.
Mach number
LO Define Mach number as a function of

TAS and speed of sound.
081 02 01 03
Influence of temperature
altitude on Mach number
LO
and
Explain the absence of change

of Mach number with varying
temperature at constant flight
level and calibrated airspeed.
Referring to 081 08 01 02 and
081 08 01 03, explain the
relationship of Mach number,
TAS and IAS during climb and
descent
at
constant
Mach
number and IAS, and explain
variation of lift coefficient,
Page 522
angle

of
attack,
pitch
Page 523
and


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 02 01 04
Compressibility
LO
081 02 01 05
State
that
compressibility
means that density can change
along a streamline.
Describe how the streamline
pattern
changes
due
to
compressibility.
State that Mach number is a
measure of compressibility.
List
the
subdivision
aerodynamic flow:
subsonic flow;
transonic flow;
supersonic flow.
of
Describe the characteristics of

the flow regimes listed above.
State that transport aeroplanes
normally
cruise
at
Mach
numbers above Mcrit.
Shock waves
LO Define a shock wave.

081 02 02 01
Subdivision of aerodynamic flow
LO
081 02 02 00
flight-path angle;
Referring to 081 06 01 04 and
081 06 01 05, explain that
VMO can be exceeded during a
descent
at
constant
Mach
number and that MMO can be
exceeded during a climb at
constant IAS.
Normal shock waves
LO Describe a normal shock wave with

respect to changes in:
static temperature;
static and total pressure;
velocity;
local speed of sound;
Mach number;
density.
Describe a normal shock wave with

respect to orientation relative to the
wing surface.
Page 524


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
Explain the influence of increasing
Mach number on a normal shock
wave, at positive lift, with respect to:
strength;
length;
position relative to the wing;
second shock wave at the
lower surface.
Explain the influence of angle of

attack on shock-wave intensity at
Discuss the bow wave.
081 02 02 02
Oblique shock waves
LO Describe an oblique shock wave with

respect to changes in:
static temperature;
static and total pressure;
velocity;
local speed of sound;
Mach number;
density.
Compare the characteristics of normal

and oblique shock waves.
081 02 02 03
Mach cone
LO Define Mach angle with a formula

and perform simple calculations.
Identify the Mach-cone zone of

influence of a pressure disturbance due
to the presence of the aeroplane.
Explain sonic boom.
081 02 03 00
Effects of exceeding Mcrit
081 02 03 01
Mcrit
LO Define Mcrit.
Explain how a change in angle of

attack influences Mcrit.
081 02 03 02
Effect on lift
Page 525


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
LO Describe the behaviour of
lift
coefficient CL versus Mach number at
constant angle of attack.
Explain shock-induced separation,

shock
stall,
and
describe
its
relationship with Mach buffet.
Define shock stall.
examination purposes, the following
description is used for shock stall:
Shock stall occurs when the lift
coefficient, as a function of Mach
number, reaches its maximum value
(for a given angle of attack).
Describe
the
consequences
exceeding Mcrit with respect to:
of
gradient of the CL graph;

CLMAX (stall speed).
Explain the change in stall speed

(IAS) with altitude.
Discuss the effect on
stalling angle of attack.
081 02 03 03
critical
or
Effect on drag
LO Describe wave drag.
Describe the behaviour of drag

coefficient CD versus Mach number at
constant angle of attack.
Explain the effect of Mach number on
the CLCD graph.
Define
drag
divergence
Mach
numberand explain the relation with
Mcrit.
081 02 03 04
Effect on pitching moment
LO Discuss the effect of Mach number on

the location of centre of pressure and
Page 526


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
aerodynamic centre.
Explain tuck undereffect.
List the methods of compensating for
tuck under effect.
Discuss the aerodynamic functioning
of the Mach trim system.
Discuss the corrective measures if the
Mach trim fails.
081 02 03 05
Effect on control effectiveness
LO Discuss the effects on the functioning

of control surfaces.
081 02 04 00
Buffet onset
LO Explain the concept of buffet margin

and describe the influence of the
following parameters:
angle of attack;
Mach number;
pressure altitude;
mass;
load factor;
angle of bank;
CG location.
Explain
how
the
buffet
onset
boundary chart can be used to
determine manoeuvre capability.
Describe the effect of exceeding the
speed for buffet onset.
Explain aerodynamic
coffin corner.
ceiling
and
Explain the concept of the 1.3G

altitude.
Find (using an example graph):
buffet free range;

aerodynamic ceiling at a given
mass;
load factor and bank angle at
Page 527

which buffet occurs at a given
Page 528


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
mass,
Mach
number
pressure altitude.
081 02 05 00
Means to influence Mcrit
081 02 05 01
Wing sweep
and
LO Explain the influence of the angle of

sweep on:
Mcrit;
effective
thickness/chord
change or velocity component
perpendicular to the quarter
chord line.
Describe the influence of the angle of

sweep at subsonic speed on:
CLMAX;
efficiency of high-lift devices.
pitch-up stall behaviour.

Discuss the effect of wing sweep on
drag.
081 02 05 02
Aerofoil shape
LO Explain the use of thin aerofoils with

reduced camber.
Explain
the
main
supercritical aerofoils.
purpose
of
Identify the shape characteristics of a

supercritical aerofoil shape.
Explain
the
advantages
and
disadvantages
of
supercritical
aerofoils for wing design.
081 02 05 03
Vortex generators
LO Explain the use of vortex generators

as a means to avoid or restrict flow
separation.
081 02 05 04
Area ruling
LO Explain
design.
area
ruling
in
aeroplane
Page 529


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 03 00 00
081 04 00 00
STABILITY
081 04 01 00
Static and dynamic stability
081 04 01 01
Basics and definitions
LO Define static stability:
identify a statically stable,

neutral and unstable condition
(positive, neutral and negative
static stability).
Explain manoeuvrability.
Explain why static stability is the
opposite of manoeuvrability.
Define dynamic stability:
identify a dynamically stable,

neutral and unstable motion
(positive, neutral and negative
dynamic stability);
identify periodic and aperiodic
motion.
Explain what combinations of static

and dynamic stability will return an
aeroplane to the equilibrium state
after a disturbance.
081 04 01 02
Precondition for static stability
LO Explain an equilibrium of forces and

moments as the condition for the
concept of static stability.
081 04 01 03
Sum of forces
LO Identify the forces considered in the

equilibrium of forces.
081 04 01 04
Sum of moments
LO Identify the moments about all three

axes considered in the equilibrium of
moments.
Discuss the effect of sum of moments
Page 530


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
not being zero.
081 04 02 00
081 04 03 00
Static and dynamic longitudinal

stability
081 04 03 01
Methods for achieving balance
LO Explain the stabiliser and the canard

as the means to satisfy the condition
of nullifying the total sum of the
moments about the lateral axis.
Explain the influence of the location

of the wing centre of pressure relative
to the centre of gravity on the
magnitude and direction of the
balancing force on stabiliser and
canard.
Explain the influence of the indicated
airspeed on the magnitude and
direction of the balancing force on
stabiliser and canard.
Explain the influence of the balancing
force on the magnitude of the
wing/fuselage lift.
Explain the use of the elevator
deflection or stabiliser angle for the
generation of the balancing force.
Explain
the
elevator
deflection
required to balance thrust changes.
081 04 03 02
Static longitudinal stability
LO Explain the changes in aerodynamic

forces when varying angle of attack
for a static longitudinally stable
aeroplane.
Discuss the effect of CG location on
pitch manoeuvrability.
081 04 03 03
Neutral point
Page 531


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
LO Define neutral point.
Explain why the location of the

neutral point is only dependent on the
aerodynamic design of the aeroplane.
081 04 03 04
Factors affecting neutral point
LO Indicate the location of the neutral

point relative to the locations of the
aerodynamic centre of the wing and
tail/canard.
Explain
the
influence
of
the
downwash variations with angle-ofattack variation on the location of the
neutral point.
Explain the contribution of engine
nacelles.
081 04 03 05
Location of centre of gravity
LO Explain the influence of the CG

location on static longitudinal stability
of the aeroplane.
Explain the CG forward and aft limits
with respect to:
longitudinal control forces;

elevator effectiveness;
stability.
Define static margin.

081 04 03 06
The Cm graph
LO Define the aerodynamic

moment coefficient (Cm).
pitching
Describe the Cmgraph with respect

to:
positive and negative sign;

linear relationship;
angle of attack for equilibrium
state;
relationship between the slope
Page 532

of the graph and static stability.
Page 533


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 04 03 07
Factors affecting the Cmgraph
LO Explain:
081 04 03 08
the effect on the C m graph

of a shift of CG in the forward
and aft direction;
the effect on the Cm graph
when the elevator is moved up
or down;
the effect on the C m graph
when the trim is moved;
the effect of
the wing
contribution and how it is
affected by CG location;
the effect of the fuselage
contribution and how it is
affected by CG location;
the tail contribution;
the effect of aerofoil camber
change.
The elevator position

speed graph (IAS)
versus
LO Describe the elevator position speed

graph.
Explain:
081 04 03 09
the gradient of the elevator

position speed graph;
the influence of the airspeed on
the stick position stability.
Factors affecting the

position speed graph
elevator
LO Explain the contribution on the

elevator positionspeed graph of:
081 04 03 10
the location of
gravity;
the
trim
(trim
stabiliser trim);
high-lift devices.
The stick force

graph (IAS)
centre
tab
versus
of
and
speed
LO Define the stick force speed graph.
Page 534

Describe the minimum gradient for
Page 535


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
stick force versus speed that is
required for certification according to
CS-23 and CS-25.
Explain the importance of the stick
force gradient for good flying qualities
of an aeroplane.
Identify the trim speed in the stick
force speed graph.
Explain how a pilot perceives stable
static longitudinal stick force stability.
081 04 03 11
Factors affecting the stick force

versus speed graph
LO Explain the contribution of:
the location of the centre of

gravity;
the trim (trim tab and stabiliser
trim);
down spring;
bob weight;
friction.
LO Explain the contribution of

number Ref. 081 02 03 04.
081 04 03 12
Mach
The manoeuvring stability/stick

force per G
LO Define the stick force per G.
Explain why:
the stick force per G has a

prescribed
minimum
and
maximum value;
the stick force per G decreases
with pressure altitude at the
same indicated airspeed.
081 04 03 13
081 04 03 14
Factors
affecting
the
manoeuvring stability/stick force
per G
LO Explain the influence on stick force

per G of:
Page 536

CG location;
Page 537


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 04 03 15
trim setting;
a down spring in the control
system;
a bob weight in the control
system.
Stick force per G and the limitload factor
LO Explain why the prescribed minimum

and maximum values of the stick
force per G are dependent on the
limit-load factor.
Calculate the stick force to achieve a

certain load factor at a given
manoeuvre stability.
081 04 03 16
Dynamic longitudinal stability
LO Describe the phugoid and shortperiod motion in terms of period,

damping, variations (if applicable) in
speed, altitude and angle of attack.
Explain why short-period motion is
more important for flying qualities than
the phugoid.
Define and
oscillations.
describe
pilot-induced
Explain the effect of high altitude on

dynamic stability.
Describe the influence of the CG
location on the dynamic longitudinal
stability of the aeroplane.
081 04 04 00
Static directional stability
LO Define static directional stability.

Explain the effects of static directional
stability being too weak or too strong.
081 04 04 01
Sideslip angle
LO Define sideslip angle.
Page 538

Identify as the symbol used for the
Page 539


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
sideslip angle.
081 04 04 02
Yaw-moment coefficient Cn
LO Define
the
coefficient Cn.
yawing-moment
Define the relationship between Cn

and for an aeroplane with static
directional stability.
081 04 04 03
Cn graph
LO Explain why:
Cn depends on the angle of

sideslip;
Cn equals zero for that angle of
sideslip that provides static
equilibrium
about
the
aeroplanes normal axis;
if
no
asymmetric
engine
thrust, flight control or loading
condition
prevails,
the
equilibrium angle of sideslip
equals zero.
Identify how the slope of the Cn

graph is a measure for static
directional stability.
081 04 04 04
Factors affecting static directional

stability
LO Describe how the following aeroplane

components
contribute
to
static
directional stability:
wing;
fin;
dorsal fin;
ventral fin;
angle of sweep of the wing;
angle of sweep of the fin;
fuselage at high angles
attack;
strakes.
Page 540
of

Explain why both the fuselage and
Page 541


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
the fin contribution reduce static
directional stability when the CG
moves aft.
081 04 05 00
Static lateral stability
LO Define static lateral stability.
Explain the effects of static lateral

stability being too weak or too strong.
081 04 05 01
Bank angle
LO Define bank angle .

081 04 05 02
The roll-moment coefficient C l
LO Define the roll-moment coefficient

Cl.
081 04 05 03
Contribution of sideslip angle
LO Explain how without coordination the

bank angle creates sideslip angle.
081 04 05 04
The Cl graph
LO Describe Clgraph.
Identify the slope of the Clgraph as
a measure for static lateral stability.
081 04 05 05
Factors affecting
stability
static
lateral
LO Explain the contribution to the static

lateral stability of:
dihedral, anhedral;
high wing, low wing;
sweep angle of the wing;
ventral fin;
vertical tail.
Define dihedral effect.

081 04 05 06
081 04 06 00
Dynamic
stability
081 04 06 01
Effects of asymmetric propeller
lateral/directional
Page 542


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
slipstream
081 04 06 02
Tendency to spiral dive
LO Explain how lateral and directional

stability are coupled.
Explain how high-static directional

stability and a low-static lateral
stability may cause spiral divergence
(unstable spiral dive), and under which
conditions the spiral dive mode is
neutral or stable.
Describe an unstable spiral dive mode
with respect to deviations in speed,
bank angle, nose low-pitch attitude
and decreasing altitude.
081 04 06 03
Dutch roll
LO Describe Dutch roll.

Explain:
why Dutch roll occurs when the

static lateral stability is large
compared with static directional
stability;
the condition for a stable,

neutral or unstable Dutch roll
motion;
the function of the yaw damper;
the actions to be taken in case

of non-availability of the yaw
damper.
LO State the effect of Mach number on
Dutch roll.
081 04 06 04
Effects of altitude on dynamic

stability
LO Explain that increased

altitude reduces dynamic
lateral/directional stability.
081 05 00 00
CONTROL
081 05 01 00
General
pressure
Page 543


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 05 01 01
Basics, the three planes and three

axes
LO Define:
lateral axis;
longitudinal axis;
normal axis.
Define:
pitch angle;
bank angle;
yaw angle.
Describe the motion about the three

axes.
Name and describe the devices that
control these motions.
081 05 01 02
Camber change
LO Explain how camber is changed by

movement of a control surface.
081 05 01 03
Angle-of-attack change
LO Explain the influence of local angleof-attack change by movement of a

control surface.
081 05 02 00
Pitch (longitudinal) control
081 05 02 01
Elevator/all-flying tails
LO Explain the working principle of the

elevator/all-flying tail and describe its
function.
Describe the loads on the tailplane
over the whole speed range.
081 05 02 02
Downwash effects
LO Explain the effect of downwash on the

tailplane angle of attack.
Explain in this context the use of a
Page 544

T-tail or stabiliser trim.
Page 545


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
081 05 02 03
Ice on tail
LO Explain how ice can change

aerodynamic characteristics of
tailplane.
the
the
Explain how this can affect the tails

proper function.
081 05 02 04
Location of centre of gravity

elevator deflection and CG location to
produce a given aeroplane response.
Explain the effect of forward CG limit
on pitch control.
081 05 02 05
Moments due to engine thrust
LO Describe the effect of engine thrust

on pitching moments for different
engine locations.
081 05 03 00
LO
081 05 03 01
LO
Yaw (directional) control

Explain the working principle of the
rudder and describe its function.
State the relationship between

rudder
deflection
and
the
moment about the normal axis;
Describe the effect of sideslip

on the moment about the normal
axis.
Rudder limiting
Explain why and how
rudder
deflection is limited on transport
aeroplanes.
081 05 04 00
Roll (lateral) control
081 05 04 01
Ailerons
LO Explain the functioning of ailerons.

Describe the adverse effects of
ailerons. (Refer to 081 05 04 04 and
Page 546

081 06 01 02)
Page 547


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
Explain in this context the use of
inboard and outboard ailerons.
Explain outboard-aileron lockout and
conditions under which this feature is
used.
Describe the use of aileron deflection
in normal flight, flight with sideslip,
crosswind landings, horizontal turns,
flight with one engine out.
Define roll rate.
List the factors that affect roll rate.
Flaperons, aileron droop.
081 05 04 02
081 05 04 03
Spoilers
LO
081 05 04 04
LO
081 05 04 05
LO
Explain how spoilers can be used to

control the rolling movement in
combination with or instead of the
ailerons.
Adverse yaw
Explain how the use of ailerons
induces adverse yaw.
Means to avoid adverse yaw
Explain how the following reduce
adverse yaw:
081 05 05 00
Frise ailerons;
differential aileron deflection;
rudder aileron cross-coupling;
roll spoilers.
Roll/yaw interaction
LO Explain the secondary effect of roll.

Explain the secondary effect of yaw.
081 05 06 00
Means to reduce control forces
081 05 06 01
Aerodynamic balance
Page 548

LO Describe the purpose of aerodynamic
Page 549


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
balance.
Describe the working principle of the
nose and horn balance.
Describe the working principle of
internal balance.
Describe the working principle and
the application of:
081 05 06 02
balance tab;
anti-balance tab;
spring tab;
servo tab.
Artificial means
LO Describe fully powered controls.
Describe power-assisted controls.

Explain why artificial feel is required.
Explain the inputs to an artificial feel
system.
081 05 07 00
Mass balance
LO Refer to 081 06 01 01 for mass

balance.
Refer to 081 04 03 11
081 04 03 14 for bob weight.
081 05 08 00
Trimming
081 05 08 01
Reasons to trim
LO State the
devices.
reasons
for
and
trimming
Explain the difference between a trim

tab and the various balance tabs.
081 05 08 02
Trim tabs

trim tab including cockpit indications.
081 05 08 03
Stabiliser trim
LO Explain
the
advantages
Page 550
and

disadvantages of a stabiliser trim
Page 551


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
compared with a trim tab.
Explain elevator deflection when the
aeroplane is trimmed in the case of
fully powered and power-assisted
pitch controls.
Explain
the
factors
stabiliser setting.
influencing
Explain the influence of take-off

stabiliser trim setting on rotation
characteristics and stick force during
take-off rotation at extremes of CG
position.
Discuss the effects of jammed and
runaway stabiliser.
Explain the landing considerations
with a jammed stabiliser.
081 06 00 00
LIMITATIONS
081 06 01 00
Operating limitations
081 06 01 01
Flutter
LO Describe the phenomenon of flutter

and list the factors:
elasticity;
backlash;
aeroelastic coupling;
mass distribution;
structural properties
- IAS.
List the flutter modes of an

aeroplane:
- wing.
- tailplane.
- fin.
- control surfaces including tabs.
Describe the use of mass balance to
alleviate the flutter problem by
adjusting the mass distribution:
Page 552


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
wing-mounted pylons;
control surface mass balance.
List the possible actions in the case of

flutter in flight.
081 06 01 02
Aileron reversal
LO Describe the phenomenon of aileron

reversal:
at low speeds;
at high speeds.
Describe the aileron reversal speed in

relationship to VNE and VNO.
081 06 01 03
Landing gear/flap operating
LO Describe the reason for flap/landing

gear limitations.
define VLO ;
define VLE.
Explain why there is a difference

between VLO and VLE in the case of
some aeroplane types.
Define VFE.
Describe flap design
prevent overload.
081 06 01 04
features
to
VMO, VNO , VNE
LO Define VMO, VNO, VNE.

Describe the differences between V MO,
VNO and VNE.
Explain the dangers
speeds close to VNE.
081 06 01 05
of
flying
at
M MO
LO Define MMO and state its limiting

factors.
081 06 02 00
Manoeuvring envelope
081 06 02 01
Manoeuvring-load diagram
Page 553
LO Describe
the

manoeuvring-load
Page 554


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
diagram.
Define limit and ultimate load factor
and explain what can happen if these
values are exceeded.
Define VA, VC, VD.
Identify the varying features on the
diagram:
load factor n;
speed
scale,
accelerated stall speed (refer to

081 01 08 02).
Describe the relationship between V MO
and VC.
State all the manoeuvring limit load
factors applicable to CS-23 and CS-25
aeroplanes.
Explain the relationship
VA and VS in a formula.
between
Explain the adverse consequences of

exceeding VA.
081 06 02 02
Factors
affecting
manoeuvring-load diagram
the
LO State the relationship of mass to:
load factor limits;

accelerated stall speed limit;
VA and VC.

VA, aeroplane mass and altitude.
Calculate the change
changing mass.
of
VA
with
LO Describe the effect of altitude on

Mach number, with respect to
limitations.
Explain why VA loses significance at
higher altitude where compressibility
effects occur.
Page 555


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
Define MC and MD and their relation
with VC and VD.
081 06 03 00
Gust envelope
081 06 03 01
Gust-load diagram
LO Recognise
diagram.
typical
gust-load
Identify the various features shown

on the diagram:
gust-load factor n;
speed scale, equivalent airspeed
and EAS;
CLMAX boundary;
vertical gust velocities;
relationship of VB to VC and VD.
gust limit load factor.
Define VRA, VB.

Discuss
considerations
selection of this speed.
for
the
Explain the adverse effects on the

aeroplane when flying in turbulence.
081 06 03 02
Factors affecting the gust-load

diagram.

gust-load factor, lift-curve slope,
density ratio, wing loading, EAS and
equivalent vertical sharp-edged gust
velocity
and
perform
relevant
calculations.
081 07 00 00
PROPELLERS
081 07 01 00
Conversion of engine torque to

thrust
LO Explain the resolution of aerodynamic

force on a propeller blade element
into lift and drag or into thrust and
torque.
Describe propeller thrust and torque
Page 556


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
and their variation with IAS.
081 07 01 01
Relevant propeller parameters
LO Describe the geometry of a typical

propeller blade element at the
reference section:
blade chord line;

propeller
rotational
velocity
vector;
true-airspeed vector;
blade angle of attack;
pitch or blade angle;
advance or helix angle;
define
geometric
pitch,
effective pitch and propeller
slip.
examination purposes, the following
definition is used for geometric pitch:
the theoretical distance a propeller
would advance in one revolution at
zero blade angle of attack.
Define fine and coarse pitch.
081 07 01 02
Blade twist
LO Define blade twist.

Explain why blade twist is necessary.
081 07 01 03
Fixed
pitch
and
pitch/constant speed
variable
LO List the different types of propellers:
fixed pitch;
adjustable pitch or variable
pitch (non-governing);
variable
pitch
(governing)/
constant speed.
Discuss
the
advantages
disadvantages of fixed-pitch
constant-speed propellers.
and
and
Discuss climb and cruise propellers.

blade angle, blade angle of attack and
Page 557

airspeed for fixed and variable pitch
Page 558


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
propellers.
Given a diagram, explain the forces
acting on a rotating blade element in
normal, feathered, windmilling and
reverse operation.
Explain the effects of changing
propeller pitch at constant IAS.
081 07 01 04
Propeller efficiency versus speed
LO Define propeller efficiency.

propeller efficiency and speed (TAS).
Plot propeller efficiency against speed
for the types of propellers listed in
081 07 01 03 above.
Explain the relationship
blade angle and thrust.
081 07 01 05
between
Effects of ice on propeller
LO Describe the effects of ice on a

propeller.
081 07 02 00
Engine failure
081 07 02 01
Windmilling drag
LO List the effects of an inoperative

engine on the performance and
controllability of an aeroplane:
081 07 02 02
thrust loss/drag increase;

influence on yaw moment
during asymmetric power.
Feathering
LO Explain the reasons for feathering and

the effect on performance and
controllability.
Influence on yaw moment during
asymmetric power.
Page 559
081 07 03 00
Design
features

for
Page 560
power


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
absorption
LO Describe the factors of propeller
design
that
increase
power
absorption.
081 07 03 01
Number of blades
LO Define solidity.
Describe
the
advantages
disadvantages
of
increasing
number of blades.
081 07 03 04
Diameter of propeller
LO Explain the reasons for restricting

propeller diameter.
081 07 03 03
Aspect ratio of blade
LO Define blade-aspect ratio.

081 07 03 02
and
the
Propeller noise
LO Explain how propeller noise can be

minimised.
081 07 04 00
Secondary effects of propellers
081 07 04 01
Torque reaction
LO Describe
the
effects
engine/propeller torque.
of
Describe the following methods for

counteracting
engine/propeller
torque:
081 07 04 02
counter-rotating propellers;
contra-rotating propellers.
Gyroscopic precession
LO Describe what
precession.
causes
gyroscopic
Describe the effect on the aeroplane

due to the gyroscopic effect.
081 07 04 03
Asymmetric slipstream effect
Page 561


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
LO Describe the possible asymmetric
effects of the rotating propeller
slipstream.
081 07 04 04
Asymmetric blade effect
LO Explain the asymmetric blade effect

(also called P factor).
Explain influence of direction of
rotation on critical engine on twin
engine aeroplanes.
081 08 00 00
FLIGHT MECHANICS
081 08 01 00
Forces acting on an aeroplane
081 08 01 01
Straight horizontal steady flight
LO Describe the forces acting on an

aeroplane in straight
horizontal
steady flight.
List the four forces and state where
they act.
Explain how
balanced.
the
four
forces
are
Describe the function of the tailplane.

081 08 01 02
Straight steady climb
LO Define flight-path angle.

Describe the relationship between
pitch attitude, flight-path angle and
angle of attack for the zero-wind, zerobank and sideslip conditions.
Describe the forces acting on an
aeroplane in a straight steady climb.
Name
the
forces
parallel
and
perpendicular to the direction of
flight.
Apply the formula relating to

the parallel forces (T = D + W
sin ).
Page 562


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR

the
perpendicular
forces
(L = W cos ).
Explain why thrust is greater than

drag.
Explain why lift is less than weight.
Explain the formula (for small angles)
giving the relationship between flightpath angle, thrust, weight and lift
drag ratio, and use this formula for
simple calculations.
Explain how IAS, angle of attack and
flight-path angle change in a climb
performed
with
constant
pitch
attitude and normal thrust decay with
altitude.
081 08 01 03
Straight steady descent

aeroplane in a straight steady
descent.
Name
the
forces parallel
and
flight.
Apply the formula parallel to the

direction of flight (T = D W sin
).
the
perpendicular
forces
(L = W cos ).
Explain why lift is less than weight.

Explain why thrust is less than drag.
081 08 01 04
Straight steady glide

aeroplane in a straight steady glide.
Name
the
forces parallel
and
Page 563


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
flight.
Apply the formula for forces

parallel to the direction of flight
(D = W sin );
Apply the formula for forces
flight (L = W cos ).
Describe the relationship between the

glide angle and the liftdrag ratio.
Describe the relationship between
angle of attack and the best liftdrag
ratio.
Explain the effect of wind component
on glide angle, duration and distance.
Explain the effect of mass change on
glide angle, duration and distance.
Explain the effect of configuration
change on glide angle, duration and
distance.
Describe the relation between TAS
and sink rate including minimum glide
angle and minimum sink rate.
081 08 01 05
Steady coordinated turn

aeroplane in a steady coordinated
turn.
Resolve the forces acting horizontally
and vertically during a coordinated
turn (tan =
V2
).
gR
Describe the difference between a

coordinated and an uncoordinated
turn and explain how to correct an
uncoordinated turn using turn and
slip indicator.
Explain why the angle of bank is
Page 564
independent

of
mass
and
Page 565
only


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
depends on TAS and radius of turn.
Resolve the forces to show that for a
given angle of bank the radius of turn
is determined solely by airspeed (tan
2
= V ).
gR
Calculate the turn radius, load factor

and the time for a complete turn for
relevant parameters given for a
steady turn.
Discuss the effects of bank angle on:
load factor;
angle of attack;
thrust;
drag.
Define angular velocity.
Define rate of turn and rate-one
turn.
Explain the influence of TAS on rate
of turn at a given bank angle.
081 08 02 00
Asymmetric thrust
LO Describe the effects on the aeroplane

during flight with asymmetric thrust
including both
jet engine and
propeller-driven aeroplanes.
Discuss critical engine, include effect

of crosswind when on the ground.
Explain effect of steady asymmetric
flight on a conventional (ball) slip
indicator.
081 08 02 01
Moments about the normal axis
LO Describe the
normal axis.
moments about
the
Explain the yawing moments about

the CG.
Page 566
Describe
the

change
to
Page 567
yawing


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
moment caused by power changes.
Describe the changes to yawing
moment caused by engine distance
from CG.
Describe
balance.
the
methods
to
achieve
081 08 02 02
081 08 02 03
Forces parallel to the lateral axis
LO Explain:
the force on the vertical fin;

the fuselage side force due to
sideslip;
the use of bank angle to tilt the
lift vector.
Explain how bank angle and sideslip

are related in a steady asymmetric
flight.
Explain why the bank angle must be
limited.
Explain the effect on fin angle of
attack due to sideslip.
081 08 02 04
Influence of aeroplane mass
LO Explain why controllability with one

engine inoperative is a typical
problem
encountered
at
low
aeroplane mass.
081 08 02 05
081 08 02 06
Secondary propeller effects
LO Describe propeller effects:
081 08 02 07
slip stream;
torque reaction;
asymmetric blade effect.

081 08 02 08
VMCA
Page 568

LO Define VMCA.
Page 569


Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

/IR
Describe how VMCA is determined
Explain the
location
081 08 02 09
influence
of
the
CG
VMCL
LO Define VMCL.
Describe how VMCL is determined.

Explain the
location
081 08 02 10
influence
of
the
CG
VMCG
LO Define VMCG.
Describe how VMCG is determined.
Explain the
location
081 08 02 11
influence
of
the
CG
Influence of density
LO Describe the influence of density.

Explain why VMCA, VMCL and VMCG reduce
with an increase in altitude and
temperature
081 08 03 00
Particular points on a polar curve
LO Identify the particular points on a

polar curve
and
explain their
significance, assuming a parabolic
approximation
Page 570

Subject: 082 - PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT (HELICOPTERS)

ATPL(A)
CPL( A)
ATPL(H)/IR
ATPL(H)
CPL(H)
CPL
Time
XX
XX
1:00
1:0 0
1:00
(
allowed
(hours)
082 01
082 02
082 03
082 04
082 05
082 06
082 07
082 08
Total
questions
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
05
03
01
12
10
05
05
03
44
Page 571
05
03
01
12
10
05
05
03
44
05
03
01
12
10
05
05
03
44
IR(A) & (H)

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

N. SUBJECT 082 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT (HELICOPTER)
(1) VOCABULARY OF MECHANICS

Speed is a scalar quantity, it has only magnitude.
Velocity is a vector quantity having magnitude and direction.
The velocity (speed) of a point of the aerofoil in the rotation around its axis is the linear
or tangentialvelocity (speed).
The rotational velocity (speed) of a body around an axis is an angular velocity (speed)
expressed in revolutions per minute (RPM), or degrees per second (deg/s), or radians per
second (rad/s).
Density is the mass of the fluid per unit volume, in SI units kg/m 3.
(2) AERONAUTICAL DEFINITIONS

The blade is the aerofoil between a root radius and the tip radius (R) attached to the hub with
hinges or flexible elements.
The cross section of a blade perpendicular to the feathering axis, the blade section at a
distance (radius) from the hub centre shows the s hape of the aerofoil.
Such section is characterised by a contour, a leading and trailing edge, a chord line, a
chord, a camber line, the maximum thickness or depth, the thickness-to-chord ratio.
The blade element is a spanwise piece of the blade. It is assumed that its radial extension
is small such that the aerodynamic forces don t vary with radial distance. The aerodynamic
forces on the blade element produce lift, drag and a pitching moment.
The centre of pressure is defined as the point on the chord where the resultant of all
aerodynamic forces acts such that the pitching moment about this point is zero.
The planform of the blade is the shape of the blade as seen from above.
The pitch angle of a section is the angle between the chord line and a reference plane.
(The reference planes will be defined later in this text .)
The blade is without twist when the pitch angle is constant from root to tip.
Page 572

The blade is twisted when the pitch angle of the section s varies as a function of the radial
distance (the chord lines are not parallel). If the pitch angle decreases towards the tip, this
is called washout.
The vector sum of the undisturbed upstream velocity and the thrust-induced velocity is the
relative velocity.
In the helicopter theory we use the following definitions for angle of attack, lift and
drag:
The angle between the relative velocity and the chord line is the angle of attack or
AoA, called effective angle of attack. The geometric angle of attack is the angle between
the undisturbed upstream velocity and the chord line.
Lift is the component of the aerodynamic force on a blade element perpendicular to
the relative velocity.
Profile drag is the component of the aerodynamic force on a blade element parallel to
the relative velocity.
Profile drag is produced by the pressure forces and by skin -friction forces that act on the
surface of the blade element.
The component of the drag force due to the pressure forces is the pressure or form drag.
The component of the drag due to the shear forces over the aerofoil is termed skin-friction
drag.
The sum of the pressure drag and the skin-friction drag is the profile drag.
(3) HELICOPTER CHARACTERISTICS

Disc loading is by definition the mass M or weight W of the helicopter divided by the area of
the disc.
(The disc area is R 2, R being the blade-tip radius)
The disc loading is M/(R 2) or W/(R 2).
Blade loading is by definition the mass (weight) divided by the total planform area of the
blades.
The area of a rectangular blade is given by chord times tip radius. For tapered blades , the
mean geometric chord is taken as an approximately equivalent chord.
Blade loading is defined as the mass or weight of the helicopter divided by the total area of
all blades.
Page 573

Rotor solidity is the ratio of the total blade area to the disc area.
(4) PLANES, AXES, REFERENCE SYSTEMS OF THE ROTOR
Shaft axis: the axis of the rotor shaft (mast).

Hub plane: plane perpendicular to the shaft axis through the centre of the hub.
Tip-path plane: the plane traced out by the blade tips. This plane is also the
no-flapping plane.
Virtual rotation axis: axis through the centre of the hub and perpendicular to the tippath plane. Another name for this axis is no-flapping axis.
Rotor-disc plane: another name for the tip-path plane.
Rotor disc: the disc traced out by the blade tips in the tip -path plane.
Plane of rotation: the plane parallel to the tip-path plane through the hub centre.
No-feathering plane: is also called the control plane. This is the reference plane
relative to which the pitch of the rotating blade has no variation during a full rotation.
The control plane is parallel to the swash plate in the simple feathering mechanism
(no flap-feathering coupling).
Control axis or axis of no-feathering. Axis through the hub centre and perpendicular to
the no-feathering or control plane.
The azimuthal angle of the blade is the angle in the rot or-disc plane counted in the
rotation sense from the direction opposite to the helicopter velocity.
(5) REFERENCE SYSTEMS (sometimes called frames of reference)

There are three different reference systems in which the movement of the blades can be
studied or observed:
The tip-path plane with the virtual rotation axis: the observer in this system observes
no flapping, only cyclic feathering.
The no-feathering plane (or control plane) with the control axis: the observer in this
system observes no feathering, only cyclic flapping.
The hub plane and shaft axis: the observer in this system observes both cyclic
flapping and cyclic feathering.
(6) ANGLES OF THE BLADES, INDUCED VELOCITY
Pitch angle of a blade section: the angle between the chord line of the section and the
hub plane (the reference plane), also called local pitch angle.
Pitch angle of the blade: the pitch angle at 75 % of the tip radius.
Flapping angle: the angle between the longitudinal axis of the blade and the hub
plane.
Coning angle: the angle between the longitudinal axis of the blade and the tip -path
plane.
Page 574

Advance angle: the azimuthal angle between the flapping axis and the point where
the pitch link is connected to the swash plate (not to be confused with the phase lag
from pitch input to flapping response).
The induced velocity is the velocity induced by the rotor thrust in the plane of the rotor disc (about
10 m/s for a light helicopter in hover). The slipstream velocity continues to increase
downstream of the rotor. In the hover out-of-ground-effect (HOGE), the velocity in the ultimate
wake is equal to two times the induced velocity.
Aerodynamic forces on the BLADES and the ROTOR.

The airflow around the blade element produces an aerodynamic force resolvable in two
components: lift and drag. Lift is perpendicular to the relative air velocity, and drag is
parallel to the relative air velocity.
The aerodynamic force may also be resolved into thrust perpendicular to the tip -path plane
(or plane of rotation) and drag parallel to the tip-path plane. This drag is the sum of the
profile drag and the induced drag.
Because the angle between the lift vector and the thrust vector is very small , the
magnitudes of these two vectors may be taken as equal.
The blade thrust is the sum of the thrusts of all blade elements along the blade radius.
The sum of the thrusts of all blades is the (total) rotor thrust acting perpendicular to the
tip-path plane in the direction of the virtual rotation axis.
The result of the induced drag forces on all the blade elements of all blades is a torque on
the shaft which multiplied by the angular velocity of the rotor gives the required
induced power.
The result of all the profile drags is a torque on the shaft which multiplied by the angular
velocity of the rotor gives the required profile power.
(7) TYPES OF ROTOR HUBS

There are basically four types of rotor hubs in use:
1.
2.
Teetering rotor or seesaw rotor: The two blades are connected together; the hinge is on the
shaft axis. A variation is the gimballed hub; the blades and the hub are attached to the rotor
shaft by means of a gimbal or universal joint.
Fully articulated rotor: The rotor has more than two blades. Each blade has a flapping
hinge, a lead-lag hinge and a feathering bearing.
Page 575
3.
4.

Hingeless rotor: There are no flap and lead-lag hinges. They are replaced by flexible
elements at the root of the blades which allow flapping and lead-lag movements. The
feathering bearing allows feathering of the blade.
Bearingless rotor: There are no hinges or bearings. Flapping and lead or lag are obtained by
flexing flexible elements called elastomeric hinges and feathering is obtained by twisting the
element.
Two remarks:
1.
Hinge offset and equivalent hinge offset
The hinge offset is the distance between the shaft axis and the axis of the hinge. In the
hingeless and bearingless rotor, we define an equivalent hinge offset.
2.
Elastomeric hinges
This bearing consists of alternate layers of elastomer and metal. The elasticity in the
elastomer allows the movements of flapping, lead-lag and feathering.
(8) DRAG AND POWERS

The induced power is the power resulting from the induced velocity in the rotor disc for the
generation of lift. For any given thrust, the induced power is minimum when the induced
velocity is uniform over the rotor disc. Such velocity distribution can be approximated by
using some blade twist (a truly uniform velocity cannot be obtained).
The rotor profile drag results from the component opposite to the blade velocities of all the
profile drags of the blade elements of all the blades.
The resulting power is the rotor profile power or the profile-drag power (sum of the powers
to overcome the torque).
The parasite drag is the drag on the helicopter fuselage including the drag of the rotor hub
and all external equipment such as wheels, winch, etc. The tail -rotor drag is also included
in the parasite drag. The power to overcome this drag is the parasite power.
In the level flight at constant speed, the main-rotor-induced power, the rotor profile power
and the parasite power are summed to give the total power required to drive the main
rotor.
The tail-rotor-induced power and the tail-rotor profile power are summed to give the power
required to drive the tail rotor .
The power required to drive the auxiliary services , such as oil pumps and electrical
generators, is the accessory or ancillary power. The power to overcome the mechanical
friction in the transmissions is included in the accessory power.
The total power required in level flight at constant speed is the sum of the total power for
the main rotor, the power for the tail rotor and the accessory power.
Page 576

In the low-speed region, the required power in straight and level flight decreases as speed
increases. The phenomenon is called translational lift.
The term limited power means that the total power required to hover OGE is greater than
the available power.
(9) PHASE ANGLE IN FLAPPING MOVEMENT OF THE BLADE

The cyclic movement tilts the rotor disc in the direction of the intended helicopter velocity.
The flapping response is approximately 90 later than the applied cyclic pitch (somewhat less
than 90 for hingeless rotors).
The pitch mechanism consists of the swash plate and for each blade a pitch link attached to the
swash plate and a pitch horn attached to the blade.
(10) AXES THROUGH THE CENTRE OF THE HELICOPTER
Longitudinal axis or roll axis: Straight line through the centre of gravity of the helicopter
from the nose to the tail about which the helicopter can roll left or right.
Lateral axis, transverse axis or pitch axis: Straight line through the centre of gravity of the
helicopter about which the helicopter can pitch its nose up or down. (This axis is also
perpendicular to the reference plane of the aircraft .)
Normal axis or yaw axis: Straight line perpendicular to the plane defined by the
longitudinal and lateral axes and about which the helicopter can yaw.
Aircraft reference plane: The plane with respect to which a subset of the components that
constitutes the major part of the aircraft is symmetrically disposed in the port and
starboard sense.
Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
080 00 00 00
PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT
082 00 00 00
PRINCIPLES
HELICOPTER
082 01 00 00
SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
082 01 01 00
Basic
concepts,
definitions
OF
FLIGHT
laws
Page 577
and
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL


Syllabus details and associated Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
/IR
Syllabus
reference
082 01 01 01
SI units and conversion of units
LO List the fundamental quantities and

units in SI system: mass (kg), length
(m), time (s).
LO Show and apply tables of conversion of

units of English units to SI units and
vice versa.
LO The units of the physical quantities

should be mentioned when they are
introduced.
and
LO Use the table of the International

Standard Atmosphere.
LO Define air density; explain the

relationship
between
density,
pressure and temperature.
LO Explain the influence of moisture

content on density.
LO Define pressure altitude and density

altitude.
LO Describe Newtons second law: force

equals
product
of
mass
and
acceleration.
LO Distinguish mass and weight, units.
LO Describe the other form of the second

law, applicable to thrust.
LO Describe Newtons third law: action

and reaction, force and torque.
082 01 01 02
Definitions and
about air
basic
concepts
LO Describe
air
temperature
pressure as functions of height.
082 01 01 03
082 01 01 04
Ne wton s laws
Basic concepts of airflow
LO Describe steady and unsteady airflow.
Page 578

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define streamlineand stream tube.
LO Equation of
conservation.
mass
LO Mass-flow rate through a stream-tube

section.
LO Describe the relation between the

external force on a stream tube and
the momentum variation of the
airflow.
LO State the Bernoullis equation in a nonviscous airflow, use this equation to

explain and define static pressure,
dynamic pressure and total pressure.
LO Define the stagnation point in a flow

around an aerofoil and explain the
pressure obtained in the stagnation
point.
LO Describe the pitot system and explain

the
measurement
of
airspeed
(no compressibility effects).
LO Define TAS, IAS, CAS.
LO Define a two-dimensional airflow and

an aerofoil of infinite span. Explain
the difference between a twodimensional and a three-dimensional
airflow.
LO Explain that viscosity is a feature of a

fluid (gas or liquid).
LO Describe the airflow over a flat

surface and explain the tangential
friction between air and surface and
the development of a boundary layer.
ATPL
continuity
or
Page 579
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define the terms aerofoil section,

aerofoil
element,
chord
line,
chord, thickness,
thickness-tochord ratio of section, camber line,
camber, leading-edge radius.
LO Describe different aerofoil sections,

symmetrical and asymmetrical.
LO Define the angle of attack.
LO Describe the pressure distribution on

the upper and lower surface.
LO Describe the boundary layers on the

upper and lower surfaces for small
angles of attack (below the onset of
stall).
LO Describe the resultant force due to

the pressure distribution and the
friction at the element, the boundary
layers and the velocities in the wake,
the loss of momentum due to friction
forces.
LO Resolve the aerodynamic force into
LO Define the lift coefficient and the drag

coefficient, equations.
LO Show that the lift coefficient is a

function of the angle of attack, draw
the graph.
ATPL
LO Define a laminar boundary layer, a
turbulent boundary layer and the
transition from laminar to turbulent.
Show the influence of the roughness of
the surface on the position of the
transition point.
082 01 02 00
Two-dimensional airflow
082 01 02 01
Aerofoil section geometry
082 01 02 02
CPL
Aerodynamic forces on aerofoil

elements
the components lift and drag.
Page 580

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain how drag is caused by pressure

forces on the surfaces and by friction
forces in the boundary layers. Define
the term profile drag.
LO Draw the graph of lift (or of the lift

coefficient) as a function of drag or of
the drag coefficient and define the lift
drag ratio.
LO Use the equations of lift and drag to

show the influence of speed and
density on lift and drag for a given
angle of attack and to calculate lift and
drag.
LO Define the action line of the

aerodynamic force, the centre of
pressure, the pitching moment.
LO Know that the pitching moment about

the centre of pressure is zero by
definition.
LO Know that symmetrical aerofoils have

the centre of pressure a quarter
chord behind the leading edge
independently of the angle of attack
as long as the angle of attack
remains smaller than the angle of stall.
LO Taking an
asymmetrical aerofoil
section with different cambers, know
the position of
the centre of
pressure, the influence of the angle
of attack on the centre of pressure and
the pitching moment about a line
which is a quarter chord behind the
leading edge.
ATPL
082 01 02 03
Stall
Page 581
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the boundary layer separation

when the angle of attack increases
beyond stall onset and the decrease
of lift and the increase of drag. Define
the separation point and line.
LO Draw a graph of lift and drag

coefficient as a function of the angle
of attack before and beyond the stall
onset.
LO Describe how the stall phenomenon

displaces the centre of pressure and
how pitching moments appear about
the line at quarter chord behind the
leading edge.
LO Explain
ice
contamination,
the
modification of the section profile and
the surfaces due to ice and snow,
influence on lift and drag and LD
ratio, on the angle of attack at stall
onset, effect of the weight increase.
LO Explain the erosion effect of heavy rain

on the wing and subsequent increase
of profile drag.
LO Describe
different
planforms
of
blades, and describe untwisted and
twisted blades.
LO Define the root chord and the tip

chord, the mean chord, the aspect
ratio and the blade twist.
ATPL
082 01 02 04
Disturbances
due
contamination
to
profile
082 01 03 00
Three-dimensional airflow around

a blade (wing) and a fuselage
082 01 03 01
The blade
082 01 03 02
CPL
Airflow pattern and influence on

lift
Page 582

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the spanwise flow in the case

of a blade and the appearance of the
tip vortices which are a loss of
energy.
LO Show that the strength of the

vortices increases as the angle of
attack and the lift increase.
LO Show that downwash causes vortices.
LO Define the effective air velocity as the

resultant of the undisturbed air
velocity and the induced velocity and
define the effective angle of attack.
LO Explain the spanwise lift distribution

and how it can be modified by twist.
LO Describe the aircraft fuselage and the

external components which cause
drag, the airflow around the fuselage,
influence of the pitch angle of the
fuselage.
LO Define parasite drag as the sum of

pressure drag and friction drag.
LO Define interference drag.
ATPL
082 01 03 03
Induced drag
LO Explain the thrust-induced drag, the

influence of the angle of attack and of
the aspect ratio.
082 01 03 04
CPL
The airflow around a fuselage
LO Describe
fuselage
minimise drag.
shapes
that
LO Know the formula of the parasite

drag and explain the influence of the
speed.
082 02 00 00
TRANSONIC AERODYNAMICS AND

COMPRESSIBILITY EFFECTS
082 02 01 00
Airflow speeds and velocities
Page 583

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define the speed of sound in air.
LO State that
the speed of sound is
proportional to the square root of the
absolute temperature (unit Kelvin).
LO Explain the variation of speed of

sound with altitude.
LO Define Mach number.
LO Explain
the
meaning
of
incompressibility and compressibility
of air; relate this to the value of Mach
number.
LO Define subsonic, high subsonic and

supersonic flows in relation to the
value of the Mach number.
LO Describe a
shock
wave
in
a
supersonic flow and the pressure and
speed changes by the shock.
LO Describe the appearance of local

supersonic flows at the upper surface
of a blade section and the compression
by a shock when the section is in an
upstream high subsonic flow.
LO Describe the effect of the shock on

lift, drag, the pitching moment and
the CLCD ratio, drag divergence
Mach number.
ATPL
082 02 01 01
082 02 01 02
082 02 01 03
CPL
Speeds and Mach number
Shock waves
Influence of aerofoil section and

blade planform
Page 584

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Describe the general layout of a

single main rotor helicopter, fuselage,
engine or engines, main gearbox,
main rotor shaft and rotor hub.
LO Mention the tail rotor at the aft of the

fuselage, the fenestron and the NOTOR
(No Tail Rotor).
ATPL
LO Explain the different shapes which
allow higher upstream Mach numbers
without generating a shock wave on
the upper surface:
reducing the section thicknessto-chord ratio;

special aerofoil sections as
supercritical shapes;
a planform with sweep angle,
positive and negative.
082 03 00 00
ROTORCRAFT TYPES
082 03 01 00
Rotorcraft
082 03 01 01
Rotorcraft types
LO Define the
helicopter.
autogyro and
the
LO Explain the rolling moment on an

autogyro with fixed blades, the
necessity to use flapping hinges and
the ensuing reduction of the moment
arm, the flapback of the blades.
082 03 02 00
Helicopters
082 03 02 01
Helicopter configurations
LO Describe the single main rotor

helicopter
and
the
other
configurations: tandem, coaxial, side
by side, synchrocopter (intermeshing
blades), the compound helicopter,
tilt-wing and tilt-rotor.
082 03 02 02
CPL
The helicopter, characteristics

and associated terminology
Page 585

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define the rotor disc area and the

blade area, the blades turning in the
hubplane.
LO Describe the teetering rotor with the

hinge axis on the shaft axis and the
rotor with more than two blades with
offset hinge axes.
LO Define the fuselage centre line and

the three axes: roll, pitch and
normal.
LO Define the gross weight and the gross

mass (units), the disc and blade
loading.
LO Define
the
circumferential
(tangential) velocity of the blade
sections, which equals the angular
velocity of the rotor multiplied by the
radius of the section.
LO Keep the blade fixed and define the

undisturbed upstream air velocity
relative to the blade.
LO Based on Newtons second law

(momentum),
explain
that
the
vertical force on the disc, the rotor
thrust, produces vertical downward
velocities in the rotor-disc plane. The
values
of
these
thrust-induced
velocities increase as the thrust
increases and decrease with increasing
rotor diameter. Know that the
velocities some distance downstream
are twice the value of the induced
speed in the disc plane.
ATPL
082 04 00 00
MAIN-ROTOR AERODYNAMICS
082 04 01 00
Hover flight
Effect (OGE)
082 04 01 01
Airflow through the rotor disc and

around the blades
Outside
CPL
Ground
Page 586

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain why the production of the

induced flow requires a power on the
shaft, the induced power. The
induced power is smallest if the
induced velocities have the same value
on the whole disc (flow uniformity over
the disc).
LO Describe uniform and typical nonuniform velocities through the rotor

disc.
LO Explain why the vertical rotor thrust

must be somewhat higher than the
weight because of the vertical drag
on the fuselage.
LO Describe the vertical air velocities

relative to the rotor disc as the sum
of the upstream air velocities and the
induced velocities.
LO Define the pitch angle and the angle

of attack of a blade element.
LO Explain lift and the profile drag of a

blade element.
LO Explain the resulting lift and

thrust on the blade, define
resulting rotor thrust.
the
the
LO Explain the necessity of collective pitch

angle changes, the influence on the
angles of attack and on the rotor thrust
and the necessity of blade feathering.
LO Explain the blade twist necessary to

obtain a more even induced airspeed
over the disc.
LO Describe the different blade shapes

(as viewed from above).
ATPL
Page 587
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain how the profile drag on the

blade elements generates a torque on
the main shaft and define the resulting
rotor profile power.
LO Explain the influence of air density on

the required powers.
LO Show the effect on the airflow over

the blade tips.
LO Based on Newtons third law, explain the

need of a tail-rotor thrust, the required
value being proportional to the mainrotor torque. Show that the tail-rotor
power is proportional to the tail-rotor
thrust.
LO Explain the necessity of blade

feathering of the tail-rotor blades and
the control by the yaw pedals, the
maximum and minimum values of the
pitch angles of the blades.
LO Define the ancillary equipment and its

power requirement.
LO Define the total power required.
LO Describe the influence of ambient

pressure, temperature and moisture
on the required power.
ATPL
082 04 01 02
082 04 01 03
CPL
Anti-torque force and tail rotor
Total power required and hover

altitude Outside Ground Effect
(OGE)
082 04 02 00
Vertical climb
082 04 02 01
Relative airflow and angles of

attack
LO Describe the climb speed and the

opposite vertical air velocity relative
to the rotor disk.
Page 588

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the relative air velocities and

the angle of attack of the blade
elements.
LO Explain how the angle of attack is

controlled by the collective pitch
angle control.
LO Define the total main-rotor power as

the sum of the parasite power, the
induced power, the climb power and
the rotor profile power.
LO Explain why the total main-rotor power

increases when the rate of climb
increases.
LO Define the total required power in

vertical flight.
LO Explain the assumption of a uniform

inflow distribution on the rotor disc.
LO Define the azimuth angle of a blade,

the advancing blade angular range
centred at 90, and the retreating
blade range centred at 270.
LO Show the upstream air velocities

relative to the blade elements and
the different effects on the advancing
and retreating blade. Define the area
of reverse flow. Explain the influence
of
forward
speed
on
the
tip
circumferential speed.
LO Assuming constant pitch angles and

rigid blade attachments, explain the
huge roll moment by the asymmetric
lift distribution.
ATPL
082 04 02 02
CPL
Power and vertical speed
082 04 03 00
Forward flight
082 04 03 01
Airflow and forces

inflow distribution
in
uniform
Page 589

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Show that through cyclic feathering

this imbalance could be eliminated by
a low angle of attack (accomplished
by a low-pitch angle) on the advancing
blade and a high angle of attack
(accomplished by a high-pitch angle)
on the retreating blade.
LO Describe the high air velocity at the

advancing
blade
tip
and
the
compressibility effects which limit the
maximum speed of the helicopter.
LO Describe the low air velocities on the

retreating blade tip resulting from the
circumferential speed and the forward
speed, the necessity of high angle of
attack and the onset of stall.
LO Define the tipspeed ratio and show

the limits.
LO Explain the rotor thrust perpendicular

to the rotor disc and the necessity to
tilt
the
thrust
vector
forward.
(Realisation will be explained in
082 05 00 00)
LO Explain the equilibrium conditions in

steady straight and level flight.
LO Explain the flare in powered flight,

the rearward tilt of the rotor disc and
of the thrust vector. Show the
horizontal thrust component opposite
to the speed.
LO State the increase of the thrust due

to the upward inflow, and show the
modifications of the angles of attack.
LO Explain the increase of rotor RPM in

the case of a non-governed rotor.
ATPL
082 04 03 02
CPL
The flare (powered flight)
Page 590

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain that the induced velocities

and induced power decrease as the
helicopter speed increases.
LO Define the profile drag and the profile

power and their increase with
helicopter speed.
LO Define the fuselage drag and the

parasite power and the increase with
helicopter speed.
LO Define the total drag and the increase

with helicopter speed.
LO Describe the tail-rotor power and the

power required by the ancillary
equipment.
LO Define the total power requirement

as a sum of the partial powers and
explain how this total power varies
with helicopter speed.
LO Explain the influence of the helicopter

mass, the air density and additional
external equipment on the partial
powers and the total power required.
ATPL
LO Explain the actions to be taken by the
pilot.
082 04 03 03
Non-uniform inflow distribution

in relation to inflow roll
LO Explain why the uniform inflow

distribution is an assumption to
simplify the theory and describe the
real inflow distribution which modifies
the angle of attack and the lift
especially on
the
forward
and
backward blades.
082 04 03 04
CPL
Power and maximum speed
Page 591

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Describe the airflow to the rotor disc in

a trouble-free vertical descent, power
on, the airflow opposite to the
helicopter velocity, the relative air
velocity and the angle of attack.
LO Explain the vortex-ring state, the

settling with
power. State the
approximate
values
of
vertical
descent speeds for the formation of
vortex ring related to the values of
the induced velocities.
LO Describe the airflow relative to the

blades, the root stall, the loss of lift
on the blade tip, the turbulence.
Show the effect of raising the lever and
discuss the effects on the controls.
ATPL
LO Describe the translational lift and show
the decrease of required total power as
the helicopter speed increases in the
low-speed region.
082 04 04 00
082 04 04 01
Hover and forward

Ground Effect (IGE)
Airflow
in
downwash
flight
ground
In
effect,
LO Explain how the vicinity of the ground

changes the downward flow pattern
and the consequences on lift (thrust)
at constant rotor power. Show that the
ground effect depends on the height of
the rotor above the ground and the
rotor diameter. Show the required
rotor power at constant AUM as a
function of height above the ground.
Describe the influence of the forward
speed.
082 04 05 00
Vertical descent
082 04 05 01
Vertical descent, power on
CPL
Page 592

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State the need for early recognition

of malfunctions and for a quick
initiation of recovery. Describe the
recovery actions.
LO Explain that the collective lever

position must be lowered sufficient
quickly to avoid a rapid decay of rotor
RPM, explain the influence of the
rotational inertia of the rotor on the
rate of decay.
LO Show the induced flow through the

rotor disc, the rotational velocity and
the relative airflow, the inflow and
inflow angles.
LO Show how the aerodynamic forces on

the blade elements vary from root to
tip and distinguish three zones: the
inner stalled ring (stall region), the
middle autorotation ring (driving
region),
and
the
outer
antiautorotation ring (driven region).
Explain the RPM stability at a given
collective pitch.
LO Explain the control of the rotor RPM

with collective pitch.
LO Show the need of negative tail-rotor

thrust for yaw control.
LO Explain the final increase in rotor

thrust by pulling the collective to
decrease the vertical descent speed
and the decay in rotor RPM.
ATPL
082 04 05 02
CPL
Autorotation
082 04 06 00
Forward flight Autorotation
082 04 06 01
Airflow at the rotor disc
Page 593

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Show the effect of forward speed on

the vertical descent speed.
LO Explain the effects of gross weight,

rotor RPM and altitude (density) on
endurance and range.
LO Explain the manoeuvers of turning

and touchdown.
LO Explain the heightvelocity avoidance

graphordeadmanscurves.
LO Show how the centrifugal forces

depend on rotor RPM and blade mass
and how they pull on the blade
attachment to the hub. Apply the
formula to an example. Justify the
upper limit of the rotor RPM.
LO Assume a rigid attachment and show

how
thrust
may
cause
huge
oscillating bending moments which
stress the attachment.
LO Explain why flapping hinges do not

transfer such moments. Show the
small flapping hinge offset on fully
articulated rotors and zero offset in the
case of teetering rotors.
ATPL
LO Explain the factors
angle and angle
autorotative power
the asymmetry over
forward flight.
082 04 06 02
affecting inflow
of attack, the
distribution and
the rotor disc in
CPL
Flight and landing
082 05 00 00
MAIN-ROTOR MECHANICS
082 05 01 00
Flapping of the blade in hover
082 05 01 01
Forces and stresses on the blade
Page 594

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Describe the centrifugal forces on the

mass elements of a blade with pitch
applied and the components of these
forces. Show how these forces
generate a moment which tries to
reduce the blade-pitch angle.
LO Explain the methods of counteracting

by hydraulics, bias springs and balance
masses.
LO Show how the equilibrium of the

moments about the flapping hinge of
lift (thrust) and of the centrifugal
force determine the coning angle of
the blade (the blade weight being
negligible).
LO Define the tip-path plane and the

coning angle.
LO Explain the influence of rotor RPM

and lift on the coning angle, justify
the lower limit of the rotor RPM,
relate the lift on one blade to the gross
weight.
LO Explain the effect of the mass of the

blade on the tip path and the
tracking.
ATPL
flexible element in the hingeless rotor
and describe the equivalent flapping
hinge offset compared to that of the
articulated rotor.
082 05 01 02
082 05 01 03
CPL
Centrifugal turning moment
Coning angle in hover
082 05 02 00
Flapping angles of the blade in

forward flight
082 05 02 01
Forces on the blade in forward

flight without cyclic feathering
Page 595

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Assume rigid attachments of the

blade to the hub and show the periodic
lift, moment and stresses on the
attachment, the ensuing metal fatigue,
the roll moment on the helicopter and
justify
the
necessity for flapping
hinge.
LO Assume no cyclic pitch and describe

the lift on the advancing and the
retreating blades.
LO State the azimuthal phase lag (90 or

less) between the input (applied
pitch) and the output (flapping
angle). Explain the rotor flapback
(the rearward tilting of the tip-path
plane and the rotor thrust).
LO Show that in order to assume and

maintain forward flight, the rotorthrust vector must get a forward
component by tilting the tip-path
plane.
LO Show how the applied cyclic pitch

modifies the lift on the advancing and
retreating blades and produces the
required forward tilting of the tippath plane and the rotor thrust.
LO Show the cone described by the blades

and define the virtual axis of rotation
(or the no flapping axis). Define the
plane of rotation.
LO Define the reference system in which

we define the movements: the shaft
axis and the hub plane.
ATPL
082 05 02 02
CPL
Cyclic
pitch
(feathering)
in
helicopter mode, forward flight
Page 596

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Describe the swash plates, the pitch

link and the pitch horn. Explain how
the collective lever moves the nonrotating swash plate up or down
alongside the shaft axis.
LO Describe the mechanism by which the

desired cyclic blade pitch can be
produced by tilting the swash plate
with the cyclic stick.
LO Define the no-feathering or control

plane (control orbit) and the nofeathering axis or control axis.
LO Explain the translational lift effect

when the speed increases.
LO Justify the increase of the tilt angle of

the thrust vector and of the tip-path
plane disc in order to increase the
speed.
LO Explain the Coriolis force due to

flapping,
the
resulting
periodic
moments in the hub plane and the
resulting periodic stresses which
make lead-lag hinges necessary to
avoid material fatigue.
LO Describe the profile-drag forces on

the blade elements and the periodic
variation of these forces.
ATPL
082 05 03 00
Blade-lag motion in forward flight
082 05 03 01
Forces on the blade in the disc

plane (tip-path plane) in forward
flight
082 05 03 02
CPL
The drag or lag hinge
LO Describe the drag hinge of the fully

articulated rotor and the lag flexure
in the hingeless rotor.
LO Explain the necessity for drag
dampers.
Page 597

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the movement of the centre

of gravity of the blades due to the
lead-lag movements in the multiblade
rotor.
LO Show the effect on the fuselage and

the danger of resonance between this
force
and
the
fuselage
and
undercarriage. State the conditions
likely to lead to ground resonance.
LO Describe the fully articulated rotor

with hinges and feathering bearings.
LO Describe ball and roller bearings and

elastomeric bearings, advantages and
disadvantages.
ATPL
082 05 03 03
Ground resonance
082 05 04 00
Rotor systems
082 05 04 01
See-saw or teetering rotor
LO Explain that a teetering rotor is prone

to mast bumping in low G situations
because of having no flapping hinge
offset.
082 05 04 02
082 05 04 03
Fully articulated rotor
Hingeless rotor, bearingless rotor
LO Show the forces on the flapping

hinges with large offset (virtual
hinge) and the resulting moments,
compare them with other rotor
systems.
082 05 05 00
Blade sailing
082 05 05 01
Blade sailing and causes
LO Define blade sailing, the influence of

low rotor RPM and of headwind.
082 05 05 02
CPL
Minimising the danger
Page 598

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the lift (thrust) variations per

revolution of a blade and the
resulting
vertical
rotor-thrust
variation in the case of perfect
identical blades.
LO Show the resulting frequencies and

amplitudes as a function of the
number of blades.
LO Explain the thrust variation in case of

an
out-of-track
blade,
causes,
frequencies (one-per-revolution).
LO Explain the importance of the hinges

offset on the effect of the vibrations on
the fuselage.
blade,
LO Explain the frequencies lateral oneper-revolution vibration.
ATPL
LO Describe the actions to minimise
danger and the demonstrated wind
envelope
for
engaging
and
disengaging rotors.
082 05 05 03
Droop stops
LO Explain the utility of the droop stops,

retraction of the stops.
082 05 06 00
Vibrations due to main rotor
082 05 06 01
Origins of the vertical vibrations
082 05 06 02
CPL
Lateral vibrations
LO Explain imbalances
causes, and effects.
of
082 06 00 00
TAIL ROTORS
082 06 01 00
Conventional tail rotor
082 06 01 01
Tail rotor description
LO Describe the two-bladed rotor with

teetering hinge, the rotors with more
than two blades.
Page 599

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Show the flapping hinges and the

feathering bearing.
LO Describe the dangers to ground

personnel, to the rotor blades,
possibilities of
minimising these
dangers.
LO Explain the airflow around the blades

in hover and in forward flight, the
effects of the tip speeds on the noise
production and the compressibility,
limits.
LO Explain in hovering the effect of wind

on the tail-rotor aerodynamics and
thrust, problems.
LO Explain the tail-rotor thrust and the

control
through
pitch
control
(feathering).
LO Explain the tail-rotor flapback, and

the effects of delta-three hinges.
LO Describe roll moment and drift as

side effects of the tail rotor.
LO Explain the effects of the tail-rotor

failure.
LO Explain
the
loss
of
tail-rotor
effectiveness,
vortex-ring
state,
causes, crosswind and yaw speed.
ATPL
082 06 01 02
082 06 01 03
Tail-rotor aerodynamics
Strakes on the tail boom
LO Describe the strake and explain the

function of the device.
082 06 02 00 The fenestron
082 06 02 01
Technical layout
LO Show the technical

fenestron tail rotor.
082 06 02 02
CPL
layout
Control concepts
Page 600
of

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain why the vector sum of forces

and moments must be zero in any
acceleration-free situation.
LO Indicate the forces and the moments

about the lateral axis in a steady
hover.
ATPL
LO Explain the control concepts of a
fenestron tail rotor.
082 06 02 03
Advantages and disadvantages
LO Explain
the
disadvantages.
advantages
082 06 03 00
The NOTAR
082 06 03 01
Technical layout
and
LO Show the technical layout.

082 06 03 02
Control concepts
LO Explain the control concepts.

082 06 03 03
Advantages and disadvantages
LO Explain
the
disadvantages.
advantages
082 06 04 00
Vibrations
082 06 04 01
Tail-rotor vibrations
and
LO Explain the sources of vibration of the

tail rotor and the resulting high
frequencies.
082 06 04 02
CPL
Balancing and tracking
LO Explain balancing and tracking of the

tail rotor.
082 07 00 00
EQUILIBRIUM,
CONTROL
082 07 01 00
Equilibrium
attitudes
082 07 01 01
Hover
STABILITY
and
AND
helicopter
Page 601

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL

about the longitudinal axis in a
steady hover.
LO Deduce how the roll angle in a steady

hover without wind results from the
moments about the longitudinal axis.
LO Explain how the cyclic is used to create

equilibrium of moments about the
lateral axis in a steady hover.
LO Explain the consequence of the cyclic

stick reaching its forward or aft limit
during an attempt to take off to the
hover.
LO Explain the influence of the density

altitude on the equilibrium of forces
and moments in a steady hover.
LO Explain why the vector sum of forces

and of moments must be zero in
unaccelerated flight.

about the lateral axis acting on a
helicopter in a steady straight and
level flight.
LO Explain the influence of All-Up Mass

(AUM) on the forces and moments
about the lateral axis in forward
flight.
LO Explain the influence of the position

of the centre of gravity on the forces
and moments about the lateral axis
in forward flight.
LO Explain the role of the cyclic stick

position in creating equilibrium of
forces and moments about the lateral
axis in forward flight.
ATPL
082 07 01 02
CPL
Forward flight
Page 602

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain how forward speed influences

the fuselage attitude.
LO Describe and explain the inflow roll

effect.
LO Define static stability; give an

example of static stability and of
static instability.
LO Explain the contribution of the main

rotor to speed stability.
LO Describe the influence of the horizontal

stabiliser
on
static
longitudinal
stability.
LO Explain the effect of hinge offset on

static stability.
LO Describe the influence of the tail rotor

on static directional stability.
LO Describe the influence of the vertical

stabiliser
on
static
directional
stability.
LO Explain the influence of the main

rotor on the static roll stability.
LO Describe
the
influence
of
the
longitudinal position of the centre of
gravity on the static longitudinal
stability.
ATPL
082 07 02 00
Stability
082 07 02 01
Static
longitudinal,
directional stability
082 07 02 02
roll
and
Static stability in the hover
LO Describe the initial movements of a

hovering
helicopter
after
the
occurrence of a horizontal gust.
082 07 02 03
CPL
Dynamic stability
Page 603

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define dynamic stability; give an

example of dynamic stability and of
dynamic instability.
LO Explain why static stability is

precondition for dynamic stability.
LO Explain the individual contributions of

angle of attack and speed stability
together with the stabiliser and
fuselage on the dynamic longitudinal
stability.
LO Explain the principle of

augmentation systems.
LO Explain the effect of a dihedral on a

helicopter.
LO Describe how a dihedral influences

the static roll stability.
LO Know that a large static roll stability

together with a small directional
stability may lead to a Dutch roll.
LO Explain which stability features taken

together may result in spiral dive and
the reason why.
LO Explain the static directional stability

features of a tandem rotor type
helicopter.
ATPL
082 07 02 04
Longitudinal stability
LO Define the
phugoid.
082 07 02 05
CPL
stability-
characteristics
Roll stability
stability
and
082 07 03 00
Control
082 07 03 01
Manoeuver stability
of
directional
LO Define the meaning of stick-force

stability.
Page 604

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define the meaning of stick-position

stability.
LO Explain the meaning of the stick-force

diagram and trim speed.
LO Explain the meaning of stick force per

G.
LO Explain how a bob weight influences

stick force per G.
LO Explain how helicopter control can be

limited because of available stick
travel.
LO Explain how the position of the centre

of gravity influences the remaining
stick travel.
LO Explain the meaning of the control

moment.
LO Explain the importance of the centre of

gravity position on the control
moment.
LO Explain
how
the
changes
of
magnitude of rotor thrust of a
helicopter
during
manoeuvres
influence the control moment.
LO Explain
which
control
moment
provides control for a helicopter rotor
with
zero-hinge
offset
(central
flapping hinge).
LO Explain the different type of rotor

control moments which together
provide the control of helicopters with
a hingeless or a fully articulated rotor
system.
LO Explain the influence of hinge offset
ATPL
082 07 03 02
Control power
on controllability.
082 07 03 03
CPL
Static and dynamic rollover
Page 605

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the mechanism which causes

dynamic rollover.
LO Explain the required pilot action when

dynamic rollover is starting to develop.
and
OGE
(see
and
LO Explain the effects of All-Up Mass

(AUM), ambient temperature and
pressure,
density
altitude
and
moisture.
LO Discuss the rate of climb in a vertical

flight.
LO Compare the power required and the

power available as a function of
speed in straight and level flight.
LO Define the maximum speed limited

by power and the value relative to
VNE and VNO.
LO Use the graph to determine the speeds

of maximum rate of climb and the
maximum angle of climb.
LO Use the graph to define the TAS for

maximum
range
and
maximum
endurance, consider the case of the
piston engine and the turbine engine.
Explain the effects of tailwind or
headwind on the speed for maximum
range.
ATPL
082 08 00 00
HELICOPTER FLIGHT MECHANICS
082 08 01 00
Flight limits
082 08 01 01
Hover and vertical flight
LO Show the power required OGE

IGE and the power available, the
and IGE maximum hover height
subject 020, piston engines
turbine engines).
082 08 01 02
CPL
Forward flight
Page 606

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Define the load factor, the radius of

turn and the rate of turn.

bank angle, the airspeed and the
radius of turn, between the bank angle
and the load factor.
LO Explain the influence of All-Up Mass

(AUM), pressure and temperature,
density altitude, humidity.
LO Define the limit-load factors and the

certification categories.
LO Explain the operations with limited

power, use the graph to show the
limitations on vertical flight and level
flight, discuss the power checks and
procedures for take-off and landing.
LO Describe
power.
limited
LO Describe overpitching and show the

consequences.
LO Describe situations likely to lead to

overpitching.
LO Describe overtorqueing and show the

consequences.
LO Describe situations likely to lead to

overtorqueing.
ATPL
LO Explain the effects of AUM, pressure
and temperature, density altitude,
humidity.
082 08 01 03
Manoeuvring
082 08 02 00
Special conditions
082 08 02 01
Operating with limited power
082 08 02 02
CPL
manoeuvres
with
Overpitch, overtorque
Page 607

Subject: 091 - VFR COMMUNICATION

ATPL(A)
CPL (A)
ATPL(H)/IR
ATPL (H)
CPL(H)
Time
00:30
00: 30
00:30
00:30
00: 30
allowed
(hours)
091 01
05
05
05
05
05
091 02
11
11
11
11
11
091 03
02
02
02
02
02
091 04
02
02
02
02
02
091 05
02
02
02
02
02
091 06
02
02
02
02
02
Total
24
24
24
24
24
questions
Page 608
IR(A) & (H)

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

O. SUBJECT 091 VFR COMMUNICATIONS

Syllabu
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL CPL ATPL/ ATPL CPL

IR
090 00 00 00
COMMUNICATIONS
091 00 00 00
VFR COMMUNICATIONS
091 01 00 00
DEFINITIONS
091 01 01 00
Meanings and significance

associated terms
of
LO Stations.
LO Communication methods.
LO List the categories of messages in

order of priority.
LO Identify the types of messages

appropriate to each category.
LO List the priority of a message (from

given examples of messages to
compare).
091 01 02 00
Air Traffic Services abbreviations
LO Define commonly used Air Traffic

Control abbreviations
091 01 03 00
flight conditions
airspace
services;
time
miscellaneous.
Q-code groups commonly used in

RTF airground communications
LO Define Q-code groups commonly used

in RTF air-to-ground communications:
pressure settings
directions and bearings.
LO State the procedure for obtaining

bearing information in flight.
091 01 04 00
Categories of messages
091 02 00 00
GENERAL OPERATING
PROCEDURES
091 02 01 00
Transmission of letters
Page 609


Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

IR
LO State the phonetic alphabet used in
radio-telephony.
LO Identify the occasions when words

should be spelt.
091 02 02 00
Transmission
of
numbers
(including level information)
LO Describe the method of transmission

of numbers:
091 02 03 00
pronunciation
single digits, whole hundreds
and whole thousands
Transmission of time
LO Describe the ways of transmitting

time:
091 02 04 00
standard time reference (UTC)

Minutes, minutes and hours,
when required
Transmission technique
LO Explain the techniques used

making good R/T transmissions.
091 02 05 00
Standard
(relevant
included)
words
RTF
for
and phrases
phraseology
LO Define the meaning

words and phrases.
of
standard
LO Use correct phraseology for

phase of VFR flight.
each
LO Aerodrome procedures:
departure information;
taxiing instructions;
aerodrome traffic and circuits;
final approach and landing;
after landing;
essential aerodrome
information.
Page 610

LO VFR departure.
LO VFR arrival.
Page 611

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
091 02 06 00
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
Radio-telephony call signs for

aeronautical stations including
use of abbreviated call signs
LO Name the two parts of the call sign of

an aeronautical station.
LO Identify the call-sign

aeronautical stations.
to
LO Describe the abbreviated forms for

aircraft call signs.
LO Explain when aircraft call signs may

be abbreviated.
LO Explain how to test radio transmission

and reception.
LO State the readability

explain its meaning.
suffixes
for
LO Explain when the call sign may be

omitted or abbreviated to the use of
suffix only.
091 02 07 00
Radio-telephony call
aircraft
including
abbreviated call signs
signs
use
LO List the three different ways

compose an aircraft call sign.
091 02 08 00
for
of
Transfer of communication
LO Describe the procedure for transfer of

communication:
091 02 09 00
091 02 10 00
by ground station;
by aircraft.
Test
procedures
readability scale
including
scale
and
Read-back and acknowledgement

requirements
LO State the requirement to read back

ATC route clearances.
Page 612


Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

IR
clearances related to the runway in
use.

other clearances including conditional
clearances.

other data such as runway, SSR codes,
etc.
091 02 11 00
Radar procedural phraseology
LO Use the correct phraseology for an

aircraft receiving a radar service:
radar identification;
radar vectoring;
traffic information and
avoidance;
SSR procedures.
091 03 00 00
RELEVANT WEATHER
INFORMATION TERMS (VFR)
091 03 01 00
Aerodrome weather
LO List the contents of aerodrome

weather reports and state units of
measurement used for each item:
091 03 02 00

variation of wind direction and
speed;
visibility;
present weather;
cloud
amount
and
type
(including the
meaning of
CAVOK);
air temperature and dew point;
pressure values (QNH, QFE);
supplementary
information
(aerodrome warnings, landing
runway,
runway
conditions,
restrictions, obstructions, windshear warnings, etc.).
Weather broadcast
Page 613

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO List the sources of weather information

available for aircraft in flight.
LO Explain the meaning of the acronyms

ATIS, VOLMET.
LO State the action to be taken in case of

communication failure on a controlled
VFR flight.
LO Identify the frequencies to be used in

an
attempt
to
establish
communication.
LO State the additional information that
should be transmitted in the event of
receiver failure.
LO Identify the SSR code that may be
used
to
indicate
communication
failure.
LO Explain the action to be taken by a pilot

with communication failure in the
aerodrome traffic pattern at controlled
aerodromes.
LO State the DISTRESS procedures.
LO Define DISTRESS.
LO Identify the frequencies that should

be used by aircraft in DISTRESS.
LO Specify the emergency SSR codes

that may be used by aircraft, and the
meaning of the codes.
091 04 00 00
ACTION REQUIRED TO BE TAKEN

IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION
FAILURE
091 05 00 00
DISTRESS
AND
PROCEDURES
091 05 01 00
Distress (definition, frequencies,

watch of distress frequencies,
distress signal, distress message)
URGENCY
Page 614

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe the action to be taken by

the
station
which
receives
a
DISTRESS message.
LO Describe the action to be taken by all

other stations when a DISTRESS
procedure is in progress.
LO List the content of

signal/message
in
sequence.
LO State the URGENCY procedures.
LO Define URGENCY.

be used by aircraft in URGENCY.

the
station
which
receives
an
URGENCY message.

other stations when an URGENCY

signal/message
in
sequence.
091 05 02 00
091 06 00 00
a DISTRESS
the
correct
Urgency (definition, frequencies,

urgency signal, urgency message)
an URGENCY
the
correct
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF VHF

PROPAGATION AND ALLOCATION
OF FREQUENCIES
Page 615

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
IR
CPL
LO Describe
the
radio-frequency
spectrum with particular reference to
VHF.
LO Describe
the
radio-frequency
spectrum of the bands into which the
radio-frequency spectrum is divided.
LO Identify the frequency range of the

VHF band.
LO Name the band normally used for

Aeronautical Mobile Service voice
communication.
LO State
the
frequency
separation
allocated between consecutive VHF
frequencies.
LO Describe
the
propagation
characteristics of radio transmissions
in the VHF band.
LO Describe the factors which reduce the

effective range and quality of radio
transmissions.
LO State which of these factors apply to

the VHF band.
LO Calculate the effective range of VHF

transmissions
assuming
no
attenuating factors.
Page 616

Subject: 092 - IFR COMMUNICATION

ATPL(A)
00:30
(
CPL( A)
CPL
XX
ATPL(H)/IR
00:30
ATPL(H)
XX
CPL(H)
XX
05
11
02
02
02
02
XX
24
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
05
11
02
02
02
02
XX
24
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
Time
allowed
(hours)
092 01
092 02
092 03
092 04
092 05
092 06
092 07
Total
questions
Page 617
IR(A)& (H)
00:30
05
11
02
02
02
02
XX
24

P. SUBJECT 092 IFR COMMUNICATIONS
Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR

IR
090 00 00 00
COMMUNICATIONS
092 00 00 00
IFR COMMUNICATIONS
092 01 00 00
DEFINITIONS
092 01 01 00
Meanings and significance

associated terms
of
LO Stations.
LO Communication methods.
LO The terms used in conjunction with

the approach and holding procedures.
092 01 02 00
Air Traffic Control abbreviations
LO Define commonly used Air Traffic

Control abbreviations:
flight conditions;
airspace;
services;
time;
miscellaneous.
LO The additional IFR-related terms.

092 01 03 00
Q-code groups commonly used in

RTF airground communications
LO Define Q-code groups commonly used

in RTF air-to-ground communications:
pressure settings;
directions and bearings.
LO State the procedure for obtaining a

bearing information in flight.
092 01 04 00
Categories of messages
LO List the categories of messages in

order of priority.
LO Identify the types of messages
appropriate to each category.
LO List the priority of a message (given
Page 618
examples of
messages to
compare).
xx
x x

Page 619

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR

IR
092 02 00 00
GENERAL OPERATING
PROCEDURES
092 02 01 00
Transmission of letters
LO State the phonetic alphabet used in

radio-telephony.
LO Identify the occasions when words

should be spelt.
standard
LO Use correct standard phraseology for

each phase of IFR flight:
092 02 02 00
Transmission of numbers
(including level information)
LO Describe the method of transmitting

numbers:
092 02 03 00
pronunciation;
single digits, whole hundreds
and whole thousands.
Transmission of time
LO Describe the ways of transmitting

time:
092 02 04 00
standard time reference (UTC);

minutes, minutes and hours,
when required.
Transmission technique
LO Explain the techniques used

making good R/T transmissions.
092 02 05 00
Standard
(relevant
included)
words
RTF
LO Define the meaning

words and phrases.
for
and phrases
phraseology
of
pushback;
IFR departure;
airways clearances;
position reporting;
approach procedures;
IFR arrivals.
Page 620

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR



omitted or abbreviated to the use of
suffix only.


for

abbreviated to the use of suffix only.
to
LO Describe the abbreviated forms for

aircraft call signs.
LO Explain when aircraft call signs may

be abbreviated.
LO Explain when the suffix HEAVY

should be used with an aircraft call
sign.
LO ExplaintheuseofthephraseChange
your call sign to.
LO ExplaintheuseofthephraseRevert to
flightplancallsign.
092 02 06 00
092 02 07 00
Radio-telephony call signs for

aeronautical stations including
use of abbreviated call signs
suffixes
suffixes
Radio-telephony call
aircraft
including
abbreviated call signs
signs
use
LO List the three different ways

compose an aircraft call sign.
092 02 08 00
CPL
Transfer of communication
Page 621
for
for
of


Helicopter
IR
Learning Objectives
Syllabus
reference

IR
LO Describe the procedure for transfer of
communication:
092 02 09 00
by ground station;
by aircraft
Test procedures including
readability scale; establishment
of RTF communication
LO Explain how to test radio transmission

and reception.
LO State the readability
explain its meaning.
092 02 10 00
scale
and
Read-back and acknowledgement

requirements

ATC route clearances.
clearances related to runway in use.
other clearances including conditional
clearances.
data such as runway, SSR codes, etc.
092 02 11 00
Radar procedural phraseology
LO Use the correct phraseology foran

aircraft receiving a radar service:
092 02 12 00
radar identification;
radar vectoring;
traffic information and avoidance
SSR procedures.
Level changes and reports
LO Use the correct term

vertical position:
to
describe
in relation to flight level

(standard pressure setting);
in relation to altitude
(metres/feet on QNH);
in relation to height
Page 622
(metres/fe
et on
QFE).

x x
x x
xx
Page 623

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO Describe the action to be taken in

communication failure on an IFR
flight.

case of communication failure on an
IFR flight when flying in VMC and the
flight will be terminated in VMC.

case of communication failure on an
IFR flight when flying in IMC.
LO Describe the type of flights to which

PAN MEDICAL applies.
LO List the content of a PAN MEDICAL

message in correct sequence.
LO State the DISTRESS procedures.
LO Define DISTRESS.

be used by aircraft in DISTRESS.
LO Specify the emergency SSR codes

that may be used by aircraft, and the
meaning of the codes.

the
station
which
receives
a
DISTRESS message.

092 03 00 00
ACTION REQUIRED TO BE TAKEN

IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION
FAILURE
092 04 00 00
DISTRESS AND URGENCY

PROCEDURES
092 04 01 00
PAN MEDICAL
092 04 02 00
CPL
Distress (definition, frequencies,

watch of distress frequencies,
distress signal, distress message)
Page 624

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO State the URGENCY procedures.
LO Define URGENCY.

be used by aircraft in URGENCY.

the
station
which
receives
an
URGENCY message.


signal/message
in
sequence.
an URGENCY
the
correct
LO List the contents of aerodrome

weather reports and state units of
measurement used for each item:
LO List the content

message.
092 04 03 00
of
DISTRESS
CPL
Urgency (definition, frequencies,

urgency signal, urgency message)
092 05 00 00
RELEVANT WEATHER
INFORMATION TERM
092 05 01 00
Aerodrome weather

variation of wind direction and
speed;
visibility;
present weather;
cloud
amount
and
type
(including the meaning
of
CAVOK);
air temperature and dew point;
pressure values (QNH, QFE);
supplementary
information
(aerodrome warnings, landing
runway,
runway
conditions,
restrictions, obstructions, windshear warnings, etc.).
LO State units for measurement used for

Page 625

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO List
the
sources
of
weather
information available for aircraft in
flight.
LO Explain the meaning of the acronyms

ATIS, VOLMET.
LO Explain
when
aircraft
routine
meteorological observations should
be made.
LO Explain
when
aircraft
meteorological observations
be made.
LO Describe
the
radio-frequency
spectrum with particular reference to
VHF.
LO State the names of the bands into

which the radio-frequency spectrum
is divided.
LO Identify the frequency range of the

VHF band.
LO Name the band normally used for

Aeronautical Mobile Service voice
communications.
LO State
the
frequency
separation
allocated between consecutive VHF
frequencies.
LO Describe
the
propagation
characteristics of radio transmissions
in the VHF band.
LO Describe the factors which reduce the

effective range and quality of radio
transmissions.
LO State units of measurement used for

braking action (friction coefficient).
092 05 02 00
092 06 00 00
CPL
Weather broadcast
special
should
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF VHF

PROPAGATION AND ALLOCATION
OF FREQUENCIES
Page 626

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
IR
ATPL
CPL ATPL/ ATPL

IR
LO State which of these factors apply to

the VHF band.
LO Calculate the effective range of VHF

transmissions
assuming
no
attenuating factors.
092 07 00 00
CPL
MORSE CODE
LO Identify radio-navigation aids (VOR,

DME, NDB, ILS) from their Morse- code
identifiers.
LO SELCAL, TCAS, ACARS phraseology

and procedures.
Page 627

Subject: AIR LAW & OPERATION PROCEDURE LICENSE CONVERSION

ATPL(A)
CPL(A)
CPL(A)/ IR ATPL(H)/IR ATPL(H) CPL(H)
Time
allowed
(hours)
2:00
2:00
2:00
2:00
2:00
2:00
010 01
010 02
010 03
010 04
010 05
010 06
010 07
010 08
010 09
010 10
010 11
010 12
010 13
010 14
071 01
071 02
071 03
3
3
1
3
15
7
5
4
7
1
3
1
1
16
15
15
XX
3
3
2
6
6
5
5
4
8
4
4
2
2
16
15
15
XX
3
3
1
3
15
7
5
4
7
1
3
1
1
16
15
15
XX
3
3
1
3
15
7
5
4
7
1
3
1
1
16
10
10
10
3
3
1
3
15
7
5
4
7
1
3
1
1
16
10
10
10
3
3
2
6
6
5
5
4
8
4
4
2
2
16
10
10
10
Total
questions
100
100
100
100
100
100
Q. SUBJECT LICENSE CONVERSION AIR LAW & OPERATION PROCEDURE

(2) The subjects Air law and ATC procedures are primarily based on ICAO documentation
and GCAA regulations.
Aeroplane
Syllabus
Page 628
Helicopter
IR
reference


Learning Objectives
ATPL
010 00 00 00
AIR LAW
010 01 00 00
INTERNATIONAL LAW:
CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND
ORGANISATIONS
010 01 01 00
The Convention on International

Civil Aviation (Chicago)
ICAO DOC 7300
LO Explain the historical background that

led to the establishment of the
Convention on International Civil
Aviation, Chicago, 7 December 1944.
010 01 01 01
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
CPL
Part I Air navigation
familiar
with
the
general
LO Be
contents of relevant parts
of the
following chapters:
general principles and

application of the Convention;
flight over territory of
Contracting States;
nationality of aircraft;
measures to facilitate air
navigation;
conditions to be fulfilled with
respect to aircraft;
international standards and
recommended practices
(SARPs), especially notification
of differences and validity of
endorsed certificates and
licences.
LO General principles
Describe the application of
following terms in civil aviation:
sovereignty;
Page 629
the

SUBJECT LICENSE CONVERSION AIRLAW & OPERATION PROCEDURE
Syllabus
Reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
territory, high seas, according

to the UN Convention on the High
Seas.
LO Define the following terms and
explain
how
they
apply
to
international air traffic:
right of non-scheduled flight

(including
the two technical
freedoms of the air);
scheduled air services;
cabotage;
landing at customs airports;
applicability of air regulations;
rules of the air;
search of aircraft.
LO Describe the duties of Contracting
States in relation to:
documents carried on board of

the aircraft:
certificate of
registration;
certificates of airworthiness;
licences of personnel;
recognition of
certificates and licences;
cargo restrictions;
photographic apparatus.
LO Describe the objectives of ICAO.

of the ICAO Assembly, Council and
Air Navigation Commission (ANC).

of the
ICAO Headquarters and
Regional Offices.
LO Describe
regions.
010 01 01 02
Part II The International Civil

Aviation Organization (ICAO)
the
worldwide
ICAO
LO Be familiar with the hierarchy of the

ICAO publications (SARPs, Docs):
annexes to the Convention;
Page 630

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
documents.
010 01 02 00 Other conventions and

agreements
010 01 02 01 The International Air Services
Transit Agreement
(ICAO Doc 7500)
LO Explain the two technical freedoms
of the air.

Agreement
LO Explain
the
three
freedoms of the air.
commercial
LO Describe the legal situation

with regard to the Freedoms
of the Air.
010 01 02 03 Suppression of unlawful acts
against
the
safety
of
civil
aviation;
the Conventions
of
Tokyo, Den Haag and Montreal
LO
Conventions
and
Supplements
concerning unlawful acts against the
safety of civil aviation.
LO Explain
the
content
of
Convention
on
Unlawful
Committed on Board Aircraft.
the
Acts
(Doc
8364
Convention
on
Offences and Certain Other Acts
Committed on Board Aircraft, Tokyo,
14 September 1963)
LO Explain
the
content
of
Convention
on
Suppression
Unlawful Seizure of Aircraft.
the
of
(Doc 8920
Convention for the
Suppression of Unlawful Seizure of
Aircraft, Den Haag, 16 December
1970,
and
Protocol
for
the
Page 631

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
Suppression
of
Unlawful
Acts
Montreal, 23 September 1971)
LO Explain
the
content
of
the
Convention
on
Suppression
of
Unlawful Acts of Violence at Airports
Serving International Civil Aviation
in accordance with Doc 8966
Convention for the Suppression of
Unlawful Acts against the Safety of
Civil Aviation, done at Montreal on
23.9.1971, and signed at Montreal
on 24 February 1988).
LO Describe the measures and actions

to be taken by the PIC of an aircraft
in order to suppress unlawful
acts
against the safety of the aircraft.
(Doc 9518 Protocol supplementary to the Convention for the

Suppression
of
Unlawful
Acts
done at Montreal on 23 September
1971, and signed at Montreal on 24
February 1988)
010 01 02 04 Bilateral agreements
LO Explain the reason for the existence
of
bilateral
agreements
for
scheduled air transport
(Digest of Bilateral Air Transport

Agreements, ICAO Doc 9511).
010 01 02 05 International private law
LO Explain
the
Conventions
and
towards persons and goods
in
accordance with the Warsaw System
based on the Convention
for the
Unification of Certain Rules Relating
to International Carriage
by Air,
Page 632

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
Warsaw, 2 October 1929.

LO Explain the legal significance of the
issue of a passenger ticket and/or of
baggage/cargo documents.
LO Explain that the liability towards

persons and goods may be unlimited
on
the basis of the
Montreal
Convention of 28 May 1999.
LO Explain the consequences of the EU

Regulation about passenger rights in
case of delay, cancellation or denied
boarding.
LO Explain the liability limit in relation

to destruction,
loss, damage or
delay of baggage.
LO Describe the consequences for an

airline
and/or the PIC when
passenger ticket is not issued.
010 01 02 06 Operators and pilots liabilities

towards persons and goods on
the ground in case of damage
and
injury
caused
by
the
operation of the aircraft
LO Explain
the
Conventions
and
towards persons and goods on the
ground based on the International
Convention
for rules relating to
Damage Caused by aircraft, signed
at Rome on 29 May 1933 and on
7 October 1952, and at Montreal on
23 September 1978.
010 01 02 07 The Convention of Rome (1933)
and other documents related to
rights in aircraft.
Page 633

Syllabus
Reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Understand the rules relating to

international recognition of rights in
aircraft and the rules relating to
precautionary arrest of aircraft.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
x
ATPL
CPL
010 01 03 00 World organisations

Association (IATA)
LO Describe the
general
and objectives of IATA.
organisation
Page 634
IR

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
010 02 00 00 AIRWORTHINESS OF AIRCRAFT

010 02 01 00 ICAO Annex 8 and the related
Certification Specifications
LO Explain the
Annex 8.
ICAO
LO Explain
how
the
Airworthiness
Standards of ICAO Annex 8 and the
Certification Specifications (CSs) are
related to each other.
LO State which aircraft the Standards

of ICAO Annex 8 and the CSs shall
apply to.
LO State the necessity to have a CofA.
LO Explain the various elements that

are required for a CofA.
LO State
who
shall determine
an
aircrafts continuing airworthiness.
LO Describe how a Certificate of

Airworthiness can be renewed or
may remain valid.
010 02 02 00 Certificate
(CofA)
LO State
CofA.
definitions
of
the issuing
of
Airworthiness
authority
010 03 00 00 AIRCRAFT
NATIONALITY
REGISTRATION MARKS
of a
AND

LO Recall
the
definitions
following terms:
of
the
aircraft;
heavier-than-air aircraft;
State of Registry.
010 03 02 00 Aircraft
nationality,
common
and registration marks to
be
Page 635

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
Used
LO State the location of nationality and
common and registration marks.
LO Explain
the
combination
of
nationality and registration marks
(sequence, use of hyphen).
LO State
who
is responsible
assigning registration marks.
LO Explain the structure of Part FCL.

Part-FCL and AMC/GM to Part-FCL.
LO Explain the requirements to act as a

flight crew member of a civil aircraft
registered in a Member State.
for
010 04 00 00 PERSONNEL LICENSING

010 04 01 00 ICAO Annex 1
010 04 01 01 Differences
Annex
1
Regulation
between
and
the
ICAO
Aircrew
LO Describe
the
relationship
and
differences between ICAO Annex 1
and the Aircrew Regulation.
010 04 02 00 Part-FCL
category of aircraft,
cross-country,
dual instruction time, flight time,
SPIC, instrument time,
instrument
flight time, instrument ground time,
MCC,
multi-pilot aircraft,
night,
private pilot,
proficiency check,
renewal, revalidation, skill test, solo
flight time, type of aircraft.
010 04 02 02 Content and structure
Page 636

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State to what extent Member States

will accept certificates issued by
other Member States.
LO List the two factors that are relevant

to the exercise of the privileges of a
licence.
LO State the circumstances in which a

language-proficiency endorsement is
required.
LO List the restrictions

for licence
holders with an age of 60 years or
more.
LO Explain
the
authority.
competent
LO Describe the obligation to carry and

present documents (e.g. a flight
crew licence) under Part-FCL.

of a CPL.
LO State the privileges of a CPL.
term
010 04 02 03 Commercial Pilot Licence (CPL)
010 04 02 04 Airline Transport Pilot Licence

(ATPL)
and
Multi-crew
Pilot
Licence (MPL)
of an ATPL and MPL.
LO State the privileges of an ATPL and

MPL.
010 04 02 05 Ratings
LO Explain the
requirements for class
LO Explain the requirements

for type
LO Explain
the
requirements
Page 637
for
x
x

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
instrument ratings, their validity and

privileges.
010 04 03 00 Part-MED
LO Describe the relevant content of PartMED
Medical
Requirements
(administrative
parts
and
requirements
related to licensing
only).
LO State the requirements for a medical

certificate.
LO Name the kind of medical certificate

required
when
exercising
the
privileges of a CPL or ATPL.

of a decrease in medical fitness.
the
LO State who on
board an aircraft is
primarily
responsible
for
the
operation of the aircraft in accordance
with the Rules of the Air.
LO Indicate under what circumstances

departure from the Rules of the Air
may be allowed.
LO Explain the
duties of the PIC
concerning pre-flight actions in case
of an IFR flight.
010 05 00 00 RULES OF THE AIR

LO Explain
the definitions
Annex 2.
of
ICAO
010 05 02 00 Applicability of the Rules of the

Air
LO Explain the territorial application of
the ICAO Rules of the Air.
LO Explain the compliance
Rules of the Air.
with
Page 638

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State who has the final authority as

to the disposition of the aircraft.
LO Explain the problematic in the use of

psychoactive substances by flight
crew members.
LO Describe the rules for the avoidance

of collisions.
LO Describe the lights to be displayed

by aircraft.
LO Understand marshalling signals.
LO State the basic requirements for

minimum height for the flight over
congested areas of cities, towns or
settlements, or over an open-air
assembly of persons.
LO Define when the cruising levels shall

be expressed in terms of flight
levels (FL).
LO Define under what circumstances

cruising levels shall be expressed in
terms of altitudes.
LO Explain the limitation for proximity

to other aircraft
and the right-ofway
rules, including holding at
runway-holding
positions
and
lighted stop bars.
LO Describe
the meaning of
light
signals displayed to and by the
aircraft.
LO Describe
carrying
flights.
the requirements when

out simulated instrument
LO Indicate the basic rules for an

aircraft operating on and in the
vicinity of an aerodrome (AD).
010 05 03 00
General rules
Page 639

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the requirements for the

submission of an ATS flight plan.
LO Explain why a time check has to be

obtained before the flight.
LO Explain the actions to be taken in

case of flight-plan change or delay.

of inadvertent changes to track,
true
airspeed
(TAS) and
time
estimate affecting the current flight
plan.
LO Explain the procedures for closing a

flight plan.
LO State for which flights an air traffic

control clearance shall be obtained.
LO State how a pilot may request an air

LO State the action to be taken if an air

traffic
control clearance is
not
satisfactory to a pilot-in-command.
LO Describe the required actions to be

carried out if the continuation of a
controlled VFR flight in VMC is not
practicable anymore.
LO Describe
the
provisions
for
transmitting a position report to the
appropriate ATS unit including time
of transmission and normal content
of the message.
LO Describe the necessary action when

an
aircraft experiences
a COM
failure.
LO State what information

an aircraft
being
subjected
to
unlawful
interference
shall give
to
the
appropriate ATS unit.
Page 640

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
010 05 04 00 Visual Flight Rules (VFRs)

LO Describe the Visual
Flight Rules as
contained in Chapter 4 of ICAO
Annex 2.
010 05 05 00 Instrument Flight Rules (IFRs)

LO Describe the Instrument Flight Rules
as contained in Chapter 5 of ICAO
Annex 2.
010 05 06 00 Interception of civil aircraft

LO List
the
possible
reasons
intercepting a civil aircraft.
for
LO State what primary action should be

carried
out
by an
intercepted
aircraft.
LO State
which
frequency
should
primarily be tried in order to contact
an intercepting aircraft.
LO State on which mode and code a

transponder
on
board
intercepted
aircraft
should
operated.
the
be
LO Recall the interception signals and

phrases.
010 06 00 00 PROCEDURES
FOR
AIR
NAVIGATION
SERVICES
AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS (PANSOPS)

010 06 01 00 Foreword and introduction
LO Translate the term PANS-OPS into
plain language.
LO State the general aim of PANS-OPS

Flight Procedures (ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume I).
010 06 02 00 Definitions and abbreviations
Page 641

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Recall all definitions included
ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I,
Chapter 1.
in
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
LO Name the factors dictating

the
design
of
instrument-departure
procedures.
LO Explain in which situations the

criteria
for
omnidirectional
departures are applied.
LO Define
the
terms
straight
departure and turning departure.
LO State
the responsibility
of the
operator when unable to utilise the
published departure procedures.
LO Explain when the omnidirectional

method is used for departure.
LO Describe the solutions when an

omnidirectional
procedure is not
possible.
the
how
omnidirectional
are expressed in the
LO Interpret all abbreviations as shown

in ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I,
Chapter 2.
010 06 03 00 Departure procedures
010 06 03 01 General criteria (assuming
engines operating)
all
010 06 03 02 Standard instrument departures

(SIDs)
010 06 03 03 Omnidirectional departures
010 06 03 04 Published information

LO State
the
conditions
for
publication of a SID and/or RNAV
route.
LO Describe
departures
Page 642

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
appropriate publication.
010 06 03 05 Area
Navigation
(RNAV)
departure procedures and RNPbased departures
RNAV/RNP-based
departure
procedures
and
those
for
approaches.
LO General criteria (except the table

Speeds for procedure calculations)
of the approach procedure design:
instrument approach areas;
accuracy of fixes;
fixes formed by intersections;
intersection fix-tolerance
factors;
other fix-tolerance factors;
approach area splays;
descent gradient.
LO Name the five possible segments of

an instrument approach procedure.
LO Give reasons for establishing aircraft

categories for the approach.
LO State the maximum angle between

the final approach track and the
extended RWY centre line to still
consider a
as being a straight-in approach.
LO State
the
minimum
obstacle
clearance provided by the minimum
sector altitudes (MSAs) established
for an aerodrome.
LO Describe the point of origin, shape,

size and subdivisions of the area used
for MSAs.
LO State that a pilot shall
010 06 04 00 Approach procedures

010 06 04 01 General criteria
apply wind
Page 643

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
corrections when carrying out
instrument-approach procedure.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
an
LO Name
the
most
significant
performance factor influencing the
conduct
of
instrument-approach
procedures.
LO Explain why a pilot should not

descend below OCA/Hs which are
established for:
precision-approach
procedures;
procedures;
visual (circling) procedures.
LO Describe in
general
relevant factors for the
of operational minima.
terms
the
calculation
acronyms
LO Describe how the vertical cross

section for each of the five approach
segments is broken
down into the
various areas.
LO State within which area of the cross

section
the
Minimum
Obstacle
Clearance (MOC) is provided for the
whole width of the area.
LO Define the terms IAF,

MAPt and TP.
FAF,
LO Name the area within which the

plotted point of an intersection fix
LO Translate the following

into plain language:

MDH,

terms:
MDH,
010 06 04 02 Approach-procedure design
IF,
Page 644

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
may lie.
LO Explain
by
which factors
the
dimensions of an intersection fix are
determined.
LO State
the accuracy of facilities
providing track (VOR, ILS, NDB).
LO Describe
factors:
LO Describe
the
basic
information
relating to approach-area splays.
LO State the optimum descent gradient

(preferred for a precision approach)
in degrees and per cent.
LO Name the five standard segments of

an
instrument APP procedure and
state the beginning and end for
each of them.
LO Describe
where
normally ends.
LO State whether or not omnidirectional

or sector arrivals can be provided.
LO Explain the main task of the initial

APP segment.
LO Describe the maximum angle of

interception between the initial APP
segment and the intermediate APP
segment
(provided
at
the
intermediate
fix) for a precision
approach
and
a
non-precision
approach.
the
other
fix-tolerance
surveillance radar (Terminal Area

Radar (TAR)), En Route Surveillance
Radar (RSR), DME, 75 MHz marker
beacon, fixes overhead a station
(VOR, NDB).
010 06 04 03 Arrival and approach segments
an
ARR
route
Page 645

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
LO State the main task of the final APP

segment.
LO Name the two possible aims of a

final APP.
LO Explain the term final approach

point in case of an ILS approach.
LO State what happens if an ILS GP

becomes inoperative during the APP.
LO Name the three phases of a missedapproach

procedure and describe
their geometric limits.
LO Describe the main task of a missedapproach procedure.
LO State at which height/altitude the

missed approach
is assured to be
initiated.
LO Define the term missed

point (MAPt).
approach
LO Describe how an MAPt

established
in
an
procedure.
may be
approach
LO State the pilots reaction if, upon

reaching the MAPt, the required
visual reference is not established.
LO Describe what a pilot is expected to

do in the event a missed approach
is initiated prior to arriving at the
MAPt.
LO State whether the pilot is obliged to

cross the MAPt at the height/altitude
required
by the
procedure or
whether they are allowed to cross
LO Describe the main task

intermediate APP segment.
of
the
010 06 04 04 Missed approach
Page 646

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
the
MAPt at
an altitude/height
greater than that required
by the
procedure.
010 06 04 05 Visual manoeuvring (circling) in
the vicinity of the aerodrome
LO Describe what is meant by visual
manoeuvring (circling).
LO Describe how a prominent obstacle

in the visual manoeuvring (circling)
area outside the final-approach and
missed-approach area has to be
considered for the visual circling.
LO State for which category of aircraft

the
obstacle-clearance
altitude/
height within an established visualmanoeuvring
(circling)
area
is
determined.
LO Describe how an MDA/H is specified

for visual
manoeuvring (circling) if
the OCA/H is known.
LO State the conditions to be fulfilled

before descending below MDA/H in a
visual-manoeuvring
(circling)
approach.
LO Describe why there can be no single

procedure designed that will cater for
conducting a circling approach in
every situation.
LO State how the pilot is expected to

behave after initial visual contact
during
a
visual
manoeuvring
(circling).

to do if visual reference is lost while
circling to land from an instrument
approach.
010 06 04 06 Area
Navigation
(RNAV)
Page 647

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
approach procedures based on

VOR/DME
LO Describe the provisions that must be
fulfilled
before
carrying
out
VOR/DME RNAV approaches.
LO Explain the disadvantages

VOR/DME RNAV system.
the
LO List the factors the navigational

accuracy of the
VOR/DME RNAV
system depends on.
LO State whether the VOR/DME/RNAV

approach is a precision or a nonprecision procedure.
LO Explain why deviations from the inflight

procedures of
a holding
established
in
accordance
with
Doc 8168 are dangerous.
LO State that if for any reasons a pilot is

unable to conform to the procedures
for normal conditions laid down for
any particular holding pattern, they
should advise ATC as early as
possible.
LO Describe how right-turn holdings can

be transferred to left-turn holding
patterns.
LO Describe the shape and terminology
of
010 06 04 07 Use of FMS/RNAV equipment to

follow
conventional
nonprecision approach procedures
LO State the provisions for flying
the
conventional non-precision approach
procedures
using
FMS/RNAV
equipment.
010 06 05 00 Holding procedures
010 06 05 01 Entry and holding
Page 648

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
associated with the holding pattern.

LO State the bank angle and
rate of
turn to be used whilst flying
in a
holding pattern.
LO Explain why pilots in a holding

pattern should attempt to maintain
tracks
and how
this can
be
achieved.
LO Describe where outbound

begins in a holding pattern.
LO State where the outbound leg in a

holding terminates if the outbound
leg is based on DME.
LO Describe the three heading-entry

sectors for entries into a holding
pattern.
LO Define the terms parallel entry,

offset entry and direct entry.
LO Determine
procedure
pattern.
entry
holding
LO State the still air time for flying the

outbound entry heading with or
without DME.

to do when
clearance is received
specifying the time of departure
from the holding point.
LO Describe the layout of the basic

holding area, entry area and buffer
area of a holding pattern.
LO State which obstacle clearance is

provided by a minimum permissible
holding
level
referring to
the
010 06 05 02 Obstacle
table)
the
for a
correct
given
clearance
timing
(except
Page 649

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
holding
area, the
buffer
area
(general only) and over high terrain
or in mountainous areas.
010 06 06 00 Altimeter-setting procedures
010 06 06 01 Basic
requirements
procedures
and
LO Describe the two main objectives of

altimeter settings.
LO Define the terms QNH and QFE.
LO Describe the different terms for

altitude or flight levels respectively
which are the references during
climb or descent to change the
altimeter
setting from
QNH to
1013.2 hPa and vice versa.
LO Define the term Flight Level (FL).
LO State where flight level zero shall be

located.
LO State
the
interval
by
which
consecutive flight levels shall be
separated.
LO Describe
how
numbered.
LO Define the term Transition Altitude.
LO State how Transition Altitudes shall

normally be specified.
LO Explain how the height of the

Transition Altitude is calculated and
expressed in practice.
LO State where Transition

shall be published.
LO Define the term Transition Level.
LO State when the Transition

Level is
normally passed on to the aircraft.
flight
levels
are
Altitudes
Page 650

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State how the vertical

position of
the aircraft shall be expressed at or
below the Transition Altitude and
Transition Level.
LO Define the term Transition Layer.
LO Describe when the vertical position

of an
aircraft passing through the
transition layer shall be expressed
in terms of flight levels and when in
terms of altitude.
LO State
when the QNH altimeter
setting shall be
made available to
departing aircraft.
LO Explain when the vertical separation

of an aircraft during en route flight
shall
be assessed
in terms
of
altitude and when in terms of flight
levels.
LO Explain
when,
in
airground
communications during an en route
flight, the vertical position of an
aircraft shall be expressed in terms
of altitude
and when in terms of
flight levels.
LO Describe why QNH altimeter-setting

reports should be provided from
sufficient locations.
LO State how a QNH altimeter setting

shall
be made available to aircraft
approaching a controlled aerodrome
for landing.

the vertical position of an aircraft
above the transition
level may be
referenced to altitudes.
010 06 06 02 Procedures
pilots
for operators
Page 651
and

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State the three requirements that

selected altitudes or selected flight
levels should have.
LO Describe a pre-flight
operational
test in case of QNH setting and in
case
of QFE
setting
including
indication (error) tolerances referred
to the different test ranges.
LO State on which setting at least one

altimeter shall be set prior to takeoff.
LO State where during the climb the

altimeter setting shall be changed
from QNH to 1013.2 hPa.

obtain the transition level.

obtain the actual QNH altimeter
setting.
LO State where the altimeter settings

shall be changed from 1013.2 hPa
to QNH during descent for landing.
LO Describe the difference

between
independent and dependent parallel
approaches.
LO Describe the
operations:
010 06 07 00 Simultaneous
operation
on
parallel
or
near-parallel
instrument runways
following
different
simultaneous instrument
departures;
segregated parallel
approaches/departures;
semi-mixed and mixed

operations.
Page 652

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Know about NOZ and NTZ.
LO Name
the
aircraft
equipment
requirements for conducting parallel

parallel instrument approaches may
be conducted.
LO State the radar requirements for

instrument approaches and how
weather conditions effect these.
LO State
the
maximum angle
of
interception for an ILS localiser CRS
or MLS final APP track in case of
conditions for
LO Describe the special
tracks
on
missed
approach
procedures and departures in case
of simultaneous, parallel operations.
LO State when and where the pilot shall

operate the transponder.
LO State the modes and codes that the

pilot shall operate in the absence of
any ATC directions or regional air
navigation agreements.
LO Indicate when the pilot shall operate

Mode C.
LO State when the pilot shall SQUAWK

IDENT.
LO State the transponder

code to indicate:
010 06 08 00 Secondary
surveillance
(transponder) operating
procedures
radar
010 06 08 01 Operation of transponders
mode
a state of emergency;
Page 653
and

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
a communication failure;

transponder failure in flight.
LO Describe the main reason for using

ACAS.
LO Indicate whether the use of ACAS

indications described in Doc 8168 is
absolutely mandatory.
LO Explain the pilots reaction required

to allow ACAS
to fulfil
its role of
assisting pilots in the avoidance of
potential collisions.
LO Explain
why
pilots
shall
not
manoeuvre
their
aircraft
in
response to Traffic Advisories only.
LO Explain the significance of Traffic

Advisories
in view of
possible
LO State why a pilot should follow

Resolution Advisories immediately.
LO List the reasons which may force a

pilot to disregard a
Resolution
Advisory.
LO Decide how a pilot shall react if

there
is
a
conflict
between
Resolution Advisories in case of an
ACAS/ACAS coordinated encounter
LO Explain
the
importance
of
instructing ATC immediately that a
Resolution
Advisory
has
been
followed.
LO Explain the duties of a pilot as far as

ATC is concerned when a Resolution
of a
LO State the primary action of the pilot

in the case of an
unserviceable
transponder before departure when
no repair or replacement at the
given aerodrome is possible.
010 06 08 02 Operation of ACAS equipment
Page 654

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
Advisory situation is resolved.

010 07 00 00 AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES AND AIR
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
010 07 01 00 ICAO Annex 11
Services
Air Traffic
LO Recall the definitions given in ICAO
Annex 11.
LO Name the objectives of Air Traffic

Services (ATS).

Traffic Services.

Traffic Control services (ATC).
LO Indicate when aerodrome

control
towers shall provide an accurate
time check to pilots.
LO State on which frequencies a pilot

can expect ATS to contact them in
case of an emergency.
LO Understand the
procedure for the
transfer of an aircraft from one ATC
unit to another.
for
LO Understand the various rules and

services that apply to the various
LO Explain which airspace

included in an FIR or UIR.
be
LO State the designation for those

portions of the airspace where flight
information
service
(FIS)
and
LO State the designations for those

portions of the airspace where ATC
service shall be provided.
010 07 01 02 General
010 07 01 03 Airspace
LO Describe
the
purpose
establishing FIRs including UIRs.
shall
Page 655

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Indicate whether or not CTAs and

CTRs designated within an FIR shall
form part of that FIR.
LO Name the lower limit of a CTA as far as

ICAO standards are concerned.
LO State whether or not the lower limit

of a CTA has to be established
uniformly.
LO Explain why a UIR or Upper CTA

should be delineated to include the
Upper Airspace within the lateral
limits of a number of lower FIRs or
CTAs.
LO Describe in general the lateral limits of

CTRs.
LO State the minimum extension

NM) of the lateral limits of a CTR.
(in
LO State the upper limits of a CTR

located within the lateral limits of a
CTA.
in
LO Name the ATS units providing ATC

service
(area
control
service,
approach
control
service,
aerodrome control service).
LO Describe which unit(s) may

assigned with the task to provide
specified services on the apron.
be
clearances
LO Describe the aim of clearances

issued by ATC with regard to IFR, VFR
or special VFR flights, and refer to the
different airspaces.
LO List the various (five possible) parts of

an ATC clearance.
LO Describe the various

clearance coordination.
010 07 01 04
Air Traffic Control services
LO Name all classes of airspace

which ATC shall be provided.
LO Name the purpose of

issued by an ATC unit.
aspects
Page 656
of

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State how ATC shall react when it

becomes
apparent
that
traffic,
additional to that already accepted,
cannot be accommodated within a
given period of time at a particular
location or in a
particular area, or
can only be accommodated
at a
given rate.
LO Explain why
the movement
of
persons, vehicles and towed aircraft on
the manoeuvring area of an AD shall be
controlled by the AD TWR (as
necessary).
LO State for which aircraft FIS shall be

provided.
LO State whether or not FIS shall

include the provision of pertinent
SIGMET and AIRMET information.
LO State which information FIS shall

include in addition to SIGMET and
AIRMET information.
LO Indicate which other

information
the FIS shall include in addition to
the special information given in
ANNEX 11.
LO Name the three major types

operational FIS broadcasts.
LO Give the meaning of the acronym

ATIS in plain language.
LO Show that you are acquainted with

the basic conditions for transmitting
an ATIS as indicated in ANNEX 11.
LO Mention the
messages.
ATIS
LO List
the
basic
information
concerning ATIS broadcasts
(e.g.
frequencies used,
number of ADs
included,
updating, identification,
acknowledgment
of
receipt,
language
and
channels,
ALT
setting).
010 07 01 05
Flight Information Service (FIS)
four
possible
Page 657
of

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Understand the content of an ATIS

message and the factors involved.
LO State
the
reasons
circumstances
when
an
message shall be updated.
LO Indicate who provides the alerting

service.
LO State
who
is
responsible
for
initiating
the
appropriate
emergency phase.
LO Indicate
the aircraft to
which
LO Name the unit which shall

be
notified by the responsible ATS unit
immediately
when an aircraft is
considered to be in a state
of
emergency.
LO Name
the
three
stages of
emergency and describe the basic
conditions
for
each
kind of
emergency.
LO Demonstrate
knowledge of
the
meaning
of
the
expressions
INCERFA, ALERFA and DETRESFA.
LO Describe the limiting conditions for

the information of aircraft in the
vicinity of an aircraft being in a
state of emergency.
the
LO State the factors that RNP is based on.
LO Describe the reason for establishing a

system of route designators and
Required
Navigation
Performance
(RNP).
LO State whether or not a prescribed
010 07 01 06
and
ATIS
Alerting service
010 07 01 07 Principles governing

ATS route designators
RNP
LO State
the
meaning
of
expressions RNP 4, RNP 1, etc.
Page 658
and

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
RNP type is considered an integral

part of the ATS route designator.
LO Demonstrate general knowledge of
the composition of an ATS route
designator.
plain
language
the
the acronym
PANS-
LO State whether or not the procedures

prescribed in ICAO Doc 4444 are
directed exclusively to ATS services
personnel.

ICAO
Doc
4444
and
other
documents.
LO State whether or not a clearance

issued by ATC units does
include
prevention of collision with terrain, and
if there is an exception to this, name
the exception.
010 07 02 00 ICAO Document 4444

Traffic Management
Air
010 07 02 01 Foreword (Scope and purpose)

LO Explain
meaning
ATM.
in
of
LO Recall
all definitions
given
Doc 4444 except the following:
in
accepting unit/controller, AD taxi

circuit, aeronautical fixed service
(AFS), aeronautical fixed station,
air-taxiing, allocation, approach
funnel, assignment, data
convention,
data
processing,
discrete code, D-value, flight status,
ground
effect,
receiving
unit/controller, sending
unit/controller, transfer of control
point, transferring
unit/controller,
unmanned free balloon.
010 07 02 03
ATS system capacity and

Air
Traffic
Flow
Management
(ATFM)
Page 659

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO
010 07 02 04
LO
010 07 02 05
Explain when and where

service shall be implemented.
ATFM
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
General provisions for Air Traffic

Services
Describe who is responsible for the
provision of flight information and
alerting
service within a Flight
Information
Region
(FIR) within
controlled airspace and at controlled
aerodromes.
ATC clearances
LO
Explain the sole scope and purpose of

an ATC clearance.
LO
State which information the issue of

an ATC clearance is based on.
LO
Describe what a PIC should do if an

ATC clearance is not suitable.
LO
Indicate
who
bears
the
responsibility for adhering to the
applicable
rules and
regulations
whilst flying under the control of an
ATC unit.
LO
Name the two primary purposes of

clearances issued by ATC units.
LO
State why
clearances
issued early enough to
aircraft.
LO
Explain what is meant

expression clearance limit.
the
LO
Explain the meaning of the phrases

cleared via flight planned route,
cleared via (designation) departure
and
cleared via
(designation)
arrival in an ATC clearance.
LO
List which items of an ATC clearance

shall always be read back by the flight
crew.
010 07 02 06
LO
Horizontal
instructions
speed
must
be
en route
by
control
Explain the reason for speed control
Page 660

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL ATPL

/IR
IR
CPL
by ATC.
LO Define the maximum speed changes
that ATC may impose.
LO State within which distance from the

threshold the PIC must not expect
any kind of speed control.
Change from IFR to VFR flight
010 07 02 07
LO Explain how the change from IFR to VFR

can be initiated by the PIC.
LO Indicate the expected reaction of

the appropriate ATC
unit upon a
request to change from IFR to VFR.
Wake turbulence
010 07 02 08
the
wake-turbulence
LO State
categories of aircraft.
the
LO State
separation minima.
wake-turbulence
LO Describe how a heavy aircraft shall

indicate this in the initial radiotelephony contact with ATS.
LO Indicate how the vertical position of

an aircraft in the vicinity of an
aerodrome shall be expressed at or
below the transition altitude, at or
above the transition level, and while
climbing or descending through the
transition layer.
LO Describe when the height of an

aircraft using QFE during an NDB
approach is referred to the landing
threshold instead of the aerodrome
elevation.
Altimeter-setting procedures
010 07 02 09
LO
transition level;
transition layer; and
transition altitude.
Indicate how far altimeter settings
Page 661

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
provided to aircraft shall be rounded

up or down.
LO Define the expression lowest usable
flight level.
LO Determine how the vertical position

of an aircraft on an en route flight is
expressed at or above the lowest
usable flight level and below the
lowest usable flight level.
LO State who establishes the transition

level to be used in the vicinity of an
aerodrome.
LO Decide how and when a flight crew

member shall be informed about the
transition level.
LO State whether or not the pilot can

request the transition level to be
included in the approach clearance.
LO State in what kind of clearance the

QNH altimeter
setting shall
be
included.
LO Describe when position reports shall

be made by an
aircraft flying on
routes
defined
by
designated
significant points.
LO List the six items that are normally

included in a voice position report.
LO Name the requirements for using a

simplified position report with flight
level, next position (and time over)
and
ensuing
significant
points
omitted.
LO Name the item of a position report

which must be forwarded to ATC
with the initial call after changing to
010 07 02 10
Position reporting
Page 662
Syllabus
reference

Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
a new frequency.
LO Indicate the item of a position
report which may be omitted if SSR
Mode C is used.
LO Explain in which circumstances the

indicated
airspeed
should
be
included in a position report.
LO Explain the meaning of the acronym

ADS.
LO State to which unit an ADS report

shall be made.
LO Describe how ADS reports shall be

made.
LO Describe
precede
position
reported
(standard
which expression
shall
the level figures in a
report
if the level
is
in
relation to 1013.2 hPa
pressure).
010 07 02 11 Reporting
of operational
meteorological information
and
LO List the occasions when special air

reports shall be made.
010 07 02 12 Separation methods and minima
LO Explain the general provisions for
the separation of controlled traffic.
LO Name
the
different
kinds
separation used in aviation.
of

the type of separation
provided
within
the
various
classes
of
airspace and the various types of
flight.
LO State who is responsible for the

avoidance of collision with other
aircraft when operating in VMC.
Page 663

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
LO State the ICAO documents in which

details of current separation minima
are prescribed.
LO Describe how vertical separation is

obtained.
LO State
the
required
separation minimum.
vertical
LO Describe how the cruising levels of

aircraft flying to the same destination
and
in the
expected approach
sequence are correlated with each
other.
LO Name the conditions that must be

adhered to when two aircraft are
cleared to
maintain a specified
vertical separation between them
during climb or descent.
LO List the two main

horizontal separation.
for
LO Describe how lateral

separation of
aircraft at the same level may be
obtained.
LO Explain
the
separation.
between
navigation
LO Describe the three basic means for

the establishment of longitudinal
separation.

LO Indicate the
standard
radar separation in NM.
term
methods
geographical
LO Describe track separation

aircraft using the same
aid or method.
horizontal
LO Describe the method of the Mach-
Page 664

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
ATPL
IR
CPL
number technique.
LO State the wake-turbulence
radar
separation for aircraft in the APP
and DEP phases of a flight when an
aircraft is operating directly behind
another aircraft at the same ALT or
less than 300 m (1 000 ft) below.
010 07 02 13
Separation in
aerodromes
the
vicinity
LO Define the expression

Local Traffic.
of
Essential
LO State which possible decision the

PIC may choose to take if departing
aircraft are expedited by suggesting
a take-off direction which is not
into the wind.
LO State the condition to enable ATC to

initiate a visual approach for an IFR
flight.
LO Indicate whether or not separation

shall be provided by ATC between
an
aircraft executing
a
visual
approach
and other arriving or
departing aircraft.
LO State in which case, when the flight

crew are not familiar with the
instrument
approach
procedure
being carried out, only the final
approach track has to be forwarded
to them by ATC.
LO Describe which flight level should be

assigned to an aircraft first arriving
over a holding fix for landing.
LO Talk about the priority that shall be

given to aircraft for a landing.
LO Understand
pilot of an
the situation when a

aircraft in an
approach
Page 665

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
sequence indicates their intention to

hold for weather improvements.
LO Explain
the
term
Expected
Approach Time and the procedures
for its use.
LO State the
reasons which
could
probably lead to the decision to use
another take-off or landing direction
than the one into the wind.
LO Name the possible consequences for

a PIC if the RWY-in-use is not
considered suitable for the operation
involved.
LO Be familiar with
the separation of
aircraft holding in flight.
LO Be
familiar
separation
aircraft.
minimum
departing
LO Be
familiar with the
minimum
separation between departing and
arriving aircraft.
LO Be familiar
with
wake-turbulence
separation minima.
LO Know about a clearance to maintain

own separation while in VMC.
LO Give a brief description of essential

traffic
and
essential
traffic
information.

010 07 02 14 Miscellaneous separation

procedures
with the
between
the
non-radar
longitudinal
010 07 02 15 Arriving and departing aircraft
Page 666


Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO List the elements of information

which shall be transmitted to an
aircraft as early as practicable if an
approach for landing is intended.
LO List
the
information
to
be
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO List
the
information
to
be
transmitted to an aircraft during
final approach.
LO Acquaint
yourself with all
the
information
regarding
arriving
and/or departing aircraft on parallel
or near-parallel
runways, including
knowledge about NTZ and NOZ and
the various combinations of parallel
arrivals and/or departures.
LO State the
sequence of
priority
between aircraft landing (or in the
final stage of an approach to land)
and aircraft intending to depart.
LO Explain the factors that

the approach sequence.
influence
LO State the significant changes in the

meteorological conditions in the takeoff or climb-out area
that shall be
transmitted without delay to
a
departing aircraft.
LO Describe what information shall be

forwarded to a departing aircraft as
far as visual or non-visual
aids are
concerned.
LO State the significant changes that

shall be transmitted as early as
practicable to an arriving aircraft,
particularly
changes
in
the
meteorological conditions.
transmitted to an aircraft at the

commencement of final approach.
010 07 02 16
Procedures
for
aerodrome
Page 667

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
control service
LO Describe the general tasks of the
Aerodrome Control Tower (TWR)
when
issuing
information
and
clearances
to aircraft under its
control.
LO List for which aircraft and their

given positions or flight situations
the TWR shall prevent collisions.
LO Name the operational failure or

irregularity of AD equipment which
shall
be reported to the TWR
immediately.
LO State that, after a given period of

time, the TWR shall report to the ACC
or FIC if an aircraft does not land as
expected.
LO Describe the
procedures to be
observed by the TWR whenever VFR
operations are suspended.
LO Explain the term RWY-in-use and its

selection.
LO List the information the TWR should

give to an aircraft:
prior to taxiing for take-off;

prior to take-off;
prior to entering the traffic
circuit.
LO Explain that a report of
wind direction given to a
the TWR is magnetic.
surface
pilot by
LO Explain the exact meaning of the

expression runway vacated.
010 07 02 17
Radar services
LO State to what extent the use of radar

in air traffic services may be limited.
Page 668

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO State what radar-derived information

shall
be available for display to the
controller as a minimum.
LO Name the two basic identification

procedures used with radar.
LO Define the term PSR.

which an aircraft provided with radar
service should be informed of its
position.
LO List the possible forms of position

information passed on to the aircraft
by radar services.
LO Define the term radar vectoring.
LO State the aims of radar vectoring as

shown in ICAO Doc 4444.
be
LO Describe the information which shall

be given to an aircraft when radar
vectoring is terminated and the pilot
is
instructed
to
resume
own
navigation.
LO Explain the procedures

for the
conduct
of
Surveillance
Radar
Approaches (SRA).
LO Describe
what
kind of
action
(concerning the transponder) the
pilot is expected to perform in case
of
emergency
if
they
have
previously been directed by ATC to
operate
the
transponder on a
specific code.
LO State how radar vectoring shall

achieved.
010 07 02 18
Air traffic advisory service
LO Describe the objective and basic

principles of the
air traffic advisory
Page 669

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
service.
LO State to which aircraft air traffic
advisory service shall be provided.
LO Explain why air traffic advisory

service does not deliver clearances
but only advisory information.
LO State the mode and code of SSR

equipment a pilot might operate in a
(general) state of emergency or
(specifically) in case the
aircraft is
subject to unlawful interference.
LO State the special rights an aircraft in

a state of emergency can
expect
from ATC.
LO Describe the expected action of

aircraft after receiving a
broadcast
from ATS concerning the emergency
descent of an aircraft.
LO State how it can be ascertained, in

case of
a failure
of
two-way
communication, whether the aircraft
is able to receive transmissions from
the ATS unit.
LO Explain the assumption based on

which
separation
shall
be
maintained if an aircraft is known to
experience a COM failure in VMC or
in IMC.
LO State
on
which
frequencies
appropriate
information, for
an
aircraft encountering two-way COM
failure, shall be sent by ATS.
LO Describe the expected actions of an

ATS unit after having been informed
010 07 02 19
Procedures
related
to
emergencies,
communication
failure and contingencies
Page 670

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
that an aircraft is being intercepted in

or outside its area of responsibility.
LO
State
what
is meant
by
expression strayed aircraft
unidentified aircraft.
LO
LO
the
and
Explain the minimum level for fueldumping and the reasons for this.
Explain the possible request of ATC to

an aircraft to change its RTF call sign.
010 07 02 20 Miscellaneous procedures

LO
Explain the meaning of AIRPROX.
LO
Determine the task of an air traffic

incident report.
010 08 00 00 AERONAUTICAL
SERVICE
INFORMATION
010 08 01 00 Introduction
LO
State, in general terms, the objective

of
the
Aeronautical
Information
Service.

LO
Recall the following definitions:

Aeronautical
Information
Circular
(AIC),
Aeronautical
Information
Publication
(AIP), AIP amendment,
AIP
supplement, AIRAC,
danger
area,
Integrated
Aeronautical
Information Package, international
airport, international NOTAM office
(NOF),
manoeuvring
area,
movement area, NOTAM, Pre-flight
Information
Bulletin
(PIB),
prohibited area, restricted
area,
SNOWTAM, ASHTAM.
010 08 03 00 General
LO
State during which period of time
Page 671

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
aeronautical
information
service
shall be available with reference to
an aircraft flying in the area of
responsibility of an AIS, provided a
24-hour service is not available.
LO Name (in general) the kind of
aeronautical information/data which
an AIS service shall make available
in a suitable form to flight crews.
LO Summarise
the
duties
of
aeronautical
information
service
concerning aeronautical information
data for the territory of the State.
LO Understand
WGS 84.
of
LO Name the different elements that

make up an Integrated Aeronautical
Information Package.
LO State the primary purpose of the

AIP.
LO Name the different parts of the AIP.
LO State in which main part of the AIP

the following information can be
found:
the
principles
010 08 04 00 Integrated Aeronautical

Information Package

Publication (AIP)
differences from the ICAO

Standards, Recommended
Practices and Procedures;
location indicators,
aeronautical information
services, minimum flight
altitude, VOLMET service,
SIGMET service;
general rules and procedures
(especially general rules, VFR,
IFR, ALT-setting procedure,
Page 672

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
interception of civil aircraft,

unlawful interference, air traffic
incidents);

UIR, TMA);

navigation routes);


prohibited, restricted and danger
areas);
documents;
AD surface-movement
guidance and control system and
markings;

declared distances, APP and RWY
lighting;

landing aids;

LO State how permanent changes to
the AIP shall be published.
LO Explain what kind of information

shall be published in the form of AIP
Supplements.
LO Describe how conspicuousness of

AIP Supplement pages is achieved.
LO Describe how information shall be

published which in principle would
belong to
NOTAMs but includes
extensive text and/or graphics.
LO Summarise essential information

which leads to the issuance
010 08 04 02
NOTAMs
Page 673
of a

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
NOTAM.
LO State to whom
distributed.
NOTAMs shall
be
LO Explain how information regarding

snow, ice and standing water on AD
pavements shall be reported.
LO Describe
the means
by
NOTAMs shall be distributed.
LO List the circumstances under which

the information concerned shall or
should be distributed as AIRAC.
LO State the sequence in which AIRACs

shall be issued and state how many
Days before the effective date the
information shall be distributed by
AIS.
the
and
which
LO State which information an ASHTAM

may contain.
Regulation and Control (AIRAC)

Circulars (AICs)
LO Describe
the
reasons
publication of AICs.
for
LO Explain
the
organisation
standard colour codes of AICs.
LO Explain the normal publication cycle

of AICs.
010 08 04 05 Pre-flight and post-flight
information/data
LO List (in general) which details shall be
Included in the aeronautical
Information provided for pre-flight
planning purposes at the appropriate
ADs.
Page 674

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO
Summarise the additional current

information relating to the AD of
departure that shall be provided as
pre-flight information.
LO
Describe how a recapitulation of

current
NOTAM
and
other
information of urgent character shall
be made available to flight crews.
LO
State which post-flight information

from aircrews shall be submitted to
AIS for distribution as required by the
circumstances.
010 09 00 00 AERODROMES (ICAO Annex 14,

Volume I Aerodrome Design
and Operations)
010 09 01 00 General
LO
Recognise all definitions of ICAO

Annex 14 except the following:
accuracy, cyclic redundancy check,
data quality, effective intensity,
Ellipsoid height (geodetic height),
Geodetic datum, geoid, geoid
undulation, integrity (aeronautical
data), light failure, lighting system
reliability, orthometric height,
station declination, usability factor,
Reference code.
LO
Describe, in general terms, the

intent of the AD reference code as
well as its composition
of two
elements.
010 09 02 00 Aerodrome data

010 09 02 01 Aerodrome reference point
LO
Describe
where
the
aerodrome
reference point shall be located and
where it shall normally remain.
Page 675

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
010 09 02 02 Pavement strengths

LO Explain the terms PCN and ACN and
describe their mutual dependence.
LO Describe how the bearing strength

for an aircraft with an apron mass
equal to or less than 5 700 kg shall
be reported.
LO List
the four
most
important
declared RWY distances and indicate
where you can find guidance on
their calculation in ICAO Annex 14.
LO Recall the definitions for the

main declared distances.
LO Understand
the
purpose
of
informing AIS and ATS units about
the condition of the movement area
and related facilities.
LO List the matters

of operational
significance
or
affecting aircraft
performance
which
should
be
reported to AIS and ATS units to be
transmitted to aircraft involved.
LO Describe the four different types of

water deposit on runways.
LO Name the three defined

frozen water on the RWY.
states of
LO Understand
the
five levels
of
braking
action
including
the
associated coefficients and codes.
four
010 09 02 04 Condition of the movement area

and related facilities
010 09 03 00 Physical characteristics

010 09 03 01 Runways
LO Describe where a threshold should
Page 676

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
normally be located.
LO Acquaint yourself with the general
considerations concerning runways
associated
with
a stopway
or
clearway.
LO State where in Annex 14 you can

find detailed information about the
required runway width dependent
upon code number and code letter.
LO Describe the condition which must be

fulfilled to maintain the required
clearance between the outer main
wheels of an aircraft and the edge of
the taxiway.
LO Describe
the
requirements
taxiways.
and
the
rapid-exit
taxiway
010 09 03 02 Runway strips

LO Explain the term runway strip.
010 09 03 03 Runway-end safety area
LO Explain the term RWY-end
area.
safety
010 09 03 04 Clearway
LO Explain the term clearway.
010 09 03 05 Stopway
LO Explain the term stopway.
010 09 03 06 Radio-altimeter operating area
LO Describe where a radio-altimeter
operating
area
should
be
established and
how far it should
extend laterally and longitudinally.
010 09 03 07 Taxiways
reasons
for
LO State the reason for

widening in curves.
Page 677

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane
Syllabus details and associated Learning

Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain
holding
LO Describe
holding
holding
intermediate
when and where

bays should be provided.
where
runway
positions shall be established.
LO Define
the
position.
LO Describe
term
road
where
taxiway holding positions should be

established.
010
09 04
00 Visual aids for navigation
010
09 04
01 Indicators and signaling devices

LO Describe
the
wind-direction
indicators with which ADs shall be

equipped.
LO Describe
landing-direction
indicator.
LO Explain
the
signaling lamp.
capabilities
of
LO State which characteristics a signal

area should have.
LO Interpret all indications and signals
that may be used in a signals area.
010
09 04
02 Markings
LO Name
various
the colours
markings
used for
the
(RWY,
TWY,
aircraft stands, apron safety lines).

LO State
where
RWY
designation
marking shall be provided and how

it is designed.
Page 678

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
LO Describe
the
characteristics of:
application
and
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Describe
mechanical
safety
considerations regarding
elevated
approach lights and
elevated RWY,
stopway and taxiway lights.
LO Describe the relationship of the

intensity of
RWY
lighting, the
approach-lighting system and the use
of a separate intensity control for
different lighting systems.
LO List
the
conditions
for
the
installation of an AD beacon and
describe its general characteristics.
LO Name
the
different
kinds
operations for which a simple APP
lighting system shall be used.
of
LO Describe the basic installations of a

simple APP lighting system including
the
dimensions
and
distances
normally used.

APP category I lighting system
including information such as location
010 09 04 03
RWY-centre-line markings;
THR marking;
touchdown-zone marking;
RWY-side-stripe marking;
TWY-centre-line marking;
runway holding position
marking;
marking;
aircraft-stand markings;
apron safety lines;
road holding position marking;
mandatory instruction
marking;
information marking.
Lights
Page 679

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
and characteristics.
Remark: This includes the Calvert
system with additional crossbars.
APP category II and III lighting
system including information such as
location and characteristics, especially
mentioning the inner 300 m of the
system.
LO Describe the wing bars of PAPI and

APAPI.
LO Interpret what the pilot will see

during approach using PAPI, APAPI,
T-VASIS and AT-VASIS.
LO Interpret what the pilot will

during approach using HAPI.
see
LO Explain
the
application
characteristics of:
and
RWY-edge lights;
RWY-threshold and wing-bar
lights;
RWY-end lights;
RWY-centre-line lights;
RWY-lead-in lights;
RWY-touchdown-zone lights;
stopway lights;
taxiway-centre-line lights;
taxiway-edge lights;
stop bars;

lights;
RWY-guard lights;
road holding position lights.

LO Understand the timescale within
which aeronautical ground lights shall
be made available to arriving aircraft.
010 09 04 04 Signs
LO State the general
installing signs.
purpose
Page 680
for

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain which signs are the only ones

on the movement area utilising red.
LO List the provisions for

signs.
illuminating
LO State the purpose for installing

mandatory instruction signs.
LO Name the kind of signs which shall be

included in the mandatory instruction
signs.
LO Name the colours used for mandatory

instruction signs.
LO Describe by which sign a pattern A

intersection of a taxiway and a noninstrument, non-precision approach
or take-off RWY) marking shall
be
supplemented.
LO Describe by which sign a pattern B

intersection of a taxiway and a
precision approach RWY) marking
shall be supplemented.
LO Describe the location of:
LO Name the sign with which it shall be

indicated that a taxiing aircraft is
about to
infringe
an obstaclelimitation surface or to interfere with
the operation of radio navigation aids
(e.g. ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area).
LO Describe
the
various
possible
inscriptions on RWY designation signs
and on holding-position signs.
LO Describe
a RWY designation sign at a

taxiway/RWY intersection;
a NO ENTRY sign;
a RWY holding position sign.
the
inscription
on
Page 681
an

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
intermediate
on a taxiway.
holding-position
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
sign
LO State when information signs shall

be provided.
LO Describe the possible inscriptions on

information signs.

characteristics
of aircraft standidentification signs.

characteristics
of
road
holdingposition signs.
LO Explain why markers located near a

runway or taxiway shall be limited
to their height.
LO Explain
the
application
characteristics of:
LO State how fixed or mobile objects

shall be marked if colouring is not
practicable.
LO Describe marking by colours (fixed

or mobile objects).
LO Explain the use of markers for the

marking of objects, overhead wires,
LO Describe
the
colours used
connection with information signs.
in
010 09 04 05 Markers
and
Documented RWY-edge markers;

TWY-edge markers;
TWY-centre-line markers;
uDocumentved TWY-edge
markers;
boundary markers;
stopway-edge
markers.
010 09 05 00 Visual
aids
for
denoting
Obstacles
010 09 05 01 Marking of objects
Page 682

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
cables, etc.
LO Explain the use of flags
marking of objects.
for the
LO Name the different types of lights to

indicate the presence of objects
which must be lighted.
LO State the time period(s) of the 24

hours of a day during which highintensity lights are intended for use.
LO Describe (in general terms)

location of obstacle lights.
the
LO Describe (in general and for normal

circumstances)
the
colour
and
sequence of low-intensity obstacle
lights,
medium-intensity obstacle
lights and high-intensity obstacle
lights.
LO State
where
you
can
find
information
about lights to be
displayed by aircraft.
LO Describe the colours and meaning of

closed
markings on RWYs and
taxiways.
LO State how the pilot of an aircraft

moving on the surface of a taxiway,
holding bay or apron shall be warned
that the shoulders of these surfaces
are non-load-bearing.
LO Describe the pre-threshold marking

(including colours) when the surface
before the threshold is not suitable
for normal use by aircraft.
010 09 05 02 Lighting of objects
010 09 06 00 Visual
aids
for
restricted use of areas
denoting
010 09 07 00 Aerodromes operational services,
Page 683

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
equipment and installations

010 09 07 01 Rescue and Firefighting (RFF)
LO Name the principal objective
rescue and firefighting service.
of a
LO List the most important factors

bearing on effective rescue in a
survivable aircraft accident.
LO Explain the basic information the AD

category
(for
rescue
and
firefighting) depends upon.

response time and state its normal
and maximum limits.
LO State the reasons for emergencyaccess roads and for satellite firefighting stations.
LO Describe the reason for providing a

special apron management service
and state what has to be observed if
the
AD control
tower is
not
participating
in
the
apron
management service.
LO State who has a right-of-way against

vehicles operating on an apron.
010 09 07 02 Apron management service
010 09 07 03 Ground-servicing of aircraft

LO Describe the necessary actions during
the ground-servicing of an aircraft
with regard to the possible event of a
fuel fire.
010 09 08 00 Attachment A to ICAO Annex 14,
Volume
1 Supplementary
Guidance Material
LO List
the
four
types of
declared
Page 684

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
distances on a runway and also the

appropriate abbreviations.
LO Explain the circumstances which lead
to the situation that the four declared
distances on a runway are equal to
the length of the runway.
LO Describe the influence of a clearway,

stopway and/or displaced
threshold
upon the four declared distances.
radio-
LO Describe the physical

characteristics
of a radio-altimeter operating area.
LO Describe the dimensions of a radioaltimeter operating area.
LO Describe the position of a

of
LO Describe the two different versions of

a simple approach lighting system.
LO Describe the two different basic

versions of precision approach
lighting systems for CAT I.
LO Describe the diagram of the inner 300

m of the precision approach lighting
system in the case of CAT II and III.
LO Describe how the arrangement of an

approach lighting system and the
location of the appropriate threshold
are interrelated between each other.
010 09 08 02 Radio-altimeter operating areas

LO Describe the purpose of a
radio-
010 09 08 03 Approach lighting systems

LO Name the two main groups
approach lighting systems.
010 10 00 00 FACILITATION (ICAO Annex 9)

010 10 01 00 General
010 10 01 01 Foreword
Page 685

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Explain the aim of ANNEX 9 as

indicated in the Foreword.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Describe the purpose and use of

aircraft documents as far as the
General Declaration is concerned.
LO State whether or not a General

Declaration will be required by a
Contracting State under normal
circumstances.
LO State the kind of information

concerning crew members whenever
a General Declaration is required by
a Contracting State.

crew.
LO Explain the reasons for the use of

Crew Member Certificates (CMC) for
flight crews and cabin attendants
engaged in International Air
Transport.
LO Explain in which cases Contracting

States shall accept the CMC as an
identity document instead of a
passport or visa.
LO State whether the entry privileges

for crews of scheduled international
air services can be extended to
other flight crews of aircraft
operated for remuneration or hire
but not engaged in scheduled
International Air Services.
010 10 01 02 Definitions (ICAO Annex 9)

LO Understand the definitions.
010 10 02 00 Entry and departure of aircraft
010 10 02 01 General Declaration
010 10 02 02 Entry and departure of crew
010 10 02 03 Entry and departure of

passengers and baggage
LO Explain the entry requirements for
passengers and their baggage.
Page 686

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
LO Explain the requirements and

documentation for unaccompanied
baggage.
LO Be familiar with
required for the
passengers and
LO Be familiar with
LO Describe how Contracting States

shall arrange for the establishment
and prompt provisions of SAR
services.
LO Explain the establishment of SAR

Regions by Contracting States.
LO Describe the areas within which SAR

services shall be established by
Contracting States.
LO State the period of time per day

within which SAR services shall be
available.
the documentation
departure and entry of
their baggage.
the arrangements
in the event of a passenger being
declared an inadmissible person.
LO Describe the pilots authority

towards unruly passengers.
010 10 02 04 Entry and departure of cargo
cargo.
required for the entry and departure of
cargo.
010 11 00 00 SEARCH AND RESCUE
010 11 01 00 Essential Search and Rescue (SAR)
definitions in ICAO Annex
12
alert phase, distress phase,
emergency phase, operator, pilotin-command, rescue co-ordination
centre, State of registry,
uncertainty phase.
Page 687

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Describe for which areas rescue

coordination centres shall be
established.
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL

procedures for the pilot-incommand who arrives first at the
scene of an accident.

procedures for the pilot-incommand intercepting a distress
transmission.
LO Explain the groundair visual signal

code for use by survivors.
LO Explain the signals to be used for

airground signals.
LO State the objectives of security.
LO Explain where further information in

addition
to
ICAO
Annex
17
concerning
aviation
security
is
available.
010 11 03 00 Operating procedures for non-SAR

crews
010 11 04 00 Search and rescue signals
010 12 00 00 SECURITY
010 12 01 00 Essential
Annex 17
definitions
of
ICAO

airside,
aircraft security
check,
screening,
security,
security
control,
security-restricted
area,
unidentified baggage.
LO Understand the required activities
expected at each airport serving
Page 688

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
010 12 04 00 Preventive security measures

LO Describe the objects not allowed
(for reasons of aviation security) on
board
an aircraft
engaged
in
LO Explain what each Contracting State

is
supposed to
do
concerning
originating passengers
and their
cabin baggage prior to boarding an
aircraft engaged in international civil
aviation operations.
LO State what each Contracting State is

supposed
to
do if
passengers
subjected to security control
have
mixed after a security screening
point.
LO Explain what has to be done at

airports serving international civil
aviation to protect cargo, baggage,
mail stores and operator supplies
against
an
act
of
unlawful
interference.
LO Explain what has to be done when

passengers,
who are obliged to
travel
because
of
judicial
or
administrative
proceedings,
are
supposed to board an aircraft.
LO Understand
what
has
to
be
considered
if
law-enforcement
officers carry weapons on board.
LO Describe what is meant by access

control at an aerodrome.
010 12 05 00 Management of response to acts

of unlawful interference
LO Describe
the
assistance
each
Contracting State shall provide to an
aircraft subjected to an act of
Page 689

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
unlawful seizure.
LO State the circumstances which could
prevent a State to detain an aircraft
on the ground after being subjected
to an act of unlawful seizure.
LO Describe what the

PIC should do
unless considerations on board the
aircraft dictate otherwise.
LO Describe what the PIC should do if:

its assigned track;

its assigned cruising level;
the aircraft is unable to notify

an ATS unit of the unlawful
interference.
LO Describe what the PIC should attempt

to do with regard to broadcast
warnings to decide at which level the
crew is proceeding
if no applicable
regional
procedures for
in-flight
contingencies have been established.
010 12 06 00 Operators security programme

LO Understand the principles of the
written
operator
security
programme each Contracting State
requires from operators.
010 12 07 00 Security
procedures
in other
documents, i.e. ICAO Annex 2,
ICAO Annex 6, ICAO Annex 14,
ICAO Doc 4444
010 12 07 01 ICAO Annex 2 Rules of the Air,
Attachment
B
Unlawful
Interference

Security
LO Describe the special considerations
referring to flight crew compartment
Page 690

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
doors with regard to aviation security.

minimise the consequences of acts
of unlawful interference.

have appropriate employees available
who can contribute to the prevention
of acts of sabotage or other forms of

Physical characteristics
LO Describe what minimum distance an
isolated
aircraft parking position
(after
the
aircraft
has
been
subjected to unlawful interference)
should have from other parking
positions, buildings or public areas.
010 12 07 04 ICAO Doc 4444
LO Describe the considerations
that
must take place with regard to a
taxi clearance in case an aircraft is
known or believed to have been
subjected to unlawful interference.
010 13 00 00 AIRCRAFT
ACCIDENT
INCIDENT INVESTIGATION
010 13 01 00 Essential
Annex 13
definitions
of
AND
ICAO

accident, aircraft, flight recorder,
incident,
investigation,
maximum
mass, operator, serious incident,
serious injury, State of Design,
State
of Manufacture, State of
Occurrence, State of the Operator,
State of Registry.
LO Define
the
difference
between
Page 691

Syllabus
reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
serious incident and accident.

LO Determine
whether
a
certain
occurrence has to be defined as a
serious incident or as an accident.
LO Recognise the description

accident or incident.
an
LO Describe the geographical

limits, if
any, within which the specifications
given in Annex 13 apply.
LO State
the
objective(s)
of
the
investigation
of
an accident or
incident according to Annex 13.
LO Understand the general procedures

for the investigation of an accident
or incident according to Annex 13.
of
010 13 02 00 Applicability of ICAO Annex 13
010 13 03 00 ICAO
accident
Investigation
010 13 04 00 Accident
investigation
LO Be
familiar
and
and
with
incident
incident
the ICAO
Accident and Incident procedures
Page 692

Syllabus
Reference
Aeroplane

Learning Objectives
ATPL
Helicopter
CPL ATPL
/IR
IR
ATPL
CPL
Annex 13.
0
010 14 00 00 UAE Air Law
1
0010 14 01 00
CAR Part 1 Definitions
010 14 01 01
Alternate aerodrome: take-off

alternate, en route alternate, ETOPS
en route alternate, destination
alternate.(CAR Part 1)
010 14 01 02
Alternate Heliport.
Flight time Helicopters(CAR Part 1)
010 14 02 00
010 14 02 01
010 14 02 02
010 14 02 03
010 14 02 04
010 14 02 05
010 14 02 06
010 14 02 07
010 14 02 08
010 14 02 09
010
010
010
010
14
14
14
14
03
03
04
04
00
01
00
01
CAR Part 2, CAR Part FCL

List the maximum period of time for
which the different licences, ratings
and medicals are valid
List the restrictions for licence holders
with an age of 60 years or more
Describe the requirement to carry a
flight crew licence
State the requirements for the Issue
and Currency of a CPL
State the Privlleges of a CPL
State the requirments for the Issue
and Currency of a MPL
State the Privlleges of a MPL
State the requirments for the issue
and currency of an ATPL
State the Privlleges of an ATPL
CAR Part 3
UAE General Rules differing to ICAO
CAR Part 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
UAE Airspace - CAP OPS 1

Commercial & Private Air Transport
Page 693
X
X
X
X
X
X

Understand the various rules and

services that apply in the various
Explain which airspace shall be

included within the UAE
010 14 04 02
UTC Time - difference between UAE

and UTC time
010 14 04 03
UAE Aeronautical Information

Publications (AIP) - State in which
main part of the AIP the following
information can be found:
Differences from ICAO SARPS
Location indicators, aeronautical
information services, minimum
flight altitude, VOLMET services,
SIGMET service.
General rules and procedures,

Unlawful interference, air traffic
incidents;

UIR, TMA);

navigation routes);


prohibited, restricted and danger
areas);
documents;
AD surface-movement
guidance and control system and
markings;

declared distances, APP and RWY
lighting;

landing aids;

010 14 04 04
Flight and Duty time limitations
010 14 05 00
Accident and Incident reporting
Page 694
Syllabus
reference


Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
070 00 00 00
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
071 01 00 00
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
071 01 01 00
ICAO Annex 6
071 01 01 01
Definitions
LO
Alternate aerodrome: take-off alternate, x

en route alternate, ETOPS en route
alternate, destination alternate (ICAO
LO
Alternate heliport (ICAO Annex

LO
Flight
time aeroplanes
LO
Flight
time
Annex
6,
Part
Chapter 1).
071 01 01 02
(ICAO
CPL
helicopters
(ICAO
III,
Section
1,
Applicability
State that Part I shall be applicable to the x
operation of aeroplanes by operators
authorised to conduct international
commercial air transport operations (ICAO
LO
State that Part III shall be applicable to

all helicopters engaged in international
commercial air transport operations or in
international general aviation operations,
except it is not applicable to helicopters
engaged in aerial work (ICAO Annex 6,
LO
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
6,
LO
071 01 01 03
CPL
Helicopter
General
State compliance with laws, regulations x
and procedures (ICAO Annex 6, Part I,
Chapter
3.1/Part
III,
Section
2,
Chapter 1.1).
Page 695

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State accident prevention

safety programme (ICAO
Part I, Chapter 3.2).
and flight x
Annex 6,
LO State flight safety documents system

(ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 3.3).
CPL
LO State maintenance release (ICAO Annex x

6, Part I, Chapter 8.8/Part III, Section 2,
Chapter 6.7).
LO List and describe the lights to be x

displayed by aircraft (ICAO Annex 6 ,
Part I, Appendix 1).
Operational requirements
071 01 02 01
Applicability
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
071 01 02 00
Helicopter
LO State
the
operational
regulations x
applicable
to
commercial
air
transportation.
LO Nature of operations and exceptions.
LO State
that
a
commercial
air x
transportation flight must meet the
LO Flight
Manual
limitations
Flight
through the Height Velocity (HV) envelope.
LO Define Helicopter Emergency Medical

Service.
LO Operations over a hostile environment

Applicability.
LO Local area operations Approval.
071 01 02 02
General
LO State the requirements about language x

used for crew communication and
operations manual.
LO Explain the relation between MMEL and

MEL.
Page 696

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
Helicopter
ATPL
CPL
LO State
the
operators
requirements x
regarding accident prevention and flight
safety programme.
LO State
LO State the operators requirements

regarding a management system.
the
operators
responsibility x
regarding the distinction between cabin
crew members and additional crew
members.
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO State
LO State the regulations concerning the

carriage of persons on an aircraft.
LO State
the
crew
members x
responsibilities in the execution of their
duties, and define the commanders
authority.
LO State the operators and commanders x

responsibilities regarding admission to
the
flight
deck
and
carriage
of
unauthorised persons or cargo.

concerning portable electronic devices.
the operators responsibilities x

regarding admission in an aircraft of a
person under the influence of drug or
alcohol.
LO List the documents to be carried on

each flight.

regarding manuals to be carried.
LO List
the
operations
limitations
regarding ditching requirements.
LO State
LO State
the
regulations
endangering safety.
concerning
the additional information

forms to be carried on board.
Page 697
and

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO List the items of information to be x

retained
on
the
ground
by
the
operator.

regarding inspections.
LO State the responsibility of the operator x

and of the commander regarding the
production of and access to records
and documents.
LO State
the
operators
responsibility x
regarding
the
preservation
of
documentation
and
recordings,
including recorders recordings.
LO Define the terms used in leasing and x

state the responsibility and requirements
of each party in various cases.
LO State the requirement to be satisfied x

for the issue of an Air Operators
Certificate (AOC).
LO State
071 01 02 03
Operator
supervision
certification
and
air
LO State the conditions to be met for the

issue or revalidation of an AOC.
LO Explain the contents and conditions of

the AOC.
LO Define the terms used for operational

procedures.

regarding Operations Manual.
the rules applicable

operator certification.
071 01 02 04
to
Operational
procedures
(except
long-range flight preparation)
Page 698

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State the operators

regarding competence
personnel.
responsibilities x
of operations
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL

regarding establishment of procedures.

regarding use of air traffic services.
LO State the operators responsibilities x

regarding authorisation of aerodromes/
heliports by the operator.
LO Explain
which
elements
must
be x
considered by the operator when
specifying aerodrome/heliport operating
minima.
LO State the operators responsibilities x

regarding
departure
and
approach
procedures.
LO State the parameters to be considered

in noise-abatement procedures.
LO State the elements to be considered x

regarding
routes
and
areas
of
operation.
LO State the additional specific navigationperformance requirements.
LO State the maximum distance from an x

adequate aerodrome for two-engine
aeroplanes without an ETOPS approval.
LO State the requirement for alternate- x

airport accessibility check for ETOPS
operations.
LO List the factors to be considered when

establishing minimum flight altitude.
LO Describe the components of the fuel

policy.
LO State the requirements for carrying

persons with reduced mobility.
Page 699

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the operators responsibilities for the x

carriage
of
inadmissible
passengers, deportees or persons in
custody.
LO State the requirements for the stowage x

of baggage and cargo in the passenger
cabin.
LO State
the
requirements
regarding x
passenger
seating
and
emergency
evacuation.
LO Detail the procedures for a passenger x

briefing in
respect
of
emergency
equipment and exits.
LO State the flight preparation forms to be

completed before flight.
LO State the commanders responsibilities

during flight preparation.
LO State
the
rules
for x
aerodromes/heliports
selection
(including ETOPS configuration).
LO Explain the planning minima for IFR

flights.
LO State the rules for refuelling/defuelling.
LO State crew members at stationpolicy.
LO State the use of seats, safety belts and

harnesses.
LO State securing of passenger cabin and

galley requirements.

regarding smoking on board.
LO State
under
which
conditions
a x
commander can commence or continue a
flight
regarding
meteorological
conditions.
x
regarding ice and other contaminants.
Page 700

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the commanders responsibility x

regarding fuel to be carried and
in-flight fuel management.

use of supplemental oxygen.
LO State the ground-proximity detection

reactions.
LO Explain the requirements for use of

ACAS.

regarding approach and landing.

report shall be submitted.
071 01 02 05
All-weather operations
LO State
the
operators
responsibility x
regarding aerodrome/heliport operating
minima.
LO List the parameters to be considered in x

establishing the aerodrome operating
minima.
LO Define the criteria to be taken into x

consideration for the classification of
aeroplanes.
LO Define the following terms: circling,
low-visibility
procedures,
lowvisibility take-off, visual approach.
LO Define the following terms: flight control x

system,
fail-passive flight
control
system, fail-operational flight control
system, fail-operational hybrid landing
system.
LO Define
the following terms:

approach and take-off area.
LO State the general operating rules for

Page 701
final
x

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Low-visibility
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
LO State the training and qualification x

requirements for flight crew to conduct
LO State the operating procedures for lowvisibility operations.
LO State the operators and commanders x

responsibilities
regarding
minimum
equipment for low-visibility operations.
LO VFR operating minima.
LO Aerodrome operating minima: state x

under which conditions the commander
can commence take-off.
LO Aerodrome
operating minima: state x

that take-off minima are expressed as
visibility or RVR.
LO Aerodrome operating minima: state the x

take-off RVR value depending on the
facilities.

system
minima
for
non-precision
approach.
LO Aerodrome operating minima: state x

under which conditions a pilot can
continue the approach below MDA/H or
DA/H.

category
1
(including
single-pilot
operations).

operations
aerodrome/heliport considerations.
Page 702
IR
CPL

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL

lowest minima for circling and visual
approach.

RVR value and cloud ceiling depending on
the facilities (class 1, 2 and 3).
LO Aerodrome
operating minima: state

under which conditions an airborne
radar approach can be performed and
state the relevant minima.
071 01 02 06
Instruments and equipment
LO State which items do not require an

equipment approval.
LO State
regarding
LO State
regarding
LO State
regarding
LO List
LO List
the
requirements
spare-fuses availability.
the
requirements
operating lights.
the
requirements
windshield wipers.
the equipment for operations

requiring a radio communication.
the equipment for operations
requiring a radio-navigation system.

for day and night VFR flights.

for IFR flights.
LO State
for
LO State the requirements for an altitude

alert system.
the required equipment

single-pilot operation under IFR.
Page 703

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO State
the
altimeters.
LO State
requirements
for
radio
requirements
for
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO State the conditions under which an x

aircraft must be fitted with a weather
radar.
LO State the requirements for operations

in icing conditions.
LO State the conditions under which a x

crew member interphone system and
public address system are mandatory.

cockpit voice recorder is compulsory.
LO State the rules regarding the location, x

of cockpit voice recorders.

flight data recorder is compulsory.
LO State the rules regarding the location, x

of flight data recorders.
LO State the requirements about seats, x

seat safety belts, harnesses and childrestraint devices.
LO State the requirements about Fasten

seat beltand No smokingsigns.
LO State
LO State
the
requirements
regarding x
emergency medical kits and first-aid
oxygen.
the
GPWS/TAWS.
LO State the requirements for ACAS.
the
requirements
internal doors and curtains.
regarding
LO State the requirements regarding firstaid kits.
Page 704


Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
LO Detail the rules regarding the carriage x

and use of supplemental oxygen for
passengers and crew.
LO Detail
LO Describe the minimum number, type x

and
location
of
handheld
fire
extinguishers.
LO Describe the minimum number and

location of crash axes and crowbars.
LO Specify the colours and markings used

to indicate break-in points.
LO State the requirements for means of

LO State
for
LO State the requirements for emergency

lighting.
LO State
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
an
LO State the requirements for life jackets,

life rafts, survival kits and ELTs.
LO State the additional requirements for

helicopters operating to or from helidecks
located in a hostile sea area.
LO State
the rules regarding

protective breathing equipment.
the
megaphones.
requirements
the
requirements
for
emergency locator transmitter.
LO State
the requirements
survival suit.
for
crew-
crew
LO State the requirements for survival

equipment.
the
requirements
for
emergency flotation equipment.
071 01 02 07
Communication
equipment
and
an
navigation
Page 705

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Explain the general requirements for x

communication
and
navigation
equipment.
LO State
LO List
the
requirements
for
radio x
equipment when flying under VFR by
reference to visual landmarks.
LO List
the
requirements
for x
communications
and
navigation
equipment when operating under IFR
or under VFR over routes not navigated
by reference to visual landmarks.
LO State
that the radio-communication x

equipment must provide communications
on 121.5 MHz.

provision of an audio selector panel.
to
LO State the requirement regarding crew

composition and in-flight relief.
LO State the requirement for conversion

LO State the requirement for differences

training and familiarisation training.
LO State the conditions for upgrade from

co-pilot to commander.
minimum
qualification x
to
operate
as
a
the equipment required

operate within RVSM airspace.
071 01 02 09
Flight crew
the
LO State
requirements
commander.
LO State the requirement for recurrent

LO State the requirement for a pilot to

operate oneitherpilotsseat.
LO State the minimum recent experience

for the commander and the co-pilot.
Page 706

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
LO Specify the route and aerodrome/ x

heliport qualification required for a
commander or a pilot flying.
LO State the requirement to operate on

LO State that when a flight crew member x

operates
both
helicopters
and
aeroplanes, the operations are limited
to one type of each.
LO State the training records requirement.
LO State who is regarded as a cabin crew

member.
LO Detail
LO State the acceptability criteria.
LO State
regarding
LO State the conditions to operate on

the
LO Explain the structure and subject

headings of the operations manual.
LO State the requirements for a journey

logbook.
LO Describe the requirements regarding

the operational flight plan.
LO State the requirements for documentstorage periods.
071 01 02 10
Cabin crew/crew members other

than flight crew
the requirements
cabin crew members.
the
requirements
senior cabin crew members.
071 01 02 11
Manuals, logs and records

operations manual.
071 01 02 12
regarding
rules
Flight and duty-time

and rest requirements
for
limitations
LO Explain the definitions used for flighttime regulation.
Page 707

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
CPL
LO State the flight and duty limitations.

maximum daily flight-duty period.
LO State the requirements regarding rest

periods.
LO Explain the possible extension of flightduty period due to in-flight rest.
LO Explain the captains discretion in case of x

unforeseen circumstances in actual flight
operations.
LO Explain
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
IR
CPL
regarding
the
requirements regarding
flight-duty, duty and rest-period records.
LO Explain the terminology relevant to

dangerous goods.
LO Explain the scope of the regulation.
LO Explain the limitations on the transport

of dangerous goods.
LO State
LO State
the
requirements
regarding x
inspection for damage, leakage or
contamination.
LO Explain the loading restrictions.
LO State the requirement for provision of

information to the crew.
LO Explain the requirements for dangerous

goods incident and accident reports.
the
regulation
standby.
LO State
071 01 02 13
Transport of dangerous goods by

air
the
requirements
for
acceptance of dangerous goods.
071 01 03 00
Long-range flights
071 01 03 01
Flight management
Page 708
the

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO Navigation-planning procedures:
describe the operators
responsibilities concerning ETOPS
routes;
list the factors to be considered
by the commander before
commencing the flight.
LO Selection of a route:
describe the meaning of the term

adequate aerodrome;
describe the limitations on
extended-range operations with
two-engine aeroplanes with and
without ETOPS approval.
LO Selection of cruising altitude (MNPSA
Manual Chapter 4):
specify the appropriate cruising
levels for normal long-range IFR
flights and for those operating on
the North Atlantic Operational
Track Structure.
LO Selection of alternate aerodrome:
state the circumstances in which a
take-off alternate must be
selected;
state the maximum flight distance
of a take-off alternate for: twoengine aeroplane, ETOPSapproved aeroplane, three or
four-engine aeroplane;
in the selection of a take-off
alternate;
state when a destination alternate
need not be selected;
state when two destination
alternates must be selected;
in the selection of a destination
alternate aerodrome;
state the factors to be
Considered in the selection of an
en route alternate aerodrome.
Page 709
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
CPL
IR

Syllabus
reference

Learning Objectives
Aeroplane
ATPL
LO
Minimum time routes:

define, construct and interpret
minimum time route (route giving
the shortest flight time from
departure to destination adhering to
all ATC and airspace restrictions).
Page 710
CPL
Helicopter
ATPL ATPL
/IR
CPL
IR

071 01 03 02
Transoceanic and polar flight
LO (ICAO Doc 7030)

x
Describe the possible indications of

navigation-system degradation.
Describe by what emergency means

course and INS can be cross-checked in the case
of: three navigation systems, two navigation
systems.
Interpret
VOR,
NDB,
VOR/DME
information to calculate aircraft position and
aircraft course.
Describe the general ICAO procedures

applicable in North Atlantic airspace (NAT)
if the aircraft is unable to continue the flight in
accordance with its air traffic control clearance.
Describe the ICAO procedures applicable

in North Atlantic Airspace (NAT) in case of radiocommunication failure.
Describe the recommended initial action if

an aircraft is unable to obtain a revised air
Describe the subsequent action for:

aircraft able to maintain assigned flight level, and
aircraft unable to maintain assigned flight level.
Describe determination of tracks and

courses for random routes in NAT.

tracks are defined (by latitude and longitude) in
the NAT region: when operating predominately
in an eastwest direction south of 70N, when
operating predominately in an eastwest
direction north of 70N.
State
the
maximum
flight
time
recommended between significant points.

tracks are defined for flights operating
predominantly in a northsouth direction.
Describe how the desired route must be
specified in the air traffic control flight

plan.
Page 711

LO Polar navigation
x
Terrestrial magnetism characteristics in polar
zones
Explain why magnetic compasses become

unreliable or useless in polar zones.
State in which area VORs are referenced

to the true north.
Specific problems of polar navigation
Describe the general problems of polar

navigation.
Describe what precautions can be taken

when operating in the area of compass
unreliability as a contingency against INS failure.
Describe how grid navigation can be used

in conjunction with a Directional Gyro (DG)
in polar areas.

coordinates to solve polar navigation problems.

coordinates to calculate navigation data.
Use INS information to solve polar

navigation problems.
Define, calculate:
transport precession,
Earth-rate (astronomic) precession, convergence
factor.
Describe the effect of using a free gyro to

Describe the effect of using a gyro

compass with hourly rate corrector unit to follow
a given course.
Convert grid navigation data into true

navigation data, into magnetic navigation data,
and into compass navigation data.
Justify the selection of a different north

reference at a given position.
Calculate the effects of gyro drift due to
the Earths rotation (15 degrees / h sin

Lm).
071 01 03 03
MNPS airspace
LO Geographical limits:
x
state the lateral dimensions (in general

terms) and vertical limits of MNPS airspace
(ICAO Doc 7030 NAT/RAC-2
3.2.1);
Page 712

state that operators must ensure that

crew follow NAT MNPSA Operations
Manual procedures (ICAO Doc 7030
NAT/RAC-2 3.2.3).
LO Define the following acronyms: MNPS, MNPSA, x
OCA, OTS, PRM, PTS, RVSM, LRNS, MASPS,
SLOP, WATRS (MNPSA Manual, Glossary of
Terms).
LO Aircraft system requirements (MNPSA Manual,
Chapter 1):
navigation requirements for unrestricted

MNPS airspace operations;
routes for use by aircraft not equipped

with two LRNSs: routes for aircraft with
only one LRNS, routes for aircraft with
short-range navigation equipment only;
performance monitoring.
LO Organised Track System (MNPSA Manual , x
Chapter 2):
construction of the Organised Track

System (OTS);
NAT track message;
OTS changeover periods.

LO Other routes and route structures within or x
adjacent to NAT MNPS airspace (MNPSA
Manual, Chapter 3):
other routes within NAT MNPS airspace;
route structures adjacent to NAT MNPS

airspace: North American routes (NARs),
Canadian domestic track systems, routes
between
North
America
and
the
Caribbean area.
LO Flight planning (MNPSA Manual, Chapter 4):
x
all flights should plan to operate on greatcircle tracks joining successive significant
waypoints;
during the hours of validity of the OTS,

operators are encouraged to flight plan as
follows: in accordance with the OTS or
along a route to join or leave an outer track of the
OTS or on a random route to remain clear of the
OTS;
flight levels available on OTS tracks

during OTS periods;
flight levels on random tracks or outside

OTS
periods
(appropriate
direction
levels).
Page 713

LO Oceanic ATC
Chapter 5):
Clearances
(MNPSA
Manual ,
it is recommended that pilots should

request their Oceanic Clearance at least
40 minutes prior to the oceanic entry point
ETA;
pilots should notify the Oceanic Area

control Centre (OAC) of the maximum
acceptable flight level possible at the boundary;
at some airports, which are situated close

to
oceanic
boundaries, the Oceanic
Clearance must be obtained before departure;
if an aircraft, which would normally be

RVSM and/or MNPS approved, encounters,
whilst en route to the NAT Oceanic Airspace, a
critical in-flight equipment
failure,
or
at
dispatch is unable to meet the MEL requirements
for RVSM or MNPS approval on the flight, then
the pilot must advise ATC at initial contact when
requesting Oceanic Clearance;
After obtaining and reading back the

clearance, the pilot should monitor the
forward estimate for oceanic entry, and if this
changes by 3 minutes or more, should pass
a revised estimate to ATC;
the pilot should pay particular attention

when the issued clearance differs from the
flight plan, as a significant proportion of
navigation errors investigated in the NAT
involve an aircraft which has followed its flight
plan rather than its differing clearance;
if the entry point of the oceanic route on

which the flight is cleared differs from
that originally requested and/or the
oceanic flight level differs from the current
flight
level,
the
pilot
is
responsible for requesting and obtaining
the necessary domestic re-clearance;
there are three elements to an Oceanic
Clearance: route, Mach number and flight

level. These elements serve to provide for
the three basic elements of separation:
lateral, longitudinal and vertical.
Page 714

and
position-reporting x
LO Communications
procedures (MNPSA Manual, Chapter 6)
HF voice communications
Pilots communicate with OACs via aeradio

stations staffed by communicators who have
no executive ATC authority. Messages are relayed,
from the ground station to the air traffic controllers
in the relevant OAC for action.
Frequencies from the lower HF bands tend

to be used for communications during
night-time and those from the higher bands
during daytime.
When initiating contact with an aeradio

station, the pilot should state the HF frequency in
use.
SATCOM voice communications
Since oceanic traffic typically communicates with
ATC through aeradio facilities, a SATCOM call made
due to unforeseen inability to communicate by
other means should be made to such a facility
rather than the ATC centre, unless the urgency
of the communication dictates otherwise.
An air-to-air VHF frequency has been established
for worldwide use when aircraft are out of range
of VHF ground stations which utilise the same or
adjacent
frequencies.
This
frequency
(123.45 MHz) is intended for pilot-to-pilot
exchanges
of
operationally
significant
information.
Standard position report message type.
Some aircraft flying in the NAT are required to
report MET observations of wind speed and
direction plus outside-air temperature. Any
turbulence encountered should be included in
these reports.
General guidance for aircraft operating in, or
proposing to operate in, the NAT region, which
experience a communications failure: general
provisions, onboard HF equipment failure, poor
HF
propagation
conditions,
loss
of
HF
communications prior to entry into the NAT, loss
of HF communications after entering the NAT.
All turbine-engine aeroplanes having a maximum
certified take-off mass exceeding 5,700 kg or
authorised
to
carry
more
than
19 passengers are required to carry and operate
ACAS II in the NAT region.
Page 715

LO Application of Mach number technique (MNPSA

Manual, Chapter 7):
practical experience has shown that when

two or more turbojet aircraft, operating along the
same route at the same flight level, maintain the
same Mach number, they are more likely to
maintain a constant time interval between each
other than when using other methods;
pilots must ensure that any required

corrections to the indicated Mach number are
taken into account when complying
with the true Mach number specified in the
ATC clearance;
after leaving oceanic airspace, pilots must

maintain their assigned Mach number in
domestic controlled airspace unless and
until the appropriate ATC unit authorises
a change.
LO MNPS flight operation & navigation procedures x
(MNPSA Manual, Chapter 8):
the pre-flight procedures for any NAT

MNPS flight must include a UTC time check
and resynchronisation of the aircraft master
clock;
state the use of the Master Document;
state the requirements for position

plotting;
PRE-FLIGHT PROCEDURES: alignment of

IRS, Satellite Navigation Availability Prediction
Programme for flights using GNSS LRNS, loading
of initial waypoints, flight plan check;
IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURES: ATC Oceanic

Clearance, entering the MNPS airspace and
reaching an oceanic waypoint,
routine monitoring;
Strategic
Lateral
Offset
Procedure
(SLOP): state that along a route or track there
will be three positions that an
aircraft may fly: centre line or one or two
miles right.
Page 716

LO RVSM flight in MNPS airspace (MNPSA Manual,

Chapter 9):

performed before MNPS airspace entry;

performed into the MNPS airspace;
in NAT MNPS airspace, pilots always have

to report to ATC immediately on reaching
any new cruising level;
crews should report when a 300 ft or

more deviation occurs.
LO Navigation system degradation or failure x
For this part, consider aircraft equipped with only
two operational LRNSs. State the requirements
for the following situations:
one system fails before take-off;
one system fails before the OCA boundary

is reached;
one system fails after the OCA boundary

is crossed;
the remaining system fails after entering

MNPS airspace.
Special
procedures for in-flight contingencies
LO
General
Until a revised clearance is obtained, the

specified NAT in-flight contingency procedures
should be carefully followed.
The general concept of these NAT in-flight

contingency
procedures
is,
whenever
operationally feasible, to offset from the assigned
route by 15 NM and climb or
descend to a level which differs from those
normally used by 500 ft if below FL410 or by 1
000 ft if above FL410.
State the factors which may affect the

direction of turn: direction to an alternate airport,
terrain clearance, levels allocated on adjacent
routes or tracks and any known SLOP offsets
adopted by other nearby traffic.
Deviations around severe weather
State that if the deviation is to be greater

than 10 NM, the assigned flight level
must be changed by 300 ft depending
on the followed track and the direction of
the deviation (Table 1).
071 01 03 04
ETOPS
Page 717

LO State that ETOPS approval is part of an AOC.
LO State that prior to conducting an ETOPS flight, x

an operator shall ensure that a suitable ETOPS
en route alternate is available, within either the
approved diversion time or a diversion time
based on the MEL-generated serviceability status
of the aeroplane, whichever is shorter.
LO State the requirements for take-off alternate.
LO State the planning minima for ETOPS en route

alternate.
071 02 00 00
SPECIAL OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND

HAZARDS (GENERAL ASPECTS)
071 02 01 00
Operations Manual
071 02 01 01
Operating procedures
LO State that all non-type-related operational x

policies, instructions and procedures needed for a
safe operation are included in Part A of the
Operations Manual.

Part A: de-icing and anti-icing on the ground,
adverse and potentially hazardous atmospheric
conditions, wake turbulence, incapacitation of crew
members, use of the minimum equipment and
configuration deviation list(s), security, handling of
accidents and occurrences.

Part A: altitude alerting system procedures,
ground proximity warning system procedures,
policy and procedures for the use of TCAS/ACAS.

Part A: rotor downwash.
LO Define the following terms: commencement of x
flight, inoperative, MEL, MMEL, rectification
interval.
LO Define the limits of MEL applicability.
LO Identify the responsibilities of the operator and

the authority with regard to MEL and MMEL.
LO State the responsibilities of the crew members

with regard to MEL.
LO State the responsibilities of the commander with

regard to MEL.
Page 718

071 02 01 02
Aeroplane/helicopter operating matters

type-related
LO State that all type-related instructions and x

procedures needed for a safe operation are
included in Part B of the Operations Manual.
They will take account of any differences
between types, variants or individual aircraft
used by the operator.

Part B: abnormal and emergency procedures,
configuration deviation list, minimum equipment
list, emergency evacuation procedures.

Part B: emergency procedures, configuration
deviation list, minimum equipment list, emergency
evacuation procedures.
071 02 02 00
Icing conditions
071 02 02 01
On ground de-icing/anti-icing procedures,

types of de-icing/anti-icing fluids
LO Define the following terms: anti-icing, de-icing,

one-step
de-icing/anti-icing, two-step deicing/anti-icing, holdover time. (ICAO Doc 9640
Glossary)
LO Define the following weather conditions: drizzle, x

fog, freezing fog, freezing drizzle, freezing
rain, frost, rain, rime, slush, snow, dry
snow, wet snow. (ICAO Doc 9640 Glossary)
LO Describe
The
clean
aircraft
concept as x
presented in the relevant chapter of ICAO
Doc 9640. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 2)
LO List
LO State the procedure to be followed when an x

aeroplane has exceeded the holdover time.
LO Interpret the fluid holdover time tables and list x

the factors which can reduce the fluid protection
time. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 5 + Attachment
tables)
the types of de-icing/anti-icing

available. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 4)
Page 719
fluids

LO State that the pre-take-off check, which is the x

responsibility of the pilot-in-command, ensures
that the critical surfaces of the aeroplane are
free of ice, snow, slush or frost just prior to takeoff. This check shall be accomplished as close to
the time of take-off as possible and is normally
made from within the aeroplane by visually
checking the wings. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 6)
LO State
LO State that an operator shall establish procedures x

to be followed when ground de-icing and anti- icing
and related inspections of the aeroplane(s) are
necessary.
LO State that a commander shall not commence take- x

off unless the external surfaces are clear of any
deposit which might adversely affect the
performance and/or controllability of the aircraft
except as permitted in the Flight Manual.
LO State that the effects of icing are wide-ranging, x

unpredictable and dependent upon individual
aeroplane design. The magnitude of these effects
is dependent upon many variables, but the
effects can be both significant and dangerous.
LO State that in icing conditions, for a given speed x

and a given angle of attack, wing lift can be
reduced by as much as 30 % and drag increased
by up to 40 %. State that these changes in lift
and drag will significantly increase stall speed,
reduce
controllability
and
alter
flight
characteristics. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 1)
LO State that ice on critical surfaces and on the x

airframe may also break away during take-off
and be ingested into engines, possibly damaging
fan and compressor blades. (ICAO Doc 9640,
Chapter 1)
LO State that ice forming on pitot tubes and static x

ports or on angle-of-attack vanes may give false
altitude, airspeed, angle-of-attack and enginepower information for air-data systems. (ICAO Doc
9640, Chapter 1)
that an aircraft has to be treated

symmetrically. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 11)
071 02 02 02
Procedure to apply in case of performance

deterioration, on ground/in flight
Page 720

LO State that ice, frost and snow formed on the critical x

surfaces on the ground can have a totally different
effect on aircraft flight characteristics than ice
formed in flight. (ICAO Doc 9640, Chapter 1)
LO State that flight in known icing conditions is x

subject to limitations found in Part B of the
Operations Manual.
LO State where procedures and performances x

regarding flight in expected or actual icing
conditions are located.
LO State that presence of birds constituting a x

potential hazard to aircraft operations is part of the
pre-flight information. (ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8)
LO State that information concerning the presence x

of birds observed by aircrews is made available
to the Aeronautical Information Service for such
distribution as the circumstances necessitate.
(ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8)
LO State that AIP ENR 5.6 contains information x

regarding bird migrations. (ICAO Annex 15,
Appendix 1)
LO State significant data regarding bird strikes x

contained in ICAO Doc 9137. (ICAO Doc 9137,
Part 3, 1.1.6)
LO List incompatible land use around airports. (ICAO

Doc 9137, Part 3, 10.4)
the
commanders
responsibilities x
LO Define
regarding the reporting of bird hazards and bird
strikes.
071 02 03 00
Bird-strike risk and avoidance
071 02 04 00
Noise abatement
071 02 04 01
Noise-abatement procedures
LO Define the operator responsibilities regarding

establishment of noise-abatement procedures.
LO State the main purpose of NADP 1 and NADP 2.

Page 721

LO State that the pilot-in-command has the x

authority to decide not to execute a noiseabatement departure procedure if conditions
preclude the safe execution of the procedure.
(ICAO Doc 8168, Volume 1, Part V, 3.2.1.3)
071 02 04 02
Influence
of
the
flight
(departure, cruise, approach)
procedure
LO List the main parameters for NADP 1 and NADP 2 x

(i.e. speeds, heights, etc.). (ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume 1, Part V, Appendix to Chapter 3)
LO State that a runway lead-in lighting system

should be provided where it is desired to
provide visual guidance along a specific
approach path for purposes of noise
abatement. (ICAO Annex 14 - Volume 1,
5.3.7.1/Vol 2, 5.3.4.1)
LO State that detailed information about noiseabatement procedures is to be found in AD 2 and
3 of the AIP. (ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 1)


which
noise-abatement
procedures
during
approach should not be required. (ICAO
Doc 8168, Volume 1, Part V, 3.4.4)
LO State the rule regarding the use of reverse thrust

on landing. (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume 1, Part V,
3.5)
071 02 04 03
071 02 04 04
Influence by the pilot (power setting, low

drag)
Influence by the pilot (power setting, track

of helicopter)
LO List the adverse operating conditions under

071 02 05 00
Fire and smoke
071 02 05 01
Carburettor fire
LO List the actions to be taken in the event of a

carburettor fire.
Page 722

071 02 05 02
Engine fire
LO List the actions to be taken in the event of an

engine fire.
LO Identify the appropriate handheld extinguishers x

to be used in the cockpit, the passenger cabin
and toilets, and in the cargo compartments.
071 02 05 03
Fire
in
the
cabin,
cockpit,
cargo
compartment
LO Identify the different types of extinguishants and
the type of fire on which each one may be used.
LO Describe the precautions to be considered in the
application of fire extinguishant.
071 02 05 04
Smoke in the cockpit and cabin
LO List the actions to be taken in the event of

smoke in the cockpit or in the cabin.
LO Describe the problems and safety precautions x

following overheated brakes after landing or a
rejected take-off.
071 02 05 05
Actions in case of overheated brakes
071 02 06 00
Decompression of pressurised cabin
071 02 06 01
Slow decompression
LO Indicate how to detect a slow decompression or

an automatic pressurisation system failure.
LO Describe the actions required following a slow
decompression.
071 02 06 02 Rapid and explosive decompression
LO Indicate how to detect a rapid or an explosive

decompression.
LO Describe the effects on aircraft occupants of a slow x

decompression and a rapid or explosive
decompression.
071 02 06 03
Dangers and action to be taken
LO Describe the actions required following a rapid or

explosive decompression.
071 02 07 00
Wind shear and microburst
071 02 07 01
Effects and recognition during departure

and approach
LO Define the meaning of the term low-level

windshear. (ICAO Circular 186, Chapter 1)
Page 723

LO Define: vertical wind shear, horizontal wind x

shear, updraft and downdraft wind shear. (ICAO
the
meteorological
phenomena x
LO Identify
associated with wind shear. (ICAO Circular 186,
Chapter 3)
LO Explain recognition of
LO Describe the effects of and actions required when x

encountering wind shear, at take-off and
approach. (ICAO Circular 186, Chapter 4)
LO Describe the precautions to be taken when wind x

shear is suspected, at take-off and approach.
LO Describe the effects of and actions required x

following entry into a strong downdraft wind shear.
LO Describe a microburst and its effects. (ICAO

(ICAO
LO Describe tip vortices circulation. (ICAO Doc

9426, Part II)
LO Explain when vortex generation begins and ends.

(ICAO Doc 9426, Part II)
LO Describe vortex circulation on the ground with

and without crosswind. (ICAO Doc 9426, Part II)
LO List the three main factors which, when x

combined, give the strongest vortices (heavy,
clean, slow). (ICAO Doc 9426, Part II)
LO Describe the wind conditions which are worst x

for wake turbulence near the ground. (ICAO
Doc 9426, Part II)
071 02 07 02
Wake turbulence
071 02 08 01
Cause
LO Define the term

Doc 4444, 4.9)
071 02 08 03
shear.
(ICAO
Actions to avoid and actions to take during

encounter
071 02 08 00
071 02 08 02
wind
wake
turbulence.
List of relevant parameters
Actions to be taken when crossing traffic,

during take-off and landing
Page 724

LO Describe the actions to be taken to avoid wake x

turbulence,
specially
separations.
(ICAO
Doc 4444, 5)
LO Give the following definitions: aircraft security x

check, screening, security, security-restricted
area, unidentified baggage. (ICAO Annex 17,
1)
the objectives
LO Give
Annex 17, 2.1)
commanders responsibilities x
LO Describe the
concerning notifying the appropriate ATS unit.
(ICAO Annex 17 Attachment)

concerning operation of SSR. (ICAO Annex 17
Attachment)
LO Describe the
concerning departing from assigned track and/or
cruising level. (ICAO Annex 17
Attachment)
LO Describe the
concerning the action required or being
requested by an ATS unit to confirm SSR code
and ATS interpretation response. (ICAO Annex
17 Attachment)
071 02 09 00
Security (unlawful events)
071 02 09 01
ICAO Annex 17
071 02 09 02
071 02 09 03
Use of
(SSR)
Secondary
of
security.
Surveillance
(ICAO
Radar
Security

programmes.
regarding
training
LO State the requirements regarding reporting

acts of unlawful interference.
LO State the requirements regarding aircraft search

procedures.
landing, x
071 02 10 00
Emergency and precautionary landings
071 02 10 01
Definition
ditching,
LO Define
emergency landing.
precautionary
LO Describe a ditching procedure.
Page 725

LO Describe a precautionary landing.
LO Explain the factors to be considered when deciding x

to make a precautionary/emergency landing or
ditching.
LO Describe the passenger briefing to be given before x

conducting a precautionary/emergency landing or
ditching (including evacuation).
LO State that the aircraft must be stopped and the x

engine
shut
down
before
launching
an
LO State that evacuation procedures are to be found

in Part B of the Operations Manual.
CS-25
requirements
regarding x
procedures.
(CS
25.803
+
071 02 10 02
Cause
LO List some reasons that may require a ditching, a

precautionary landing or an emergency landing.
071 02 10 03
071 02 10 04
Passenger information
Action after landing
LO Describe the actions and responsibilities of crew

members after landing.
071 02 10 05
Evacuation
the
LO State
evacuation
Appendix J)
071 02 11 00
Fuel jettisoning
071 02 11 01
Safety aspects
LO State that an aircraft may need to jettison fuel x

so as to reduce its landing mass in order to
effect a safe landing. (ICAO Doc 4444, 15.5.3)
LO State that when an aircraft operating within x

controlled airspace needs to jettison fuel, the flight
crew shall coordinate with ATC the following: route
to be flown which, if possible, should be clear of
cities and towns, preferably over water and away
from areas where thunderstorms have been
reported or are expected; the level to be used,
which should be not less than 1 800 m (6 000
ft); and the duration of fuel jettisoning. (ICAO
Doc 4444,
15.5.3)
LO State that flaps and slats may adversely affect

fuel jettisoning. (CS 25.1001)
Page 726

071 02 11 02
Requirements
LO State that a fuel-jettisoning system must be x

installed on each aeroplane unless it is shown
that the aeroplane meets some CS-25 climb
requirements. (CS 25.1001)
LO State that a fuel-jettisoning system must be

capable of jettisoning enough fuel within
15 minutes. (CS 25.1001)
LO Give the following definitions: dangerous goods, x

dangerous goods accident, dangerous goods
incident, exemption, incompatible, packaging,
UN number. (ICAO Annex 18, Chapter 1)
LO State that detailed provisions for dangerous goods x

transportation are contained in the Technical
Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air (Doc 9284). (ICAO Annex 18, Chapter
2, 2.2.1)
LO State that in case of an in-flight emergency, the x

pilot-in-command must inform the ATC of
dangerous goods transportation. (ICAO Annex
18, Chapter 9, 9.5)
071 02 12 00
Transport of dangerous goods
071 02 12 01
ICAO Annex 18
071 02 12 02
Technical Instructions (ICAO Doc 9284)
LO Explain the principle of compatibility

segregation. (ICAO Doc 9284)
and
LO Explain the special requirements for the loading

of radioactive materials. (ICAO Doc 9284)
LO Explain the use of the dangerous goods list.

(ICAO Doc 9284)
LO Identify the labels. (ICAO Doc 9284)
LO Identify articles and substances, which would x

otherwise be classed as dangerous goods, that
are excluded from the provisions.
LO State that some articles and substances may be

forbidden for air transportation.
LO State that packing must comply

Technical Instructions specifications.
071 02 12 03
Transport of dangerous goods by air
LO State that dangerous goods transportation is

subject to operator approval.
Page 727
with
the

LO List the labelling and marking requirements.
LO List the Dangerous Goods Transport Document

requirements.
LO List the Acceptance

requirements.
Goods
LO Explain the need for an inspection prior to

loading on an aircraft.
LO State that some dangerous goods are designated

for carriage only on cargo aircraft.
LO State that accidents or incidents

dangerous goods are to be reported.
involving
LO State that misdeclared or undeclared dangerous

goods found in baggage are to be reported.
LO List the different types of contamination: damp, x

wet or water patches, rime or frost-covered, dry
snow, wet snow, slush, ice, compacted or rolled
snow, frozen ruts or ridges. (ICAO Annex 15,
Appendix 2)
LO Give the definitions of the various types of snow.

(ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2)
the
difference
between
friction x
LO Identify
coefficient and estimated surface friction. (ICAO
LO State that when friction coefficient is 0.40 or x

higher, the expected braking action is good. (ICAO
of
071 02 13 00
Contaminated runways
071 02 13 01
Kinds of contamination
Dangerous
LO Define a contaminated runway, a damp

runway, a wet runway, and a dry runway.
071 02 13 02
071 02 13 03
Estimated
coefficient
surface
friction,
friction
Hydroplaning principles and effects
LO Define the different types of hydroplaning.

(NASA TM-85652/Tire friction performance/
pp. 6 to 9)
Page 728

LO Compute the two dynamic hydroplaning speeds

using the following formulas:
Spin-down speed (rotating tire) (kt) = 9 square

root (pressure in PSI)
Spin-up speed (non-rotating tire) (kt) = 7.7
square root (pressure in PSI).
(NASA TM-85652/Tire friction performance /p. 8)
LO State that it is the spin-up speed rather than the x
spin-down speed which represents the actual tire
situation for aircraft touchdown on flooded
runways.
(NASA TM-85652/Tire friction performance/p. 8)
071 02 13 04
Procedures
LO State that some wind limitations may apply in case x

of contaminated runways. Those limitations are to
be found in Part B of the Operations Manual
Limitations.
LO State that the procedures associated with take- off x

and landing on contaminated runways are to be
found in Part B of the Operations Manual Normal
procedures.
LO State that the performances associated with x

contaminated runways are to be found in Part B of
the Operations Manual Performance.
071 02 13 05
SNOWTAM
LO Interpret from a SNOWTAM the contamination

and braking action on a runway.
071 02 14 00
Rotor downwash
071 02 14 01
Describe downwash
LO Describe the downwash.
LO Give the definition of white-out.
LO Describe loss of spatial orientation.
LO Describe take-off and landing techniques.
071 02 14 02
Effects
LO Explain the effects on: soil erosion, water dispersal

and spray, recirculation, damage to property, loose
articles.
071 02 15 00
Operation
influence
conditions (Helicopter)
071 02 15 01
White-out/sand/dust
by
Page 729
meteorological

071 02 15 02
Strong winds
LO Describe blade sailing.

LO Describe wind operating envelopes.
LO Describe vertical speed problems.
071 02 15 03 Mountain environment
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LO Describe techniques for failure in: hover, climb,

cruise, approach.
071 03 01 02 Fire in cabin/cockpit/engine
LO Describe the basic actions when encountering

fire in the cabin, cockpit or engine.
LO Describe the basic actions following loss of tail

rotor.
LO Describe the basic actions following loss of
directional control.
071 03 01 04 Ground resonance

071 03 01 05 Blade stall
recovery
to
LO Describe constraints associated with mountain

environment.
071 03 00 00
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (HELICOPTER)
071 03 01 00
Influence of technical problems
071 03 01 01
Engine failure
071 03 01 03
Tail/rotor/directional control failure
LO Describe cause and recovery actions when

encountering retreating blade stall.
071 03 01 06
Settling with power (vortex ring)
LO Describe prerequisite conditions and recovery

actions.
071 03 01 07
Overpitch

071 03 01 08
Overspeed: rotor/engine
LO Describe overspeed control.

071 03 01 09
Dynamic rollover
LO Describe potential
action.
071 03 01 10 Mast bumping
conditions and
conditions
LO Describe
avoidance ofeffect.
conducive
Page 730
and

Gcaa Lo Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gcaa Lo Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gcaa Lo Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main subjects covered in the document?

What are the main subjects covered in the document?

What information would a pilot need to know about operating on contaminated runways?

What information would a pilot need to know about operating on contaminated runways?

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Flight Crew License

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Explanatory Note ................................................................................................................................... 3

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Subject: 010 - AIR LAW

IR(A) & (H)

A. SUBJECT 010 AIR LAW

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Syllabus details and associated

The Convention on International

LO Explain the historical background that

CPL ATPL ATPL

Part I Air navigation

general principles and

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Syllabus details and associated

CPL ATPL ATPL

territory, high seas, according

LO Describe the objectives of ICAO.

LO Explain the organisation and duties

LO Explain the organisation and duties

Part II The International Civil

LO Be familiar with the hierarchy of the

annexes to the Convention;

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Syllabus details and associated

CPL ATPL ATPL

010 01 02 00 Other conventions and

LO Describe the legal situation within

010 01 02 02 The International Air Transport

010 01 02 03 Suppression of unlawful acts

Convention for the

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Syllabus details and associated

CPL ATPL ATPL

LO Describe the measures and actions

(Doc 9518 Protocol supplementary to the Convention for the

(Digest of Bilateral Air Transport

GENERAL CIVIL AVIATION AUTHORITY

THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE LEARNING OBJECTIVES

Syllabus details and associated